Hyundai Ioniq Hybrid Blue Link 2018 Hatchback Owner's Manual PDF
en
Summary of Content for Hyundai Ioniq Hybrid Blue Link 2018 Hatchback Owner's Manual PDF
OWNER'S MANUAL Operation Maintenance Specifications
All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of pub- lication. However, HYUNDAI reserves the right to make changes at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.
This manual applies to all HYUNDAI models and includes descrip- tions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.
F2
Your HYUNDAI should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the per- formance, safety or durability of your HYUNDAI and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limit- ed warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifi- cations may also be in violation of regulations established by the U.S. Department of Transportation and other federal or state agencies.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injec- tion and other electronic components. It is possible for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your HYUNDAI dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.
CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
This manual includes information titled as DAN- GER, WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE. These titles indicate the following:
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER
WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION
NOTICE indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in vehicle damage.
NOTICE
WARNING
F3
Your Hyundai vehicle may be equipped with technologies and services that use information collected, generated, recorded or stored by the vehicle. Hyundai has created a Vehicle Owner Privacy Policy to explain how these technologies and services collect use and share this information.
You may read our Vehicle Owner Privacy Policy on the Hyundaiusa.com website at: https://www.hyundaiusa.com/owner-privacy-policy.aspx If you would like to receive a hard copy of our Vehicle Owner Privacy Policy, please contact our Customer Connect Center at:
Hyundai Customer Care P.O. Box 20850 Fountain Valley, CA 92728 800-633-5151 consumeraffairs@hmausa.com
Hyundai's Customer Connect Center representatives are available Monday through Friday, between the hours of 5:00 AM and 7:00 PM PST and Saturday and Sunday between 6:30 AM and 3:00 PM PST (English). For Customer Connect Center assistance in Spanish or Korean, representatives are available Monday through Friday between 6:30 AM and 3:00 PM PST.
HYUNDAI VEHICLE OWNER PRIVACY POLICY
F4
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations, and thank you for choosing HYUNDAI. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of dis- tinguished people who drive HYUNDAIS. We are very proud of the advanced engineering and high-quality construc- tion of each HYUNDAI we build. Your Owners Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new HYUNDAI. To become familiar with your new HYUNDAI, so that you can fully enjoy it, read this Owners Manual carefully before driving your new vehicle. This manual contains important safety information and instructions intended to familiarize you with your vehicles con- trols and safety features so you can safely operate your vehicle. This manual also contains information on maintenance designed to enhance safe operation of the vehicle. It is recom- mended that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. HYUNDAI deal- ers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be required. This Owners Manual should be considered a permanent part of your vehicle, and should be kept in the vehicle so you can refer to it at any time. The manual should stay with the vehicle if you sell it to provide the next owner with impor- tant operating, safety and maintenance information.
HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA
Copyright 2017 HYUNDAI Motor America. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of HYUNDAI Motor America.
Severe engine and transmission damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet HYUNDAI specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 8-7 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.
CAUTION
F5
1. What are HYUNDAI Genuine Parts? HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are the same parts used by HYUNDAI Motor Company to manufacture vehicles. They are designed and tested for the optimum safety, per- formance, and reliability for our customers.
2. Why should you use genuine parts? HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are engineered and built to meet rigid manufacturing requirements. Damage caused by using imita- tion, counterfeit or used salvage parts is not covered under the HYUNDAI New Vehicle Limited Warranty or any other HYUNDAI warranty. In addition, any damage to or fail- ure of HYUNDAI Genuine Parts caused by the installation or fail- ure of an imitation, counterfeit or used salvage part is not covered by any HYUNDAI Warranty.
3. How can you tell if you are pur- chasing HYUNDAI Genuine Parts? Look for the HYUNDAI Genuine Parts Logo on the package (see below). HYUNDAI Genuine Parts export- ed to the U.S. are packaged with labels written only in English. HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are only sold through authorized HYUNDAI Dealerships.
GUIDE TO HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS
F6
Introduction
We want to help you get the greatest possible driving pleasure from your vehicle. Your Owner's Manual can assist you in many ways. To gain an overview of the contents of your Owner's Manual, use the Table of Contents in the front of the manual. The first page of each Chapter includes a detailed Table of Contents of the topics in that Chapter. To quickly locate information about your vehicle, use the Index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabet- ical list of what is in this manual and the page number where it can be found. For your convenience, we have incorporated tabs on the right-hand page edges. These tabs are coded with the Chapter titles to assist you with navigating through the manual.
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. This Owner's Manual provides you with many safe- ty precautions and operating proce- dures. This information alerts you to potential hazards that may hurt you or others, as well as damage to your vehicle. Safety messages found on vehicle labels and in this manual describe these hazards and what to do to avoid or reduce the risks. Warnings and instructions contained in this manual are for your safety. Failure to follow safety warnings and instructions can lead to serious injury or death.
Throughout this manual DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION, NOTICE and the SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL will be used.
This is the safety alert sym- bol. It is used to alert you to potential physical injury haz- ards. Obey all safety mes- sages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death. The safety alert sym- bol precedes the signal words DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER
WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
SAFETY MESSAGES
F7
Introduction
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
NOTICE indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in vehicle damage.
Your new vehicle is designed to obtain maximum performance with UNLEADED FUEL, as well as mini- mize exhaust emissions and spark plug fouling.
Your new vehicle is designed to use only unleaded fuel having an octane number ((R+M)/2) of 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. (Do not use methanol blended fuels)
To prevent damage to the engine and engine components, never add any fuel system cleaning agents to the fuel tank other than what has been specified. Consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for additional information.
Gasoline containing alcohol or methanol Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and ethanol (also known as grain alco- hol) are being marketed along with or instead of leaded or unleaded gaso- line. For example, "E15" is a gasohol comprised of 15% ethanol and 85% gasoline. Do not use gasohol containing more than 15% ethanol, and do not use gasoline or gasohol containing any methanol. Either of these fuels may cause drivability problems and dam- age to the fuel system, engine con- trol system and emission control sys- tem. Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if drivability problems occur.
NOTICE
NOTICE
CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moder- ate injury.
CAUTION
Do not "top off" after the noz- zle automatically shuts off when refueling.
Always check that the fuel cap is installed securely to pre- vent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.
WARNING
F8
Introduction
"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com- prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15 percent gasoline, and is manufac- tured exclusively for use in Flexible Fuel Vehicles. "E85" is not compati- ble with your vehicle. Use of "E85" may result in poor engine perform- ance and damage to your vehicle's engine and fuel system. HYUNDAI recommends that customers do not use fuel with an ethanol content exceeding 15 percent.
To prevent damage to your vehicles engine and fuel system: Never use gasohol which con-
tains methanol. Never use gasohol containing
more than 15% ethanol. Never use leaded fuel or leaded
gasohol. Never use "E85" fuel. Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not cover damage to the fuel system or any perform- ance problems caused by the use of "E85" fuel.
Using Fuel Additives (except Detergent Fuel Additives) Using fuel additives such as: - Silicone fuel additive - Ferrocene (iron-based) fuel additive - Other metallic-based fuel additives may result in cylinder misfire, poor acceleration, engine stalling, dam- age to the catalyst, or abnormal cor- rosion, and may cause damage to the engine resulting in a reduction in the overall life of the powertrain. - The Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) may illuminate.
Damage to the fuel system or per- formance problem caused by the use of these fuels or fuel additives may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Gasoline containing MMT Some gasoline contains harmful manganese-based fuel additives such as MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). HYUNDAI does not recommend the use of gasoline containing MMT. This type of fuel can reduce vehicle performance and affect your emis- sion control system. The malfunction indicator lamp on the cluster may come on.
Detergent Fuel Additives HYUNDAI recommends that you use good quality gasolines treated with detergent additives such as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, which help pre- vent deposit formation in the engine. These gasolines will help the engine run cleaner and enhance performance of the Emission Control System. For more information on TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, please go to the website (www.toptiergas.com).
NOTICE
NOTICE
F9
Introduction
For customers who do not use TOP Tier Detergent Gasoline regularly, and have problems starting or the engine does not run smoothly, deter- gent-based fuel additives that you can purchase separately may be added to the gasoline. If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive added to the fuel tank at every 7,500 miles or 12 months is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
Operation in foreign countries If you are going to drive your vehicle in another country, be sure to: Observe all regulations regarding
registration and insurance. Determine that acceptable fuel is
available.
This vehicle should not be modi- fied. Modification of your vehicle could affect its performance, safety or durability and may even violate governmental safety and emis- sions regulations. In addition, damage or perform- ance problems resulting from any modification may not be covered under warranty.
If you use unauthorized electronic devices, it may cause the vehicle to operate abnormally, wire damage, battery discharge and fire. For your safety, do not use unauthorized electronic devices.
By following a few simple precautions for the first 600 miles (1,000 km) you may add to the performance, econo- my and life of your vehicle. Do not race the engine. While driving, keep your engine
speed (rpm, or revolutions per minute) between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.
Do not maintain a single speed for long periods of time, either fast or slow.Varying engine speed is need- ed to properly break-in the engine.
Avoid hard stops, except in emer- gencies, to allow the brakes to seat properly.
VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESSVEHICLE MODIFICATIONS
F10
Introduction
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicles systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety sys- tems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: How various systems in your
vehicle were operating; Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was travel- ing.
These data can help provide a bet- ter understanding of the circum- stances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of per- sonally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investiga- tion. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING
Items contained in motor vehi- cles or emitted from them are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or reproductive harm. These include: Gasoline and its vapors Engine exhaust Used engine oil Interior passenger compart-
ment components and materi- als
Component parts which are subject to heat and wear
In addition, battery posts, termi- nals and related accessories contain lead, lead compounds and other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
WARNING
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
Your vehicle at a glance
Safety system of your vehicle
Convenient features of your vehicle
Multimedia System
Driving your vehicle
What to do in an emergency
Maintenance
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Index
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Your vehicle at a glance
1
Your vehicle at a glance
Hybrid Vehicle Exterior Overview..................................................1-2 Interior Overview ...................................................1-4 Instrument Panel Overview ..................................1-5 Engine Compartment .............................................1-6
Plug-in Hybrid Vehicle Exterior Overview..................................................1-7 Interior Overview ...................................................1-9 Instrument Panel Overview ................................1-10 Engine Compartment ...........................................1-11
1-2
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW - HYBRID VEHICLE
Your vehicle at a glance
1. Hood......................................................3-45
2. Windows ................................................3-37
3. Sunroof..................................................3-41
4. Wiper blade ..........................................7-28
5. Tires and wheels............................7-34, 8-5
6. Headlamp ..............................................7-55
7. Outer side view mirror ..........................3-33
8. Daytime running light (DRL) ......3-115, 7-60
OAE016001N
Front view
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1-3
Your vehicle at a glance
1
1. Door lock ................................................3-9
2. Fuel filler door ......................................3-48
3. Antenna ..................................................4-2
4. Rear combination lamp ........................7-61
5. High mounted stop lamp ......................7-64
6. Liftgate ..................................................3-46
7. Rearview camera ................................3-125
8. Rear parking assist system ................3-126
9. Towing hook ..........................................6-41
OAE016002
Rear view
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1-4
Your vehicle at a glance
INTERIOR OVERVIEW - HYBRID VEHICLE
1. Door lock/unlock button ........................3-10
2. Driver position memory system ............3-14
3. Side view mirror control switch ..............3-35
4. Central door lock switch ........................3-11
5. Power window switches ........................3-37
6. Power window lock switch......................3-40
7. Instrument panel illumination control switch ....................................................3-56
8. Blind Spot Detection (BSD) System ......5-34
9. Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ....5-56
10. ESC (Electronic Stability Control) OFF button ..........................................5-28
11. Fuel filler door open switch ..................3-48
12. 12V battery reset switch ........................6-5
13. Fuse panel ..........................................7-50
14. Steering wheel ....................................3-16
15. Steering wheel tilt/telescope lever ......3-16
16. Seat........................................................2-4
17. Hood release lever ..............................3-45
OAE017003N
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW - HYBRID VEHICLE
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1-5
Your vehicle at a glance
1
1. Steering wheel audio controls/ ............4-3 Bluetooth wireless technology hands-free controls ..............................4-4
2. Instrument cluster ..............................3-54 3. Horn ....................................................3-17 4. Drivers front air bag ..........................2-49 5. Cruise controls/ ..................................5-64
Smart cruise controls..........................5-69 6. Engine Start/Stop button ......................5-6 7. Light control/Turn signals..................3-115 8. Wiper/Washer ..................................3-123 9. Dual clutch transmission ....................5-12 10. Hazard warning flasher button ..............6-2 11. Climate control system ..................3-129 12. Seat warmer ....................................2-20 13. Wireless cellular phone charging
system ............................................3-151 14. Passengers front air bag..................2-49 15. Glove box........................................3-146 16. Power outlet ....................................3-149 17. AUX, USB and iPod port ..................4-2
OAE016004N
1-6
Your vehicle at a glance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT - HYBRID VEHICLE
1. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-16
2. Engine oil dipstick .............................7-16
3. Engine coolant cap ...........................7-19
4. Engine coolant reservoir ...................7-18
5. Inverter coolant reservoir ..................7-18
6. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-22
7. Air cleaner.........................................7-24
8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-23
9. Fuse box ...........................................7-51
OAE076001
The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1-7
Your vehicle at a glance
1 EXTERIOR OVERVIEW - PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE
1. Hood......................................................3-45
2. Windows ................................................3-37
3. Sunroof..................................................3-41
4. Wiper blade ..........................................7-28
5. Tires and wheels............................7-34, 8-5
6. Headlamp ..............................................7-55
7. Outer side view mirror ..........................3-33
8. Daytime running light (DRL) ......3-115, 7-60
9. Charging door ..........................................H4
OAEPH017001N
Front view
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1-8
Your vehicle at a glance
1. Door lock ................................................3-9
2. Fuel filler door ......................................3-51
3. Antenna ..................................................4-2
4. Rear combination lamp ........................7-61
5. High mounted stop lamp ......................7-64
6. Liftgate ..................................................3-46
7. Rearview camera ................................3-125
8. Rear parking assist system ................3-126
9. Towing hook ..........................................6-41
OAEPH016002
Rear view
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1-9
Your vehicle at a glance
1 INTERIOR OVERVIEW - PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE
1. Door lock/unlock button ........................3-10
2. Driver position memory system ............3-14
3. Side view mirror control switch ..............3-35
4. Central door lock switch ........................3-11
5. Power window switches ........................3-37
6. Power window lock switch......................3-40
7. Instrument panel illumination control switch ....................................................3-56
8. Blind Spot Detection (BSD) System ......5-34
9. Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ....5-56
10. ESC (Electronic Stability Control) OFF button ..........................................5-28
11. Fuel filler door open switch ..................3-51
12. AUTO/LOCK mode selection button ......H6
13. Scheduled charging deactivation button......................................................H7
14. Fuse panel ..........................................7-50
15. Steering wheel ....................................3-16
16. Steering wheel tilt/telescope lever ......3-16
17. Seat........................................................2-4
18. Hood release lever ..............................3-45
OAEPH017003N
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1-10
Your vehicle at a glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW - PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1. Steering wheel audio controls/ ............4-3 Bluetooth wireless technology hands-free controls ..............................4-4
2. Instrument cluster ..............................3-55 3. Horn ....................................................3-17 4. Drivers front air bag ..........................2-49 5. Cruise controls/ ..................................5-64
Smart cruise controls..........................5-69 6. Engine Start/Stop button ......................5-6 7. Light control/Turn signals..................3-115 8. Wiper/Washer ..................................3-123 9. Dual clutch transmission ....................5-12 10. Hazard warning flasher button ..............6-2 11. Climate control system ..................3-129 12. Seat warmer ....................................2-20 13. EV/HEV button ..................................H29 14. Wireless cellular phone charging
system ............................................3-151 15. Passengers front air bag..................2-49 16. Glove box........................................3-146 17. Power outlet ....................................3-149 18. AUX, USB and iPod port ..................4-2
OAE016004C
1-11
Your vehicle at a glance
1 ENGINE COMPARTMENT - PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE
1. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-16
2. Engine oil dipstick .............................7-16
3. Engine coolant cap ...........................7-19
4. Engine coolant reservoir ...................7-18
5. Inverter coolant reservoir ..................7-18
6. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-22
7. Air cleaner.........................................7-24
8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-23
9. Fuse box ...........................................7-51
The 12 volt battery is located in the lug- gage compartment.
OAEPH076001
The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
Safety system of your vehicle
Important safety precautions...............................2-2 Always Wear Your Seat Belt ..........................................2-2 Restrain All Children .........................................................2-2 Air Bag Hazards.................................................................2-2 Driver Distraction ..............................................................2-2 Control Your Speed...........................................................2-3 Keep Your Vehicle in Safe Condition............................2-3
Seats ........................................................................2-4 Safety Precautions ...........................................................2-5 Front Seats .........................................................................2-6 Rear Seats.........................................................................2-12 Head Restraints ...............................................................2-16 Seat warmers ...................................................................2-20
Seat belts ..............................................................2-23 Seat Belt Safety Precautions.......................................2-23 Seat Belt Warning Light ................................................2-24 Seat Belt Restraint System...........................................2-25 Additional Seat Belt Safety Precautions...................2-32 Care of Seat Belts...........................................................2-35
Child restraint system (CRS) ..............................2-36 Children Always in the Rear.........................................2-36 Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) .................2-37 Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS)..................2-39
Air bag - Advanced supplemental restraint system.....2-47
Where Are the Air Bags?..............................................2-49 How Does the Air Bag System Operate?..................2-52 What to Expect After an Air Bag Inflates................2-57 Occupant Classification System (OCS).......................2-58 Why Didn't My Air Bag Go Off in a Collision? ........2-63 SRS Care............................................................................2-68 Additional Safety Precautions .....................................2-69 Air Bag Warning Labels.................................................2-70
This chapter provides you with important information about how to protect yourself and your passengers. It explains how to properly use your seats and seat belts, and how your air bags work. Additionally, this chapter explains how to properly restrain infants and children in your vehicle.
2
2-2
You will find many safety precautions and recommendations throughout this section, and throughout this man- ual.The safety precautions in this sec- tion are among the most important.
Always Wear Your Seat Belt A seat belt is your best protection in all types of accidents. Air bags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with air bags, ALWAYS make sure you and your passengers wear your seat belts, and wear them properly.
Restrain All Children All children under age 13 should ride in your vehicle properly restrained in a rear seat, not the front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in an appropriate child restraint. Larger children should use a booster seat with the lap/shoulder belt until they can use the seat belt properly without a booster seat.
Air Bag Hazards While air bags can save lives, they can also cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or who are not prop- erly restrained. Infants, young chil- dren, and shorter adults are at the greatest risk of being injured by an inflating air bag. Follow all instruc- tions and warnings in this manual.
Driver Distraction Driver distraction presents a serious and potentially deadly danger, espe- cially for inexperienced drivers. Safety should be the first concern when behind the wheel and drivers need to be aware of the wide array of potential distractions, such as drowsiness, reaching for objects, eating, personal grooming, other passengers, and using cellular phones. Drivers can become distracted when they take their eyes and attention off the road or their hands off the wheel to focus on activities other than driv- ing. To reduce your risk of distraction or getting into an accident:
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Safety system of your vehicle
2-3
Safety system of your vehicle
ALWAYS set up your mobile devices (i.e., MP3 players, phones, naviga- tion units, etc.) when your vehicle is parked or safely stopped.
ONLY use your mobile device when allowed by laws and when conditions permit safe use. NEVER text or email while driving. Most states have laws prohibiting drivers from texting. Some states and cities also prohibit drivers from using handheld phones.
NEVER let the use of a mobile device distract you from driving. You have a responsibility to your passen- gers and others on the road to always drive safely, with your hands on the wheel as well as your eyes and attention on the road.
Control Your Speed Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current condi- tions, regardless of the maximum speed posted.
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe Condition Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous. To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
2
2-4
SEATS
Safety system of your vehicle
OAE036001N
Front seats (1) Forward and backward (2) Seatback angle (3) Seat cushion height (4) Lumbar support (Driver's seat)* (5) Seat warmer* (6) Headrest
Rear seats (7) Seat warmer* (8) Armrest* (9) Headrest (10) Seatback folding
* : if equipped
Manual seat
Power seat
Safety Precautions Adjusting the seats so that you are sit- ting in a safe, comfortable position plays an important role in driver and passenger safety together with the seat belts and air bags in an accident.
Air bags You can take steps to reduce the risk of being injured by an inflating air bag. Sitting too close to an air bag greatly increases the risk of injury in the event the air bag inflates. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) recommends that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and their chest.
Do not use a cushion that reduces friction between the seat and the passenger. The passen- ger's hips may slide under the lap portion of the seat belt during an accident or a sudden stop. Serious or fatal internal injuries could result because the seat belt cannot operate properly.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from an inflating air bag, take the following pre- cautions: Adjust the driver's seat as far to
the rear as possible while main- taining the ability to maintain full control of the vehicle.
Adjust the front passenger seat as far to the rear as possible.
Hold the steering wheel by the rim with hands at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions to mini- mize the risk of injuries to your hands and arms.
NEVER place anything or any- one between the steering wheel and the air bag.
Do not allow the front passen- ger to place feet or legs on the dashboard to minimize the risk of leg injuries.
WARNING
2-5
Safety system of your vehicle
2
2-6
Safety system of your vehicle
Seat belts Always fasten your seat belt before starting any trip. At all times, passengers should sit upright and be properly restrained. Infants and small children must be restrained in appropriate child restraint systems. Adults and children who have outgrown a booster seat must be restrained using the seat belts.
Front Seats
Take the following precautions when adjusting your seat belt: NEVER use one seat belt for
more than one occupant. Always position the seatback
upright with the lap portion of the seat belt snug and low across the hips.
NEVER allow children or small infants to ride on a passen- ger's lap.
Do not route the seat belt across your neck, across sharp edges, or reroute the shoulder strap away from your body.
Do not allow the seat belt to become caught or jammed.
WARNING
Take the following precautions when adjusting your seat: NEVER attempt to adjust the
seat while the vehicle is mov- ing. The seat could respond with unexpected movement and may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an acci- dent.
Do not place anything under the front seats. Loose objects in the driver's foot area could interfere with the operation of the foot pedals, causing an accident.
Do not allow anything to inter- fere with the normal position and proper locking of the seat- back.
Do not place a cigarette lighter on the floor or seat. When you operate the seat, gas may exit out of the lighter causing a fire.
(Continued)
WARNING
2-7
Safety system of your vehicle
Manual adjustment (if equipped) The front seat can be adjusted by using the levers located on the out- side of the seat cushion. Before driv- ing, adjust the seat to the proper position so that you can easily con- trol the steering wheel, foot pedals and controls on the instrument panel.
Forward and rearward adjustment
To move the seat forward or rearward: 1. Pull up the seat slide adjustment
lever and hold it. 2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire. 3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place. Move forward and rearward without using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not locked properly.
2
To prevent injury:
Do not adjust your seat while wearing your seat belt. Moving the seat cushion for- ward may cause strong pres- sure on your abdomen.
Do not allow your hands or fingers to get caught in the seat mechanisms while the seat is moving.
CAUTION
(Continued) Use extreme caution when
picking up small objects trapped under the seats or between the seat and the cen- ter console. Your hands might be cut or injured by the sharp edges of the seat mechanism.
OAE036002
2-8
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback: 1. Lean forward slightly and lift up
the seatback lever. 2. Carefully lean back on the seat
and adjust the seatback to the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the seatback is locked in place. (The lever MUST return to its orig- inal position for the seatback to lock.)
Reclining seatback Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be dan- gerous. Even when buckled up, the protection of your restraint system (seat belts and air bags) is greatly reduced by reclining your seatback.
Seat belts must be snug against your hips and chest to work properly. When the seatback is reclined, the shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will not be snug against your chest. Instead, it will be in front of you. During an accident, you could be thrown into the seat belt, causing neck or other injuries. The more the seatback is reclined, the greater chance the passenger's hips will slide under the lap belt or the passenger's neck will strike the shoulder belt.
Safety system of your vehicle
NEVER ride with a reclined seatback when the vehicle is moving. Riding with a reclined seatback increases your chance of seri- ous or fatal injuries in the event of a collision or sudden stop. Drivers and passengers should ALWAYS sit well back in their seats, properly belted, and with the seatbacks upright.
WARNING
OAE036003
2-9
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Seat cushion height
To change the height of the seat cushion: Push down on the lever several
times, to lower the seat cushion. Pull up on the lever several times,
to raise the seat cushion.
Power adjustment (for driver's seat, if equipped) The front seat can be adjusted by using the control switches located on the outside of the seat cushion. Before driving, adjust the seat to the proper position so that you can easily control the steering wheel, foot pedals and controls on the instrument panel.
To prevent damage to the seats: Always stop adjusting the seats
when the seat has moved as far forward or rearward as possible.
Do not adjust the seats for longer than necessary when the vehicle is turned off. This may result in unnecessary battery drain.
Do not operate two or more seats at the same time.This may result in an electrical malfunc- tion.
NOTICE
NEVER allow children in the vehicle unattended. The power seats are operable when the vehicle is turned off.
WARNING OAE036004
2-10
Forward and rearward adjustment
To move the seat forward or rearward: 1. Push the control switch forward or
rearward. 2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Seatback angle
To adjust the seatback: 1. Rotate the top of control switch
forward or rearward. 2. Release the switch once the seat-
back reaches the desired position.
Reclining seatback Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be dan- gerous. Even when buckled up, the protections of your restraint system (seat belts and air bags) is greatly reduced by reclining your seatback.
Safety system of your vehicle
NEVER ride with a reclined seat- back when the vehicle is moving. Riding with a reclined seatback increases your chance of serious or fatal injuries in the event of a collision or sudden stop. Driver and passengers should ALWAYS sit well back in their seats, properly belted, and with the seatbacks upright.
WARNING
OAE036007OAE036006
2-11
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Seat belts must be snug against your hips and chest to work properly. When the seatback is reclined, the shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will not be snug against your chest. Instead, it will be in front of you. During an accident, you could be thrown into the seat belt, causing neck or other injuries. The more the seatback is reclined, the greater chance the passengers hips will slide under the lap belt or the passenger's neck will strike the shoulder belt.
Seat cushion height
To change the height of the seat cushion: 1. Push the front portion of the con-
trol switch up to raise or down to lower the front part of the seat cushion.
Push the rear portion of the con- trol switch up to raise or down to lower the height of the seat cush- ion.
2. Release the switch once the seat reaches the desired position.
Lumbar support (for driver's seat, if equipped)
To adjust the lumbar support: 1. Press the front portion of the
switch (1) to increase support or the rear portion of the switch (2) to decrease support.
2. Release the switch once it reach- es the desired position.
OAE036008 OAE036005
2-12
Safety system of your vehicle
Seatback pocket
The seatback pocket is provided on the back of the front passenger's seatback.
Rear Seats Folding the rear seat The rear seatbacks can be folded to facilitate carrying long items or to increase the luggage capacity of the vehicle.
To prevent the Occupant Classification System from mal- functioning: Do not hang onto the front pas- senger's seatback.
WARNING
Never allow passengers to sit on top of the folded down seatback while the vehicle is moving. This is not a proper seating position and no seat belts are available for use. This could result in serious injury or death in case of an accident or sudden stop.
Objects carried on the folded down seatback should not extend higher than the top of the front seatbacks. This could allow cargo to slide for- ward and cause injury or dam- age during sudden stops.
WARNING
Do not put heavy or sharp objects in the seatback pockets. In an accident they could come loose from the pocket and injure occupants.
CAUTION
OAD035017
2-13
Safety system of your vehicle
To fold down the rear seatback: 1. Set the front seatback to the
upright position and if necessary, slide the front seat forward.
2. Lower the rear head restraints to the lowest position by pushing and holding the release button (1) and pushing down on the headrest (2). 3. Insert the rear seat belt buckle in
the pocket between the rear seat- back and cushion.
4. Locate the seatbelt toward the outboard position before folding down the seatback. If not, the seatbelt system may be interfered by the seatback.
5. Pull on the seatback folding lever (1).
2
OAE036018
OAE036065L
OAE036019
OAE036020
When returning the rear seat- back from a folded to an upright position, hold the seatback and return it slowly. Ensure that the seatback is completely locked into its upright position by pushing on the top of the seat- back. In an accident or sudden stop, the unlocked seatback could allow cargo to move for- ward with great force and enter the passenger compartment, which could result in serious injury or death.
WARNING
2-14
6. Fold the seatback toward the front of the vehicle.
7. To use the rear seat, lift and unfold the seatback to the upright posi- tion. Push the seatback firmly until it clicks into place. Make sure the seatback is locked in place. When you return the seatback to its upright position, always be sure it has locked into position by push- ing on the top of the seatback.
Safety system of your vehicle
OAE036021 OAE036066L
2-15
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Armrest (if equipped)
The armrest is located in the center of the rear seat. Use the strap in the center of the armrest to pull it down.
Do not place objects in the rear seats, since they cannot be properly secured and may hit vehicle occupants in a collision causing serious injury or death.
WARNING
Make sure the vehicle is off, the shift lever is in P (Park), and the parking brake is securely applied whenever loading or unloading cargo. Failure to take these steps may allow the vehicle to move if the shift lever is inadvertently moved to another position.
WARNING
OAE036022
Be careful when loading cargo through the rear pas- senger seats to prevent dam- age to the vehicle interior.
When cargo is loaded through the rear passenger seats, ensure the cargo is properly secured to prevent it from moving while driving.
Unsecured cargo in the pas- senger compartment can cause damage to the vehicle or injury to it's occupants.
CAUTION
2-16
Safety system of your vehicle
Head Restraints The vehicle's front and rear seats have adjustable head restraints. The head restraints provide comfort for passengers, but more importantly they are designed to help protect passengers from whiplash and other neck and spinal injuries during an accident, especially in a rear impact collision.
To prevent damage, NEVER hit or pull on the head restraints.
NOTICE
To reduce the risk of serious injury or death in an accident, take the following precautions when adjusting your head restraints: Always properly adjust the
head restraints for all passen- gers BEFORE starting the vehicle.
NEVER let anyone ride in a seat with the head restraints removed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Adjust the head restraints so the middle of the head restraint is at the same height as the height of the top of the eyes.
NEVER adjust the head restraint position of the dri- ver's seat when the vehicle is in motion.
Adjust the head restraint as close to the passenger's head as possible. Do not use a seat cushion that holds the body away from the seatback.
Make sure the head restraint locks into position after adjust- ing it.
WARNING OLF034072N
2-17
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Front seat head restraints
The vehicle's front and passenger's seats are equipped with adjustable head restraints for the passengers safety and comfort.
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the head restraint: 1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).
To lower the head restraint: 1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the head restraint support. 2. Lower the head restraint to the
desired position (3).
If you recline the seatback towards the front with the head restraint and seat cushion raised, the head restraint may come in contact with the sunvisor or other parts of the vehicle.
NOTICEOPDE036068
OAE036010 OLF034015
2-18
Safety system of your vehicle
Removal/Reinstallation
To remove the head restraint: 1. Recline the seatback (2) rearward
using the seatback angle lever/ switch (1).
2. Raise the head restraint as far as it can go.
3. Press the head restraint release button (3) while pulling the head restraint up (4).
To reinstall the head restraint: 1. Put the head restraint poles (2)
into the holes while pressing the release button (1).
2. Adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.
3. Adjust the seatback (4) forward using the seatback angle lever/ switch (3).
OAE036012
OAE036011
Type A
Type B OAE036014
OAE036013
Type A
Type B
2-19
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Rear seat head restraints
The rear seats are equipped with head restraints in all the seating positions for the passenger's safety and comfort.
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the head restraint: 1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).
To lower the head restraint: 1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the head restraint support. 2. Lower the head restraint to the
desired position (3).
Removal/Reinstallation
To remove the head restraint: 1. Raise the head restraint as far as
it can go. 2. Press the head restraint release
button (1) while pulling the head restraint up (2).
To reinstall the head restraint: 1. Put the head restraint poles into
the holes (3) while pressing the release button (1).
2. Adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.
OPDE036069
OAE036017 OAE036072L
2-20
Safety system of your vehicle
Seat warmers Front seat warmers (if equipped) Seat warmers are provided to warm the seats during cold weather.
To prevent damage to the seat warmers and seats: Never use a solvent such as
paint thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline to clean the seats.
Do not place heavy or sharp objects on seats equipped with seat warmers.
Do not change the seat cover. It may damage the seat warmer.
NOTICE
The seat warmers can cause a SERIOUS BURN, even at low temperatures and especially if used for long periods of time. Passengers must be able to feel if the seat is becoming too warm so they can turn it off, if needed.
(Continued)
(Continued) People who cannot detect tem- perature change or pain to the skin should use extreme cau- tion, especially the following types of passengers: Infants, children, elderly or
disabled persons, or hospital outpatients.
People with sensitive skin or who burn easily.
Fatigued individuals. Intoxicated individuals. People taking medication that
can cause drowsiness or sleepiness.
WARNING
NEVER place anything on the seat that insulates against heat when the seat warmer is in oper- ation, such as a blanket or seat cushion. This may cause the seat warmer to overheat, caus- ing a burn or damage to the seat.
WARNING
2-21
Safety system of your vehicle
2
While the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode, push either of the switches to warm the driver's seat or front passenger's seat. During mild weather or under condi- tions where the operation of the seat warmer is not needed, keep the switches in the OFF position.
Each time you push the switch, the temperature setting of the seat is changed as follows :
When pressing the switch for more than 1.5 seconds with the seat warmer operating, the seat warmer will turn OFF.
The seat warmer defaults to the OFF position whenever the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON posi- tion.
Information With the seat warmer switch in the ON position, the heating system in the seat turns off or on automatically depending on the seat temperature.
Rear seat warmers (if equipped)
While the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode, push either of the switches to warm the rear seat. During mild weather or under condi- tions where the operation of the seat warmer is not needed, keep the switches in the OFF position.
i
OAE036015N
OFF HIGH ( )
LOW ( ) MIDDLE ( )
OAE036023
2-22
Safety system of your vehicle
Each time you push the switch, the temperature setting of the seat is changed as follows :
The seat warmer defaults to the OFF position whenever the Engine Start/ Stop button is placed in the ON posi- tion.
Information With the seat warmer switch in the ON position, the heating system in the seat turns off or on automatically depending on the seat temperature.
Battery cooling duct
The high voltage battery cooling duct is located on the left side of the rear seats. The cooling duct cools down the high voltage battery.
When the high voltage battery cool- ing duct is blocked, the high voltage battery may be overheated. Do not obstruct the cooling duct with any other objects.
i
OFF HIGH ( ) LOW ( )
OAE036024
Hybrid vehicle
OAEPH036024
Plug-in hybrid vehicle
2-23
Safety system of your vehicle
2
This section describes how to use the seat belts properly. It also describes some of the things not to do when using seat belts.
Seat Belt Safety Precautions Always fasten your seat belt and make sure all passengers have fas- tened their seat belts before starting any trip. Air bags are designed to supplement the seat belt as an addi- tional safety device, but they are not a substitute. Most states require all occupants of a vehicle to wear seat belts.
SEAT BELTS
Seat belts must be used by ALL passengers whenever the vehi- cle is moving.Take the following precautions when adjusting and wearing seat belts: ALWAYS properly restrain
children under age 13 in the rear seats.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued) NEVER allow children to ride
in the front passenger seat. If a child age 13 or older must be seated in the front seat, move the seat as far back as possi- ble and properly restrain them in the seat.
NEVER allow an infant or child to be carried on an occupants lap.
NEVER ride with the seatback reclined when the vehicle is moving.
Do not allow children to share a seat or seat belt.
Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm or behind your back.
Always wear both the shoul- der portion and lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
Do not use the seat belt if it is twisted. A twisted seat belt will not protect you properly in an accident.
(Continued)
(Continued) Do not use a seat belt if the
webbing or hardware is dam- aged.
Do not latch the seat belt into the buckles of other seats.
NEVER unfasten the seat belt while driving. This may cause loss of vehicle control result- ing in an accident.
Make sure there is nothing in the buckle interfering with the seat belt latch mechanism. This may prevent the seat belt from fastening securely.
No modifications or additions should be made by the user which will either prevent the seat belt adjusting devices from operating to remove slack, or prevent the seat belt assembly from being adjusted to remove slack.
2-24
Safety system of your vehicle
Seat Belt Warning Light Seat belt warning light (for driver's seat)
As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt warning light will illuminate and warning chime will sound for approxi- mately 6 seconds each time you place the Engine Start/Stop button to the ON position if the seat belt is unfastened.
If you continue not to fasten the seat belt and you drive over 6 mph (9 km/h), the warning light will stay illuminated. If you continue not to fasten the seat belt and you drive over 12 mph (20 km/h) the seat belt warning chime will sound for approximately 100 sec- onds and the corresponding warning light will blink.
If you unfasten the seat belt while driving under 12 mph (20 km/h), the seat belt warning light will illuminate until the seat belt is fastened. If you unfasten the seat belt while driving over 12 mph (20 km/h), the seat belt warning chime will sound for approximately 100 seconds and the corresponding warning light will blink.
Damaged seat belts and seat belt assemblies will not operate properly. Always replace: Frayed, contaminated, or dam-
aged webbing Damaged hardware The entire seat belt assembly
after it has been worn in an accident, even if damage to webbing or assembly is not apparent
WARNING
OLMB033022
2-25
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Seat belt warning light (for front passenger's seat)
As a reminder to the front passenger, the front passenger's seat belt warn- ing lights will illuminate for approxi- mately 6 seconds each time you place the Engine Start/Stop button to the ON position regardless of belt fastening. If you continue not to fasten the seat belt and you drive over 6 mph (9 km/h), the warning light will stay illuminated.
If you continue not to fasten the seat belt and you drive over 12 mph (20 km/h) the seat belt warning chime will sound for approximately 100 sec- onds and the corresponding warning light will blink. If you unfasten the seat belt while driving under 12 mph (20 km/h) the seat belt warning light will illuminate until the seat belt is fastened. If you unfasten the seat belt while driving over 12 mph (20 km/h), the seat belt warning chime will sound for approximately 100 seconds and the corresponding warning light will blink.
Seat Belt Restraint System
The front passenger's seat belt warning light may not properly operate if the front passenger does not sit properly in the seat.
WARNING
OAEE036011N Improperly positioned seat belts may increase the risk of serious injury in an accident.Take the fol- lowing precautions when adjust- ing the seat belt: Position the lap portion of the
seat belt as low as possible across your hips, not on your waist, so that it fits snugly.
(Continued)
WARNING
OLMB033025
2-26
Safety system of your vehicle
Seat Belt-Driver's 3-point sys- tem with emergency locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt:
Pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into the buckle (2). There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into the buckle.
You should place the lap belt (1) por- tion across your hips and the shoul- der belt (2) portion across your chest. The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper length after the lap belt portion is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will extend and move with you. If there is a sudden stop or impact, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly.
OLMB033087
(Continued) Position one arm under the
shoulder belt and the other over the belt, as shown in the illus- tration.
Always position the shoulder belt anchor into the locked position at the appropriate height.
Never position the shoulder belt across your neck or face. ODH033053
2-27
Safety system of your vehicle
2
If you are not able to smoothly pull enough of the seat belt out from the retractor, firmly pull the seat belt out and release it. After release, you will be able to pull the belt out smoothly.
Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt anchor to one of the three different positions for maximum comfort and safety. The shoulder por- tion should be adjusted so it lies across your chest and midway over your shoulder nearest the door, not over your neck. To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster into an appropriate position. To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1). To lower it, push it down (3) while pressing the height adjuster button (2). Release the button to lock the anchor into position. Try sliding the height adjuster to make sure that it has locked into position.
To release your seat belt:
Press the release button (1) in the locking buckle. When it is released, the belt should automatically draw back into the retractor. If this does not happen, check the belt to be sure it is not twist- ed, then try again.
NOTICE
OAD035027 ODH033057
2-28
Safety system of your vehicle
Rear Seat Belt Passenger's 3- point system with convertible locking retractor This type of seat belt combines the features of both an emergency locking retractor seat belt and an automatic locking retractor seat belt. Convertible retractor type seat belts are installed in the rear seat positions to help accom- modate the installation of child restraint systems. Although a convert- ible retractor is also installed in the front passenger seat position, NEVER place any infant/child restraint system in the front seat of the vehicle.
To fasten your seat belt:
Pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the metal tab into the buck- le. There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into the buckle. When not securing a child restraint, the seat belt operates in the same way as the driver's seat belt (Emergency Locking Retractor Type). It automati- cally adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt portion of the seat belt is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly across your hips.
When the seat belt is fully extended from the retractor to allow the installa- tion of a child restraint system, the seat belt operation changes to allow the belt to retract, but not to extend (Automatic Locking Retractor Type). Refer to the "Using a Child Restraint System" section in this chapter.
Although the seat belt retractor provides the same level of protec- tion for seated passengers in either emergency or automatic locking modes, the emergency locking mode allows seated pas- sengers to move freely in their seat while keeping some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop, the retractor auto- matically locks the belt to help restrain your body. To deactivate the automatic lock- ing mode, unbuckle the seat belt and allow the belt to fully retract.
To release your seat belt:
Press the release button (1) in the locking buckle. When it is released, the belt should automatically draw back into the retractor. If this does not happen, check the belt to be sure it is not twist- ed, then try again.
NOTICE
ODH033057
2-29
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Pre-tensioner seat belt (Driver and front passenger)
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and front passenger's Pre-tensioner Seat Belts (Retractor Pretensioner and Emergency Fastening Device System). The purpose of the pre-ten- sioner is to make sure the seat belts fit tightly against the occupant's body in certain frontal or side collision(s). The Emergency Fastening Device System may be activated in certain crashes where the frontal or side colli- sion(s) is severe enough, together with the air bags.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if the occupant tries to lean forward too quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock into position. In certain frontal or side collision(s), the pre-tensioner will activate and pull the seat belt into tighter contact against the occu- pant's body.
(1) Retractor Pretensioner The purpose of the retractor pre- tensioner is to make sure that the shoulder belts fit in tightly against the occupant's upper body in cer- tain frontal or side collision(s).
(2) Emergency Fastening Device System The purpose of the Emergency Fastening Device System is to make sure that the pelvis belts fit in tightly against the occupant's lower body in certain frontal or side collision(s).
If the system senses excessive ten- sion on the driver or passenger's seat belt when the pre-tensioner sys- tem activates, the load limiter inside the retractor pre-tensioner will release some of the pressure on the affected seat belt.
OTL035053
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly in your seat.
Do not use the seat belt if it is loose or twisted. A loose or twisted seat belt will not pro- tect you properly in an acci- dent.
Do not place anything near the buckle. This may adversely affect the buckle and cause it to function improperly.
Always replace your pre-ten- sioners after activation or an accident.
NEVER inspect, service, repair or replace the pre-tensioners yourself. This must be done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not hit the seat belt assem- blies.
WARNING
2-30
Safety system of your vehicle
The Pre-Tensioner Seat Belt System consists mainly of the following com- ponents. Their locations are shown in the illustration above: 1. SRS air bag warning light 2. Retractor pre-tensioner 3. SRS control module 4. Emergency Fastening Device
System
The sensor that activates the SRS air bag is connected with the pretensioner seat belts. The SRS air bag warning light on the instru- ment panel will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds after the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position, and then it should turn off. If the pre-tensioner is not working properly, the warning light will illu- minate even if the SRS air bag is not malfunctioning. If the warning light does not illuminate, stays illuminated or illuminates when the vehicle is being driven, have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer inspect the pre-tensioner seat belts and SRS air bags as soon as possible.
NOTICE
Do not touch the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies for several minutes after they have been activated. When the pre-ten- sioner seat belt mechanism deploys during a collision, the pre-tensioners become hot and can burn you.
WARNING
OLMB033040/Q
2-31
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Both the driver's and front pas- senger's pre-tensioner seat belts may be activated in certain frontal or side collisions or rollovers.
When the pre-tensioner seat belts are activated, a loud noise may be heard and fine dust, which may appear to be smoke, may be visible in the passenger compartment. These are normal operating conditions and are not hazardous.
Although it is non-toxic, the fine dust may cause skin irritation and should not be inhaled for prolonged periods. Wash all exposed skin areas thoroughly after an accident in which the pre-tensioner seat belts were activated.
Rear center seatbelt (3-point rear center seat belt)
1. Insert the tongue plate (A) into the buckle (A) until an audible "click" is heard, indicating the latch is locked. Make sure the belt is not twisted.
NOTICE
Fasten your seat belt while sitting properly in an upright position to maximize the effectiveness of the pre-ten- sioner seat belt system.
A pre-tensioner seat belt sys- tem is designed to activate only once. Replace the pre- tensioner seat belt system, if it was activated in an accident.
WARNING
OAE036068L
2-32
Safety system of your vehicle
2. Pull the tongue plate (B) and insert it into the buckle (B) until an audible "click" is heard, indicating the latch is locked. Make sure the belt is not twisted.
When using the rear center seat belt, the buckle with the "CENTER" mark must be used.
Additional Seat Belt Safety Precautions Seat belt use during pregnancy The seat belt should always be used during pregnancy. The best way to protect your unborn child is to protect yourself by always wearing the seat belt. Pregnant women should always wear a lap-shoulder seat belt. Place the shoulder belt across your chest, rout- ed between your breasts and away from your neck. Place the lap belt line so that it fits snugly and as low as pos- sible across the hips, not across the abdomen.
A pregnant woman or a patient is more vulnerable to any imapcts on the abdomen during an abrupt stop or acci- dent. If you are in an accident while pregnant, we recom- mend you consult your doc- tor.
To reduce the risk of serious injury or death to an unborn child during an accident, pregnant women should NEVER place the lap portion of the seat belt above or over the area of the abdomen where the unborn child is located.
WARNING
OAE036027
2-33
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Seat belt use and children Infant and small children
All 50 states have child restraint laws which require children to travel in approved child restraint devices, including booster seats. The age at which seat belts can be used instead of child restraints differs among states, so you should be aware of the specific requirements in your state, and where you are travelling. Infant and child restraints must be properly placed and installed in a rear seat. For more information refer to the "Child Restraint Systems" section in this chapter.
Small children are best protected from injury in an accident when prop- erly restrained in the rear seat by a child restraint system that meets the requirements of the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Before buying any child restraint system, make sure that it has a label certify- ing that it meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard FMVSS 213. The restraint must be appropri- ate for your child's height and weight. Check the label on the child restraint for this information. Refer to the "Child Restraint Systems" section in this chapter.
ALWAYS properly restrain infants and small children in a child restraint appropriate for the child's height and weight. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death to a child and other passengers, NEVER hold a child in your lap or arms when the vehicle is moving.The violent forces created during an acci- dent will tear the child from your arms and throw the child against the interior of the vehicle.
WARNING
2-34
Safety system of your vehicle
Larger children
Children under age 13 and who are too large for a booster seat must always occupy the rear seat and use the available lap/shoulder belts. A seat belt should lie across the upper thighs and be snug across the shoul- der and chest to restrain the child safely. Check belt fit periodically. Children are afforded the most safe- ty in the event of an accident when they are restrained by a proper restraint system and/or seat belts in the rear seat. Always have the LATCH system inspected by your authorized HYUNDAI dealer after an accident. An accident can damage the LATCH system and may not properly secure the child restraint. If a larger child over age 13 must be seated in the front seat, the child must be securely restrained by the available lap/shoulder belt and the seat should be placed in the rear- most position.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly touches the child's neck or face, try placing the child closer to the center of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still touches their face or neck they need to be returned to an appropriate booster seat in the rear seat.
Transporting an injured person A seat belt should be used when an injured person is being transported. Consult a physician for specific rec- ommendations.
One person per belt Two people (including children) should never attempt to use a single seat belt. This could increase the severity of injuries in case of an accident.
Do not lie down Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the protec- tions of your restraint system (seat belts and air bags) is greatly reduced by reclining your seatback. To reduce the chance of injuries in the event of an accident and to achieve the maximum effectiveness of the restraint system, all passengers should be sitting up and the front and rear seats should be in an upright position when the car is moving.
Always make sure children are wearing their seat belts and that they are properly adjusted before driving.
NEVER allow the shoulder belt to contact the childs neck or face.
Do not allow more than one child to use a single seat belt.
WARNING
2-35
Safety system of your vehicle
2
A seat belt cannot provide proper protection if the person is lying down in the rear seat or if the front or rear seats are in a reclined position.
Care of Seat Belts Seat belt systems should never be disassembled or modified. In addi- tion, care should be taken to assure that seat belts and belt hardware are not damaged by seat hinges, doors or other abuse.
Periodic inspection All seat belts should be inspected periodically for wear or damage of any kind. Any damaged parts should be replaced as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Keep belts clean and dry Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. If belts become dirty, they can be cleaned by using a mild soap solu- tion and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong detergents or abrasives should not be used because they may damage and weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts The entire seat belt assembly or assemblies should be replaced if the vehicle has been involved in an acci- dent. This should be done even if no damage is visible. Additional ques- tions concerning seat belt operation should be directed to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
NEVER ride with a reclined seatback when the vehicle is moving.
Riding with a reclined seatback increases your chance of seri- ous or fatal injuries in the event of a collision or sudden stop.
Drivers and passengers should always sit well back in their seats, properly belted, and with the seatbacks upright.
WARNING
2-36
Safety system of your vehicle
Children Always in the Rear Children under age 13 must always ride in the rear seats and must always be properly restrained to min- imize the risk of injury in an accident, sudden stop or sudden maneuver. According to accident statistics, chil- dren are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats than in the front seat. Even with air bags, children can be seriously injured or killed. Children too large for a child restraint must use the seat belts provided. All 50 states have child restraint laws which require children to travel in approved child restraint devices. The laws governing the age or height/weight restrictions at which seat belts can be used instead of child restraints differs among states, so you should be aware of the spe- cific requirements in your state, and where you are travelling.
Child restraint systems must be prop- erly placed and installed in the rear seat. You must use a commercially available child restraint system that meets the requirements of the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS 213). Child restraint systems are generally designed to be secured in a vehicle seat by lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt, or by a LATCH sys- tem in the rear seats of the vehicle.
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM (CRS)
Always properly restrain chil- dren in the rear seats of the vehicle. Children of all ages are safer when restrained in the rear seat. A child riding in the front pas- senger seat can be forcefully struck by an inflating air bag resulting in SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH.
WARNING
2-37
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Child restraint system (CRS) Infants and younger children must be restrained in an appropriate rear-fac- ing or forward-facing CRS that has first been properly secured to the rear seat of the vehicle. Read and comply with the instructions for installation and use provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint.
Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) When selecting a CRS for your child, always: Make sure the CRS has a label
certifying that it meets applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS 213).
Select a child restraint based on your childs height and weight. The required label or the instructions for use typically provide this infor- mation.
Select a child restraint that fits the vehicle seating position where it will be used.
Read and comply with the warn- ings and instructions for installation and use provided with the child restraint system.
(Continued) Always follow the child
restraint system manufactur- er's instructions for installa- tion and use.
Always properly restrain your child in the child restraint.
If the vehicle head restraint prevents proper installation of a child seat (as described in the child restraint system manual), the head restraint of the respective seating posi- tion shall be readjusted or entirely removed.
Do not use an infant carrier or a child safety seat that "hooks" over a seatback, it may not provide adequate protection in an accident.
After an accident, have a HYUNDAI dealer check the child restraint system, seat belts, tether anchors and lower anchors.
An improperly secured child restraint can increase the risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH in an accident. Always take the following precautions when using a child restraint system: NEVER install a child or infant
restraint in the front passen- ger's seat.
Always properly secure the child restraint to a rear seat of the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING
2-38
Safety system of your vehicle
Child restraint system types There are three main types of child restraint systems: rear-facing seats, forward-facing seats, and booster seats. They are classified according to the child's age, height and weight.
Rearward-facing child seats
A rear-facing child seat provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the child. The har- ness system holds the child in place, and in an accident, acts to keep the child positioned in the seat and reduce the stress to the neck and spinal cord. All children under age one must always ride in a rear-facing infant child restraint. Convertible and 3-in-1 child seats typ- ically have higher height and weight limits for the rear-facing position, allowing you to keep your child rear- facing for a longer period of time.
Continue to use a rear-facing child seat for as long as your child will fit within the height and weight limits allowed by the child seat manufactur- er. It's the best way to keep them safe. Once your child has outgrown the rear-facing child restraint, your child is ready for a forward-facing child restraint with a harness.
OAE036062 NEVER install a child or infant restraint in the front passen- ger's seat. Placing a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat can result in SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH if the child restraint is struck by an inflating air bag.
WARNING
2-39
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Forward-facing child restraints
A forward-facing child seat provides restraint for the child's body with a harness. Keep children in a forward- facing child seat with a harness until they reach the top height or weight limit allowed by your child restraints manufacturer. Once your child outgrows the forward- facing child restraint, your child is ready for a booster seat.
Booster seats
A booster seat is a restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle's seat belt system. A booster seat positions the seat belt so that it fits properly over the lap of your child. Keep your child in a booster seat until they are big enough to sit in the seat without a booster and still have the seat belt fit properly. For a seat belt to fit properly, the lap belt must lie snug- ly across the upper thighs, not the stomach. The shoulder belt should lie snug across the shoulder and chest and not across the neck or face. Children under age 13 must always ride in the rear seats and must always be properly restrained to minimize the risk of injury.
Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS)
Before installing your child restraint system always: Read and follow the instruc-
tions provided by the manu- facturer of the child restraint.
Read and follow the instruc- tions regarding child restraint systems in this manual.
Failure to follow all warnings and instructions could increase the risk of the SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH if an accident occurs.
WARNING
If the vehicle headrest prevents proper installation of a child seat (as described in the child seat system manual, the head- rest of the respective seating position shall be readjusted or entirely removed.
WARNING
OAE036028
2-40
Safety system of your vehicle
After selecting a proper child seat for your child, check to make sure it fits properly in your vehicle. Follow the instructions provided by the manu- facturer when installing the child seat. Note these general steps when installing the seat to your vehicle: Properly secure the child restraint
to the vehicle. All child restraints must be secured to the vehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt or with the LATCH system.
Make sure the child restraint is firmly secured. After installing a child restraint to the vehicle, push and pull the seat forward-and-back and side-to-side to verify that it is securely attached to the seat. A child restraint secured with a seat belt should be installed as firmly as possible. However, some side-to- side movement can be expected.
Secure the child in the child restraint. Make sure the child is properly strapped in the child restraint according to the manufac- turer instructions.
Lower Anchors and Tether for Children (LATCH System) The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving and in an acci- dent. This system is designed to make installation of the child restraint easier and reduce the possibility of improperly installing your child restraint. The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and attach- ments on the child restraint. The LATCH system eliminates the need to use seat belts to secure the child restraint to the rear seats. Lower anchors are metal bars built into the vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating position that will accommodate a child restraint with lower attachments. To use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you must have a child restraint with LATCH attachments. The child seat manufacturer will pro- vide you with instructions on how to use the child seat with its attachments for the LATCH lower anchors.
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot.To prevent burns, check the seat- ing surface and buckles before placing your child in the child restraint.
CAUTION
2-41
Safety system of your vehicle
2
LATCH anchors have been provided in the left and right outboard rear seating positions. Their locations are shown in the illustration. There are no LATCH anchors provided for the cen- ter rear seating position.
The lower anchor position indicator symbols are located on the left and right rear seat backs to identify the position of the lower anchors in your vehicle (see arrows in illustration). The LATCH anchors are located between the seatback and the seat cushion of the rear seat left and right outboard seating positions.
Do not attempt to install a child restraint system using LATCH anchors in the rear center seat- ing position.There are no LATCH anchors provided for this seat. Using the outboard seat anchors can damage the anchors which may break or fail in a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
WARNING
OAE036063 OAE036031
Lower Anchor Position Indicator
Lower Anchor
2-42
Safety system of your vehicle
Securing a child restraint with the LATCH anchors system To install a LATCH-compatible child restraint in either of the rear outboard seating positions: 1. Move the seat belt buckle away
from the lower anchors. 2. Move any other objects away from
the anchors that could prevent a secure connection between the child restraint and the lower anchors.
3. Place the child restraint on the vehicle seat, then attach the seat to the lower anchors according to the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer.
4. Follow the child restraint instruc- tions for properly adjusting and tightening the lower attachments on the child restraint to the lower anchors.
The recommended weight for the LATCH system is under 65 lb (30 kg). How to determine an appropriate child restraint weight: Child weight + Child restraint weight < 65 lb (30kg)
NOTICE
Take the following precautions when using the LATCH system: Read and follow all installation
instructions provided with your child restraint system.
To prevent the child from reaching and taking hold of unretracted seat belts, buckle all unused rear seat belts and retract the seat belt webbing behind the child. Children can be strangled if a shoulder belt becomes wrapped around their neck and the seat belt tightens.
NEVER attach more than one child restraint to a single anchor. This could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or break.
Always have the LATCH sys- tem inspected by your author- ized HYUNDAI dealer after an accident. An accident can damage the LATCH system and may not properly secure the child restraint.
WARNING
2-43
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Securing a child restraint seat with "Tether Anchor" system
First secure the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchors or the seat belt. If the child restraint manufactur- er recommends that the top tether strap be attached, attach and tighten the top tether strap to the top tether strap anchor. Child restraint hook holders are located on the rear of the seatbacks.
To install the tether anchor: 1. Route the child restraint tether strap
over the child restraint seatback. Route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts, or route the tether strap over the top of the vehi- cle seatback. Make sure the strap is not twisted.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the tether anchor, then tighten the teth- er strap according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions to firmly secure the child restraint to the seat.
3. Check that the child restraint is securely attached to the seat by pushing and pulling the seat for- ward-and-back and side-to-side.
Take the following precautions when installing the tether strap: Read and follow all installation
instructions provided with your child restraint system.
NEVER attach more than one child restraint to a single teth- er anchor. This could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or break.
Do not attach the tether strap to anything other than the cor- rect tether anchor. It may not work properly if attached to something else.
Do not use the tether anchors for adult seat belts or harness- es, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING
OAE036030
OAE036029N
2-44
Safety system of your vehicle
Securing a child restraint with lap/shoulder belt When not using the LATCH system, all child restraints must be secured to a vehicle rear seat with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.
Automatic locking mode
Since all passenger seat belts move freely under normal conditions and only lock under extreme or emer- gency conditions (emergency locking mode), you must manually pull the seat belt all the way out to shift the retractor to the "Automatic Locking" mode to secure a child restraint. The "Automatic Locking" mode will help prevent the normal movement of the child in the vehicle from caus- ing the seat belt to loosen and com- promise the child restraint system. To secure a child restraint system, use the following procedure.
To install a child restraint system on the rear seats, do the following: 1. Place the child restraint system on
a rear seat and route the lap/ shoulder belt around or through the child restraint, following the restraint manufacturer's instruc- tions. Be sure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.
When using the rear center seat belt, you should also refer to the "Rear Seat Belt Passenger's 3- point system" section in this chapter.
NOTICE
ALWAYS place a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat of the vehicle. Placing a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the child restraint is struck by an inflating air bag.
WARNING
OLMB033044
2-45
Safety system of your vehicle
2
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into the buckle. Listen for the dis- tinct "click" sound.
Information Position the release button so that it is easy to access in case of an emergency.
3. Pull the shoulder portion of the seat belt all the way out.When the shoul- der portion of the seat belt is fully extended, it will shift the retractor to the "Automatic Locking" (child restraint) mode.
4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion of the seat belt to retract and listen for an audible "clicking" or "ratcheting" sound. This indicates that the retractor is in the "Automatic Locking" mode. If no distinct sound is heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.
i
OLMB033045 OLMB033097 OLMB033098
2-46
Safety system of your vehicle
5. Remove as much slack from the belt as possible by pushing down on the child restraint system while feeding the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
6. Push and pull on the child restraint system to confirm that the seat belt is holding it firmly in place. If it is not, release the seat belt and repeat steps 2 through 6.
7. Double check that the retractor is in the "Automatic Locking" mode by attempting to pull more of the seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot, the retractor is in the "Automatic Locking" mode.
If your CRS manufacturer instructs or recommends you to use a tether anchor with the lap/shoulder belt, refer to the previous pages for more information.
When the seat belt is allowed to retract to its fully stowed position, the retractor will automatically switch from the "Automatic Locking" mode to the emergency lock mode for normal adult usage.
To remove the child restraint, press the release button on the buckle and then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of the restraint and allow the seat belt to retract fully.
NOTICE
If the retractor is not in the "Automatic Locking" mode, the child restraint can move when your vehicle turns or stops sud- denly. A child can be seriously injured or killed if the child restraint is not properly anchored in the car, including manually pulling the seat belt all the way out to shift the rectractor to the "Automatic Locking" mode.
WARNING
2-47
Safety system of your vehicle
2
AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
OAEE036035
The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1. Driver's front air bag
2. Passenger's front air bag
3. Side air bag
4. Curtain air bag
5. Driver's knee air bag
2-48
Safety system of your vehicle
This vehicle is equipped with an Advanced Supplemental Air Bag System for the driver's seat and front passenger's seats. The front air bags are designed to supplement the three-point seat belts. For these air bags to provide protection, the seat belts must be worn at all times when driving. You can be severely injured or killed in an accident if you are not wearing a seat belt. Air bags are designed to supplement seat belts, but do not replace them. Also, air bags are not designed to deploy in every collision. In some accidents, the seat belts are the only restraint protecting you.
AIR BAG SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ALWAYS use seat belts and child restraints - every trip, every time, everyone! Even with air bags, you can be seriously injured or killed in a collision if you are improperly belted or not wearing your seat belt when the air bag inflates. NEVER place a child in any child restraint or booster seat in the front passenger seat. An inflating air bag could forcefully strike the infant or child causing serious or fatal injuries. ABC - Always Buckle Children under age 13 in the back seat. It is the safest place for children of any age to ride. If a child age 13 or older must be seated in the front seat, he or she must be properly belted and the seat should be moved as far back as possible. All occupants should sit upright with the seatback in an upright posi- tion, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs com- fortably extended and their feet on the floor until the vehicle is parked and is turned off. If an occupant is out of position during an accident, the rapidly deploying air bag may forcefully contact the occupant causing serious or fatal injuries. You and your passengers should never sit or lean unnecessarily close to the air bags or lean against the door or center console. Move your seat as far back as possible from front air bags, while still maintaining control of the vehicle. The U.S. National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) recommends that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest.
WARNING
2-49
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Where Are the Air Bags? Driver's and passenger's front air bags Your vehicle is equipped with a Advanced Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver and passenger seating positions. The SRS consists of air bags which are located in the center of the steer- ing wheel, in the driver's side lower crash pad below the steering wheel column and the passenger's side front panel pad above the glove box. The air bags are labeled with the let- ters "AIR BAG" embossed on the pad covers.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide the vehicle's driver and front passen- gers with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt system alone. The advanced SRS offers the ability to control the air bag inflation within two levels. A first stage level is provided for moderate-severity impacts. A second stage level is pro- vided for more severe impacts. According to the impact severity, the SRS Control Module (SRSCM) con- trols the air bag inflation. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.
OAE036032
OAE036033
OAE036036
Driver's knee air bag
Driver's front air bag
Passenger's front air bag
2-50
Safety system of your vehicle
Side air bags
Your vehicle is equipped with a side air bag in each front seat. The pur- pose of the air bag is to provide the vehicle's driver and the front passen- ger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt alone.
The side air bags are designed to deploy only during certain side impact collisions, depending on the crash severity. The side and curtain air bags on both sides of the vehicle may deploy if a rollover or possible rollover is detected. The side air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact or rollover situations.
To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from an inflating front air bags, take the following precautions: Seat belts must be worn at all
times to help keep occupants positioned properly.
Move your seat as far back as possible from front air bags, while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Never lean against the door or center console.
Do not allow the front passen- ger to place their feet or legs on the dashboard.
No objects (such as crash pad cover, cellular phone holder, cup holder, perfume or stickers) should be placed over or near the air bag modules on the steering wheel, instrument panel, windshield glass, and the front passenger's panel above the glove box. Such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the air bags to deploy.
WARNING
OAE036037
OAE036038
To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from an inflating side air bag, take the following precautions: Seat belts must be worn at all
times to help keep occupants positioned properly.
(Continued)
WARNING
2-51
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Curtain air bags
Curtain air bags are located along both sides of the roof rails above the front and rear doors.
(Continued) Do not allow passengers to
lean their heads or bodies onto doors, put their arms on the doors, stretch their arms out of the window, or place objects between the doors and seats.
Hold the steering wheel at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock posi- tions, to minimize the risk of injuries to your hands and arms.
Do not use any accessory seat covers.This could reduce or prevent the effectiveness of the system.
Do not place any objects over the air bag or between the air bag and yourself. Also, do not attach any objects around the area the air bag inflates such as the door, side door glass, front and rear pillar.
(Continued)
(Continued) Do not place any objects
between the door and the seat. They may become dan- gerous projectiles if the side air bag inflates.
Do not install any accessories on the side or near the side air bags.
Do not put any objects between the side airbag label and seat cushion. It could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the air bags to deploy.
Do not cause impact to the doors when the Engine Start/ Stop button is in the ON posi- tion as this may cause the side air bags to inflate.
If the seat or seat cover is damaged, have the vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OAE036041
OAE036042
2-52
Safety system of your vehicle
They are designed to help protect the heads of the front seat occupants and the rear outboard seat occupants in certain side impact collisions. The curtain air bags are designed to deploy only during certain side impact collisions, depending on the crash severity. The side and curtain air bags on both sides of the vehicle may deploy if a rollover or possible rollover is detected. The curtain air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact or rollover situations.
How Does the Air Bag System Operate?
The SRS consists of the following components: 1. Driver's front air bag module/
Driver's knee airbag module 2. Passenger's front air bag module 3. Side air bag modules/
Side impact sensors 4. Curtain air bag modules 5. Retractor pre-tensioner assem-
blies 6. Air bag warning light 7. SRS control module (SRSCM)/
Rollover sensor
To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from an inflating curtain air bag, take the follow- ing precautions: All seat occupants must wear
seat belts at all times to help keep occupants positioned properly.
(Continued)
(Continued) Properly secure child
restraints as far away from the door as possible.
Do not place any objects over the air bag. Also, do not attach any objects around the area the air bag inflates such as the door, side door glass, front and rear pillar, roof side rail.
Do not hang other objects except clothes, especially hard or breakable objects. In an accident, it may cause vehicle damage or personal injury.
Do not allow passengers to lean their heads or bodies onto doors, put their arms on the doors, stretch their arms out of the window, or place objects between the doors and seats.
Do not open or repair the side curtain air bags.
WARNING
OAEE036075N
2-53
Safety system of your vehicle
2
8. Front impact sensors 9. Side pressure sensors 10. Emergency Fastening Device
System 11. Occupant classification system
The SRSCM (Supplemental Restraint System Control Module) continually monitors all SRS compo- nents while the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position to deter- mine if a crash impact is severe enough to require air bag deploy- ment or pre-tensioner seat belt deployment.
SRS warning light
The SRS (Supplement Restraint System) air bag warning light on the instrument panel displays the air bag symbol depicted in the illustration. The system checks the air bag elec- trical system for malfunctions. The light indicates that there is a potential malfunction with your air bag system, which could include your side and curtain air bags used for rollover pro- tection.
If your SRS malfunctions, the air bag may not inflate properly dur- ing an accident increasing the risk of serious injury or death. If any of the following condi- tions occur, your SRS is mal- functioning: The light does not turn on for
approximately six seconds when the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position.
The light stays on after illumi- nating for approximately six seconds.
The light comes on while the vehicle is in motion.
The light blinks when the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode.
Have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer inspect the SRS as soon as possible if any of these con- ditions occur.
WARNING
2-54
Safety system of your vehicle
During a frontal collision, sensors will detect the vehicle's deceleration. If the rate of deceleration is high enough, the control unit will inflate the front air bags. The front air bags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which seat belts alone cannot pro- vide adequate restraint. When need- ed, the side air bags help provide protection in the event of a side impact or rollover. Air bags are activated (able to
inflate if necessary) only when the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position.
Air bags inflate in the event of cer- tain frontal or side collisions to help protect the occupants from serious physical injury.
Generally, air bags are designed to inflate based upon the severity of a collision, its direction, etc. These two factors determine whether the sensors produce an electronic deployment/inflation signal.
Air bag deployment depends on a number of factors including vehicle speed, angles of impact and the density and stiffness of the vehicles or objects which your vehicle impacts during a collision. The determining factors are not limited to those mentioned above.
The front air bags will completely inflate and deflate in an instant. It is virtually impossible for you to see the air bags inflate during an acci- dent. It is much more likely that you will simply see the deflated air bags hanging out of their storage com- partments after the collision.
In addition to inflating in certain side collisions, vehicles equipped with a rollover sensor, side and curtain air bags will inflate if the sensing system detects a rollover. When a rollover is detected, side and curtain air bags will remain inflated longer to help provide pro- tection from ejection, especially when used in conjunction with the seat belts.
To help provide protection, the air bags must inflate rapidly.The speed of air bag inflation is a consequence of extremely short time in which to inflate the air bag between the occupant and the vehicle structures before the occupant impacts those structures. This speed of inflation reduces the risk of serious or life- threatening injuries and is thus a necessary part of air bag design. However, the rapid air bag inflation can also cause injuries which can include facial abrasions, bruises and broken bones because the inflation speed also causes the air bags to expand with a great deal of force.
There are even circumstances under which contact with the air bag can cause fatal injuries, espe- cially if the occupant is positioned excessively close to the air bag.
2-55
Safety system of your vehicle
2
You can take steps to help reduce the risk of being injured by an inflat- ing air bag. The greatest risk is sitting too close to the air bag. An air bag needs about 10 inches (25 cm) of space to inflate. NHTSA recom- mends that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest.
When the SRSCM detects a suffi- ciently severe impact to the front of the vehicle, it will automatically deploy the front air bags.
OHM039102N
Drivers front air bag (1)
To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from an inflating air bag, take the following pre- cautions: NEVER place a child restraint
in the front passenger seat. Always properly restrain chil- dren under age 13 in the rear seats of the vehicle.
Adjust the front passenger's and driver's seats as far to the rear as possible while allow- ing you to maintain full con- trol of the vehicle.
Hold the steering wheel with hands at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions.
Never place anything or any- one between the air bag and the seat occupant.
Do not allow the front passen- ger to place their feet or legs on the dashboard.
WARNING
2-56
Safety system of your vehicle
Upon deployment, tear seams mold- ed directly into the pad covers will separate under pressure from the expansion of the air bags. Further opening of the covers allows full inflation of the air bags. A fully inflated air bag, in combina- tion with a properly worn seat belt, slows the driver or the front passen- ger forward motion, reducing the risk of head and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag immediately starts deflating, enabling the driver to maintain forward visibili- ty and the ability to steer or operate other controls.
OHM039103N
Drivers front air bag (2)
OHM039104N
Drivers front air bag (3)
OLMB033057
Passengers front air bag
To prevent objects from becom- ing dangerous projectiles when the passenger's air bag inflates: Do not install or place any
objects (drink holder, CD holder, stickers, etc.) on the front passenger's panel above the glove box where the pas- senger's air bag is located.
Do not install a container of liquid air freshener near the instrument cluster or on the instrument panel surface.
WARNING
2-57
Safety system of your vehicle
2
What to Expect After an Air Bag Inflates After a frontal or side air bag inflates, it will deflate very quickly. Air bag inflation will not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer. Curtain air bags may remain partially inflated for some time after they deploy.
Noise and smoke from inflating air bag When the air bags inflate, they make a loud noise and may produce smoke and powder in the air inside of the vehicle. This is normal and is a result of the ignition of the air bag inflator. After the air bag inflates, you may feel substantial discomfort in breathing because of the contact of your chest with both the seat belt and the air bag, as well as from breathing the smoke and powder. The powder may aggravate asthma for some people. If you experience breathing problems after an air bag deploy- ment, seek medical attention imme- diately. Though the smoke and powder are nontoxic, they may cause irritation to the skin, eyes, nose, throat, etc. If this is the case, wash and rinse with cold water immediately and seek medical attention if the symptoms persist.
(Continued) Always wash exposed skin
areas thoroughly with cold and mild soap.
Always have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer replace the air bag immediately after deployment. Air bags are designed to be used only once.
After an air bag inflates, take the following precautions: Open your windows and doors
as soon as possible after impact to reduce prolonged exposure to the smoke and powder released by the inflat- ing air bag.
Do not touch the air bag stor- age area's internal compo- nents immediately after an air bag has inflated. The parts that come into contact with an inflating air bag may be very hot.
(Continued)
WARNING
2-58
Safety system of your vehicle
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Occupant Classification System (OCS) in the front passenger's seat.
Main components of the Occupant Classification System A detection device located within
the front passenger seat cushion. Electronic system to determine
whether the passenger air bag systems should be activated or deactivated.
An indicator light located on the instrument panel which illuminates the words "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicating the front passen- ger air bag system is deactivated.
The instrument panel air bag indi- cator light is interconnected with the OCS.
The OCS is designed to help detect the presence of a properly-seated front passenger and determine if the passenger's front air bag should be enabled (may inflate) or not. The purpose is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflat- ing air bag to certain front passenger seat occupants, such as children, by requiring the air bag to be automati- cally turned OFF.
For example, if a child restraint of the type specified in the regulations is on the seat, the occupant classification sensor can detect it and cause the air bag to turn OFF. Front passenger seat adult occu- pants who are properly seated and wearing the seat belt properly, should not cause the passenger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF, however, if the occupant does not sit in the seat properly (for exam- ple, by not sitting upright, by sitting on the edge of the seat, or by other- wise being out of position), this could cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. You will find the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator on the center fascia panel. This system detects the conditions 1-4 in the following table and activates or deactivates the front passenger air bag based on these conditions.
OAEE036040N
2-59
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Always be sure that you and all vehi- cle occupants are seated properly and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective protection by the air bag and the seat belt. The OCS may not function properly if the passenger takes actions which can affect the classification system. These include: Failing to sit in an upright position. Leaning against the door or center
console. Sitting towards the sides of the
front of the seat. Putting their legs on the dashboard
or resting them on other locations which reduce the passenger weight on the front seat.
Wearing the seat belt improperly. Reclining the seatback. Wearing a thick cloth like ski wear
or hip protection wear. Putting an additional thick cushion
on the seat. Putting electrical devices (e.g.
notebook, satellite radio) on the seat with inverter charging.
Condition and operation in the front passenger Occupant Classification System
Condition detected by the occupant classification system
Indicator/Warning light Devices
"PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator light
SRS warning light
Front passenger air bag
1. Adult *1 Off Off Activated
2. Infant *2 or child restraint system with 12 months old *3 *4
On Off Deactivated
3. Unoccupied On Off Deactivated
4. Malfunction in the system Off On Activated
*1 The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
*2 Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a larger child who has out- grown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending upon his/her physique or sitting position.
*3 Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat. *4 The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator may turn on or off when a child above 12 months
to 12 years old (with or without child restraint system) sits in the front passenger seat. This is a normal condition.
2-60
Safety system of your vehicle
Riding in an improper position or placing weight on the front passenger's seat when it is unoccupied by a passenger adversely affects the OCS. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death:
WARNING
OVQ036013NB
OLMB033100
OLMB033101
OLMB033103
OLMB033102
OLMB033104
NEVER put a heavy load in the front seat or seatback pocket, or hang any items on the front passenger seat.
NEVER place your feet on the front passenger seat- back.
NEVER sit with your hips shifted towards the front of the seat.
NEVER ride with the seat- back reclined when the vehicle is moving.
NEVER place your feet or legs on the dashboard.
NEVER lean on the door or center console or sit on one side of the front pas- senger seat.
(continued)
2-61
Safety system of your vehicle
2
ODH035900K
ODH035901K
ODH035902K
ODH035903K
Do not sit on the passen- ger seat wearing heavily padded clothes such as ski wear and hip protector.
Do not use car seat accessories such as thick blankets and cushions which cover up the car seat surface.
Do not place electronic devices such as laptops, DVD player, or conductive materials such as water bottles on the passenger seat.
Do not use electronic devices such as laptops and satellite radios which use inverter chargers.
If large quantity of liquid has been spilled on the passenger seat, the air bag warning light may illuminate or malfunction. Therefore, make sure the seat has been completely dried before driving the vehicle.
Do not place sharp objects on the front passenger seat.These may damage the occupant detection sys- tem, if they puncture the seat cushion.
Do not place any items under the front passenger seat. When changing or replacing the seat or seat cover, use original items only. The OCS has been devel-
oped based on using original HYUNDAI car seats only. Altering or changing the authentic parts may result in system malfunction and increase risk of injury when in collision. Any of the above could inter- fere with the proper operation of the OCS sensor thereby increasing the risk of an injury in an accident.
(continued)
2-62
Safety system of your vehicle
Proper seated position for OCS
If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator is on when an adult is seat- ed in the front passenger seat, place the Engine Start/Stop button in the OFF position and ask the passenger to sit properly (sitting upright with the seat back in an upright position, cen- tered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor). Restart the engine and have the per- son remain in that position. This will allow the system to detect the person and to enable the passenger air bag. If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator is still on, ask the passen- ger to move to the rear seat.
The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator illuminates for approxi- mately 4 seconds after the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position or after the engine is started. If the front passenger seat is occupied, the OCS will then classify the front passenger after several more seconds.
Do Not Install a Child Restraint in the Front Passenger's Seat
Even though your vehicle is equipped with the OCS, never install a child restraint in the front passenger's seat. An inflating air bag can forcefully strike a child or child restraint result- ing in serious or fatal injury.NOTICE
B990A01O
Never allow an adult passenger to ride in the front passenger seat when the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator is illuminat- ed. During a collision, the air bag will not inflate if the indicator is illuminated. Have your passen- ger reposition himself in the seat. If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator remains illu- minated after the passenger repositions himself properly and the vehicle is restarted, have the passenger move to the rear seat because the air bag will not inflate.
WARNING
1JBH3051
2-63
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Why Didn't My Air Bag Go Off in a Collision? Air bags are not designed to inflate in every collision. There are certain types of accidents in which the air bag would not be expected to provide additional protection. These include rear impacts, second or third colli- sions in multiple impact accidents, as well as low speed impacts. Damage to the vehicle indicates a collision energy absorption, and is not an indi- cator of whether or not an air bag should have inflated.
Air bag collision sensors
NEVER place a rear-facing or front-facing child restraint in the front passenger's seat of the vehicle.
An inflating frontal air bag could forcefully strike a child resulting in serious injury or death.
Always properly restrain chil- dren in an appropriate child restraint in the rear seat of the vehicle.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of an air bag deploying unexpectedly and causing serious injury or death: Do not hit or allow any objects
to impact the locations where air bags or sensors are installed.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued) Do not perform maintenance
on or around the air bag sen- sors. If the location or angle of the sensors is altered, the air bags may deploy when they should not or may not deploy when they should.
Do not install bumper guards or replace the bumper with a non-genuine HYUNDAI parts. This may adversely affect the collision and air bag deploy- ment performance.
Place the Engine Start/Stop button in the OFF or ACC position when the vehicle is being towed to prevent inad- vertent air bag deployment.
Have all air bag repairs conduct- ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
2-64
Safety system of your vehicle
1. SRS control module/Rollover sensor
2. Front impact sensor
3. Side pressure sensor
4. Side impact sensor
OAE036043N/OAE036044/OAE036045N/OAE036046/OAE036047
2-65
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags and the driver's knee air bag are designed to inflate in a frontal collision depending on the the severity of impact of the front colli- sion.
Side and curtain air bags
Side and curtain air bags are designed to inflate when an impact is detected by side collision sensors depending on the severity of impact resulting from a side impact collision.
Although the driver's and front pas- senger's air bags are designed to inflate only in frontal collisions, they also may inflate in other types of col- lisions if the front impact sensors detect a sufficient impact. Side and curtain air bags are designed to inflate only in side impact collisions or rollover situations, but they may inflate in other collisions if the side impact sensors detect a sufficient impact. If the vehicle chassis is impacted by bumps or objects on unimproved roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive carefully on unimproved roads or on surfaces not designed for vehicle traffic to prevent unintended air bag deployment.
OAE036049
OAE036050
OAE036048
2-66
Safety system of your vehicle
Air bag non-inflation conditions
In certain low-speed collisions the air bags may not deploy. The air bags are designed not to deploy in such cases because they may not provide benefits beyond the protection of the seat belts.
Front air bags are not designed to inflate in rear collisions, because occupants are moved backward by the force of the impact. In this case, inflated air bags would not provide any additional benefit.
Front air bags may not inflate in side impact collisions, because occupants move in the direction of the collision, and thus in side impacts, front air bag deployment would not provide addi- tional occupant protection. However, side and curtain air bags may inflate depending on the severi- ty of impact.
OAE036052
OAE036051
OAE036053
2-67
Safety system of your vehicle
2
In an angled collision, the force of impact may direct the occupants in a direction where the air bags would not be able to provide any additional benefit, and thus the sensors may not deploy any air bags.
Just before impact, drivers often brake heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the front portion of the vehicle causing it to "ride" under a vehicle with a higher ground clearance. Air bags may not inflate in this "under- ride" situation because deceleration forces that are detected by sensors may be significantly reduced by such "underride" collisions.
Front air bags may not inflate in rollover accidents because air bag deployment could not provide protec- tion to the occupants. However, side and curtain air bags may inflate when the vehicle is rolled over by a side impact collision.
OAE036061 OAE036054 OAE036055
2-68
Safety system of your vehicle
Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle collides with objects such as utility poles or trees, where the point of impact is concentrated and the colli- sion energy is absorbed by the vehi- cle structure.
SRS Care The SRS is virtually maintenance- free and there are no parts you can safely service by yourself. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illumi- nate when the Engine Start/Stop but- ton is in the ON position, or continu- ously remains on, have your vehicle immediately inspected by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer. Any work on the SRS system, such as removing, installing, repairing, or any work on the steering wheel, the front passenger's panel, front seats and roof rails must be performed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. Improper handling of the SRS system may result in serious personal injury.
To reduce the risk of serious injury or death, take the follow- ing precautions: Do not attempt to modify or
disconnect the SRS compo- nents or wiring, including the addition of any kind of badges to the pad covers or modifica- tions to the body structure.
Do not place objects over or near the air bag modules on the steering wheel, instrument panel, or the front passen- ger's panel above the glove box.
Clean the air bag pad covers with a soft cloth moistened with plain water. Solvents or cleaners could adversely affect the air bag covers and proper deployment of the sys- tem.
Always have inflated air bags replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
WARNING
OAE036056
2-69
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Additional Safety Precautions Passengers should not move out of or change seats while the vehicle is moving. A passenger who is not wearing a seat belt during a crash or emergency stop can be thrown against the inside of the vehicle, against other occupants, or be ejected from the vehicle. Do not use any accessories on seat belts. Devices claiming to improve occupant comfort or reposition the seat belt can reduce the protection provided by the seat belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash. Do not modify the front seats. Modification of the front seats could interfere with the operation of the sup- plemental restraint system sensing components or side air bags. Do not place items under the front seats. Placing items under the front seats could interfere with the opera- tion of the supplemental restraint sys- tem sensing components and wiring harnesses. Do not cause impact to the doors. Impact to the doors when the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position may cause the air bags to inflate.
Modifications to accommodate disabilities. If you require modifica- tion to your vehicle to accommodate a disability, contact the HYUNDAI Customer Connect Center at 1-877- 378-8727.
Adding equipment to or modify- ing your air bag equipped vehicle If you modify your vehicle by chang- ing your vehicle's frame, bumper sys- tem, front end or side sheet metal or ride height, this may affect the oper- ation of your vehicle's air bag sys- tem.
(Continued) If components of the air bag
system must be discarded, or if the vehicle must be scrapped, certain safety precautions must be observed. Consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for the necessary information. Failure to follow these precau- tions could increase the risk of personal injury.
Air Bag Warning Labels
Air bag warning labels, required by the U.S. National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), are attached to alert the driver and pas- sengers of potential risks of the air bag system. Be sure to read all of the information about the air bags that are installed on your vehicle in this Owners Manual.
Safety system of your vehicle
2-70
OAD035053N
Convenient features of your vehicle
Accessing Your Vehicle .........................................3-3 Smart Key............................................................................3-3 Immobilizer System ...........................................................3-8
Door Locks..............................................................3-9 Operating Door Locks from Outside the Vehicle......3-9 Operating Door Locks from Inside the Vehicle .......3-10 Auto Door Lock/Unlock Features...............................3-12 Child-Protector Rear Door Locks...............................3-12
Theft-alarm System ............................................3-13 Driver Position Memory System........................3-14
Storing Positions into Memory....................................3-14 Recalling Positions from Memory...............................3-15 Easy Access Function ....................................................3-15
Steering Wheel .....................................................3-16 Electric Power Steering (EPS) .....................................3-16 Tilt Steering / Telescope Steering..............................3-16 Horn....................................................................................3-17 Heated Steering Wheel (for Canada).........................3-17
Mirrors...................................................................3-18 Inside Rearview Mirror ..................................................3-18 Side View Mirrors ...........................................................3-33 Reverse Parking Aid Function......................................3-36
Windows ................................................................3-37 Power Windows...............................................................3-38
Sunroof..................................................................3-41 Sunroof Opening and Closing ......................................3-42 Sliding the Sunroof.........................................................3-42 Tilting the Sunroof .........................................................3-43 Sunshade...........................................................................3-43 Resetting the Sunroof ...................................................3-44
Exterior Features.................................................3-45 Hood ...................................................................................3-45 Liftgate ..............................................................................3-46 Fuel Filler Door (Hybrid vehicle) .................................3-48 Fuel Filler Door (Plug-in hybrid vehicle) ..................3-51
Instrument Cluster ...............................................3-54 Instrument Cluster Control............................................3-56 Gauges and Meters ........................................................3-56 Warning and Indicator Lights.......................................3-62 LCD Display Messages...................................................3-73
LCD Display ..........................................................3-88 LCD Display Control ........................................................3-88 LCD Display Modes (for cluster type A) ...................3-89 LCD Display Modes (for cluster type B) ...................3-97
3
Trip Computer (Hybrid Vehicle) .......................3-104 Trip Computer (Plug-In Hybrid Vehicle).........3-109 Lighting................................................................3-115
Exterior Lights ...............................................................3-115 Interior Lights ................................................................3-120 Welcome System...........................................................3-122
Wipers and Washers..........................................3-123 Windshield Wipers ........................................................3-123 Windshield Washers .....................................................3-124
Driver Assist System .........................................3-125 Rear View Camera ........................................................3-125 Rear Parking Assist System .......................................3-126
Automatic Climate Control System..................3-129 Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning.................3-130 Manual Heating and Air Conditioning......................3-131 System Operation .........................................................3-138 System Maintenance....................................................3-139
Windshield Defrosting and Defogging............3-141 To Defog Inside Windshield........................................3-141 To Defrost Outside Windshield..................................3-142 Defogging Logic ............................................................3-142 Rear Window Defroster ..............................................3-142 Auto Defogging System ..............................................3-143
Climate Control Additional Features ...............3-145 Automatic Ventilation...................................................3-145
Storage Compartment .......................................3-146 Center Console Storage ..............................................3-146 Glove Box........................................................................3-146 Sunglass Holder.............................................................3-147 Multi Box.........................................................................3-147
Interior Features ................................................3-148 Cup Holder ......................................................................3-148 Sunvisor...........................................................................3-149 Power Outlet ..................................................................3-149 USB Charger...................................................................3-150 Wireless Cellular Phone Charging System..............3-151 Clock.................................................................................3-152 Clothes Hanger ..............................................................3-153 Floor Mat Anchor(s).....................................................3-153 Cargo Security Screen.................................................3-154
3
3-3
Convenient features of your vehicle
Smart Key
Your HYUNDAI uses a Smart Key, which you can use to lock or unlock a door (and liftgate) and even start the vehicle. 1. Door Lock 2. Door Unlock 3. Liftgate Unlock 4. Panic
Locking
To lock : 1. Close all doors, hood and liftgate. 2. Either press the door handle but-
ton or press the Door Lock button (1) on the smart key.
3. The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound once.
4. Make sure the doors are locked by checking the position of the door lock button inside the vehicle.
Information The door handle button will only operate when the smart key is within 28~40 inches (0.7~1 m) from the out- side door handle.
Even though you press the outside door handle button, the doors will not lock and the chime will sound for three seconds if any of the following occur: The Smart Key is in the vehicle. The Engine Start/Stop button is in
ACC or ON position. Any door except the liftgate is
open.
i ACCESSING YOUR VEHICLE
3
OAE046029 OAE046001
Do not leave the Smart Key in your vehicle with unsupervised children. Unattended children could press the Engine Start/ Stop button and may operate power windows or other con- trols, or even make the vehicle move, which could result in serious injury or death.
WARNING
3-4
Convenient features of your vehicle
Unlocking
To unlock: 1. Carry the Smart Key. 2. Either press the driver's outside
door handle button or press the Door Unlock button (2) on the smart key.
3. The driver's door will unlock. The hazard warning lights will blink two times. If you press the driver's outside door handle button or Door Unlock button on the smart key again within four seconds, then all the doors will unlock. Two press unlock setting: Two press unlock setting can be changed according to owner's preference. Select or deselect the 'Two Press Unlock' menu in the User Settings mode on the LCD display (User Settings Door and select or deselect Two Press Unlock).
Information The door handle button will only
operate when the smart key is with- in 28~40 inches (0.7~1 m) from the outside door handle and other peo- ple can also open the doors.
If you press the front passenger's outside door handle, while carrying the Smart Key, all doors will unlock.
After unlocking the doors, the doors will lock automatically after 30 sec- onds unless a door is opened.
Either the driver or front passenger door can be opened with the door handle button when the smart key is within this range.
i
OAE046001
3-5
Convenient features of your vehicle
Liftgate unlocking To unlock: 1. Carry the smart key. 2. Either press the liftgate handle
button or press and hold the Liftgate Unlock button (3) on the smart key for more than one sec- ond.
3. The hazard warning lights will blink two times.
Information The liftgate handle button will only
operate when the smart key is within 28 inches (0.7 m) from the liftgate handle.
The Liftgate Unlock button (3) will only unlock the liftgate. It will not release the latch and open the lift- gate automatically. If the Liftgate Unlock button is used, someone must still press the liftgate handle button to open the liftgate.
Panic button Press and hold the Panic button (4) for more than one second. The horn sounds and hazard warning lights blink for about 30 seconds. To cancel the panic mode, press any button on the Smart Key.
Start-up You can start the vehicle without inserting the key.
For more information, refer to the "Engine Start/Stop Button" sec- tion in chapter 5.
To prevent damaging the smart key: Keep the smart key away from
any liquid or fire. Internal circuits may malfunction if the inside of the smart key gets damp (from liquids or moisture) or if it is heat- ed. This can exclude the smart key from warranty coverage.
Avoid dropping or throwing the smart key.
Protect the smart key from extreme temperatures.
NOTICE
i
3
3-6
Mechanical key If the Smart Key does not operate nor- mally, you can lock or unlock the dri- vers door by using the mechanical key.
Press and hold the release button (1) and remove the mechanical key (2). Insert the mechanical key into the key hole on the door. To reinstall the mechanical key, put the key into the hole and push it until a click sound is heard.
Loss of a smart key A maximum of two Smart Keys can be registered to a single vehicle. If you happen to lose your smart key, you should immediately take the vehicle and remaining keys to your authorized HYUNDAI dealer or tow the vehicle, if necessary.
Smart key precautions The smart key may not work if any of the following occur: The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the trans- mitter.
The smart key is near a mobile two way radio system or a cellular phone.
Another vehicles smart key is being operated close to your vehicle.
If the smart key does not work cor- rectly, open and close the door with the mechanical key. If you have a problem with the smart key, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
If the smart key is in close proximity to your mobile phone, the signal could be blocked by your mobile phones normal operational signals. This is specifically relevant when the phone is active such as making and receiving calls, text messaging, and/or sending/receiving emails. Avoid placing the smart key and your mobile phone in the same location and always try to maintain an ade- quate distance between the two devices.
Keep the smart key away from electromagnetic materials that blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface.
Always have the smart key with you when leaving the vehicle. If the smart key is left near the vehi- cle, the vehicle battery may be dis- charged.
NOTICE
NOTICE
Convenient features of your vehicle
OAEE046001
3-7
Convenient features of your vehicle
Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter- ference received, including interfer- ence that may cause undesired operation.
3. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.
Battery replacement
If the Smart Key is not working prop- erly, try replacing the battery with a new one. Battery Type: CR2032 To replace the battery: 1. Pry open the rear cover of the
smart key. 2. Remove the old battery and insert
the new battery. 3. Reinstall the rear cover of the
smart key.
If you suspect your smart key might have sustained some damage, or you feel your smart key is not work- ing correctly, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Information An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health. Dispose of the battery according to your local law(s) or regulation(s).
i
i
3
OLF044008
3-8
Convenient features of your vehicle
Immobilizer System The immobilizer system helps protects your vehicle from theft. If an improper- ly coded key (or other device) is used, the engine's fuel system is disabled. When the Engine Start/Stop button is placed in the ON position, the immo- bilizer system indicator should come on briefly, then go off. If the indicator starts to blink, the system does not recognize the coding of the key. Place the Engine Start/Stop button to the OFF position, then place the Engine Start/Stop button to the ON position again. The system may not recognize your key's coding if another immobilizer key or other metal object (i.e., key chain) is near the key. The vehicle may not start because the metal may interrupt the transponder signal from transmitting normally. If the system repeatedly does not recognize the coding of the key, it is recommended that you contact your HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it. Electrical problems could result that may make your vehicle inoperable.
The transponder in your key is an important part of the immobilizer system. It is designed to give years of trouble-free service, how- ever you should avoid exposure to moisture, static electricity and rough handling. Immobilizer sys- tem malfunction could occur.
Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interfer- ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
3. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.
i
NOTICE
In order to prevent theft of your vehicle, do not leave spare keys anywhere in your vehicle. Your immobilizer password is a cus- tomer unique password and should be kept confidential.
WARNING
3-9
Convenient features of your vehicle
Operating Door Locks from Outside the Vehicle Mechanical key
To remove the cover: 1. Pull out the door handle (1). 2. Press the lock (2) located inside
the bottom part of the cover with a key or flat-head screwdriver.
3. Push out the cover while pressing the lock.
To install the cover: 1. Pull out the door handle. 2. Install the cover.
If you lock the driver's door with a mechanical key, all vehicle doors will lock. If you unlock the driver's door with a mechanical key, the driver's door will unlock and the passenger doors will unlock according to the current two press unlock setting. Once the doors are unlocked, they may be opened by pulling the door handle. When closing the door, push the door by hand. Make sure that doors are closed securely.
Smart key
Press the button on the driver's out- side door handle while carrying the Smart Key with you or press the Door Unlock button on the Smart Key, the driver's door will unlock. If you press the button on the front passenger's outside door, all doors will unlock.
DOOR LOCKS
3
OAEE046188N
Lock
Unlock
OAE046001
OLF044003
Door Unlock
Door Lock
3-10
Convenient features of your vehicle
Once the doors are unlocked, they may be opened by pulling the door handle. When closing the door, push the door by hand. Make sure that doors are closed securely.
Information In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.
If the door is locked/unlocked multi- ple times in rapid succession with either the vehicle key or door lock switch, the system may stop operat- ing temporarily in order to protect the circuit and prevent damage to system components.
Two press unlock setting can be changed with the smart key or in the User Settings mode on the cluster.
Operating Door Locks from Inside the Vehicle With the door lock button
To unlock a door, pull the door lock button (1) to the "Unlock" position. The red mark (2) on the door lock button will be visible.
To lock a door, push the door lock button (1) to the "Lock" position. If the door is locked properly, the red mark (2) on the door lock button will not be visible.
To open a door, pull the door han- dle (3) outward.
If the inner door handle of the dri- vers (or front passengers) door is pulled when the door lock button is in the lock position, the button is unlocked and door opens.
Doors cannot be locked if the smart key is in the vehicle and any door is open.
Information If a power door lock ever fails to func- tion while you are in the vehicle try one or more of the following tech- niques to exit:
Operate the door unlock feature repeatedly (both electronic and manual) while simultaneously pulling on the door handle.
Operate the other door locks and handles, front and rear.
Lower a front window and use the mechanical key to unlock the door from outside.
i
i
OAE046004N
Unlock
Lock
3-11
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
With the central door lock switch
When pressing the ( ) switch (1), all vehicle doors will lock. When pressing the ( ) switch (2), all vehicle doors will unlock. If the smart key is in the vehicle and any door is opened, the doors will not lock even though the lock button (1) of the central door lock switch is pressed.
Drivers door
OAE046005N/OAEE046509N
Passengers door The doors should always be fully closed and locked while the vehicle is in motion. If the doors are unlocked, the risk of being thrown from the vehicle in a crash is increased.
Do not pull the inner door handle of driver's or passen- ger's door while the vehicle is moving.
WARNING
Do not leave children or animals unattended in your vehicle. An enclosed vehicle can become extremely hot, causing death or serious injury to unattended children or animals who cannot escape the vehicle. Children might operate features of the vehicle that could injure them, or they could encounter other harm, possibly from someone gaining entry to the vehicle.
WARNING
Always secure your vehicle. Leaving your vehicle unlocked increases the potential risk to you or others from someone hiding in your vehicle. To secure your vehicle, while depressing the brake, move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi- tion, engage the parking brake, and place the Engine Start/Stop button in the OFF position, close all windows, lock all doors, and always take the key with you.
WARNING
3-12
Convenient features of your vehicle
Auto Door Lock/Unlock Features Impact sensing door unlock All doors will be automatically unlocked when an impact causes the air bags to deploy.
Speed sensing door lock All doors will be automatically locked (when set on cluster) when vehicle speed exceeds 9 mph (15 km/h). All of the doors will be automatically unlocked after the vehicle is turned off.
Shift lever auto door lock All doors will be automatically locked when shifted out of P (Park) with the vehicle in the ready ( ) mode.
You can activate or deactivate the Auto Door Lock/Unlock features from the User Settings mode on the LCD display.
For more information, refer to the "LCD Display" section in this chapter.
Child-Protector Rear Door Locks
The child safety lock is provided to help prevent children seated in the rear from accidentally opening the rear doors.The rear door safety locks should be used whenever children are in the vehicle. The child safety lock is located on the edge of each rear door. When the child safety lock is in the lock posi- tion, the rear door will not open if the inner door handle is pulled.
OAEE046002N
Opening a door when something is approaching may cause dam- age or injury. Be careful when opening doors and watch for vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles or pedestrians approaching the vehicle in the path of the door.
CAUTION
If you stay in the vehicle for a long time while the weather is very hot or cold, there are risks of injuries or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when someone is in the vehicle.
WARNING
3-13
Convenient features of your vehicle
To lock the child safety lock, insert a key (or screw driver) (1) into the hole and turn it to the lock position. To allow a rear door to be opened from inside the vehicle, unlock the child safety lock.
This system helps to protect your vehicle and valuables. The horn will sound and the hazard warning lights will blink continuously if any of the following occur: - A door is opened without using the
smart key. - The liftgate is opened without
using the smart key. - The engine hood is opened. The alarm continues for 30 seconds, then the system resets. To turn off the alarm, unlock the doors with the smart key. The Theft Alarm System automati- cally sets 30 seconds after you lock the doors and the liftgate. For the system to activate, you must lock the doors and the liftgate from outside the vehicle with the smart key or by pressing the button on the outside of the door handles with the smart key in your possession. The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound once to indicate the system is armed.
Once the security system is set, opening any door, the liftgate, or the hood without using the smart key will cause the alarm to activate. The Theft Alarm System will not set if the hood, the liftgate, or any door is not fully closed. If the system will not set, check the hood, the liftgate, or the doors are fully closed. Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it.
Information Do not lock the doors until all pas-
sengers have left the vehicle. If the remaining passenger leaves the vehicle when the system is armed, the alarm will be activated.
If the vehicle is not disarmed with the smart key, open the doors by using the mechanical key and start the vehicle by directly pressing the Engine Start/Stop button with the smart key.
When the system is disarmed but a door or liftgate is not opened within 30 seconds, the system will be rearmed.
i
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM
3
If children accidently open the rear doors while the vehicle is in motion, they could fall out of the vehicle.The rear door safety locks should always be used whenever children are in the vehicle.
WARNING
3-14
Convenient features of your vehicle
The Driver Position Memory System is provided to store and recall the fol- lowing memory settings with a sim- ple button operation. - Driver's seat position - Side view mirror position - Instrument panel illumination intensity If the battery is disconnected, the position memory will be lost and the driving positions must be stored in the system again. If the Driver Position Memory System does not operate normally, have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Storing Positions into Memory 1. Check that the shift lever is in P
(Park) while the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position.
2. Adjust the driver's seat position, side view mirror position and instrument panel illumination intensity to positions comfortable for the driver.
3. Press the SET button. The system will beep once and notify you "Press button to save settings"on the LCD display.
4. Press one of the memory buttons (1 or 2) within 4 seconds. The sys- tem will beep twice when the mem- ory has been successfully stored.
5. "Driver 1 (or 2) settings saved" will appear on the LCD display.
DRIVER POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OAE046036N
Never attempt to operate the driv- er position memory system while the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss of con- trol, and an accident causing death, serious injury, or property damage.
WARNING
3-15
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Recalling Positions from Memory 1. Check that the shift lever is in P
(Park) while the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position.
2. Press the desired memory button (1 or 2).The system will beep once, and then the driver's seat position, side view mirror position and instru- ment panel illumination intensity will automatically adjust to the stored positions.
3. "Driver 1(or 2) settings is applied" will appear on the LCD display.
While recalling the "1" memory position, pressing the SET or 1 button temporarily stops the adjustment of the recalled memo- ry position. Pressing the 2 button recalls the "2" memory position.
While recalling the "2" memory position, pressing the SET or 2 button temporarily stops the adjustment of the recalled memo- ry position. Pressing the 1 button recalls the "1" memory position.
While recalling the stored posi- tions, pressing one of the con- trol buttons for the drivers seat, side view mirror or instrument panel illumination will cause the movement of that component to stop and move in the direction that the control button is pressed.
Easy Access Function The system will move the driver's seat automatically as follows: The shift lever is in P (Park) It will move the driver's seat rear-
ward when the Engine Start/Stop button is in the OFF position and the driver's door is opened.
It will move the driver's seat forward when the vehicle is turned ON or the drivers door is closed with the smart key with you.
You can activate or deactivate the Easy Access Function from the User Settings mode on the LCD display.
For more information, refer to the "LCD Display" section in this chapter.
NOTICE
3-16
Convenient features of your vehicle
STEERING WHEEL Electric Power Steering (EPS) The system assists you with steering the vehicle. If the vehicle is turned off or if the power steering system becomes inoperative, you may still steer the vehicle, but it will require increased steering effort. Should you notice any change in the effort required to steer during normal vehicle operation, have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Information The following symptoms may occur during normal vehicle operation:
The steering effort may be high immediately after placing the Engine Start/Stop button in the ON position.
This happens as the system performs the EPS system diagnostics. When the diagnostics are completed, the steering wheel will return to its nor- mal condition.
A click noise may be heard from the EPS relay after the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON or OFF position.
Motor noise may be heard when the vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving speed.
When you operate the steering wheel in low temperature, abnormal noise may occur. If temperature rises, the noise will disappear. This is a normal condition.
When an error is detected from the EPS, the steering effort assist func- tion will not be activated in order to prevent fatal accidents. Instrument cluster warning lights may be on or the steering effort may be high. When the following symptoms occur, immediately drive the vehicle to a safe area and check it.
Tilt Steering / Telescope Steering Adjust the steering wheel so it points toward your chest, not toward your face. Make sure you can see the instrument cluster warning lights and gauges. After adjusting, push the steering wheel both up and down to be certain it is locked in position. Always adjust the position of the steering wheel before driving.
i
If the Electric Power Steering System does not operate nor- mally, the warning light ( ) will illuminate on the instrument cluster. You may steer the vehi- cle, but it will require increased steering efforts. Take your vehi- cle to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked as soon as possible.
CAUTION NEVER adjust the steering wheel while driving. This may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.
WARNING
3-17
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
To change the steering wheel angle and height: 1. Pull down the lock-release lever (1). 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the
desired angle (2) and distance for- ward/back (3).
3. Pull up the lock-release lever to lock the steering wheel in place.
Information After adjustment, sometimes the lock release lever may not lock the steering wheel. It is not a malfunction. This occurs when two gears are not engaged correctly. In this case, adjust the steering wheel again and then lock the steering wheel.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the area indicated by the horn symbol on your steering wheel (see illustration). The horn will operate only when this area is pressed.
Do not strike the horn severely to operate it, or hit it with your fist. Do not press on the horn with a sharp-pointed object.
Heated Steering Wheel (for Canada, if equipped)
When the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position or when the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode, press the heated steering wheel but- ton to warm the steering wheel. The indicator on the button will illuminate. To turn the heated steering wheel off, press the button again. The indicator on the button will turn off. The heated steering wheel will auto- matically turn off after approximately 30 minutes.
NOTICE
i
OAEE046014
OAE046009
OAE046008N
3-18
Do not install any cover or acces- sory on the steering wheel. The cover or accessory could cause damage to the heated steering wheel system.
Inside Rearview Mirror Before you start driving, adjust the rearview mirror to the center on the view through the rear window.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
NOTICE
NOTICE
Convenient features of your vehicle
Make sure your line of sight is not obstructed. Do not place objects in the rear seat, cargo area, or behind the rear head- rests which could interfere with your vision through the rear window.
WARNING
NEVER adjust the mirror while driving. This may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.
WARNING
To prevent serious injury during an accident or deployment of the air bag, do not modify the rearview mirror and do not install a wide mirror.
WARNING
MIRRORS
3-19
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Day/night rearview mirror (if equipped)
Make this adjustment before you start driving and while the day/night lever is in the day position. Pull the day/night lever towards you to reduce glare from the headlights of the vehicles behind you during night driving. Remember that you lose some rearview clarity in the night position.
Blue Link center (if equipped)
For details, refer to the Blue Link
Owner's Guide, Navigation Manual or Audio Manual.
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with HomeLink system, compass and Blue Link
(for U.S.A) Your vehicle may be equipped with a Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror with a Z-Nav Electronic Compass Display and an Integrated HomeLink
Wireless Control System. During nighttime driving, this feature will automatically detect and reduce rearview mirror glare while the com- pass indicates the direction the vehi- cle is pointed. The HomeLink
Universal Transceiver allows you to activate your garage door(s), electric gate, home lighting, etc.
OAD045011N
OAE046010 Day
Night
3-20
Convenient features of your vehicle
(1) Blue Link Center button (2) Blue Link POI button (3) Blue Link SOS button (4) Compass control button &
Dimming ON/OFF button (5) Status indicator LED (6) Channel 1 button (7) Channel 2 button (8) Channel 3 button (9) Compass display (10) Rear light sensor
Automatic-Dimming Night Vision Safety (NVS) Mirror (if equipped)
The NVS Mirror automatically reduces glare by monitoring light lev- els in the front and the rear of the vehicle. Any object that obstructs either light sensor will degrade the automatic dimming control feature.
For more information regarding NVS mirrors and other applica- tions, please refer to the Gentex website: www.gentex.com
Your mirror will automatically dim upon detecting glare from the vehi- cles traveling behind you. The auto- dimming function can be controlled by pressing the Dimming ON/OFF button (4):
1. Pressing and holding the button for 3 seconds turns the auto-dim- ming function OFF which is indi- cated by the green Status Indicator LED turning off.
2. Pressing and holding the button for 3 seconds again turns the auto- dimming function ON which is indi- cated by the green Status Indicator LED turning on.
The mirror defaults to the ON posi- tion each time the vehicle is started.
Z-Nav Compass Display
The NVS Mirror in your vehicle is also equipped with a Z-Nav Compass that shows the vehicle Compass heading in the Display Window using the 8 basic cardinal headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).
OAD045045N
3-21
Convenient features of your vehicle
Compass function The Compass can be turned ON and OFF and will remember the last state when the ignition is cycled. To turn the display feature ON/OFF: 1. Press and release the button
within 1 second to turn the display feature OFF.
2. Press and release the button again within 1 second to turn the display back ON.
Additional options can be set with press and hold sequences of the button and are detailed below.
There is a difference between mag- netic north and true north. To com- pensate for this difference you will need to adjust the Zone setting based on where you live.
3
B520C05NF
3-22
Convenient features of your vehicle
To adjust the Zone setting: 1. Determine the desired Zone
Number based upon your current location on the Zone Map.
2. Press and hold the button for 6 seconds, the current Zone Number will appear on the display.
3. Pressing and holding the button again will cause the numbers to increment (Note: they will repeat 13, 14, 15, 1, 2, ). Releasing the button when the desired Zone Number appears on the display will set the new Zone.
4. Within about 5 seconds the com- pass will start displaying a com- pass heading again.
There are some conditions that can cause changes to the vehicle mag- nets, such as installing a ski rack or a CB antenna. Body repair work on the vehicle can also cause changes to the vehicles magnetic field. In these situations, the compass will need to be re-calibrated to quickly correct these changes.
If you need to recalibrate the com- pass: 1. Press and hold the button for
more than 9 seconds. When the compass memory is cleared a "C" will appear in the display.
2. Drive the vehicle in 2 complete cir- cles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Integrated HomeLink Wireless Control System
The HomeLink Wireless Control System can replace up to three hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters with a single built-in device. This innovative feature will learn the radio frequency codes of most current transmitters to operate devices such as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door locks, security systems, even home lighting. Both standard and rolling code-equipped transmitters can be programmed by following the out- lined procedures. Additional HomeLink information can be found at: www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515. Retain the original transmitter of the RF device you are programming for use in other vehicles as well as for future HomeLink programming. It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes.
3-23
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Programming HomeLink
Please note the following: When programming a garage door
opener, it is advised to park the vehicle outside of the garage.
It is recommended that a new bat- tery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being pro- grammed to HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Some vehicles may require the Engine Start/Stop button to be placed in the ACC (or "Accessories") position for programming and/or operation of HomeLink.
In the event that there are still pro- gramming difficulties or questions after following the programming steps listed below, contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
Programming
To train most devices, follow these instructions: 1. For first-time programming, press
and hold the two outside buttons ( , ), HomeLink Channel 1 and Channel 3, until the indicator light begins to flash (after 10 sec- onds). Release both buttons. Do not hold the buttons for longer than 20 seconds.
ODH044413N
FlashingBefore programming HomeLink
to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage. Do not use the HomeLink with any garage door opener that lacks the safety stop and reverse features required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door that can- not detect an object - signaling the door to stop and reverse - does not meet current U.S. feder- al safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death.
WARNING
3-24
Convenient features of your vehicle
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink and hand- held transmitter buttons until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapid blinking light. Now you may release both the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons.
Information Some devices may require you to replace this Programming step 3 with procedures noted in the "Gate Operator/Canadian Programming" chapter. If the HomeLink indicator light does not change to a rapidly blinking light after performing these steps, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com.
4. Press and hold for 5 seconds and release the programmed HomeLink
button up to two separate times to activate the door. If the door does not activate, press and hold the just- trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light. If the indicator light stays on con-
stantly, programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns to a constant light, continue with "Programming" steps 5-7 to com- plete the programming of a rolling code equipped device (most com- monly a garage door opener).
5. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the "learn" or "smart" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit.
i
ODH044414N
Flashing
3-25
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
6. Firmly press and release the "learn" or "smart" button. (The name and color of the button vary by manufacturer). There are 30 seconds to initiate step 7.
7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for 2 seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button. Repeat the "press/hold/release" sequence a second time, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming process.
HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device.
Gate operator & Canadian program- ming During programming, your handheld transmitter may automatically stop transmitting. Continue to press the Integrated HomeLink Wireless Control System button (note steps 2 through 3 in the Programming portion of this document) while you press and re-press ("cycle") your handheld transmitter every two seconds until the frequency signal has been learned. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon successful training.
Operating HomeLink
To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security sys- tem, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.
Reprogramming a single HomeLink
button To program a device to HomeLink
using a HomeLink button previously trained, follow these steps: 1. Press and hold the desired
HomeLink button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the HomeLink button, proceed with "Programming" step 2.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
3-26
Convenient features of your vehicle
Erasing HomeLink buttons Individual buttons cannot be erased. However, to erase all three pro- grammed buttons: 1. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink buttons until the indi- cator light begins to flash after 10 seconds.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds.
The Integrated HomeLink Wireless Control System is now in the training (learn) mode and can be pro- grammed at any time following the appropriate steps in the Programming chapters above.
NVS is a registered trademark and Z-Nav is a trademark of the Gentex Corporation, Zeeland, Michigan. HomeLink is a registered trademark owned by Johnson Controls, Incorporated, Milwaukee, Wisconsin. FCC ID: NZLTLMHL4 IC: 4112A-TLMHL4
Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter- ference received, including interfer- ence that may cause undesired operation.
3. The transceiver has been tested and complies with FCC and Industry Canada rules. Changes or modifica- tions not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the device.
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with compass and HomeLink
system (for Canada) Your vehicle may be equipped with a Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror with a Z-Nav Electronic Compass Display and an Integrated HomeLink
Wireless Control System. During nighttime driving, this feature will automatically detect and reduce rearview mirror glare while the com- pass indicates the direction the vehi- cle is pointed. The HomeLink
Universal Transceiver allows you to activate your garage door(s), electric gate, home lighting, etc.
i
3-27
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
(1) Channel 1 button (2) Channel 2 button (3) Status indicator LED (4) Channel 3 button (5) Rear light sensor (6) Dimming ON/OFF button (7) Compass control button (8) Compass display
Automatic-Dimming Night Vision Safety (NVS) Mirror (if equipped)
The NVS Mirror automatically reduces glare by monitoring light lev- els in the front and the rear of the vehicle. Any object that obstructs either light sensor will degrade the automatic dimming control feature.
For more information regarding NVS mirrors and other applica- tions, please refer to the Gentex website: www.gentex.com
The auto-dimming function can be controlled by pressing the ON/OFF button:
1. Pressing the button turns the auto- dimming function OFF which is indicated by the green Status Indicator LED turning off.
2. Pressing the button again turns the auto-dimming function ON which is indicated by the green Status Indicator LED turning on.
The mirror defaults to the ON posi- tion each time the vehicle is started.
Z-Nav Compass Display
The NVS Mirror in your vehicle is also equipped with a Z-Nav Compass that shows the vehicle Compass heading in the Display Window using the 8 basic cardinal headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).
OAD045046N
3-28
Convenient features of your vehicle
B520C05NF
Compass function The Compass can be turned ON and OFF and will remember the last state when the ignition is cycled. To turn the display feature ON/OFF: 1. Press and release the button to
turn the display feature OFF. 2. Press and release the button
again to turn the display back ON. Additional options can be set with press and hold sequences of the but- ton and are detailed below.
There is a difference between mag- netic north and true north. To com- pensate for this difference you will need to adjust the Zone setting based on where you live.
3-29
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
To adjust the Zone setting: 1. Determine the desired Zone
Number based upon your current location on the Zone Map.
2. Press and hold the button for more than 3 but less than 6 sec- onds, the current Zone Number will appear on the display.
3. Pressing and holding the button again will cause the numbers to increment (Note: they will repeat 13, 14, 15, 1, 2, ). Releasing the button when the desired Zone Number appears on the display will set the new Zone.
4. Within about 5 seconds the com- pass will start displaying a com- pass heading again.
There are some conditions that can cause changes to the vehicle mag- nets, such as installing a ski rack or a CB antenna. Body repair work on the vehicle can also cause changes to the vehicles magnetic field. In these situations, the compass will need to be re-calibrated to quickly correct these changes.
If you need to recalibrate the com- pass: 1. Press and hold the button for
more than 6 seconds. When the compass memory is cleared a "C" will appear in the display.
2. Drive the vehicle in 2 complete cir- cles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Integrated HomeLink Wireless Control System
The HomeLink Wireless Control System can replace up to three hand- held radio-frequency (RF) transmit- ters with a single built-in device. This innovative feature will learn the radio frequency codes of most current transmitters to operate devices such as gate operators, garage door open- ers, entry door locks, security sys- tems, even home lighting. Both stan- dard and rolling code-equipped trans- mitters can be programmed by fol- lowing the outlined procedures. Additional HomeLink information can be found at: www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515. Retain the original transmitter of the RF device you are programming for use in other vehicles as well as for future HomeLink programming. It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes.
3-30
Convenient features of your vehicle
Programming HomeLink
Please note the following: When programming a garage door
opener, it is advised to park the vehicle outside of the garage.
It is recommended that a new bat- tery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being pro- grammed to HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Some vehicles may require the Engine Start/Stop button to be placed in the ACC (or "Accessories") position for programming and/or operation of HomeLink.
In the event that there are still pro- gramming difficulties or questions after following the programming steps listed below, contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
Rolling code programming Rolling code devices which are "code-protected" and manufactured after 1996 may be determined by the following: Reference the device owners
manual for verification. The handheld transmitter appears to
program the HomeLink Universal Transceiver but does not activate the device.
Press and hold the trained HomeLink button. The device has the rolling code feature if the indi- cator light flashes rapidly and then turns solid after 2 seconds.
Before programming HomeLink
to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage. Do not use the HomeLink with any garage door opener that lacks the safety stop and reverse features required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door that can- not detect an object - signaling the door to stop and reverse - does not meet current U.S. feder- al safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death.
WARNING
3-31
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
To train rolling code devices, follow these instructions: 1. At the garage door opener receiv-
er (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the "learn" or "smart" but- ton. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit. Exact location and color of the but- ton may vary by garage door opener brand. If there is difficulty locating the training button, refer- ence the device owners manual or please visit our Web site at www.homelink.com.
2. Firmly press and release the "learn" or "smart" button (which activates the "training light"). You will have 30 seconds to initiate step 3.
3. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and then release the desired HomeLink button. Repeat the "press/hold/release" sequence a second time to complete the pro- gramming. (Some devices may require you to repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming.)
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink button and observe the red Status Indicator LED. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and your device should activate.
5. To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, follow either steps 1 through 4 above for other Rolling Code devices or steps 2 through 5 in Standard Programming for standard devices.
Standard programming To train most devices, follow these instructions: 1. For first-time programming, press
and hold the two outside buttons, HomeLink Channel 1 and Channel 3 Buttons, until the indi- cator light begins to flash (after 20 seconds). Release both buttons. Do not hold the buttons for longer than 30 seconds.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm) away from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink and hand- held transmitter button. DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has been completed.
4. While continuing to hold the but- tons the red Indicator Status LED will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink successfully trains to the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons.
3-32
Convenient features of your vehicle
5. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink button and observe the red Status Indicator LED. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released.
6. To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, follow steps 2 through 5.
Gate operator & Canadian program- ming During programming, your handheld transmitter may automatically stop transmitting. Continue to press the Integrated HomeLink Wireless Control System button (note steps 2 through 4 in the Standard Programming portion of this docu- ment) while you press and re-press ("cycle") your handheld transmitter every two seconds until the frequen- cy signal has been learned. The indi- cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon successful training.
Operating HomeLink
To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security sys- tem, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.
Reprogramming a single HomeLink button To program a new device to a previ- ously trained HomeLink button, fol- low these steps: 1. Press and hold the desired
HomeLink button. Do NOT release until step 4 has been com- pleted.
2. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly (after 20 seconds), position the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 inches away from the HomeLink surface.
3. Press and hold the handheld transmitter button. The HomeLink
indicator light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
4. When the indicator light begins to flash rapidly, release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink button and observe the red Status Indicator LED. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and your new device should activate.
3-33
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Erasing HomeLink buttons Individual buttons cannot be erased. However, to erase all three pro- grammed buttons: 1. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink buttons until the indi- cator light begins to flash-after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer than 30 seconds.
The Integrated HomeLink Wireless Control System is now in the training (learn) mode and can be pro- grammed at any time following the appropriate steps in the Programming chapters above.
NVS is a registered trademark and Z-Nav is a trademark of the Gentex Corporation, Zeeland, Michigan. HomeLink is a registered trademark owned by Johnson Controls, Incorporated, Milwaukee, Wisconsin. FCC ID: NZLZTVHL3 IC: 4112A-ZTVHL3
Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interfer- ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
3. The transceiver has been tested and complies with FCC and Industry Canada rules. Changes or modifica- tions not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the device.
Side View Mirrors
Be sure to adjust mirror angles before driving. Your vehicle is equipped with both left-hand and right-hand side view mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted remotely with the remote switch. The mirror heads can be folded to help prevent damage during an automatic car wash or when passing through a narrow street. The right side view mirror is convex. Objects seen in the mirror are closer than they appear.
i
OAE046013
3-34
Convenient features of your vehicle
Use your interior side view mirror or direct observation to determine the actual distance of following vehicles when changing lanes.
Do not scrape ice off the mirror face; this may damage the sur- face of the glass.
If the mirror is jammed with ice, do not adjust the mirror by force. Use an approved spray de-icer (not radiator antifreeze) spray, or a sponge or soft cloth with very warm water, or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt.
Blind spot mirror (for U.S.A)
The Blind Spot Mirror (BSM) is a supplemental mirror that reduces the drivers blind spot by showing the rear side area of the vehicle. The blind spot mirror is equipped on the left-hand side view mirror.
Do not clean the mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other petroleum based cleaning products.
NOTICE
NOTICE
OLF044477N
OLF044478N
Always check the road condi- tion while driving for unex- pected situations even though the vehicle is equipped with a blind spot mirror.
The blind spot mirror is a device made for convenience. Do not solely rely on the mir- ror but always pay attention to traffic around you.
WARNING
Do not adjust or fold the side view mirrors while driving. This may cause loss of vehicle con- trol resulting in an accident.
WARNING
3-35
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Side view mirror control
Adjusting the side mirrors: 1. Press either the L (driver's side) or
R (passenger's side) button (1) to select the side view mirror you would like to adjust.
2. Use the mirror adjustment control switch to position the selected mir- ror up, down, left or right.
3. After adjustment, put the button into neutral (center) position to prevent inadvertent adjustment.
The mirrors stop moving when they reach the maximum adjust- ing angles, but the motor contin- ues to operate while the switch is pressed. Do not press the switch longer than necessary, because this can damage the motor.
Do not attempt to adjust the side view mirrors by hand, because this can damage the motor.
Folding the side view mirrors
To fold the side view mirrors, grasp the housing of the mirror and then fold it toward the rear of the vehicle.
NOTICE
OAE046014N OAE046015
3-36
Convenient features of your vehicle
Reverse Parking Aid Function (if equipped)
When you move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position, the side view mirror(s) will rotate downwards to aid with driving in reverse. The position of the side view mirror switch (1) determines whether or not the mir- rors will move: Left/Right : When either the L (Left) or
R (Right) switch is select- ed, both side view mirrors will move.
Neutral : When neither switch is select- ed, the side view mirrors will not move.
The side view mirrors will automati- cally revert to their original positions if any of the following occur: The Engine Start/Stop button is
placed to either the OFF position or the ACC position.
The shift lever is moved to any position except R (Reverse).
The remote control side view mir- ror switch is not selected.
OAE046502N
3-37
Convenient features of your vehicle
(1) Drivers door power window switch
(2) Front passengers door power window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window switch
(5) Window opening and closing (6) Automatic power window (7) Power window lock switch
WINDOWS
3
OAEE046019N
3-38
Convenient features of your vehicle
Power Windows The Engine Start/Stop button must be in the ON position to be able to raise or lower the windows. Each door has a Power Window switch to control that door's window. The driv- er has a Power Window Lock switch which can block the operation of pas- senger windows.The power windows will operate for approximately 30 seconds after the Engine Start/Stop button is placed in the ACC or OFF position. However, if the front doors are opened, the Power Windows will not operate even within the 30 sec- onds period.
Information In cold and wet climates, power win-
dows may not work properly due to freezing conditions.
While driving with the rear win- dows down or with the sunroof (if equipped) opened (or partially opened), your vehicle may demon- strate a wind buffeting or pulsation noise. This noise is normal and can be reduced or eliminated by taking the following actions. If the noise occurs with one or both of the rear windows down, partially lower both front windows approximately one inch (2.5 cm). If you experience the noise with the sunroof open, slightly close the sunroof.
Window opening and closing
To open: Press the window switch down to the first detent position (5). Release the switch when you want the window to stop.
To close: Pull the window switch up to the first detent position (5). Release the win- dow switch when you want the win- dow to stop.
i
To avoid serious injury or death, do not extend your head, arms or body outside the windows while driving.
WARNING
OAE046020
3-39
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Auto up/down window (if equipped) Pressing or pulling up the power win- dow switch momentarily to the sec- ond detent position (6) completely lowers or lifts the window even when the switch is released. To stop the window at the desired position while the window is in operation, pull up or press down and release the switch.
To reset the power windows If the power windows do not operate normally, the automatic power win- dow system must be reset as follows: 1. Place the Engine Start/Stop button
to the ON position. 2. Close the window and continue
pulling up on the power window switch for at least one second.
If the power windows do not operate properly after resetting, have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Automatic reverse (if equipped)
If a window senses any obstacle while it is closing automatically, it will stop and lower approximately 12 inches (30 cm) to allow the object to be cleared. If the window detects the resistance while the power window switch is pulled up continuously, the window will stop upward movement then lower approximately 1 inch (2.5 cm). If the power window switch is pulled up continuously again within 5 sec- onds after the window is lowered by the automatic window reverse fea- ture, the automatic window reverse will not operate.
OLF044032
The automatic reverse feature doesn't activate while resetting power window system. Make sure body parts or other objects are safely out of the way before closing the windows to avoid injuries or vehicle damage.
WARNING
3-40
Convenient features of your vehicle
Information The automatic reverse feature is only active when the "Auto Up" feature is used by fully pulling up the switch to the second detent.
Do not install any accessories on the windows. The automatic reverse feature may not operate.
Power window lock switch
The driver can disable the power window switches on the rear passen- ger's doors by pressing the power window lock switch. When the power window lock switch is pressed: The driver's master control can
operate all the power windows. The front passenger's control can
operate the front passenger's power window.
The rear passenger's control can- not operate the rear passenger's power window.
To prevent possible damage to the power window system, do not open or close two windows or more at the same time. This will also ensure the longevity of the fuse.
Never try to operate the main switch on the driver's door and the individual door window switch in opposite directions at the same time. If this is done, the window will stop and cannot be opened or closed.
NOTICE
NOTICE
i
OAE046021N
Do not allow children to play with the power windows. Keep the driver's door power window lock switch in the LOCK posi- tion. Serious injury or death can result from unintentional win- dow operation by a child.
WARNING
Make sure body parts or other objects are safely out of the way before closing the windows to avoid injuries or vehicle damage. Objects less than 0.16 inch (4 mm) in diameter caught between the window glass and the upper win- dow channel may not be detected by the automatic reverse window and the window will not stop and reverse direction.
WARNING
3-41
Convenient features of your vehicle
If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof, you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the sunroof control switch located on the overhead con- sole. The sunroof can only be opened, closed, or tilted when the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON posi- tion. The sunroof can be operated for approximately 30 seconds after the Engine Start/Stop button is placed in the ACC or OFF position. However, if the front door is opened, the sunroof cannot be operated even within 30 seconds.
Information In cold and wet climates, the sun-
roof may not work properly due to freezing conditions.
After the vehicle is washed or in a rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any water that is on the sunroof before operating it.
To prevent damage to the sun- roof and the motor, do not con- tinue to press the sunroof con- trol lever after the sunroof is in the fully open, closed or tilt posi- tion(s).
Make sure the sunroof is closed fully when leaving your vehicle. If the sunroof is left open, rain or snow may wet the interior of the vehicle. Also, leaving the sun- roof open when the vehicle is unattended may invite theft.
NOTICEi SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
3
OAD045022
Never adjust the sunroof or sunshade while driving. This could result in loss of vehicle control resulting in an acci- dent.
Make sure heads, other body parts or objects are out of the way before using the sunroof.
Do not leave the engine run- ning and the key in your vehi- cle with unsupervised children. Unattended children could operate the sunroof, which could result in serious injury.
Do not sit on the top of the vehicle. It may cause injuries or vehicle damage.
WARNING
3-42
Convenient features of your vehicle
Sunroof Opening and Closing
To open: Press the sunroof control lever back- ward to the first detent position. Release the switch when you want the sunroof to stop. To close: Press the sunroof control lever forward to the first detent position. Release the switch when you want the sunroof to stop.
Sliding the Sunroof Pressing the sunroof control lever backward or forward momentarily to the second detent position completely opens or closes the sunroof even when the switch is released. To stop the sunroof at the desired position while the sunroof is in operation, press the sunroof control lever backward or forward and release the switch.
Information To minimize wind noise while driving, it is recommended that you drive with the sunroof slightly closed (stop the sunroof about 3 inch (7 cm) before the maximum slide open position).
Automatic reverse (if equipped)
If the sunroof senses any obstacle while it is closing automatically, it will reverse direction then stop to allow the object to be cleared. The auto reverse function does not work if a small obstacle is between the sliding glass and the sunroof sash. You should always check that all pas- sengers and objects are away from the sunroof before closing it.
i OLFC044035CNOAD045023
3-43
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Tilting the Sunroof
Tilt the sunroof open: Push the sunroof control lever upward until the sunroof moves to the desired position.
To close the sunroof: Push the sunroof control lever forward until the sunroof moves to the desired position.
Sunshade
The sunshade will open automatical- ly with the sunroof when the glass panel moves. If you want it closed, move the sunshade manually.
The sunroof is made to slide together with the sunshade. Do not leave the sunshade closed while the sunroof is open.
NOTICE
OAD045024 OAD045037
Small objects that can get caught between the sunroof glass and the front glass chan- nel may not be detected by the automatic reverse system. In this case, the sunroof glass will not detect the object and will not reverse direction.
WARNING
3-44
Convenient features of your vehicle
Resetting the Sunroof The sunroof may need to be reset if the following conditions occur: - The battery is discharged or dis-
connected or the sunroof fuse has been replaced or disconnected
- The sunroof control lever is not operating correctly
To reset the sunroof, perform the fol- lowing steps: 1. Place the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton to the ON position or start the vehicle ( indicator ON). It is recommended to reset the sunroof while the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode.
2. Push the control lever forward.The sunroof will close completely or tilt depending on the condition of the sunroof.
3. Release the control lever when the sunroof stops moving.
4. Push the control lever forward about 10 seconds. - When the sunroof is in the
closed position : The glass will tilt and slightly move up and down.
- When the sunroof is in the tilt position: The glass will slightly move up and down.
Do not release the lever until the operation is completed. If you release the lever during opera- tion, start the procedure again from step 2.
5. Within 3 seconds, push and hold the control lever forward until the sunroof operates as follows:
Tilt down Slide Open Slide Close.
Do not release the lever until the operation is completed. If you release the lever during opera- tion, start the procedure again from step 2.
6. Release the sunroof control lever after all steps have completed. (The sunroof system has been reset.)
Information If the sunroof is not reset when the
vehicle battery is disconnected or discharged, or the sunroof fuse is blown, the sunroof may not operate normally.
For more detailed information, con- tact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
i
3-45
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Hood Opening the hood
1. Park the vehicle and set the park- ing brake.
2. Pull the release lever to unlatch the hood. The hood should pop open slightly.
3. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the hood slightly, push up the sec- ondary latch (1) inside of the hood center and lift the hood (2).
4. Pull out the support rod and hold the hood open with the support rod (3).
EXTERIOR FEATURES
Grasp the support rod in the area wrapped in rubber. The rubber will help prevent you from being burned by hot metal when the engine is hot.
The support rod must be insert- ed completely into the hole pro- vided whenever you inspect the engine compartment. This will prevent the hood from falling and possibly injuring you.
WARNING
OAE046026N
OAE046027N OAD045039L
3-46
Convenient features of your vehicle
Closing the hood 1. Before closing the hood, check the
following: All filler caps in engine compart-
ment must be correctly installed. Gloves, rags or any other com-
bustible material must be removed from the engine com- partment.
2. Lower the hood halfway (lifted approximately 12 inches (30 cm) from the closed position) and push down to securely lock in place. Then double check to be sure the hood is secure. If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not securely locked. Open it again and close it with more force.
Liftgate Opening the liftgate Make sure the shift lever is in P (Park).
Then do one of the following: 1. Unlock all doors with the Door
Unlock button on your smart key. Press the liftgate handle button and open the liftgate.
2. Press and hold the Liftgate Unlock button on the smart key. Press the liftgate handle button and open the liftgate.
3. With the Smart Key in your pos- session, press the liftgate handle button and open the liftgate.
Before closing the hood, ensure all obstructions are removed from around the hood opening.
Always double check to be sure that the hood is firmly latched before driving away. Check there is no hood open warning light or message dis- played on the instrument clus- ter. Driving with the hood opened may cause a total loss of visibility, which might result in an accident.
Do not move the vehicle with the hood in the raised posi- tion, as vision is obstructed, which might result in an acci- dent, and the hood could fall or be damaged.
WARNING
OAE046022
3-47
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Closing the liftgate
Lower the liftgate lid and press down until it locks. To be sure the liftgate lid is securely fastened, always check by trying to pull it up again without pressing the liftgate handle button.
In cold and wet climates, door lock and door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing con- ditions.
NOTICE
OAE046031N
The liftgate swings upward. Make sure no objects or people are near the rear of the vehicle when opening the liftgate.
WARNING
Make certain that you close the liftgate before driving your vehi- cle. Possible damage may occur to the liftgate lift cylinders and attached hardware if the liftgate is not closed prior to driving.
CAUTION Do not hold the part (gas lifter) that supports the liftgate. Be aware that the deformation of the part may cause vehicle damage and a risk of safety accident.
WARNING
OHYK047009
3-48
Convenient features of your vehicle
Emergency liftgate safety release
Your vehicle is equipped with an Emergency Liftgate Safety Release lever located inside the liftgate. When someone is inadvertently locked in the luggage compartment, the lift- gate can be opened manually from inside the luggage compartment by performing the following steps : 1. Input the mechanical key into the
hole. 2. Push the mechanical key to the
right. 3. Push up the liftgate.
Fuel Filler Door (Hybrid vehicle) Opening the fuel filler door The fuel filler door must be opened from inside the vehicle by pushing the fuel filler door open switch.
1. Turn the vehicle off. 2. Push the fuel filler door open
switch.
For emergencies, be fully aware of the location of the emergency liftgate safety release lever in this vehicle and how to open the liftgate if you are accidentally locked in the luggage compartment.
No one should be allowed to occupy the luggage compart- ment of the vehicle at any time. The luggage compartment is a very dangerous location in the event of a crash.
Use the release lever for emer- gencies only. Use extreme cau- tion, especially while the vehi- cle is in motion.
WARNING
OAE046024N
OAE046023N
3-49
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
3. Pull the fuel filler door (1) out to fully open.
4. To remove the fuel tank cap (2), turn it counterclockwise. You may hear a hissing noise as the pres- sure inside the tank equalizes.
5. Place the cap on the fuel filler door.
Information If the fuel filler door does not open because ice has formed around it, tap lightly or push on the door to break the ice and release the door. Do not pry on the door. If necessary, spray around the door with an approved de- icer fluid (do not use radiator anti- freeze) or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt.
Closing the fuel filler door 1. To install the fuel tank cap, turn it
clockwise until it "clicks" one time. 2. Close the fuel filler door until it is
latched securely.
i
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. Failure to follow these guidelines may result in SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: Read and follow all warnings
posted at the gas station. Before refueling, note the
location of the Emergency Gasoline Shut-Off, if available, at the gas station.
Before touching the fuel noz- zle, you should eliminate the potential build-up of static electricity by touching a metal part of the vehicle, a safe dis- tance away from the fuel filler neck, nozzle, or other gas source, with your bare hand.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued) Do not use cellular phones
while refueling. Electric cur- rent and/or electronic interfer- ence from cellular phones can potentially ignite fuel vapors and cause a fire.
Do not get back into a vehicle once you have begun refuel- ing. You can generate a build- up of static electricity by touching, rubbing or sliding against any item or fabric capable of producing static electricity. Static electricity discharge can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. If you must re-enter the vehicle, you should once again eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity discharge by touch- ing a metal part of the vehicle, away from the fuel filler neck, nozzle or other gasoline source, with your bare hand.
(Continued)
OAE046025
3-50
Information Make sure to refuel your vehicle according to the "Fuel Requirements" suggested in the Introduction chapter.
Do not spill fuel on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Any type of fuel spilled on painted sur- faces may damage the paint.
If the fuel filler cap requires replacement, use only a genuine HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent specified for your vehicle. An incorrect fuel filler cap can result in a serious malfunction of the fuel system or emission control system.
NOTICE
i
Convenient features of your vehicle
(Continued) Do not use matches or a
lighter and do not smoke or leave a lit cigarette in your vehicle while at a gas station, especially during refueling.
Do not over-fill or top-off your vehicle tank, which can cause gasoline spillage.
If a fire breaks out during refu- eling, leave the vicinity of the vehicle, and immediately con- tact the manager of the gas station and then contact the local fire department. Follow any safety instructions they provide.
If pressurized fuel sprays out, it can cover your clothes or skin and thus subject you to the risk of fire and burns. Always remove the fuel cap carefully and slowly. If the cap is venting fuel or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until the condition stops before com- pletely removing the cap.
(Continued)
(Continued) Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to pre- vent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.
(Continued) When using an approved
portable fuel container, be sure to place the container on the ground prior to refueling. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. Once refueling has begun, contact between your bare hand and the vehicle should be maintained until the filling is complete.
Use only approved portable plastic fuel containers designed to carry and store gasoline.
When refueling, always move the shift lever to the P (Park) position, set the parking brake, and place the Engine Start/Stop button to the OFF position. Sparks produced by electrical components related to the engine can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.
(Continued)
3-51
Convenient features of your vehicle
Fuel Filler Door (Plug-in hybrid vehicle) Opening the fuel filler door The fuel filler door must be opened from inside the vehicle by pushing the fuel filler door open switch.
1. Turn the vehicle off. 2. Push the fuel filler door open
switch.
3. Wait until the fuel tank is depres- surized. The message "Fuel door open" is displayed when the fuel filler door opens after the fuel tank is depressurized.
Information It may take up to 20 seconds to open
the fuel filler door.
When the fuel filler door is frozen and does not open after 20 seconds at freezing temperature, slightly tap the fuel filler door and then attempt to open it.
4. Pull the fuel filler door (1) out to fully open.
5. To remove the fuel tank cap (2), turn it counterclockwise. You may hear a hissing noise as the pres- sure inside the tank equalizes.
6. Place the cap on the fuel filler door.i
3
OAEPH047025L
OAEPH046024
OLFP045236N/OAEPH047525L
3-52
Closing the fuel filler door 1. To install the fuel tank cap, turn it
clockwise until it "clicks" one time. 2. Close the fuel filler door until it is
latched securely.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. Failure to follow these guidelines may result in SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: Read and follow all warnings
posted at the gas station. Before refueling, note the
location of the Emergency Gasoline Shut-Off, if available, at the gas station.
Before touching the fuel noz- zle, you should eliminate the potential build-up of static electricity by touching a metal part of the vehicle, a safe dis- tance away from the fuel filler neck, nozzle, or other gas source, with your bare hand.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued) Do not use cellular phones
while refueling. Electric cur- rent and/or electronic interfer- ence from cellular phones can potentially ignite fuel vapors and cause a fire.
Do not get back into a vehicle once you have begun refuel- ing. You can generate a build- up of static electricity by touching, rubbing or sliding against any item or fabric capable of producing static electricity. Static electricity discharge can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. If you must re-enter the vehicle, you should once again eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity discharge by touch- ing a metal part of the vehicle, away from the fuel filler neck, nozzle or other gasoline source, with your bare hand.
(Continued)
Add fuel into the fuel tank within 20 minutes after open- ing the fuel filler door. After 20 minutes, the fuel tank may shut off, causing fuel to over- flow. In this case, re-press the fuel filler door opening but- ton.
Do not leave the fuel filler door opened for an extended period of time. It may dis- charge the battery.
Close the fuel filler door after fueling the vehicle. If you start the vehicle with the fuel filler door opened, the message, "Check fuel door", illuminates on the LCD display.
Avoid refueling the vehicle while charging the (high-volt- age) hybrid battery. It may cause a fire or an explosion due to static electricity.
WARNING
3-53
Convenient features of your vehicle
Information Make sure to refuel your vehicle according to the "Fuel Requirements" suggested in the Introduction chapter.
Do not spill fuel on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Any type of fuel spilled on painted sur- faces may damage the paint.
If the fuel filler cap requires replacement, use only a genuine HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent specified for your vehicle. An incorrect fuel filler cap can result in a serious malfunction of the fuel system or emission control system.
NOTICE
i 3
(Continued) When using an approved
portable fuel container, be sure to place the container on the ground prior to refueling. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. Once refueling has begun, contact between your bare hand and the vehicle should be maintained until the filling is complete.
Use only approved portable plastic fuel containers designed to carry and store gasoline.
When refueling, always move the shift lever to the P (Park) position, set the parking brake, and place the Engine Start/Stop button to the OFF position. Sparks produced by electrical components related to the engine can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.
(Continued)
(Continued) Do not use matches or a
lighter and do not smoke or leave a lit cigarette in your vehicle while at a gas station, especially during refueling.
Do not over-fill or top-off your vehicle tank, which can cause gasoline spillage.
If a fire breaks out during refu- eling, leave the vicinity of the vehicle, and immediately con- tact the manager of the gas station and then contact the local fire department. Follow any safety instructions they provide.
If pressurized fuel sprays out, it can cover your clothes or skin and thus subject you to the risk of fire and burns. Always remove the fuel cap carefully and slowly. If the cap is venting fuel or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until the condition stops before com- pletely removing the cap.
(Continued)
(Continued) Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to pre- vent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.
3-54
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Convenient features of your vehicle
1. Power gauge
2. Speedometer
3. Battery SOC (State of Charge) gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. Warning and indicator lights
6. LCD display (including Trip computer)
OAEPH047100N/OAE046501N
Type B
Hybrid vehicle Type A
The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. For more details, refer to the "Gauges and Meters" in this chapter.
3-55
Convenient features of your vehicle
3 1. Power gauge
2. Speedometer
3. Battery SOC (State of Charge) gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. Warning and indicator lights
6. LCD display (including Trip computer)
OAEPH047542N/OAEPH047501N
Type B
Plug-in hybrid vehicle Type A
The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. For more details, refer to the "Gauges and Meters" in this chapter.
3-56
Instrument Cluster Control Instrument panel illumination
When the vehicle's position lights or headlights are on, press the illumina- tion control button to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel illumination. When pressing the illumination con- trol button, the interior switch illumi- nation intensity is also adjusted.
The brightness of the instrument panel illumination is displayed.
If the brightness reaches to the maximum or minimum level, a chime will sound.
Gauges and Meters Speedometer
Convenient features of your vehicle
Never adjust the instrument cluster while driving. This could result in loss of control and lead to an accident that may cause death, serious injury, or property damage.
WARNING
OAE046401N OAE046102N
OAE046103N
Type A
Type B ECO mode selected
Type A Type B
OAE046167L/OAE046113L
3-57
Convenient features of your vehicle
The speedometer indicates the speed of the vehicle and is calibrated in miles per hour (MPH) and/or kilo- meters per hour (km/h). The speedometer for cluster type B is displayed differently according to the mode selected, ECO or SPORT. If the shift lever is in S (Sport), SPORT mode is selected and if the shift lever is in D (Drive), ECO mode is selected.
For more information, refer to "Dual Clutch Transmission" in chapter 5.
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the approx- imate number of engine revolutions per minute (rpm). Use the tachometer to select the cor- rect shift points and to prevent lug- ging and/or over-revving the engine.
Do not operate the engine within the tachometer's RED ZONE. This may cause severe engine damage.
Power gauge
The power gauge indicates whether the current driving condition is fuel efficient or not. CHARGE :
Shows that the energy made by the vehicle is being converted to elec- trical energy. (Regenerated energy)
ECO : Shows that the vehicle is being driven in an Eco-friendly manner.
POWER : Shows that the vehicle is exceed- ing the Eco-friendly range.
NOTICE
3
OAE046104N
Type B SPORT mode selected
OAE046106N
Type B SPORT mode selected
OAEQ046008
3-58
Information Accordance to the power gauge area the "EV" indicator comes on or off.
- "EV" indicator ON : Vehicle is driv- en using the electric motor or the gasoline engine is stopped.
- "EV" indicator OFF : Vehicle is driven using the gasoline engine.
Fuel gauge
This gauge indicates the approxi- mate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.
Information The fuel tank capacity is given in
chapter 8.
The fuel gauge is supplemented by a low fuel warning light, which will illuminate when the fuel tank is nearly empty.
On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel warning light may come on earlier than usual due to the movement of fuel in the tank.
Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire damaging the catalytic converter.
NOTICE
i
i
Convenient features of your vehicle
OAE046107/OAE046108
Type A Type B
Running out of fuel can expose vehicle occupants to danger. You must stop and obtain addi- tional fuel as soon as possible after the warning light comes on or when the gauge indicator comes close to the "E (Empty)" level.
WARNING
3-59
Convenient features of your vehicle
Hybrid battery SOC (State of Charge) gauge
This gauge indicates the remaining hybrid battery power. If the SOC is near the "L (Low)" level, the vehicle automatically operates the engine to charge the battery. However, if the Service Indicator ( ) and Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ( ) turn on when the SOC gauge is near the "L (Low)" level, have the vehicle be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Never try to start the vehicle if the fuel tank is empty. In this condi- tion, the engine cannot charge the high voltage battery of the hybrid system. If you try to start the vehi- cle when the fuel is empty, the high voltage battery will become discharged and be damaged.
Plug-in hybrid mode indicator
CD (Charge Depleting, Electric) mode : The high-voltage (hybrid) battery is used to drive the vehicle.
CS (Charge Sustaining, Hybrid) mode : The high-voltage (hybrid) battery and gasoline engine is used to drive the vehicle.
Information Even when the battery charging rate is high and driving in electric mode is possible, engine may turn on in some areas to protect the system.
i
NOTICE
3
Hybrid vehicle Plug-in hybrid vehicle
OAEQ046009/OAEPH046522
OAEPH047519N
CD (Charge Depleting, Electric)
OAEPH047520N
CS (Charge Sustaining, Hybrid)
3-60
Convenient features of your vehicle
Outside temperature gauge
This gauge indicates the current out- side air temperatures by 1F (1C). - Temperature range : -40F ~ 140F
(-40C ~ 60C) The outside temperature on the dis- play may not change immediately like a general thermometer (to avoid distracting the driver).
To change the temperature unit from F to C or C to F: - Go to User Settings Mode Other
(Features) Temperature Unit.
For vehicles equipped with Automatic Climate Control, you can also: - Press and hold the AUTO and OFF
buttons on the climate control unit for 3 seconds
Both the temperature unit on the cluster LCD display and climate con- trol screen will change.
Odometer
The odometer indicates the total dis- tance that the vehicle has been driv- en and should be used to determine when periodic maintenance should be performed.
OAE046135N/OAEE046502N
Type B Type A
OAE046138N/OAE046112N
Type B Type A
3-61
Convenient features of your vehicle
Range
The range is the estimated dis- tance the vehicle can be driven with the remaining fuel.
If the estimated distance is below 1 mi. (1 km), the trip computer will display "----" as range.
The Range for cluster type B is dis- played differently according to the mode selected, ECO or SPORT. If the shift lever is in S (Sport), SPORT mode is selected and if the shift lever is in D (Drive), ECO mode is selected.
For more information, refer to "Dual Clutch Transmission" in chapter 5.
The Range for cluster type A is mentioned in "Trip Computer" in this chapter.
Information If the vehicle is not on level ground
or the battery power has been inter- rupted, the range function may not operate correctly.
The range may differ from the actu- al driving distance as it is an esti- mate of the available driving dis- tance.
The trip computer may not register additional fuel if less than 1.6 gallon (6 liters) of fuel are added to the vehicle.
The range may vary significantly based on driving conditions, driving habits, and condition of the vehicle.
Dual clutch transmission shift indicator
This indicator displays which shift lever position is selected.
i
3
OAE046475N/OAE046126N
Type B Type A
OAE046136L/OAE046110L
Type B Type A
3-62
Convenient features of your vehicle
Shift indicator pop-up (if equipped)
The pop-up indicates the current gear position displayed in the cluster for about 2 seconds when shifting into other positions (P/R/N/D).
Warning and Indicator Lights
Information Make sure that all warning lights are OFF after starting the engine. If any light is still ON, this indicates a situa- tion that needs attention.
Ready Indicator
This indicator illuminates :
When the vehicle is ready to be driven. - ON : Normal driving is possible. - OFF : Normal driving is not possible,
or a problem has occurred. - Blinking : Emergency driving.
When the ready indicator goes OFF or blinks, there is a problem with the system. In this case, have your vehi- cle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
EV Mode Indicator
This indicator illuminates when the vehicle is driven by the electric motor.
Service Warning Light
This warning light illuminates :
When you place the Engine Start/ Stop button to the ON position. - It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off. When there is a problem with the
hybrid vehicle control system or hardware.
When the warning light illuminates while driving, or does not go OFF after starting the vehicle, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
i
Type B
EV Type A
OAE046137/OAE046111
3-63
Convenient features of your vehicle
Charging Cable Connection Indicator (Plug-in hybrid)
This indicator illuminates in red when the charging cable is connected.
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
When you place the Engine Start/ Stop button to the ON position. - It illuminates for approximately 6
seconds and then goes off. When there is a malfunction with
the SRS. In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Seat Belt Warning Light
This warning light informs the driver that the seat belt is not fastened.
For more details, refer to the "Seat Belts" in chapter 2.
Parking Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
When you place the Engine Start/ Stop button to the ON position. - It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds. - It remains on if the parking brake
is applied. When the parking brake is applied. When the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low. - If the warning light illuminates
with the parking brake released, it indicates the brake fluid level in the reservoir is low.
When the regenerative brake does not operate.
If the brake fluid level in the reser- voir is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the brake fluid level immediately and add fluid as required (For more details, refer to "Brake Fluid" in chapter 7). After adding brake fluid, check all brake components for fluid leaks. If a brake fluid leak is found, or if the warning light remains on, or if the brakes do not operate properly, do not drive the vehicle. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Dual-diagonal braking system
Your vehicle is equipped with dual- diagonal braking systems. This means you still have braking on two wheels even if one of the dual sys- tems should fail. With only one of the dual systems working, more than normal pedal travel and greater pedal pressure is required to stop the vehicle.
3
3-64
Also, the vehicle will not stop in as short a distance with only a portion of the brake system working. If the brakes fail while you are driv- ing, shift to a lower gear for addition- al engine braking and stop the vehi- cle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Regenerative Brake Warning Light
This warning light illuminates :
When you place the Engine Start/ Stop button to the ON position. - It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds. When the regenerative brake does
not operate and the brake does not perform well.This causes the Brake Warning light and Regenerative Brake Warning Light to illuminate simultaneously.
In this case, drive safely and have your vehicle inspected by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer. The operation of the brake pedal may be more difficult than normal and the braking distance can increase.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
When you place the Engine Start/ Stop button to the ON position. - It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off. When there is a malfunction with
the ABS (The normal braking sys- tem will still be operational without the assistance of the anti-lock brake system). In this case, have the vehicle inspect- ed by an authorized HYUNDAI deal- er.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Parking Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Light
Driving the vehicle with a warn- ing light ON is dangerous. If the Parking Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Light illuminates with the parking brake released, it indicates that the brake fluid level is low. In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
3-65
Convenient features of your vehicle
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) System Warning Light
These two warning lights illuminate at the same time while driving:
When the ABS and regular brake system may not work normally. In this case, have the vehicle inspect- ed by an authorized HYUNDAI deal- er.
Information - Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) System Warning Light
When the ABS Warning Light is on or both ABS and Parking Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on, the speedometer, odometer, or tripmeter may not work. Also, the EPS Warning Light may illuminate and the steering effort may increase or decrease.
In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
When you place the Engine Start/ Stop button to the ON position. - It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off. When there is a malfunction with
the EPS. In this case, have the vehicle inspect- ed by an authorized HYUNDAI deal- er.
i 3
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) System Warning Light
When both ABS and Parking Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on, the brake system will not work normally and you may experience an unexpected and dangerous situation during sudden braking.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued) In this case, avoid high speed driving and abrupt braking. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
3-66
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
This warning light illuminates:
When you place the Engine Start/ Stop button to the ON position. - It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off. When there is a malfunction with
the emission control system. In this case, have the vehicle inspect- ed by an authorized HYUNDAI deal- er.
Driving with the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may cause damage to the emission control system which could affect drivability and/or fuel economy.
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illuminates, potential catalyt- ic converter damage is possible which could result in loss of engine power. In this case, have the vehicle inspect- ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
Charging System Warning Light
When this warning light illuminates while running the engine, the battery is not being charged. Immediately turn OFF all electrical accessories. Try not to use electrically operated controls, such as the power win- dows. Keep running the engine. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
When the engine oil pressure is low.
If the engine oil pressure is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the engine oil level (For more details, refer to "Engine Oil" in chapter 7). If the level is low, add oil as required. If the warning light remains on after adding oil or if oil is not avail- able, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
NOTICE
NOTICE
Convenient features of your vehicle
3-67
Convenient features of your vehicle
If the engine does not stop immediately after the Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light is illumi- nated, severe damage could result.
If the warning light stays on while the engine is running, it indicates that there may be seri- ous engine damage or malfunc- tion. In this case: 1. Stop the vehicle as soon as it
is safe to do so. 2. Turn off the engine and check
the oil level. If the oil level is low, fill the engine oil to the proper level.
3. Start the engine again. If the warning light stays on after the engine is started, turn the engine off immediately. In this case, have the vehicle inspect- ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Low Fuel Level Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
When the fuel tank is nearly empty. Add fuel as soon as possible.
Driving with the Low Fuel Level warning light on or with the fuel level below "E" can cause the engine to misfire and damage the catalytic converter (if equipped).
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
When the engine coolant temper- ature is above 248F (120C). This means that the engine is overheat- ed and may be damaged.
If your vehicle is overheated, refer to "Overheating" in chapter 6.
NOTICE
NOTICE
3
3-68
Convenient features of your vehicle
Master Warning Light
This indicator light illuminates:
When there is a malfunction in oper- ation in any of the following systems: - Low washer fluid (if equipped) - Exterior lamp malfunction - Blind Spot Detection (BSD) mal-
function (if equipped) - Autonomous Emergency Braking
(AEB) malfunction (if equipped) - Smart cruise control malfunction
(if equipped) - Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) - Service reminder To identify the details of the warning, look at the LCD display.
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
When you place Engine Start/Stop button to the ON position. - It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off. When one or more of your tires are
significantly underinflated.
For more details, refer to "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in chapter 6.
This warning light remains ON after blinking for approximately 60 seconds, or repeatedly blinks ON and OFF in 3 second intervals:
When there is a malfunction with the TPMS. In this case, have the vehicle inspect- ed by an authorized HYUNDAI deal- er as soon as possible.
For more details, refer to "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in chapter 6.
Safe Stopping
The TPMS cannot alert you to severe and sudden tire damage caused by external factors.
If you notice any vehicle insta- bility, immediately take your foot off the accelerator pedal, apply the brakes gradually with light force, and slowly move to a safe position off the road.
WARNING
3-69
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
When you place the Engine Start/ Stop button to the ON position. - It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off. When there is a malfunction with
the ESC system. In this case, have the vehicle inspect- ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
While the ESC is operating.
For more details, refer to "Electronic Stability Control (ESC)" in chapter 5.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
When you place the Engine Start/ Stop button to the ON position. - It illuminates for approximately
3 seconds and then goes off. When you deactivate the ESC sys-
tem by pressing the ESC OFF but- ton.
For more details, refer to "Electronic Stability Control (ESC)" in chapter 5.
Immobilizer Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates for up to 30 seconds:
When the vehicle detects the smart key in the vehicle with the Engine Start/Stop button in the ACC or ON position. - At this time, you can start the
engine. - The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks for a few seconds:
When the smart key is not in the vehi- cle. - At this time, you cannot start the
engine.
3-70
Convenient features of your vehicle
This indicator light illuminates for 2 seconds and goes off:
If the smart key is in the vehicle and the Engine Start/Stop button is ON, but the vehicle cannot detect the smart key. In this case, have the vehicle inspect- ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
When the battery voltage of the smart key is low. - At this time, you can not start the
engine. However, you can start the engine if you press the Engine Start/Stop button with the smart key. (For more details, refer to "Starting the Vehicle" in chapter 5).
When there is a malfunction with the immobilizer system. In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Turn Signal Indicator Light
This indicator light blinks:
When you operate the turn signal indicator light.
If any of the following occurs, there may be a malfunction with the turn signal system. - The turn signal indicator light illumi-
nates but does not blink - The turn signal indicator light blinks
rapidly - The turn signal indicator light does
not illuminate at all If either of these conditions occur, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
When the headlamps are on and in the high beam position.
When the turn signal lever is pulled into the Flash-to-Pass position.
Light ON Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
When the tail lights or headlamps are on.
3-71
Convenient features of your vehicle
Exterior Light Warning Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
When one of the exterior bulbs (headlamp, tail lamp, fog lamp, etc.) is not operating properly. One of the bulbs may need to be replaced.
Information Make sure to replace the burned out bulb with a new one of the same wattage rating.
LED Headlight Warning Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
When you place the Engine Start/ Stop button to the ON position.
When there is a malfunction with the LED headlight. In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
This warning light blinks:
When there is a malfunction with a LED headlight related part. In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Continuous driving with the LED Headlight Warning Light on or blinking can reduce LED headlight life.
Cruise Indicator Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
When the cruise control system is enabled.
For more details, refer to "Cruise Control System" in chapter 5.
Cruise SET Indicator Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
When the cruise control speed is set.
For more details, refer to "Cruise Control System" in chapter 5.
NOTICE
i
3
3-72
Convenient features of your vehicle
SPORT Mode Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates
When the driver moves the shift lever to S (Sport).
For more details, refer to "Dual Clutch Transmission" in chapter 5.
ECO Mode Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
When the driver moves the shift lever to D (Drive).
For more details, refer to "Dual Clutch Transmission" in chapter 5.
Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB) Warning Light (if equipped) This warning light illuminates :
When you place the Engine Start/ Stop button to the ON position. - It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds. (for cluster type B) When the AEB system is turned
off. When the radar sensor or cover is
blocked with dirt or snow. Check the sensor and cover and clean them by using a soft cloth.
When there is a malfunction with AEB. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized dealer of HYUNDAI.
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator Light (if equipped) This indicator light illuminates:
[Green] When you activate the lane departure warning system by pressing the LKAS button and all of the system operating conditions are satisfied.
[White] When system operating conditions are not satisfied or when the sensor does not detect the lane line.
[Yellow] When there is a malfunc- tion with the lane keeping assist system.
In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
For more information, refer to "Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)" in chapter 5.
3-73
Convenient features of your vehicle
LCD Display Messages Shift to P This message is displayed if you try to turn off the vehicle with the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position. At this time, the Engine Start/Stop button turns to the ACC position (If you press the Engine Start/Stop but- ton once more, it will turn to the ON position).
Low Key Battery This message is displayed if the bat- tery of the smart key is discharged while changing the Engine Start/ Stop button to the OFF position.
Press START button while turn- ing wheel This message is displayed if the steering wheel does not unlock nor- mally when the Engine Start/Stop button is pressed. You should press the Engine Start/ Stop button while turning the steer- ing wheel right and left.
Check Steering Wheel Lock System This message is displayed if the steering wheel does not lock normal- ly while the Engine Start/Stop button changes to the OFF position.
Press brake pedal to start vehicle This message is displayed if the Engine Start/Stop button changes to the ACC position twice by pressing the button repeatedly without depressing the brake pedal. You can start the vehicle by depress- ing the brake pedal.
Key not in vehicle This message is displayed if the smart key is not in the vehicle when you press the Engine Start/Stop but- ton. When attempting to start the vehicle, always have the smart key with you.
Key not detected This message is displayed if the smart key is not detected when you press the Engine Start/Stop button.
Press START button again This message is displayed if you were unable to start the vehicle when the Engine Start/Stop button was pressed. If this occurs, attempt to start the engine by pressing the Engine Start/ Stop button again. If the warning message appears each time you press the Engine Start/Stop button, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
3
3-74
Press START button with key This message is displayed if you press the Engine Start/Stop button while the warning message "Key not detected" is displayed. At this time, the immobilizer indicator light blinks.
Check BRAKE SWITCH fuse This message is displayed if the brake switch fuse is disconnected. You need to replace the fuse with a new one before starting the engine. If that is not possible, you can start the engine by pressing the Engine Start/Stop button for 10 seconds in the ACC position.
Shift to P to start vehicle This message is displayed if you try to start the engine with the shift lever not in the P (Park) position.
Door, Hood, Liftgate Open
This warning is displayed indicating which door, or hood, or liftgate is open.
If the door/liftgate open warning is blocked with another warning mes- sage, an icon will appear on the top of the LCD display.
Convenient features of your vehicle
OAE046165
Before driving the vehicle, you should confirm that the door/ hood/liftgate is fully closed. Also, check there is no door /hood/liftgate open warning light or message displayed on the instrument cluster.
CAUTION
OAD045136
Type A
3-75
Convenient features of your vehicle
Sunroof Open (if equipped)
This warning is displayed if you turn off the engine when the sunroof is open.
Icy Road Warning Light (if equipped)
This warning light is to warn the driver the road may be icy. When the temperature on the out- side temperature gauge is approxi- mately below 40F (4C), the Icy Road Warning Light and Outside Temperature Gauge blinks and then illuminates. Also, the warning chime sounds 1 time.
Information If the icy road warning light appears while driving, you should drive more attentively and safely refraining from over-speeding, rapid acceleration, sud- den braking or sharp turning, etc.
i
3
OAEE046114
Type B Type A
OAE046461L/OAE046099L
3-76
Low Pressure
This message is displayed if the tire pressure is low. The corresponding tire on the vehicle will be illuminated.
For more details, refer to "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in chapter 6.
Turn on FUSE SWITCH/ Turn FUSE SWITCH On
Either message is displayed if the fuse switch located on the fuse box under the steering wheel is OFF. You should turn the fuse switch on.
For more details, refer to "Fuses" in chapter 7.
Low Washer Fluid (if equipped) This message is displayed if the washer fluid level in the reservoir is nearly empty. Have the washer fluid reservoir refilled.
Low Fuel This message is displayed if the fuel tank is almost out of fuel. When this message is displayed, the low fuel level warning light in the cluster will come on. It is recommended to look for the nearest fueling station and refuel as soon as possible.
Add fuel as soon as possible.
Engine has overheated / Engine overheated Either message is displayed when the engine coolant temperature is above 248F (120C). This means that the engine is overheated and may be damaged.
If your vehicle is overheated, refer to "Overheating" in chapter 6.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Type B Type A
OAE046114L/OAE046115L
OLFH044149L/OAEPH047564N
3-77
Convenient features of your vehicle
Lights Mode
This indicator displays which exterior light is selected using the lighting control.
Wiper
This indicator displays which wiper speed is selected using the wiper control.
Check headlight (if equipped) This message is displayed if the headlamps are not operating proper- ly. A headlamp bulb may need to be replaced.
Information Make sure to replace the burned out bulb with a new one of the same wattage rating.
Check LKAS/Check Lane Keeping Assist System (if equipped) Either message is displayed if there is a problem with the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS). Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
For more information, refer to "Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)" in chapter 5.
i 3
OAE046117L OAE046118L
3-78
Rear parking assist system mal- function (if equipped)
This warning is displayed if there is a problem with the Parking Assist System. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized dealer of HYUNDAI.
For more information, refer to "Driver Assist System" in chapter 3.
Check Active Air Flap System
This message is displayed in the fol- lowing situations: - There is a malfunction with the
actuator flap - There is a malfunction with the
actuator air flap controller - The air flap does not open
When all of the above conditions are fixed, the warning will disappear.
Check Hybrid system
This message is displayed when there is a problem with the hybrid control system. Refrain from driving when the warn- ing message is displayed. In this case, have your vehicle inspect- ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Convenient features of your vehicle
OLFH044262L OLFH044248L
OAE046462L
3-79
Convenient features of your vehicle
Check Hybrid system. Turn engine Off
This message is displayed when there is a problem with the hybrid system. The " " indicator will blink and a warning chime will sound until the problem is solved. In this case, have your vehicle inspect- ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Check Hybrid system. Do not start engine
This message is displayed when the hybrid battery power (SOC) level is low. A warning chime will sound until the problem is solved. In this case have your vehicle inspect- ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Stop vehicle and check power supply
This message is displayed when a failure occurs in the power supply system. In this case, park the vehicle in a safe location and tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the vehicle inspect- ed.
3
OAEPH047560N OLFH044240L OLFH044230L
3-80
Stop vehicle to charge battery/ Park with engine On to charge battery
Either message is displayed when the hybrid battery power (SOC) level is low. In this case, park the vehicle in a safe location and wait until the hybrid battery is charged.
Refuel to prevent Hybrid battery damage
This message is displayed when the fuel tank is nearly empty. You should refill the fuel tank to pre- vent hybrid battery damage.
Refill inverter coolant
This message is displayed when the inverter coolant is nearly empty. You should refill the inverter coolant.
Convenient features of your vehicle
OLFH044242L
OLFH044244L
OLFH044232L/OAEPH047561N
3-81
Convenient features of your vehicle
Stop vehicle and check brakes/ Stop vehicle and check regen. brakes
Either message is displayed when a failure occurs in the brake system. In this case, park the vehicle in a safe location and tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the vehicle inspected.
Check brakes/Check regenera- tive brakes
Either message is displayed when the brake performance is low or the regenerative brake does not work properly due to a failure in the brake system. In this case, it may take longer for the brake pedal to operate and the brak- ing distance may become longer.
Check Virtual Engine Sound System
This message is displayed when there is a problem with the Virtual Engine Sound System (VESS). In this case, have your vehicle inspect- ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
3
OLFH044543L
OLFH044234L/OAEPH047562N
OLFH044250L/OAEPH047563N
3-82
Unplug vehicle to start (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)
This message is displayed when you start the engine without unplugging the charging cable. Unplug the charging cable, and then start the vehicle.
Remaining time (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)
This message is displayed to notify the remaining time to fully charge the battery.
Wait until fuel door opens (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)
This message is displayed when you attempt to open the fuel filler door with the fuel tank pressurized. Wait until the fuel tank is depressurized.
Information It may take up to 20 seconds to open fuel filler door.
i
Convenient features of your vehicle
OLFP045258N OAEPH047193N OAEPH047201L
3-83
Convenient features of your vehicle
Check fuel door (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)
This message is displayed when there is a problem with the fuel filler door. Such as, when the fuel filler door does not open after 20 seconds at freezing temperature.
Information When the fuel filler door is frozen and does not open after 20 seconds at freezing temperature, slightly tap the fuel filler door and then attempt to open it. In other cases, have your vehi- cle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Fuel door open (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)
This message is displayed when the fuel filler door opens after the fuel tank is depressurized. If this mes- sage is displayed, you can refuel the fuel tank.
Check fuel door (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)
This message is displayed when the vehicle is driven with the fuel filler door opened. Close the fuel filler door and then start driving.
i
3
OAEPH047526L OAEPH047525L OAEPH047526L
3-84
Shift to P to charge (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)
This message is displayed when the charging connector is plugged with the shift lever in R (Reverse), N (Neutral) or D (Drive). Move the shift lever to P (Park) and re-start the charging process.
AC Charger Error! (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)
This message is displayed when there is a problem with the charger.
Aux. Battery Saver+ was used while parked (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)
This message is displayed when the Aux. Battery Saver+ function has been completed when the vehicle is turned ON.
For more information, refer to "Hybrid System Overview" provided in the front of the owner's manual.
Convenient features of your vehicle
OAEPH047202L OAEE047134N
OAEE047143N
3-85
Convenient features of your vehicle
Switching to Hybrid mode to allow heating or air condition- ing (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)
This message is displayed when the vehicle automatically switches to HEV mode to allow heating or air conditioning. It is when the coolant temperature is low (below 7 F (-14 C)) and the driver turns on the heat- ing or cooling system. If the coolant temperature gets high- er than 7 F (-14 C) or the driver turns off the heating or cooling sys- tem the vehicle returns to its default (EV) mode.
Maintaining Hybrid mode to continue heating or air condi- tioning (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)
This message is displayed when the vehicle maintains the HEV mode to allow heating or air conditioning. The mode does not change when the driver presses the [EV/HEV] button to switch from the HEV mode to EV mode while the heating and cooling system is on and the coolant temper- ature is below 7 F (-14 C).
Low/High System Temp. Maintaining Hybrid mode (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)
This message is displayed when the temperature of the high-voltage (hybrid) battery is too low or too high. This warning message is to protect the battery and the hybrid system.
3
OAEPH047527L OAEPH047203L/OAEPH047204LOAEPH047207L
3-86
Low/High System Temp. Switching to Hybrid mode (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)
This message is displayed when the temperature of the high-voltage (hybrid) battery is too low or high. This warning message is to protect the battery and the hybrid system.
Switching to Hybrid mode to lubricate engine (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)
This message is displayed when the vehicle is automatically switched to the HEV mode to lubricate engine while the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position.
Maintaining Hybrid mode to protect engine (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)
This message is displayed when the [EV/HEV] button is pressed but it is impossible to switch from the HEV mode to EV mode due to engine lubrication.
Convenient features of your vehicle
OAEPH047205L/OAEPH047206L OAEPH047530L OAEPH047528L
3-87
Convenient features of your vehicle
Exit SPORT mode to switch to EV (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)
This message is displayed when [EV/HEV] button is pressed but it is impossible to switch from the HEV mode to EV mode because the SPORT mode is engaged.
3
OAEPH047531N
3-88
Convenient features of your vehicle
LCD DISPLAY LCD Display Control
The LCD display modes can be changed by using the control buttons.
(1) : MODE button for changing modes
(2) , : MOVE switch for changing items
(3) OK : SELECT/RESET button for setting or resetting the select- ed item
OAE046402
Type A
Type B
Type C
3-89
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Modes Symbol Explanation
Trip Computer This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy, etc.
For more information, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.
Turn By Turn (TBT) This mode displays the state of the navigation.
SCC/LKAS
This mode displays the state of : - Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) - Smart Cruise Control
For more information, refer to "Smart Cruise Control (SCC)" and "Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)" in chapter 5.
A/V This mode displays the state of the A/V system.
Information This mode displays the service interval (mileage or days) and warning mes- sages related to the Blind Spot Detection system, etc.
User Settings In this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, etc.
or or
LCD Display Modes (for cluster type A)
The information provided may differ depending on which functions are applicable to your vehicle.
3-90
Convenient features of your vehicle
Edit settings after shifting to P/ Shift to P to edit settings Either message appears if you try to adjust the User Settings while driv- ing. For your safety, change the User Settings after parking the vehicle, applying the parking brake and mov- ing the shift lever to P (Park).
Quick guide (Help) This mode provides quick guides for the systems in the User Settings mode. Select an item, press and hold the OK button.
For more information, about each system, refer to this Owner's Manual.
Trip computer mode
The trip computer mode displays information related to vehicle driving parameters including fuel economy, tripmeter information and vehicle speed.
For more information, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.
Turn By Turn (TBT) mode
This mode displays the state of the navigation.
OAE046503N OTL045174
3-91
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
SCC/LKAS mode
This mode displays the state of the Smart Cruise Control (SCC) and Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).
For more information, refer to "Smart Cruise Control (SCC)" and "Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)" in chapter 5.
A/V mode
This mode displays the state of the A/V system.
Information mode This mode displays the service inter- val (mileage and days).
Service interval Service in
It calculates and displays the mainte- nance schedule (mileage or days), as set in the system. When the set mileages or days passed, "Service in" message is dis- played for several seconds each time Engine Start/Stop button is turned ON.
OAE057195N OTL045178
OTLA045182
3-92
Convenient features of your vehicle
Service required
If you exceed the specified service interval, a message indicating, "Service required" will be displayed each time you turn ON the vehicle.
To reset the service interval in mileages or days that you initially set, press the OK button for more than 1 second.
Service in OFF
If the service interval is not set, "Service in OFF" message is dis- played on the LCD display.
Information If any of the following conditions occur, the mileage and number of days to service may be incorrect.
- The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- The battery is discharged.
Warning message If one of followings occurs, warning messages will be displayed in the information mode for several seconds. - Low washer fluid (if equipped) - Exterior lamp malfunction - Blind Spot Detection (BSD) mal-
function (if equipped) - Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) malfunction - Autonomous Emergency Braking
(AEB) malfunction (if equipped) - Smart cruise control malfunction
(if equipped) - Service reminder
i
OTLA045297 OTL045299L
3-93
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
User settings mode In this mode, you can change the settings of the instrument cluster, doors, lamps, etc. 1. Driving Assist 2. Door 3. Lights 4. Convenience 5. Service Interval 6. Other (Features) 7. Reset The information provided may dif- fer depending on which functions are applicable to your vehicle.
1. Driving Assist Lane Keeping Assist System - Lane Departure Warning/
Standard LKA/Active LKA To adjust the sensitivity of the Lane Keeping Assist System.
For more information, refer to the "Lane Keeping Assist System" in chapter 5.
Smart Cruise Control - Response (Slow/Normal/Fast)
To adjust the sensitivity of the Smart Cruise Control system.
For more information, refer to the "Smart Cruise Control" in chapter 5.
Forward Collision Warning - Autonomous Emergency Braking
To activate or deactivate the AEB system.
- Late/Normal/Early To adjust the initial warning alert time for Autonomous Emergency Braking system.
For more information, refer to "Autonomous (Automatic) Emergency Braking (AEB)" in chapter 5.
Rear Collision Warning - Rear Cross Traffic Alert
To activate or deactivate the Rear Cross Traffic Alert system.
- Blind Spot Detection Sound To activate or deactivate the Blind Spot Detection sound.
For more information, refer to "Blind Spot Detection" in chapter 5.
Coasting Guide - Coasting Guide: To activate or
deactivate the Coasting Guide sys- tem.
- Sound: To activate or deactivate the Coasting Guide system sound.
- Start Coasting (Late/Normal/Early) To adjust the sensitivity of the Coasting Guide.
For more information, refer to "Coasting Guide" in chapter 5.
3-94
Convenient features of your vehicle
2. Door Auto Lock - Disable: The auto door lock opera-
tion will be canceled. - Enable on Speed: All doors will be
automatically locked when the vehi- cle speed exceeds 9.3 mph (15 km/h).
- Enable on Shift: All doors will be automatically locked if the shift lever is shifted from the P (Park) position to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position.
Auto Unlock - Disable: The auto door unlock oper-
ation will be canceled. - Vehicle Off: All doors will be auto-
matically unlocked when the Engine Start/Stop button is set to the OFF position.
- On Shift to P: All doors will be auto- matically unlocked if the shift lever is shifted to the P (Park) position.
Two Press Unlock - Off: The two press unlock function
will be deactivated. Therefore, all doors will unlock if the door unlock button is pressed.
- On: Only the driver's door will unlock if the door unlock button is pressed. When the door unlock but- ton is pressed again within 4 sec- onds, the remaining doors will unlock.
3. Lights One Touch Turn Signal - Off : The one touch turn signal func-
tion will be deactivated. - 3, 5, 7 Flashes: The turn signal indi-
cator will blink 3, 5, or 7 times when the turn signal lever is moved slightly.
For more information, refer to "Lighting" in this chapter.
Headlight Delay To activate or deactivate the head- lamp delay function.
For more information, refer to "Lighting" in this chapter
3-95
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
4. Convenience Seat Easy Access - Off: The seat easy access function
is deactivated. - Normal/Extended: When you turn
off the engine, the driver's seat will automatically move rearward short (Normal) or long (Extended) for you to enter or exit the vehicle more comfortably.
For more information, refer to "Driver Position Memory System" in this chapter.
Wireless Charging System To activate or deactivate the wireless charging system in the front seat.
For more information, refer to "Wireless Charging System" in this chapter.
Wiper/Lights Display To activate or deactivate the Wiper/ Light mode. When activated, the LCD display shows the selected Wiper/Light mode whenever you change the mode.
Gear Position Pop-up To activate or deactivate the gear position pop-up. When activated, the gear position will be displayed on the LCD display.
5. Service Interval Service Interval To activate or deactivate the service interval function.
If the service interval menu is acti- vated, you may adjust the time and distance.
Information To use the service interval menu, con- sult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
If the service interval is activated and the time and distance is adjusted, messages are displayed in the fol- lowing situations each time the vehi- cle is turned on. - Service in
: Displayed to inform the driver the remaining mileage and days to service.
- Service required : Displayed when the mileage and days to service has been reached or passed.
Information If any of the following conditions occur, the mileage and number of days to service may be incorrect.
- The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- The battery is discharged.
i i
3-96
Convenient features of your vehicle
6. Other (Features) Aux. Battery Saver+ To activate or deactivate the Aux. Battery Saver+ function. When activated, the high voltage bat- tery is used to keep the 12V battery charged.
For more information, refer to "Hybrid System Overview" provid- ed in the front of the owners man- ual.
Fuel Economy (Auto) Reset - Off: The average fuel economy will
not reset automatically whenever refueling.
- After Ignition: When the vehicle has been OFF for 4 hours or longer the average fuel economy will reset automatically.
- After Refueling: The average fuel economy will reset automatically after adding 1.6 gallons (6 liters) of fuel or more and after driving speed exceeds 1 mph (1 km/h).
For more information, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.
Fuel Economy Unit To select the fuel economy unit. (US gallon, UK gallon)
Temperature Unit To select the temperature unit. (C,F)
Tire Pressure Unit To select the tire pressure unit. (psi, kPa, bar)
Language To select language.
7. Reset You can reset the menus in the User Settings Mode. All menus in the User Settings Mode are reset to factory settings, except language and serv- ice interval.
3-97
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Modes Symbol Explanation
Trip Computer This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy, etc. For more information, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.
Turn By Turn (TBT) This mode displays the state of the navigation.
Assist
This mode displays the state of : - Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) - Smart Cruise Control - Tire Pressure For more information, refer to "Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)", "Smart Cruise Control (SCC)" in chapter 5 and "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in chapter 6.
User Settings In this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, etc.
Warning This mode displays warning messages related to the Blind Spot Detection system, etc.
The information provided may differ depending on which functions are applicable to your vehicle.
LCD Display Modes (for cluster type B)
3-98
Convenient features of your vehicle
Edit settings after shifting to P/ Shift to P to edit settings Either message appears if you try to adjust the User Settings while driv- ing. For your safety, change the User Settings after parking the vehicle, applying the parking brake and mov- ing the shift lever to P (Park).
Quick guide help This mode provides quick guides for the systems in the User Settings mode. Select an item, press and hold the OK button. For more information about each system, refer to this Owner's Manual.
Trip computer mode
The trip computer mode displays information related to vehicle driving parameters including fuel economy, tripmeter information and vehicle speed.
For more information, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.
OAEE046191N
3-99
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Turn By Turn (TBT) mode
This mode displays the state of the navigation.
Assist mode
SCC/LKAS
This mode displays the state of the Smart Cruise Control (SCC) and Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).
For more information, refer to "Smart Cruise Control (SCC)" and "Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)" in chapter 5.
Tire Pressure
This mode displays information relat- ed to Tire Pressure.
For more information, refer to "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in chapter 6.
OAEE046505N OAEE046137R
OAE066030L
3-100
Convenient features of your vehicle
Warning mode If one of followings occurs, warning messages will be displayed on the LCD display for several seconds. - Lower washer fluid (if equipped) - Exterior lamp malfunction - Blind Spot Detection (BSD) mal-
function (if equipped) - Autonomous Emergency Braking
(AEB) malfunction - Smart cruise control malfunction - Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) malfunction
User settings mode In this mode, you can change the settings of the instrument cluster, doors, lamps, etc. 1. Driving Assist 2. Door 3. Lights 4. Convenience 5. Service Interval 6. Other (Features) 7. Reset The information provided may dif- fer depending on which functions are applicable to your vehicle.
1. Driving Assist Lane Keeping Assist System - Lane Departure Warning/
Standard LKA/Active LKA To adjust the sensitivity of the Lane Keeping Assist System.
For more information, refer to the "Lane Keeping Assist System" in chapter 5.
Smart Cruise Control Response - Slow/Normal/Fast
To adjust the sensitivity of the Smart Cruise Control system.
For more information, refer to the "Smart Cruise Control" in chapter 5.
Autonomous Emergency Braking To activate or deactivate the Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB).
For more information, refer to "Autonomous (Automatic) Emergency Braking (AEB)" in chapter 5.
3-101
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Forward Collision Warning - Late/Normal/Early
To adjust the initial warning alert time for Autonomous Emergency Braking system.
For more information, refer to "Autonomous (Automatic) Emergency Braking (AEB)" in chapter 5.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert To activate or deactivate the Rear Cross Traffic Alert system.
For more information, refer to "Blind Spot Detection" in chapter 5.
Blind Spot Detection Sound To activate or deactivate the Blind Spot Detection sound.
For more information, refer to "Blind Spot Detection" in chapter 5.
Coasting Guide - Coasting Guide: To activate or
deactivate the Coasting Guide sys- tem.
- Sound: To activate or deactivate the Coasting Guide system sound.
For more information, refer to "Coasting Guide" in chapter 5.
Start Coasting (Late/Normal/Early) To adjust the sensitivity of the Coasting Guide.
For more information, refer to "Coasting Guide" in chapter 5.
2. Door Auto Lock - Disable: The auto door lock opera-
tion will be canceled. - Enable on Speed: All doors will be
automatically locked when the vehicle speed exceeds 9.3 mph (15 km/h).
- Enable on Shift: All doors will be automatically locked if the shift lever is shifted from the P (Park) position to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position.
Auto Unlock - Disable: The auto door unlock oper-
ation will be canceled. - Vehicle Off: All doors will be auto-
matically unlocked when the Engine Star/Stop button is set to the OFF position.
- On Shift to P: All doors will be auto- matically unlocked if the shift lever is shifted to the P (Park) position.
Two Press Unlock - Off: The two press unlock function
will be deactivated. Therefore, all doors will unlock if the door unlock button is pressed.
- On: Only the driver's door will unlock if the door unlock button is pressed. When the door unlock button is pressed again within 4 seconds, the remaining doors will unlock.
3-102
Convenient features of your vehicle
3. Lights One Touch Turn Signal - Off: The one touch turn signal func-
tion will be deactivated. - 3, 5, 7 Flashes: The turn signal indi-
cator will blink 3, 5, or 7 times when the turn signal lever is moved slightly.
For more information, refer to "Lighting" in this chapter.
Headlight Delay To activate or deactivate the head- lamp delay function.
For more information, refer to "Lighting" in this chapter
4. Convenience Seat Easy Access - Off: The seat easy access function
is deactivated. - Normal/Extended: When you turn
off the engine, the driver's seat will automatically move rearward short (Normal) or long (Extended) for you to enter or exit the vehicle more comfortably.
For more information, refer to "Driver Position Memory System" in this chapter.
Wireless Charging System To activate or deactivate the wireless charging system in the front seat.
For more information, refer to "Wireless Charging System" in this chapter.
Wiper/Lights Display To activate or deactivate the Wiper/ Light mode. When activated, the LCD display shows the selected Wiper/Light mode whenever you changed the mode.
Gear Position Pop-up To activate or deactivate the gear position pop-up. When activated, the gear position will be displayed on the LCD display.
5. Service Interval Service Interval To activate or deactivate the service interval function.
Adjust Interval If the service interval menu is acti- vated, you may adjust the time and distance.
Information To use the service interval menu, con- sult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
i
3-103
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
If the service interval is activated and the time and distance is adjusted, messages are displayed in the fol- lowing situations each time the vehi- cle is turned on. - Service in
: Displayed to inform the driver the remaining mileage and days to service.
- Service required : Displayed when the mileage and days to service has been reached or passed.
Information If any of the following conditions occur, the mileage and number of days to service may be incorrect.
- The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- The battery is discharged.
6. Other (Features) Aux. Battery Saver+ To activate or deactivate the Aux. Battery Saver+ function. When activated, the high voltage bat- tery is used to keep the 12V battery charged. For more information, refer to "Hybrid System Overview" provid- ed in the front of the owner's man- ual.
Fuel Economy (Auto) Reset - Off: The average fuel economy will
not reset automatically whenever refueling.
- After Ignition: When the engine has been OFF for 4 hours or longer the average fuel economy will reset automatically.
- After Refueling: The average fuel economy will reset automatically after adding 1.6 gallons (6 liters) of fuel or more and after driving speed exceeds 1 mph (1 km/h).
For more information, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.
Fuel Economy Unit To select the fuel economy unit. (US gallon, UK gallon)
Temperature Unit To select the temperature unit. (C,F)
Tire Pressure Unit To select the tire pressure unit. (psi, kPa, bar)
Language To select language.
7. Reset You can reset the menus in the User Settings Mode. All menus in the User Settings Mode are reset to factory settings, except language and serv- ice interval.
i
3-104
Convenient features of your vehicle
The trip computer is a microcomput- er-controlled driver information sys- tem that displays information related to driving.
Information Some driving information stored in the trip computer (for example Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the battery is disconnected.
Trip modes
To change the trip mode, toggle the " , " switch on the steering wheel.
i
TRIP COMPUTER (HYBRID VEHICLE)
Tripmeter
Average Vehicle Speed
Timer
Range (Only for cluster type A)
Average Fuel Economy
Instant Fuel Economy
Digital Speedometer
Driving Style
Energy Flow
Engine Coolant Temperature (Only for cluster type B)
OAE046402
Type A
Type B
Type C
3-105
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Range/Average fuel economy/ Instant fuel economy
Range (1)
The range is the estimated dis- tance the vehicle can be driven with the remaining fuel.
If the estimated distance is below 1 mi. (1 km), the trip computer will display "----" as range.
Information If the vehicle is not on level ground
or the battery power has been inter- rupted, the range function may not operate correctly.
(Continued)
(Continued)
The range may differ from the actu- al driving distance as it is an esti- mate of the available driving dis- tance.
The trip computer may not register additional fuel if less than 1.6 gallons (6 liters) of fuel are added to the vehi- cle.
The fuel economy and range may vary significantly based on driving conditions, driving habits, and condi- tion of the vehicle.
Average Fuel Economy (2)
The average fuel economy is calcu- lated by the total driving distance and fuel consumption since the last average fuel economy reset.
The average fuel economy can be reset both manually and automati- cally.
Manual reset To clear the average fuel economy manually, press the OK button on the steering wheel for more than 1 sec- ond when the average fuel economy is displayed.
Automatic reset To automatically reset the average fuel economy, select between "After Ignition" or "After Refueling" in the User Settings mode on the LCD dis- play. - After Ignition: When the vehicle has
been OFF for 4 hours or longer the average fuel economy will reset automatically.
- After Refueling: The average fuel economy will reset automatically after adding 1.6 gallons (6 liters) of fuel or more and after driving speed exceeds 1 mph (1 km/h).
Information The vehicle must be driven for a min- imum of 0.19 miles (300 meters) since the last ignition key cycle before the average fuel economy will be recalcu- lated.
Instant Fuel Economy (3)
This mode displays the instanta- neous fuel economy while driving.
i
i
OAEPH047208N/OAEPH047506N
Type A Type B
3-106
Convenient features of your vehicle
Tripmeter/Average vehicle speed/ Timer
Tripmeter (1)
The tripmeter is the total driving distance since the last tripmeter reset.
To reset the tripmeter, press the OK button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the tripmeter is displayed.
Average Vehicle Speed (2)
The average vehicle speed is cal- culated by the total driving dis- tance and driving time since the last average vehicle speed reset.
To reset the average vehicle speed, press the OK button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the average vehicle speed is dis- played.
Information The average vehicle speed is not dis-
played if the driving distance is less than 0.19 miles (300 meters) or the driving time is less than 10 seconds, after resetting the vehicle speed.
The average vehicle speed will con- tinue to be calculated and will start to decrease if the vehicle is stopped while the engine is still running (for example, when the vehicle is in traf- fic or stopped at a stop light.)
Timer (3)
The timer is the total driving time since the last timer reset.
To reset the timer, press the OK button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the timer is displayed.
Information The timer will continue to be counted while the engine is still running (for example, when the vehicle is in traffic or stopped at a stop light.)
i
i
OAE046503N/OAEE046191N
Type A Type B
3-107
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Digital speedometer
This message shows the speed of the vehicle.
Drive Info display
At the end of each driving cycle, the Driving Info message is displayed. This display shows the trip distance (1), the average fuel economy (2), and the remaining vehicle range (3). This information is displayed for a few seconds when you turn off the ignition, and then goes off automati- cally. The information is calculated for each ignition cycle. If the estimated remaining vehicle range is below 1 mi. (1 km), the dis- tance to empty will display as "----" and a "Low Fuel" warning message (4) will be displayed.
Information If sunroof open warning is displayed in the cluster, the Driving Info mes- sage will not be displayed.
i
OTLA045193/OAEE046153R
Type A Type B
OAEPH047194N
Type A
3-108
Convenient features of your vehicle
Driving style
The driving style is displayed when you are driving in ECO mode. When you drive in SPORT mode, each driving category will be dis- played with "--".
Energy flow
The hybrid system informs the driv- ers its energy flow in various operat- ing modes. While driving, the current energy flow is specified in 11 modes. For more information, refer to HEV Energy Flow in the "Hybrid System Overview" provided in front of the owner's manual.
Engine coolant temperature
This gauge indicates the tempera- ture of the engine coolant when the engine is running.
When the gauge indicator gets out of the normal range, toward the "H (Hot)" position, it indicates over- heating of the engine. It may dam- age the engine. Do not continue driving with the overheated engine. For further information, refer to "If the Engine Overheats" in the chapter 6.
NOTICE
OAE046148L/OAE046124L
Type A Type B Type A Type B
OAE046149L/OAEQ046001L OAE046125L
Type B
3-109
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
The trip computer is a microcomput- er-controlled driver information sys- tem that displays information related to driving.
Information Some driving information stored in the trip computer (for example Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the battery is disconnected.
Trip modes For cluster type A For cluster type B
i
TRIP COMPUTER (PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE)
Tripmeter
Average Vehicle Speed
Elapsed Time
Distance to Empty (Only for cluster type A)
Average Fuel Economy
Instant Fuel Economy
Digital Speedometer
Range (Electric/Gasoline)
Driving Style
Energy Flow
Tripmeter
Average Vehicle Speed
Elapsed Time
Average Fuel Economy
Instant Fuel Economy
Range (Electric/Gasoline)
Digital Speedometer
Driving Style
Energy Flow
Engine Coolant Temperature
3-110
Convenient features of your vehicle
To change the trip mode, toggle the " , " switch on the steering wheel.
Range
The range is the estimated distance the vehicle can be driven with the remaining fuel in the fuel tank (Gasoline) and high-voltage (hybrid) battery (Electric). If the estimated distance is below 1 mph (1 km/h), the trip computer will display "---" as the range.
Information If the vehicle is not on level ground
or the battery power has been inter- rupted, the range function may not operate correctly.
The range may differ from the actu- al driving distance as it is an esti- mate of the available driving dis- tance.
The trip computer may not register additional fuel if less than 1.6 gallons (6 liters) of fuel are added to the vehi- cle.
The range may vary significantly based on driving conditions, driving habits, and condition of the vehicle.
i
OAE046402 OAEPH047534N/OAEPH047153N
Type A Type B
Type A
Type B
Type C
3-111
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Range/Average fuel economy/ Instant fuel economy
Range (1)
The range is the estimated dis- tance the vehicle can be driven with the remaining fuel.
If the estimated distance is below 1 mi. (1 km), the trip computer will display "----" as range.
Information If the vehicle is not on level ground
or the battery power has been inter- rupted, the range function may not operate correctly.
The range may differ from the actu- al driving distance as it is an esti- mate of the available driving dis- tance.
The trip computer may not register additional fuel if less than 1.6 gallons (6 liters) of fuel are added to the vehi- cle.
The fuel economy and range may vary significantly based on driving conditions, driving habits, and condi- tion of the vehicle.
Average Fuel Economy (2)
The average fuel economy is cal- culated by the total driving dis- tance and fuel consumption since the last average fuel economy reset.
The average fuel economy can be reset both manually and automati- cally.
Manual reset To clear the average fuel economy manually, press the OK button on the steering wheel for more than 1 sec- ond when the average fuel economy is displayed.
Automatic reset To automatically reset the average fuel economy, select between "After Ignition" or "After Refueling" in the User Settings mode on the LCD dis- play. - After Ignition: When the vehicle has
been OFF for 4 hours or longer the average fuel economy will reset automatically.
- After Refueling: The average fuel economy will reset automatically after adding 1.6 gallons (6 liters) of fuel or more and after driving speed exceeds 1 mph (1 km/h).
Information The vehicle must be driven for a mini- mum of 0.19 miles (300 meters) since the last ignition key cycle before the average fuel economy will be recalculated.
i
i
Type A Type B
OAEPH047208N/OAEPH047506N
3-112
Convenient features of your vehicle
Instant Fuel Economy (3)
This mode displays the instanta- neous fuel economy while driving.
Tripmeter/Average vehicle speed/Timer
Tripmeter (1)
The tripmeter is the total driving distance since the last tripmeter reset.
To reset the tripmeter, press the OK button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the tripmeter is displayed.
Average Vehicle Speed (2)
The average vehicle speed is cal- culated by the total driving dis- tance and driving time since the last average vehicle speed reset.
To reset the average vehicle speed, press the OK button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the average vehicle speed is dis- played.
Information The average vehicle speed is not dis-
played if the driving distance is less than 0.19 miles (300 meters) or the driving time is less than 10 seconds, after resetting the vehicle speed.
The average vehicle speed will con- tinue to be calculated and will start to decrease if the vehicle is stopped while the engine is still running (for example, when the vehicle is in traf- fic or stopped at a stop light.)
i
OAE046503N/OAEE046191N
Type A Type B
3-113
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Timer (3)
The timer is the total driving time since the last timer reset.
To reset the timer, press the OK button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the timer is displayed.
Information The timer will continue to be counted while the engine is still running (for example, when the vehicle is in traffic or stopped at a stop light.)
Digital speedometer
This message shows the speed of the vehicle.
Drive Info display
At the end of each driving cycle, the Driving Info message is displayed. This display shows the trip distance (1), average fuel economy (2), remain- ing vehicle range (3), and charging status (4). This information is displayed for a few seconds when you turn off the vehicle, and then goes off automatically. The information is calculated for each time the vehicle is turned on.
Information If sunroof open warning is displayed in the cluster, the Driving Info mes- sage will not be displayed.
i
i
OTLA045193/OAEE046153R
Type A Type B
OAEPH047195N/OAEPH047538N
Type A Type B
3-114
Convenient features of your vehicle
Driving style
The driving style is displayed when you are driving in ECO mode. When you drive in SPORT mode, each driving category will be dis- played with "--".
Energy flow
The hybrid system informs the driv- ers its energy flow in various operat- ing modes. While driving, the current energy flow is specified in 11 modes. For more information, refer to HEV Energy Flow in the "Hybrid System Overview" provided in front of the owner's manual.
Engine coolant temperature
This gauge indicates the tempera- ture of the engine coolant when the engine is running.
When the gauge indicator gets out of the normal range, toward the "H (Hot)" position, it indicates over- heating of the engine. It may dam- age the engine. Do not continue driving with the overheated engine. For further information, refer to "If the Engine Overheats" in the chapter 6.
NOTICE
OAE046148L/OAE046124L
Type A Type B Type A Type B
OAE046149L/OAEQ046001L OAE046125L
Type B
3-115
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
LIGHTING Exterior Lights Lighting control To operate the lights, turn the knob at the end of the control lever to one of the following positions:
1. DRL (Daytime Running Lights) OFF position
2. AUTO light position 3. Parking lamp position 4. Headlamp position
Daytime running light (DRL) (if equipped)
The Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day, especially after dawn and before sunset.
The DRL system will turn the dedi- cated lamp OFF when : The light switch is in the DRL OFF
position. The headlamps are ON. The parking lamps are ON. The vehicle is turned off.
AUTO light position (if equipped)
The parking lamp and headlamp will be turned ON or OFF automatically depending on the amount of light outside the vehicle.
Even with the AUTO light feature in operation, it is recommended to manually turn ON the lamps when driving at night or in a fog, driving in the rain, or when you enter dark areas, such as tunnels and parking facilities.
OLF044084N
OAEE046510N
3-116
Convenient features of your vehicle
Do not cover or spill anything on the sensor (1) located in front of the instrument panel.
Do not clean the sensor using a window cleaner, the cleanser may leave a light film which could interfere with sensor operation.
If your vehicle has window tint or other types of metallic coat- ing on the front windshield, the AUTO light system may not work properly.
Parking lamp position ( )
The parking lamp, license plate lamp and instrument panel lamp are turned ON.
Headlamp position ( )
The headlamp, parking lamp, license plate lamp and instrument panel lamp are turned ON.
Information The Engine Start/Stop button must be in the ON position to turn on the headlamp.
i
NOTICE
OLF044086N OLF044087N
3-117
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
High beam operation
To turn on the high beam headlamp, push the lever away from you. The lever will return to its original position. The high beam indicator will light when the headlamp high beams are switched on. To turn off the high beam headlamp, pull the lever towards you. The low beams will turn on.
To flash the high beam headlamp, pull the lever towards you, then release the lever. The high beams will remain ON as long as you hold the lever towards you.
Turn signals and lane change signals
To signal a turn, push down on the lever for a left turn or up for a right turn in position (A). If an indicator stays on and does not flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the turn signal bulbs may be burned out and will require replacement.
Do not use high beam when there are other vehicles approaching you. Using high beam could obstruct the other driver's vision.
WARNING
OLF044089N
OLF044088N
OLF044091N
3-118
Convenient features of your vehicle
One-touch turn signal function
To activate the One Touch Turn Signal function, push the turn signal lever up or down to position (B) and then release it. The lane change signals will blink 3, 5 or 7 times. You can activate or deactivate the One Touch Turn Signal function or choose the number of blinks (3, 5, or 7) from the User Settings mode (Light) on the LCD display.
For more information, refer to the "LCD Display" section in this chapter.
Battery saver function The purpose of this feature is to pre- vent the battery from being dis- charged. The system automatically turns off the parking lamp when the driver turns the vehicle off and opens the driver-side door. With this feature, the parking lamps will turn off automatically if the driver parks on the side of road at night. If necessary, to keep the lamps on when the vehicle is turned off, per- form the following: 1) Open the driver-side door. 2) Turn the parking lamps OFF and
ON again using the light switch on the steering column.
Headlamp delay function (if equipped) If the Engine Start/Stop button is placed in the ACC position or the OFF position with the headlamps ON, the headlamps (and/or parking lamps) remain on for about 5 min- utes. However, if the driver's door is opened and closed, the headlights are turned off after 15 seconds. Also, with the vehicle off if the driver's door is opened and closed, the head- lamps (and/or parking lamps) are turned off after 15 seconds. The headlamps (and/or parking lamps) can be turned off by pressing the lock button on the smart key twice or turning the light switch to the OFF or AUTO position. You can activate or deactivate the Headlamp Delay function from the User Settings mode (Light) on the LCD display.
For more information, refer to the "LCD Display" section in this chapter.
3-119
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
If the driver gets out of the vehicle through other doors (except dri- ver's door), the battery saver func- tion does not operate and the headlamp delay function does not turn off automatically. Therefore, It causes the battery to be dis- charged. In this case, make sure to turn off the lamp before getting out of the vehicle.
AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting System) a.k.a. DBL (Dynamic Bending Light) (if equipped)
Adaptive front lighting system uses the steering angle and vehicle speed, to keep your field of vision wide by swiveling and leveling the headlamp.
Change the switch to the AUTO posi- tion when the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode. The adaptive front light- ing system will operate when the headlamp is ON. To turn off the AFLS, change the switch to other positions. After turning the AFLS off, headlamp swiveling no longer occurs, but leveling operates contin- uously. If the AFLS malfunction indicator comes on, the AFLS is not working properly. Drive to the nearest safe location and restart the vehicle ( indicator ON). If the indicator contin- uously remains on, have the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
NOTICE
OAEE046510N
3-120
Convenient features of your vehicle
Interior Lights
Do not use the interior lights for extended periods when the vehi- cle is turned off or the battery will discharge.
Interior lamp AUTO cut The interior lamps will automatically go off approximately 20 minutes after the vehicle is turned off and the doors are closed. If a door is opened, the lamp will go off 40 minutes after the vehicle is turned off. If the doors are locked by the smart key and the vehicle enters the armed stage of the theft alarm system, the lamps will go off five seconds later.
Front lamps
(1) Front Map Lamp (2) Front Door Lamp (3) Front Room Lamp ON (4) Front Room Lamp OFF
Front Map Lamp :
Press either lenses to turn the map lamp on or off. This light produces a spot beam for convenient use as a map lamp at night or as a personal lamp for the driver and the front pas- senger.
Front Door Lamp ( ):
The front or rear room lamps come on when the front or rear doors are opened. When doors are unlocked by the smart key, the front and rear lamps come on for approximately 30 seconds as long as any door is not opened.The front and rear room lamps go out grad- ually after approximately 30 seconds when the door is closed. However, if the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position or all doors are locked, the front and rear lamps will turn off. If a door is opened with the Engine Start/Stop button in the ACC position or the OFF position, the front and rear lamps stay on for about 20 minutes.
Front room lamp
: Press the button to turn ON the room lamp for the front/rear seats.
: Press the button to turn OFF the room lamp for the front/rear seats regardless of front or rear door open position.
NOTICE
Do not use the interior lights when driving in the dark.The inte- rior lights may obscure your view and cause an accident.
WARNING
OAD045405
3-121
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Rear lamp
Rear Room Lamp ( ):
Press this switch to turn the room lamp on and off.
Luggage compartment lamp
The luggage compartment lamp comes on when the liftgate is opened.
The luggage compartment lamp comes on as long as the liftgate is open. To prevent unnecessary charging system drain, close the liftgate securely after using the luggage compartment.
Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)
Push the switch to turn the light on or off. : The lamp will turn on if this
button is pressed. : The lamp will turn off if this
button is pressed.
Always have the switch in the off position when the vanity mirror lamp is not in use. If the sunvisor is closed without the lamp off, it may discharge the battery or dam- age the sunvisor.
NOTICE
NOTICE
Type A
Type B OAE046445
OAEE046421
OAE046418N OAD045410
3-122
Convenient features of your vehicle
Welcome System (if equipped) Welcome light (if equipped)
Door handle lamp (if equipped)
When all the doors (and liftgate) are closed and locked, the door handle lamp will come on for about 15 sec- onds if any of the below is performed. When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key. When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed with the smart key in possession.
When the vehicle is approached with the smart key in possession.
Headlamp and parking lamp
When the headlamp (with the lamp switch in the headlamp or AUTO position) is on and all doors (and trunk) are locked and closed, the parking lamp and headlamp will come on for 15 seconds when the door unlock button is pressed on the smart key. At this time, if you press the door lock or unlock button on the smart key the parking lamp and headlamp will turn off immediately.
You can activate or deactivate the Welcome Light from the User Settings mode on the LCD display. For more details, refer to "LCD Display" in this chapter.
Interior lamp
When the interior lamp switch is in the DOOR position and all doors (and tailgate) are closed and locked, the room lamp will come on for 30 sec- onds if any of the below is performed. When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key. When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed. At this time, if you press the door lock or unlock button, the room lamp will turn off immediately.
OAE046409N
3-123
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
A : Wiper speed control MIST Single wipe OFF Off INT Intermittent wipe LO Low wiper speed HI High wiper speed
B : Intermittent control wipe time adjustment
C : Wash with brief wipes
Windshield Wipers Operates as follows when the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON posi- tion. MIST : For a single wiping cycle,
push the lever upward and release. The wipers will oper- ate continuously if the lever is held in this position.
OFF : Wiper is not in operation. INT : Wiper operates intermittently at
the same wiping intervals. To vary the speed setting, move the speed control lever. The top most setting will run the wipers most frequently (for more rain). The bottom setting will run the wipers the least frequently (for less rain).
LO : The wiper runs at a lower speed. HI : The wiper runs at a higher speed.
Information If there is heavy accumulation of snow or ice on the windshield, defrost the windshield for about 10 minutes, or until the snow and/or ice is removed before using the windshield wipers to ensure proper operation.
If you do not remove the snow and/or ice before using the wiper and washer, it may damage the wiper and washer system.
i WIPERS AND WASHERS
OLF044278
3-124
Convenient features of your vehicle
Windshield Washers
In the OFF position, pull the lever gently toward you to spray washer fluid on the windshield and to run the wipers 1-3 cycles. The spray and wiper operation will continue until you release the lever. If the washer does not work, you may need to add wash- er fluid to the washer fluid reservoir.
To prevent possible damage to the washer pump, do not oper- ate the washer when the fluid reservoir is empty.
To prevent possible damage to the wipers or windshield, do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms and other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manually.
To prevent possible damage to the wipers and washer system, use anti-freezing washer fluids in the winter season or cold weather.
NOTICE
When the outside temperature is below freezing, ALWAYS warm the windshield using the defroster to help prevent the washer fluid from freezing on the windshield and obscuring your vision which could result in an accident and serious injury or death.
WARNING
OLF044095N
3-125
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
DRIVER ASSIST SYSTEM Rear View Camera
The Rear View Camera will activate when the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode and when you shift to the R (Reverse) position.
This is a supplemental system that helps provide a view of the area behind the vehicle through the A/V display while the vehicle is in the R (Reverse) position.
Always keep the camera lens clean. The camera may not work normally if the lens is covered with dirt, water or snow.
NOTICE
The Rear View Camera is not a safety device. It only serves to assist the driver in identifying objects directly behind the mid- dle of the vehicle. The camera does NOT cover the complete area behind the vehicle.
WARNING
Never rely solely on the Rear View Camera when backing- up.
ALWAYS look around your vehicle to make sure there are no objects or obstacles before moving the vehicle in any direction to prevent a collision.
Always pay close attention when the vehicle is driven close to objects, particularly pedestrians, and especially children.
WARNING
OAE046407N
OAE046406
3-126
Rear Parking Assist System (if equipped)
The Rear Parking Assist System assists the driver during reverse movement of the vehicle by chiming if any object is sensed within approx- imately 50 in (120 cm) behind the vehicle. This system is a supplemental sys- tem that senses objects within the range and location of the sensors, it cannot detect objects in other areas where sensors are not installed.
Operation of the Rear Parking Assist System Operating condition
This system will activate when backing up. However, if the vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h), the system may not detect objects.
If the vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h), the system will not warn you even though objects are detected.
When more than two objects are sensed at the same time, the clos- est one will be recognized first.
Convenient features of your vehicle
OAE046403
Sensor
ALWAYS look around your vehi- cle to make sure there are not any objects or obstacles before moving the vehicle in any direc- tion to prevent a collision.
Always pay close attention when the vehicle is driven close to objects, particularly pedestri- ans, and especially children.
Be aware that some objects may not be visible on the screen or be detected by the sensors, due to the objects distance, size or material, all of which can limit the effective- ness of the sensor.
WARNING
3-127
Convenient features of your vehicle
Types of warning sound and indicator Non-operational conditions of Parking Assist System The Rear Parking Assist System may not operate normally when:
Moisture is frozen to the sensor. The sensor is covered with dirt or
debris such as snow or ice, or the sensor cover is blocked.
There is a possibility of the Rear Parking Assist System malfunction when:
Driving on uneven road surfaces such as unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, or gradient.
Objects generating excessive noise such as vehicle horns, loud motor- cycle engines, or truck air brakes can interfere with the sensor.
Heavy rain or water spray is present. Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones are present near the sensor. The sensor is covered with snow. Any non-factory equipment or
accessories have been installed, or if the vehicle bumper height or sen- sor installation has been modified.
3
Types of warning sound Indicator
When an object is approximately 24 to 47 in (60 to 120 cm) from the rear bumper, the warning sound beeps inter- mittently.
When an object is approximately 12 to 24 in (30 to 60 cm) from the rear bumper, the warning sound beeps more fre- quently.
When an object is within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear bumper, the warning sound beeps continuously.
The indicator may differ from the illustration as objects or sensors sta- tus. If the indicator blinks, have your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
If the audible warning does not sound or if the buzzer sounds intermit- tently when shifting into R (Reverse) position, this may indicate a mal- function with the Parking Assist System. If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
NOTICE
3-128
Detecting range may decrease when:
Outside air temperature is extreme- ly hot or cold.
Undetectable objects smaller than 40 inches (1 m) and narrower than 6 inches (14 cm) in diameter.
The following objects may not be recognized by the sensor:
Sharp or slim objects such as ropes, chains or small poles.
Objects, which tend to absorb sen- sor frequency such as clothes, spongy material or snow.
Rear parking assist system pre- cautions The rear parking assist system
may not operate consistently in some circumstances depending on the speed of the vehicle and the shapes of the objects detected.
The rear parking assist system may malfunction if the vehicle bumper height or sensor installation has been modified or damaged. Any non-factory installed equipment or accessories may also interfere with the sensor performance.
The sensor may not recognize objects less than 15 in. (40 cm) from the sensor, or it may sense an incorrect distance. Use caution.
When the sensor is blocked with snow, dirt, debris, or ice, the rear parking assist system may be inop- erative until the snow or ice melts, or the debris is removed. Use a soft cloth to wipe debris away from the sensor.
Do not push, scratch or strike the sensor with any hard objects that could damage the surface of the sensor. Sensor damage could occur.
Do not spray the sensors or its sur- rounding area directly with a high pressure washer. Doing so may cause the sensors to fail to operate normally.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Your new vehicle warranty does not cover any accidents or dam- age to the vehicle or injuries to its occupants related to a Rear Parking Assist System. Always drive safely and cautiously.
WARNING
3-129
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
OAE046500
1. Driver's temperature control knob
2. Passengers temperature control knob
3. AUTO (automatic control) button
4. OFF button
5. Front windshield defrost button
6. Rear window defrost button
7. Air conditioning button
8. Air intake control button
9. Fan speed control button
10. Mode selection button
11. Driver only button
12. SYNC button
13. Climate control information screen
3-130
Convenient features of your vehicle
Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning
The Automatic Climate Control System is controlled by setting the desired temperature. 1. Press the AUTO button. The modes, fan speeds, air intake and air-conditioning will be controlled automatically by the temperature set- ting you select.
2. Turn the temperature control knob to the desired temperature. If the temperature is set to the lowest setting (Lo), the air conditioning system will operate continuously. After the interior has cooled suffi- ciently, adjust the knob to a higher temperature set point whenever possible.
To turn the automatic operation off, select any button of the following:
- Mode selection button - Front windshield defroster button
(Press the button one more time to deselect the front windshield defroster function. The 'AUTO' sign will illuminate on the infor- mation screen once again.)
- Fan speed control button The selected function will be con- trolled manually while other functions operate automatically. For your convenience and to improve the effectiveness of the climate con- trol, use the AUTO button and set the temperature to 73F (23C).
OAE046303
OAE046302
3-131
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Never place anything near the sensor to ensure better control of the heating and cooling system.
Manual Heating and Air Conditioning The heating and cooling system can be controlled manually by pushing buttons other than the AUTO button. In this case, the system works sequentially according to the order of buttons selected. When pressing any button except the AUTO button while using automatic operation, the functions not selected will be controlled automatically. 1. Start the vehicle ( indicator
ON). 2. Set the mode to the desired posi-
tion. To improve the effectiveness of heating and cooling, select: - Heating: - Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the air conditioning system on.
7. Press the AUTO button to convert to full automatic control of the sys- tem.
NOTICE
OAE046304N
3-132
Convenient features of your vehicle
Mode selection The air flow outlet direction is cycled as follows:
Face-Level (B, D, F)
Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face. Additionally, each outlet can be controlled to direct the air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F)
Air flow is directed towards the face and the floor.
The mode selection button controls the direction of the air flow through the ventilation system.
OAE046306N/OAE046305
MODE DOWN ( )
MODE UP ( )
3-133
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Floor & Defrost (A, C, E, F)
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windshield with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters.
Floor-Level (A, C, E, F)
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor, with a small amount of the air being directed to the windshield and side window defrosters.
Defrost-Level (A)
Most of the air flow is directed to the windshield with a small amount of air directed to the side window defrosters.
Interior panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or closed ( ) using the vent control lever. Also, you can adjust the direction of air delivered from these vents using the vent control lever as shown.
OAE046307
OAE046308
OAE046309
Front
Rear
3-134
Convenient features of your vehicle
Temperature control
Turn the knob to the right to increase the temperature. Turn the knob to the left to decrease temperature. The temperature will increase or decrease by 1F/0.5C.
Temperature conversion
If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, the temperature mode display will reset to Fahrenheit. To change the temperature unit from F to C or C to F: - On the instrument cluster, go to
User Settings Mode Other (Features) Temperature Unit.
- Press and hold the AUTO and OFF buttons on the climate control unit for 3 seconds.
The temperature unit on both on the cluster LCD display and climate con- trol information screen will change.
Sync button
Adjusting the driver and passenger side temperature equally
Press the "SYNC" button to oper- ate the driver and passenger side temperature equally. The passenger side temperature will be set to the same temperature as the driver side temperature.
Turn the left temperature control knob. The driver and passenger side temperature will be adjusted equally.
Drivers side Front passengers side
OAE046310 OAE046311
3-135
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Adjusting the driver and passenger side temperature individually
Press the "SYNC" button again to operate the driver and passenger side temperature individually. The button indicator will turn off.
Air intake control
This button is used to select the out- side (fresh) air position or recirculat- ed air position.
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air position selected, air from the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heat- ing system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh) air position selected, air enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.
Information Using the system in the fresh air posi- tion is recommended.
Prolonged operation of the heater in the recirculated air position (without air conditioning selected) can cause fogging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the pas- senger compartment will become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected will result in exces- sively dry air in the passenger com- partment.
i
OAE046312
3-136
Convenient features of your vehicle
Fan speed control
The fan speed can be set as desired by pushing the fan speed control but- ton. More air is delivered with higher fan speeds. Pressing the OFF button turns off the fan.
Information For better voice recognition, fan speed may automatically slow down for a couple of minutes when you activate voice recognition or hands free.
Operating the fan when the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position could cause the bat- tery to discharge. Operate the fan when the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode.
NOTICE
i
Continued use of the climate control system operation in the recirculated air position can cause drowsiness or sleepiness, that may cause loss of vehicle control result- ing in an accident. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position as much as possible while driving.
Continued use of the climate control system operation in the recirculated air position (without the air conditioning selected) may allow humidity to increase inside the vehicle which may fog the glass and obscure visibility.
Do not sleep in a vehicle with the air conditioning or heating system on. It may cause seri- ous injury or death due to a drop in the oxygen level and/or body temperature.
WARNING
OAE046313
3-137
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Driver only
If you press the DRIVER ONLY but- ton( ) and the indicator light illuminates, air mostly blows in the direction of the drivers seat. However, some of the air may come out of other seating position ducts to keep indoor air pleasant. If you use the button with no passen- ger in the front passenger seat, ener- gy consumption will be reduced. DRIVER ONLY button will be turned off under the following conditions: 1) Defrost on (the DRIVER ONLY
button indicator is not turned off) 2) DRIVER ONLY button re-push
Air conditioning
Push the A/C button to manually turn the system on (indicator light will illu- minate) and off.
OFF mode
Push the OFF button to turn the cli- mate control system off. You can still operate the mode and air intake buttons as long as the Engine Start/ Stop button is in the ON position.
DRIVER ONLY
OAE046315OAE046314 OAE046316
3-138
Convenient features of your vehicle
System Operation Ventilation 1. Select the Face Level mode. 2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position. 3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position. 4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating 1. Select the Floor Level mode. 2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position. 3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position. 4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed. 5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system on. If the windshield fogs up, select the Floor & Defrost mode or press the Front Defrost mode.
Operation Tips
To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from entering the car through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air intake control to the recircu- lated air position. Return the con- trol to the fresh air position when the irritation has passed. This will help keep the driver alert and com- fortable.
To prevent the inside of the wind- shield from fogging, set the air intake control to the fresh air posi- tion and fan speed to the desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust the temperature control to the desired temperature.
Air conditioning All HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems are filled with environmen- tally friendly R-134a refrigerant. 1. Start the vehicle. 2. Push the air conditioning button. 3. Set the mode to the Face Level
mode. 4. Set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. However, prolonged operation of the recircu- lated air position will excessively dry the air. In this case, change the air position.
5. Adjust the fan speed control and temperature control to maintain maximum comfort.
When maximum cooling is desired, set the temperature control to the extreme left position then set the fan speed control to the highest speed.
3-139
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Air conditioning system operation tips
If the vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight during hot weather, open the windows for a short time to let the hot air inside the vehicle escape.
After sufficient cooling has been achieved, switch back from the recirculated air to the fresh outside air position.
To help reduce moisture inside of the windows on rainy or humid days, decrease the humidity inside the vehicle by operating the air conditioning system with the win- dows and sunroof closed.
Use the air conditioning system every month only for a few minutes to ensure maximum system per- formance.
If you operate air conditioner excessively, the difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, causing loss of visibility. In this case, set the mode selection knob or button to the position and fan speed control to the lower speed.
System Maintenance Climate control air filter
This filter is installed behind the glove box. It filters the dust or other pollu- tants that enter the vehicle through the heating and air conditioning system. Have the climate control air filter be replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer according to the maintenance schedule. If the vehicle is being driv- en in severe conditions such as dusty or rough roads, more frequent air conditioner filter inspections and changes are required. If the air flow rate suddenly decreas- es, the system should be checked at an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant When the amount of refrigerant is low, the performance of the air con- ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also reduces the performance of the air conditioning system. Therefore, if abnormal operation is found, have the system inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrig- erant is used. Otherwise, damage to the compressor and abnormal system operation may occur.
NOTICE 1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated air
Climate control air filter
Blower
Evaporator core
Heater core
3-140
Convenient features of your vehicle
The air conditioning system should be serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Air conditioning refrigerant label
The actual Air Conditioning refriger- ant label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. Each symbols and specification on air conditioning refrigerant label means as below : 1. Classification of refrigerant 2. Amount of refrigerant 3. Classification of Compressor lubri-
cant
Refer to chapter 8 for more detail location of the air conditioning refrig- erant label.
Because the refriger- ant is at very high pressure, the air con- ditioning system should only be serv-
iced by trained and certified technicians. It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used, oth- erwise damage to the vehicle and personal injury may occur.
WARNING
POE
OLFP046583N
Example
3-141
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
Windshield heating
Do not use the or posi- tion during cooling operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temper- ature of the outside air and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface of the wind- shield to fog up, causing loss of visibility could cause an acci- dent resulting in serious injury or death. In this case, set the mode selection knob or button to the position and fan speed control knob or button to a lower speed.
WARNING For maximum defrosting, set the
temperature control to the extreme right/hot position and the fan speed control to the highest speed.
If warm air to the floor is desired while defrosting or defogging, set the mode to the floor-defrost position.
Before driving, clear all snow and ice from the windshield, rear win- dow, side view mirrors, and all side windows.
Clear all snow and ice from the hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve heater and defroster effi- ciency and to reduce the probability of fogging up the inside of the wind- shield.
Information If the engine temperature is still cold after starting, then a brief engine warm up period may be required for the vented air flow to become warm or hot.
To Defog Inside Windshield
1. Select the desired fan speed. 2. Select the desired temperature. 3. Press the defroster button ( ). 4. The outside (fresh) air position will
be selected automatically. If the outside (fresh) air position is not selected automatically, adjust the corresponding button manually. If the position is selected, lower fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed.
i
OAE046317
3-142
Convenient features of your vehicle
To Defrost Outside Windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest (extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot (HI) position.
3. Press the defroster button ( ). 4. The outside (fresh) air position will
be selected automatically. If the position is selected, lower fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed.
Defogging Logic To reduce the probability of fogging up the inside of the windshield, the air intake or air conditioning are con- trolled automatically according to certain conditions such as or positions. To cancel or return the defogging logic, do the following.
1. Place the Engine Start/Stop button to the ON position.
2. Press the defroster button ( ). 3. While pressing the air conditioning
button (A/C), press the air intake control button at least 5 times with- in 3 seconds.
The air intake control button indicator will blink 3 times. It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled or returned to the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it resets to the defog logic status.
Rear Window Defroster
To prevent damage to the conduc- tors bonded to the inside surface of the rear window, never use sharp instruments or window cleaners containing abrasives to clean the window.
If you want to defrost and defog the front windshield, refer to the "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging" section in this chapter.
NOTICE
OAE046318
3-143
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
The defroster heats the window to remove frost, fog and thin ice from the interior and exterior of the rear window while the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode. To activate the rear window
defroster, press the rear window defroster button located in the center facia switch panel. The indicator on the rear window defroster button illu- minates when the defroster is ON.
To turn off the defroster, press the rear window defroster button again.
Information If there is heavy accumulation of
snow on the rear window, brush it off before operating the rear defroster.
The rear window defroster automat- ically turns off after approximately 20 minutes or when the Engine Start/Stop button is in the OFF posi- tion.
Side view mirror defroster If your vehicle is equipped with the side view mirror defrosters, they will operate at the same time you turn on the rear window defroster.
Auto Defogging System
Auto defogging system reduces the possibility of fogging up the inside of the windshield by automatically sensing the moisture on inside the windshield. The auto defogging system operates when the heater or air conditioning is on.
i
OAE046301
OAE046320N
3-144
When the Auto Defogging System operates, the indi- cator will illuminate.
If high levels of moisture are sensed in the vehicle, the Auto Defogging System will operate in the following order: Step 1 : Outside air position Step 2 : Operating the air conditioning Step 3 : Blowing air toward the wind-
shield Step 4 : Increasing air flow toward
the windshield If the air conditioning is off or recircu- lated air position is manually select- ed while Auto Defogging System is ON, the Auto Defogging System Indicator will blink 3 times to signal that the manual operation has been canceled.
To cancel or reset the Auto Defogging System
Press the front windshield defroster button for 3 seconds when the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position. When the Auto Defogging System is canceled, the ADS OFF symbol will blink 3 times and ADS OFF will be displayed on the climate control information screen. When the Auto Defogging System is reset, the ADS OFF symbol will blink 6 times without a signal.
Information When the air conditioning is turned
on by Auto defogging system, if you try to turn off the air conditioning, the indicator will blink 3 times and the air conditioning will not be turned off.
For efficiency, do not select recircu- lated air position while the Auto defogging system is operating.
When Auto defogging mode is selected, fan speed, temperature and intake mode which is adjusted man- ually are canceled for better defog- ging result.
Do not remove the sensor cover located on the upper end of the windshield glass. Damage to system parts could occur and may not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
NOTICE
i
Convenient features of your vehicle
3-145
Convenient features of your vehicle
Automatic Ventilation (if equipped) When the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position or when the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode and temperature is below 59F (15C) with the recirculated air posi- tion selected more than five minutes, the air intake position will automati- cally change to the outside (fresh) air position.
To cancel or reset the Automatic Ventilation
When the air conditioning system is on, select Face Level mode and while pressing the A/C button, press the recirculated air position button five times within three seconds.
CLIMATE CONTROL ADDITIONAL FEATURES
3
3-146
Convenient features of your vehicle
STORAGE COMPARTMENT
To avoid possible theft, do not leave valuables in the storage compartments.
Center Console Storage
To open : Grab and hold the latch (1) on the arm rest then lift the lid.
Glove Box
To open: Pull the lever (1).
NOTICE
Never store cigarette lighters, propane cylinders, or other flammable/explosive materials in the vehicle. These items may catch fire and/or explode if the vehicle is exposed to hot tem- peratures for extended periods.
WARNING
ALWAYS keep the storage com- partment covers closed secure- ly while driving. Items inside your vehicle are moving as fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, the items may fly out of the compartment and may cause an injury if they strike the driver or a passenger.
WARNING OAE046420
ALWAYS close the glove box door after use. An open glove box door can cause serious injury to the pas- senger in an accident, even if the passenger is wearing a seat belt.
WARNING
OAE046421
3-147
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Sunglass Holder
To open: Push and release the cover and the holder will slowly open. Place your sunglasses in the compartment door with the lenses facing out. To close: Push back into position. Make sure the sunglass holder is closed while driving.
Multi Box
Use the multi box to keep small objects.
OAD045413 OAE046422
Do not keep objects except sunglasses inside the sun- glass holder. Such objects can be thrown from the holder in the event of a sudden stop or an accident, possibly injuring the passengers in the vehicle.
Do not open the sunglass holder while the vehicle is moving. The rear view mirror of the vehicle can be blocked by an open sunglass holder.
Do not put the glasses forcibly into a sunglass holder. It may cause personal injury if you try to open it forcibly when the glasses are jammed in holder.
WARNING
Do not keep objects that can be thrown from the multi box and severely injure passengers in the vehicle in the event of a sud- den stop or an accident.
WARNING
3-148
Convenient features of your vehicle
Cup Holder
Cups or small beverages cups may be placed in the cup holders.
Rear (if equipped) Pull the armrest down to use the cup holders.
Keep your drinks sealed while driving to prevent spilling your drink. If liquid spills, it may get into the vehicle's electrical/elec- tronic system and damage elec- trical/electronic parts.
When cleaning spilled liquids, do not dry the cup holder at high temperature. This may damage the cup holder.
NOTICE
INTERIOR FEATURES
OAE046424
Front
Rear OAE046423
Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is in use to prevent spilling your drink. If hot liquid spills, you could be burned. Such a burn to the driver could cause loss of vehicle control result- ing in an accident.
Do not place uncovered or unsecured cups, bottles, cans, etc., in the cup holder containing hot liquid while the vehicle is in motion. Injuries may result in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
Only use soft cups in the cup holders. Hard objects can injure you in an accident.
WARNING
Keep cans or bottles out of direct sun light and do not put them in a hot vehicle. It may explode.
WARNING
3-149
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Sunvisor
To use a sunvisor, pull it downward. To use a sunvisor for a side window, pull it downward, unsnap it from the bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2). To use the vanity mirror, pull down the sunvisor and slide the mirror cover (3). Adjust the sunvisor forward or back- ward (4) as needed (if equipped). Use the ticket holder (5) to hold tickets (if equipped).
Close the vanity mirror cover securely and return the sunvisor to its original position after use.
Do not put several tickets in the ticket holder at one time. This could cause damage to the ticket holder.
Power Outlet (if equipped)
The power outlet is designed to pro- vide power for mobile telephones or other devices designed to operate with vehicle electrical systems. The devices should draw less than 180 W (Watts) with the vehicle in the ready ( ) mode.
NOTICE
NOTICE
OAEE046511N
For your safety, do not block your view when using the sunvi- sor.
WARNING
OAE046426N
Avoid electrical shocks. Do not place your fingers or foreign objects (pin, etc.) into a power outlet or touch the power outlet with a wet hand.
WARNING
3-150
Convenient features of your vehicle
To prevent damage to the Power Outlets : Use the power outlet only when
the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode and remove the accessory plug after use. Using the acces- sory plug for prolonged periods of time with the vehicle off could cause the battery to discharge.
Only use 12V electric acces- sories which are less than 180 W (Watts) in electric capacity.
Adjust the air-conditioner or heater to the lowest operating level when using the power outlet.
Close the cover when not in use. (Continued)
(Continued) Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference when plugged into a vehicles power outlet.These devices may cause excessive audio static and malfunctions in other elec- tronic systems or devices used in your vehicle.
Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat and the fuse may open.
Plug in battery equipped electri- cal/electronic devices with reverse current protection. The current from the battery may flow into the vehicles electri- cal/electronic system and cause system malfunction.
USB Charger (if equipped)
The USB charger is located inside the console box between the driver's seat and the front passenger's seat. Insert the USB charger into the USB port, and re-charge a smart phone or a tablet PC. A charging status/charging comple- tion message will be displayed on the screen of your device. Your device may get warm during the re-charging process. This does not indicate any malfunction with the charging system.
NOTICE
OAE046427
3-151
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
A device that requires a specific re- charging method may not properly re-charge with this USB charger. If this is the case, use the specified charger for your device. This USB charging terminal will not allow you to play your media on the AVN unit. To connect your media to the AVN unit, use the USB port in the multi box and follow steps in the Car Multimedia User's Manual that is supplied with the vehicle.
Wireless Cellular Phone Charging System (if equipped)
There is a wireless cellular phone charger inside the front console. The system is available when all doors are closed, and when the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ACC/ON/START position.
To charge a cellular phone The wireless cellular phone charging system charges only the Qi-enabled cellular phones ( ). Read the label on the cellular phone accessory cover or visit your cellular phone manufacturers website to check whether your cellular phone supports the Qi technology. The wireless charging process starts when you put a Qi-enabled cellular phone on the wireless charging unit.
1. Remove other items, including the smart key, from the wireless charg- ing unit. If not, the wireless charg- ing process may be interrupted.
2. The indicator light is orange when the phone is charging. The indica- tor light turns green when phone charging is complete.
3. You can turn ON or OFF the wire- less charging function in the user settings mode on the instrument cluster. For further information, refer to the "LCD Display Modes" in this chapter.
OAE046444N
3-152
Convenient features of your vehicle
If your phone is not charging: - Slightly change the position of the
cellular phone on the charging pad. - Make sure the indicator light is
orange. Depending on the cellular phone type, the indicator light may not turn green even though the charging is complete. The indicator light will blink orange for 10 seconds if there is a malfunction in the wireless charging system. In this case, temporarily stop the charging process, and re-attempt to wirelessly charge your cellular phone again. The system warns you with a message on the LCD display if the cellular phone is still on the wireless charging unit after the Engine Start/Stop button is in the OFF position and the front door is opened.
The wireless cellular phone charging system may not sup- port certain cellular phones, which are not verified for the Qi specification ( ).
(Continued)
(Continued) Locate your cell phone well in
the middle of the wireless cellu- lar phone charging system. Even when your cell phone locates slightly to one side, the charging speed may decrease.
The wireless charging process may temporarily stop, when a smart key function operates (i.e. starting the vehicle, opening the doors, closing the doors).
For certain cell phones, the indi- cator color may not change to green, even when the wireless charging process is properly completed.
The wireless charging process may temporarily stop, when tem- perature abnormally increases inside the wireless cellular phone charging system. The wireless charging process restarts, when temperature falls to a certain level.
The wireless charging process may temporarily stop when there is any metallic item, such as a coin, between the wireless cellular phone charging system and a cellular phone.
Clock
Vehicles with Audio system Select the [SETUP] button on the audio system Select [Date/Time]. Set time: Set the time displayed on
the audio screen. Time format: Choose between 12-
hour and 24-hour time formats.
Vehicles with Navigation system Select the Settings menu on the Navigation system Select [Date/Time]. GPS time: Displays time according
to the received GNSS time. 24-hour: Switches to 12 hour or 24
hour.
NOTICE
Do not adjust the clock while driving, you may lose your steering control and cause an accident that results in severe personal injury or death.
WARNING
3-153
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Clothes Hanger (if equipped)
These hangers are not designed to hold large or heavy items.
Floor Mat Anchor(s)
ALWAYS use the Floor Mat Anchors to attach the front floor mats to the vehicle. The anchors on the front floor carpet keep the floor mats from sliding forward.
Do not hang other objects such as hangers or hard objects except clothes. Also, do not put heavy, sharp or breakable objects in the clothes pockets. In an accident or when the cur- tain air bag is inflated, it may cause vehicle damage or per- sonal injury.
WARNING
OAEE046434 OGSB047265L OAE046430
Do not overlay additional mats or liners over the floor mats. If using All Weather mats, remove the carpeted floor mats before installing them. Only use floor mats designed to connect to the anchors.
WARNING
3-154
Convenient features of your vehicle
Cargo Security Screen (if equipped)
Use the cargo security screen to hide items stored in the cargo area.
To use the cargo security screen
1. Pull the cargo security screen towards the rear of the vehicle by the handle (1).
2. Insert the guide pin into the guide (2).
Pull out the cargo security screen with the handle in the center to prevent the guide pin from falling out of the guide.
NOTICE
The following must be observed when installing ANY floor mat to the vehicle. Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehi- cle's floor mat anchor(s) before driving the vehicle.
Do not use ANY floor mat that cannot be firmly attached to the vehicle's floor mat anchors.
Do not stack floor mats on top of one another (e.g. all-weath- er rubber mat on top of a car- peted floor mat). Only a single floor mat should be installed in each position.
IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was manufactured with drivers side floor mat anchors that are designed to securely hold the floor mat in place. To avoid any interference with pedal opera- tion, HYUNDAI recommends that the HYUNDAI floor mat designed for use in your vehicle be installed.
WARNING
OAE046432N
OAE046433
3-155
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
When the cargo security screen is not in use: 1. Pull the cargo security screen
backward and up to release it from the guides.
2. The cargo security screen will automatically slide back in.
The cargo security screen may not automatically slide back in if the cargo security screen is not fully pulled out. Fully pull it out and then let go.
To remove the cargo security screen
1. Push out the lower part of guide pins in both sides.
2. While pushing in one side of the guide pin, pull out the cargo secu- rity screen.
3. Open the luggage tray and keep the cargo security screen in the tray.
NOTICE
OAEE046409N
OAE046435N
Multimedia System
Multimedia System.................................................4-2 AUX, USB and iPod port ...............................................4-2 Antenna ...............................................................................4-2 Steering Wheel Audio Controls......................................4-3 Bluetooth Wireless Technology Hands-Free...........4-4 Audio (Display Audio) / Video / Navigation System (AVN).................................................4-5 How Vehicle Audio Works ...............................................4-5 Features of Your Vehicle.................................................4-7
Audio (with Touch Screen).................................4-10 Feature of Your Audio ...................................................4-11 Radio...................................................................................4-16 SiriusXM ............................................................................4-18 Media..................................................................................4-19 Phone .................................................................................4-32 Siri .......................................................................................4-40 Setup ..................................................................................4-41
Declaration of Conformity..................................4-44 FCC......................................................................................4-44
4
4-2
Multimedia System
If you install an aftermarket HID head lamp, your vehicle's audio and electronic devices may not function properly.
Prevent chemicals such as per- fume, cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner, and air freshener from contacting the interior parts because they may cause damage or discoloration.
AUX, USB and iPod Port
You can use an AUX port or USB cable to connect audio devices to the vehicle AUX or USB port.
Information When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet, noise may occur during playback. If this happens, use the power source.
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Antenna Shark fin antenna
The shark fin antenna will receive the transmit data (example: AM/FM, SXM signal, GPS, LTE).
i
NOTICE
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OAE046439N
OAE046321L
4-3
M ultim
edia System
4
Roof antenna
The roof antenna receives both AM and FM broadcast signals. Rotate the roof antenna in a counterclock- wise direction to remove it. Rotate it in a clockwise direction to reinstall it.
Before entering a place with a low height clearance or a car wash, remove the antenna by rotating it counterclockwise. If not, the antenna may be damaged.
When reinstalling your antenna, it is important that it is fully tightened and adjusted to the upright position to ensure prop- er reception.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
Do not operate multiple audio remote control buttons simultane- ously.
NOTICE
NOTICE
OAE046481L OAE046438
4-4
Multimedia System
VOLUME (VOL + / - ) (1) Press the VOLUME switch up to
increase volume. Press the VOLUME switch down to
decrease volume.
SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2) If the SEEK/PRESET switch is pressed up or down and held for 0.8 second or more, it will function in the following modes:
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK select button. It will SEEK until you release the button.
MEDIA mode
It will function as the FF/RW button.
If the SEEK/PRESET switch is pressed up or down, it will function in the following modes:
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STA- TION UP/DOWN button.
MEDIA mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/ DOWN button.
MODE (3) Press the MODE button to toggle through Radio, SXM, or AUX modes.
MUTE ( ) (4) Press the MUTE button to mute the
sound. Press the MUTE button again to
activate the sound.
Information Detailed information for audio control buttons are described in the Car Multimedia User's Manual that is supplied with the vehicle.
Bluetooth Wireless Technology Hands-Free
With the Bluetooth Wireless Technology in the vehicle, you can use the phone wireless. (1) Call / Answer button (2) Call end button
i
OAE046440
OAE046447
(3) Microphone Detailed information for the Bluetooth
Wireless Technology hands-free is described in the Car Multimedia User's Manual.
Audio (Display Audio) / Video / Navigation System (AVN) (if equipped) Detailed information for the AVN sys- tem is described in the Car Multimedia User's Manual.
How Vehicle Audio Works
AM and FM radio signals are broad- cast from transmitter towers located around your city. They are intercept- ed by the radio antenna on your vehi- cle. This signal is then processed by the radio and sent to your vehicle speakers. When a strong radio signal has reached your vehicle, the precise engineering of your audio system ensures the best possible quality reproduction. However, in some cases the signal coming to your vehi- cle may not be strong and clear.
This can be due to factors, such as the distance from the radio station, closeness of other strong radio sta- tions or the presence of buildings, bridges or other large obstructions in the area.
4-5
M ultim
edia System
4 JBM001
FM reception
AM broadcasts can be received at greater distances than FM broad- casts. This is because AM radio waves are transmitted at low fre- quencies. These long distance, low frequency radio waves can follow the curvature of the earth rather than travelling straight. In addition, they curve around obstructions resulting in better signal coverage.
FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frequencies and do not bend to follow the earth's surface. Because of this, FM broadcasts generally begin to fade within short distances from the station. Also, FM signals are easily affected by buildings, moun- tains, and obstructions. This can lead to undesirable or unpleasant listen- ing conditions which might lead you to believe a problem exists with your radio. The following conditions are normal and do not indicate radio trouble:
Fading - As your vehicle moves away from the radio station, the sig- nal will weaken and sound will begin to fade. When this occurs, we suggest that you select another stronger station.
Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or large obstructions between the transmitter and your radio can dis- turb the signal causing static or flut- tering noises to occur. Reducing the treble level may lessen this effect until the disturbance clears.
4-6
Multimedia System
JBM003
FM radio station
JBM004JBM002
AM reception
Station Swapping - As an FM signal weakens, another more powerful signal near the same frequency may begin to play. This is because your radio is designed to lock onto the clearest signal. If this occurs, select another station with a stronger signal.
Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio sig- nals being received from several directions can cause distortion or fluttering. This can be caused by a direct and reflected signal from the same station, or by signals from two stations with close frequencies. If this occurs, select another station until the condition has passed.
Features of Your Vehicle Satellite radio reception You may experience difficulties in receiving SiriusXM satellite radio signals in the following situations.
If you are driving in a tunnel or a covered parking area.
If you are driving beneath the top level of a multi-level freeway.
If you are driving under a bridge. If you are driving next to a tall vehi-
cle (such as a truck or a bus) that blocks the signal.
If you are driving in a valley where the surrounding hills or peaks block the signal from the satellite.
If you are driving on a mountain road where is the signal blocked by mountains.
If you are driving in an area with tall trees that block the signal (30 ft. /10m or more), for example on an road that goes through a dense for- est.
The signal can become weak in some areas that are not covered by the SiriusXM repeater network.
4-7
M ultim
edia System
4 JBM005
SATELLITE2
SATELLITE1
Information There may also be additional unfore- seen circumstances leading to recep- tion problems with the SiriusXM
satellite radio signal.
Advisory Messages, such as 'CH Unavailable' may occur when starting SiriusXM Radio.
Using a cellular phone or a two- way radio When a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle, noise may be produced from the audio system. This does not mean that something is wrong with the audio equipment. In such a case, try to operate mobile devices as far from the audio equipment as possible.
NOTE: Order of playing files (folders) : 1. Song playing order : to
sequentially. 2. Folder playing order : If no song file is contained in the
folder, that folder is not displayed.
i
4-8
Multimedia System
When using a communication system such as a cellular phone or a radio set inside the vehicle, a separate external antenna must be fitted. When a cellular phone or a radio set is used with an internal antenna alone, it may interfere with the vehicle's electri- cal system and adversely affect safe operation of the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not use a cellular phone while driving. Stop at a safe location to use a cellular phone or set up the hands-free calling feature.
WARNING
iPod
iPod is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.
Bluetooth Wireless Technology The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by HYUNDAI is under license. Other trade- marks and trade names are those of their respective owners. A Bluetooth Wireless Technology enabled cell phone is required to use Bluetooth Wireless Technology. Bluetooth Wireless Technology phone compatibility can be checked by visiting https://www.hyundaiusa.com/blue- tooth.
Pandora
Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc. Used with permission. Pandora is only available in certain countries. Please visit http://www.pandora.com/legal for more information.
4-9
M ultim
edia System
4
4-10
Multimedia System
AUDIO (With Touch Screen)
G2H4G0000EU/G2H4G0001EU
Type A
(With Bluetooth Wireless Technology)
Type B
4-11
M ultim
edia System
4
Feature of Your Audio
Head unit
The actual image in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
(1) LCD screen Tap the screen to select a button.
(2) POWER/VOL knob Turn to adjust the volume. Press to turn the device on or off.
(3) RADIO Start FM, AM and SiriusXM*. * if equipped
(4) MEDIA Select USB(iPod), Bluetooth
Wireless Technology(BT) Audio, AUX and My Music or Pandora.
Display the media menu when two or more media are connected or when the [MEDIA] button is pressed in media mode.
(5) SEEK/TRACK Search for next station in FM or AM
radio mode. Search for next station in SiriusXM*
radio mode. Change the current song in media
mode. * if equipped
(6) RESET Shutdown and restart the system.
Type B
Type A
4-12
Multimedia System
(7) PHONE Start Bluetooth Wireless Technology
Phone mode.
(8) SETUP Access Display, Sound, Date/Time,
Bluetooth, System, Screen Saver and Display Off settings.
(9) TUNE knob Turn to navigate through the sta-
tions/songs list. Press to select an item. Type B
Type A
4-13
M ultim
edia System
4
Steering wheel remote control
The actual image in the may differ from the illustration.
(1) VOICE Pressing the button
- If Siri is not active: Starts Siri. - If Siri is active: Re-starts Siri.
Pressing and holding the button: Siri is deactivated.
(2) MODE Press the button to change the
mode in the following order: Radio Media.
Press and hold the button to turn off.
(3) MUTE Press to mute audio output. When a call is active, mic volume is
muted.
(4) VOLUME Press to adjust the volume.
(5) UP/DOWN Press the button in radio mode to
search Presets. Press and hold the button in radio
mode to search frequencies. Press the button in media mode to
change the current song. Press and hold the button in media
mode to quick search through songs.
(6) CALL Pressing the button
- If not in Bluetooth Wireless Technology Handsfree mode or receiving a phone call. First press: Display Dial Number screen. Second press: Automatically dis- play the most recently Dialed Call number.
Third press: Dial the phone num- ber entered.
- Press in the Incoming Call notifica- tion screen to accept the phone call.
- Press in Bluetooth Wireless Technology Handsfree mode to switch to the waiting call.
Pressing and holding the button (over 1.0 seconds) - If not in Bluetooth Wireless
Technology Handsfree mode or receiving a phone call, the most recently Dialed Call number is dialed.
- Press in Bluetooth Wireless Technology Handsfree mode to transfer the call to your cell phone.
- Press in cell phone mode to switch to Bluetooth Wireless Technology Handsfree mode.
(7) END Press in Bluetooth Wireless
Technology Handsfree mode to end the phone call.
Press in the incoming call screen to reject the call.
4-14
Multimedia System
Audio System Safety Warning
Do not use a cellular phone while driving. Stop at a safe location to use a cellular phone.
Do not stare at the screen while driving. Staring at the screen for prolonged periods of time could lead to traffic accidents.
Do not disassemble, assemble, or modify the audio system. Such acts could result in acci- dents, fire, or electric shock.
Using the phone while driving may lead to a lack of attention of traffic conditions and increase the likelihood of accidents. Use the phone fea- ture after parking the vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued) Exercise caution not to spill
water or introduce foreign objects into the device. Such acts could lead to smoke, fire, or product malfunction.
Please refrain from use if the screen is blank or no sound can be heard as these signs may indicate product malfunc- tion. Continued use in such conditions could lead to acci- dents (fires, electric shock) or product malfunctions.
Do not touch the antenna dur- ing thunder or lightening as such acts may lead to light- ning induced electric shock.
Do not stop or park in park- ing-restricted areas to operate the product. Such acts could lead to traffic accidents.
WARNING
Distracted Driving
Driving while distracted can result in a loss of vehicle con- trol that may lead to an acci- dent, severe personal injury, and death. The drivers primary responsibility is in the safe and legal operation of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equipment, or vehicle sys- tems which take the drivers eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permis- sible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.
WARNING
4-15
M ultim
edia System
4
Information Turn on the car ignition before using this device. Do not operate the audio system for long periods of time with the ignition turned off as such opera- tions may lead to battery discharge.
Do not subject the device to severe shock or impact. Direct pressure onto the front side of the monitor may cause damage to the LCD or touch screen.
When cleaning the device, make sure to turn off the device and use a dry and smooth cloth. Never use rough materials, chemical cloths, or solvents (alcohol, benzene, thinners, etc.). As such materials may damage the device panel or cause color/quality deteriora- tion.
Do not place beverages close to the audio system. Spilling bever- ages may lead to system mal- function.
Placing the audio system within an electromagnetic environment may result in noise interference.
Information In this case of product malfunction, please contact your dealer or vehicle service center.
Information on status icons Icons showing audio status are shown in the upper-right corner of the screen.
i
NOTICEi
Icon Description
Mute Mute engaged
Battery Remaining battery life of a connected Bluetooth
device
Handsfree + Audio stream- ing connection
Bluetooth Handsfree call and audio stream- ing available
Handsfree connection
Bluetooth Handsfree call available
Bluetooth
audio streaming Bluetooth audio streaming available
Downloading contacts
Downloading contacts through Bluetooth wire- less communications
Downloading call history
Downloading call history through Bluetooth wire- less communications
Line busy Phone call in progress
Mute mic Mic muted during a call (caller cannot hear your voice)
Phone signal strength
Display the phone signal strength for a cell phone connected by Bluetooth
4-16
Multimedia System
Radio
You can listen to FM, AM and SiriusXM* radio.
(1) Band
Switch between FM, AM and SiriusXM*. * if equipped
(2) Presets
Change the preset number on the main screen.
(3) List
Display all available stations.
(4) Menu
Navigate to the menu screen.
(5) Presets 1~40
Save or listen to favorite stations.
Switching between FM, AM and SiriusXM*
Press the [RADIO] button on the audio system to switch between FM, AM and SiriusXM*.
Select [Band] on the screen to switch between FM, AM and SiriusXM*.
* if equipped
Searching stations
Searching stations by pressing the [SEEK/TRACK] button on the prod- uct.
< Presets >
By selecting [< Presets >], the but- tons for Presets 1~40 displayed on the screen can be changed.
Presets 1~40
Press the button to listen to a preset. Press and hold the button number to save the current station. If the slot is empty, simply pressing saves the station to the slot.
List
A list of all available stations is dis- played. Press the desired station. Favorite stations can be saved to [Presets] by selecting the [+].
Menu
Select [Menu], and select the desired function. Presets: Save up to 40 frequently
used stations. To listen to a preset, press the desired station. Press and hold the desired slot from 1 through 40. This saves the current station in the selected slot. If the slot is empty, simply pressing saves the station to the slot.
Scan: All stations available in the current location of the vehicle are played for five seconds each.
Information: View detailed station information.
Sound Settings: Audio sound set- tings can be changed.
Station Info: Set whether to receive station information such as Station Name, Program Type or Information.
4-17
M ultim
edia System
4
Information - SiriusXM
Satellite Radio information (if equipped)
Satellite Radio channels:
Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a 3-month trial subscription to the Sirius Select package. Youll get over variable channels, including commer- cial free music, plus all your favorite sports, exclusive talk, entertainment, and a selection of premium program- ming. For more information and a complete list of SiriusXM channels, visit siriusxm.com in the United States, siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio reception factors:
To receive the satellite signal, your vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite radio reception perform- ance:
(Continued)
(Continued)
- Antenna obstructions: For opti- mal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio service: SiriusXM is a subscription-based satel- lite radio service that broadcasts music, sports, news and entertainment pro- gramming to radio receivers, which are available for installation in motor vehi- cles or factory installed, as well as for the home, portable and wireless devices, and through an Internet connection on a personal computer.
Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed SiriusXM Satellite Radio system include:
- Hardware and an introductory trial subscription term, which begins on the date of sale or lease of the vehicle.
- For a small upgrade fee, access to SiriusXM music channels, and other select channels over the Internet using any computer con- nected to the Internet (U.S. cus- tomers only).
(Continued)
(Continued)
SiriusXM services require a sub- scription sold separately, or as a package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If you decide to continue service after your trial, the subscription plan you choose will automatically renew thereafter and you will be charged according to your chosen payment method at then-current rates. Fees and taxes apply. To cancel you must call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXM Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.sir- iusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data services are available only in the 48 contiguous states, DC and Puerto Rico (with coverage limita- tions). SiriusXM satellite service is also available in Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca. All fees and pro- gramming subject to change. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.
i
4-18
Multimedia System
SiriusXM
(1) Band
Switch between FM, AM and SiriusXM.
(2) Presets
Change the preset number on the main screen.
(3) List
Display all channels.
(4) Menu
Navigate to the menu screen.
(5) Presets 1~40
Save or listen to favorite channels.
(6) Play Live
Switches to the live broadcast mode.
(7) Skip Backward
Repeats the previously broadcasted program. - Holding for less than 0.8 seconds:
Moves to the previous segment. - Holding for over 1.0 seconds: Moves
to the previous 5 seconds.
(8) Play/Pause
Pauses/plays the current broadcast- ing program.
(9) Skip Forward
Moves to the next segment.
Switching between FM, AM and SiriusXM
Press the [RADIO] button on the audio system to switch between FM, AM and SiriusXM.
Select [Band] on the screen to switch between FM, AM and SiriusXM.
Searching channels
Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to search channels.
< Presets >
By selecting [< Presets >], the but- tons for Presets 1~40 displayed on the screen can be changed.
Presets 1~40
Press the button to listen to a preset. Press and hold the button number to save the current channel.
List
A list of all channels is displayed. Press the desired channel. Favorite channels can be saved to [Presets] by selecting the [+].
4-19
M ultim
edia System
4
Menu
Select [Menu], and select the desired function. Presets: Save up to 40 frequently
used channels. To listen to a preset, press the desired channel. Press and hold the desired slot from 1 through 40. This saves the current channel in the selected slot. If the slot is empty, simply pressing saves the channel to the slot.
Categories: Channels can be searched by category.
Direct Tune: The desired channel can be selected by entering num- bers.
Sound Settings: Audio sound set- tings can be changed.
Tag Song: Tag the current song information. When an Apple device (iPhone, iPod) is connected, tagged song information is sent automatically to the connected device.
Information Up to 50 songs can be tagged.
Scan: All channels available in the vehicles current location are played for ten seconds each.
Program Schedule: View the Program schedule.
Featured Favorites: The Featured Favorites feature allows SiriusXM to broadcast additional presets. - Example 1: During holidays,
Holiday Music might include all SiriusXM channels that are playing holiday music for easy access by users.
Multiple sets of Featured Favorites data can be broadcast by SiriusXM and can change from time to time.
Information: View detailed channel information.
Category Lock: Search or scan channels in the current category only.
Media
Information - Using MP3 Supported audio formats
File formats other than the formats above may not be recognized or playable. Information such as file name may not be displayed.
NOTICE
i
i
Compressed audio formats
MPEG1 Audio Layer3
MPEG2 Audio Layer3
MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3
Windows Media Audio Ver 7.X & 8.X
4-20
Multimedia System
Range of supported compressed file types
1. Bitrate range (Kbps)
2. Sampling frequency (Hz)
The sound quality of MP3/WMA compressed files may vary depend- ing on the bitrate. (A higher bitrate can have better sound quality.)
The product only recognizes files with the MP3 or WMA extension. Files without one of these exten- sions are not recognized.
3. Number of recognizable folders and files
Folders: 2,000 for USB Files: 6,000 for USB No recognition limit for folder hier-
archies
4. Character display range (Unicode) Filenames: Up to 64 English char-
acters (64 Korean characters) Foldernames: Up to 32 English
characters (32 Korean characters)
Languages supported (Unicode support)
Korean: 2,604 characters English: 94 characters Common Chinese characters: 4,888
characters Special symbols: 986 characters
Japanese/Simplified Chinese char- acters are not supported.
NOTICE
B IT
R AT
E (k
bp s)
MPEG1 MPEG2 MPEG2.5 WMA
Layer3 High Range
32 8 8 48
40 16 16 64
48 24 24 80
56 32 32 96
64 40 40 128
80 48 48 160
96 56 56 192
112 64 64
128 80 80
160 96 96
192 112 112
224 128 128
256 144 144
320 160 160
MPEG1 MPEG2 MPEG2.5 WMA
44100 22050 11025 32000
48000 24000 12000 44100
32000 16000 8000 48000
4-21
M ultim
edia System
4
Information - Using the USB Devices
Starting the vehicle while a USB device is connected can damage the device. Please disconnect USB devices before starting the vehicle.
Starting the vehicle or stopping the engine while an external USB device is connected can result in failure of the external USB device to operate.
Be cautious of static electricity when connecting/disconnecting external USB devices.
An encrypted MP3 player is not rec- ognized when connected as an exter- nal device.
External USB devices may not be recognized, depending on the state of the external USB device.
Only products with byte/sectors for- matted at 4 KB or lower are recog- nized.
Only USB devices in FAT12/16/32 format are recognized; NTFS and ExFAT file systems are not recog- nized.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Some USB devices are not recog- nized due to compatibility issues.
Do not touch the USB connections.
Connecting and disconnecting USB devices rapidly over a short period of time can cause equipment failure.
Abnormal sounds may be audible when the USB device is disconnected.
Turn the audio off before connecting or disconnecting external USB devices.
Recognition may take longer depending on the type, capacity or file format of the external USB device. This is not a product mal- function.
Use of USB devices for purposes other than playing music files is pro- hibited.
Image display and video playback are not supported.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Use of USB accessories, including charge and heat though the USB I/F, can lead to reduced product per- formance or malfunctions. Do not use USB devices or accessories for these purposes.
Use of aftermarket USB hubs and extension cables can result in the vehicles audio system failing to rec- ognize your USB device. Connect the USB device directly to the multi- media port of your vehicle.
When using high-capacity USB devices with logical drive divisions, only files saved on the highest level logical drive can be played.
If applications are loaded on a USB drive, file playback may fail.
Some MP3 players, cell phones, dig- ital cameras, etc. (USB devices that are not recognized as mobile stor- age) may not operate normally when connected.
USB charging may not be supported by some mobile devices.
(Continued)
i
4-22
Multimedia System
(Continued)
Operation is guaranteed only for standard (Metal Cover Type) USB Memory drives.
Operation of HDD, CF, SD and mem- ory stick devices is not guaranteed.
DRM (Digital Rights Management) files cannot be played.
SD-type USB memory, CF-type USB memory, and other USB mem- ory devices that require adapters for connection are not supported.
Proper operation of USB HDDs or USB drives with connectors that loosen due to vehicle vibrations is not guaranteed. (iStick, etc.)
USB products that are used as key chains or cell phone accessories may damage the USB jack and affect proper file playback. Please refrain from use. Use only products with plug connectors, as shown in the follow- ing illustration.
When MP3 devices or cell phones are connected simultaneously through AUX, BT Audio and USB modes, a popping noise or malfunc- tion may occur.
USB
(1) Repeat
Enable/disable repeat.
(2) Shuffle
Enable/disable shuffle play.
(3) List
View a list of all songs.
(4) Menu
Navigate to the menu screen.
(5) Album Image
View song info.
(6) Pause
Pause or play music.
(7) Playback progress
Press to skip to the desired location.
Playback
Press the [MEDIA] button, and select [USB].
Connect a USB drive to the USB port to automatically play files on the USB drive.
Changing songs
Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to play the previous or next song.
Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK] button to rewind or fast forward the currently playing song.
Search songs by turning TUNE knob, and press the knob to play.
4-23
M ultim
edia System
4 Selecting songs from a list
Select [List] to see a list of songs available for play. Select and play the desired song.
Repeat play
Select [Repeat] to enable or disable Repeat all, Repeat current song, Repeat folder or Repeat category. Repeat all: All songs in the
playlist are repeated. Repeat current song: The cur-
rently playing song is repeated. Repeat folder: All songs in the
current folder are repeated. Repeat category: Repeat all
songs in the current category.
Information The repeat folder function is available only when songs are playing from the [File] category under [List].
Shuffle play
Select [Shuffle] to enable/disable Shuffle, Shuffle folder or Shuffle category play. Shuffle: Songs are played in
random order. Shuffle folder: Songs within
the current folder are played in ran- dom order.
Shuffle category: Songs within the current category are played in random order.
Menu
Select [Menu], and select the desired function.
Save to My Music: Songs on your USB device can be saved to My Music.
(1) File: Select a file to save.
(2) Mark All: Select all files.
(3) Unmark All: Deselect all files.
i
4-24
Multimedia System
(4) Save: Save the selected file(s). - Select the files you want to save,
and select [Save]. This saves the selected files to My Music.
- Saving is canceled if phone calls are received or made while saving.
- If Siri is activated, phone calls are received or made while sav- ing, saving will be canceled.
- Up to 6,000 files can be saved. - The currently playing file on the
USB device cannot be changed while saving.
- My Music cannot be used while saving.
- Up to 700 MB can be saved. Information: Detailed information
on the currently playing song is dis- played.
Sound Settings: Audio sound set- tings can be changed.
Information - Using the iPod Devices
To use the audio systems iPod con- trol function, use the dedicated cable provided with your iPod.
Connecting the iPod to the vehicle during play may result in a loud noise that lasts about one to two sec- onds. Connect the iPod to the vehi- cle after stopping or pausing play.
Connect the iPod with the vehicle in the ACC ON state to begin charging.
When connecting the iPod cable, be sure to fully push the cable into the port.
When EQ effects are enabled simul- taneously on external devices, such as iPods and the audio system, the EQ effects may overlap, causing sound quality deterioration or dis- tortion. Deactivate the EQ function for all external devices, if possible.
Noise may occur when your iPod
or the AUX port is connected. Disconnect and store separately when not in use.
(Continued)
(Continued)
There may be noise if the audio sys- tem is used with an iPod or AUX external device connected to the power jack. In these cases, discon- nect the iPod or external device from the power jack.
Play may be interrupted, or device malfunctions may occur depending on the characteristics of your iPod/iPhone.
Play may fail if your iPhone is con- nected through both Bluetooth Wireless Technology and USB. In this case, select Dock connector or Bluetooth Wireless Technology on your iPhone to change the sound output settings.
If your software version does not support the communication proto- col or your iPod is not recognized due to device failure, anomalies or defects, iPod mode cannot be used.
iPod nano (5th generation) devices may not be recognized if the battery is low. Charge sufficiently before use.
(Continued)
i
4-25
M ultim
edia System
4
(Continued)
The search and song play order in the iPod device may be different from the search order in the audio system.
If the iPod has failed due to an internal defect, please reset the iPod (consult your iPod manual).
Depending on the software version, the iPod may fail to sync with the system. If the media is removed or disconnected before recognition, the previous mode may not be restored (iPad cannot be charged).
Cables other than the 1-meter cable provided with iPod/iPhone prod- ucts may not be recognized.
When other music apps are used on your iPod, the system sync func- tion may fail due to malfunction of the iPod application.
iPod
(1) Repeat
Enable/disable repeat.
(2) Shuffle
Enable/disable shuffle play.
(3) List
View a list of all songs.
(4) Menu
Navigate to the menu screen.
(5) Album Image
View song info.
(6) Pause
Pause or play music.
(7) Playback progress
Press to skip to the desired location.
Playback
Connect your iPod to the audio USB port, press the [MEDIA] but- ton, and select [iPod].
Changing songs
Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to play the previous or next song.
Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK] button to rewind or fast forward the currently playing song.
Search songs by turning the TUNE knob, and press the knob to play.
Selecting songs from a list
Select [List] to see a list of songs available for play. Select and play the desired song.
4-26
Multimedia System
Repeat play
Select [Repeat] to enable or disable Repeat category, Repeat current song. Repeat category: Repeat all
songs in the current category. Repeat current song: The cur-
rently playing song is repeated.
Shuffle play
Select [Shuffle] to enable/disable Shuffle category play. Shuffle category: Songs within
the current category are played in random order.
Menu
Select [Menu], and select the desired function. Information: Detailed info on the
currently playing song is displayed. Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed.
When other music programs are running
When songs saved on your iPod
are playing through a separate music app, the following screen is dis- played. (1) Play/Pause: Pause or play music.
(2) Play iPod Files: Play music saved on your iPod.
(3) Album Image: View playback info.
Information Operation cannot be carried out cor- rectly due to iPod application mal- function.
Play iPod Files
Select [Play iPod Files] to play songs saved on your iPod. If there are no songs saved on your iPod, the [Play iPod Files] is dis- abled.
i
4-27
M ultim
edia System
4
Information - Using Bluetooth Wireless
Technology Audio Bluetooth Wireless Technology
Audio mode can only be used if a Bluetooth Wireless Technology- enabled phone is connected. Only devices that support Bluetooth Wireless Technology audio can be used.
If the Bluetooth Wireless Technology-enabled phone is dis- connected during play, the music stops.
When the TRACK UP/DOWN but- tons are used during Bluetooth Wireless Technology audio stream- ing, a popping noise or sound inter- ruptions may occur, depending on the cell phone device.
Depending on the cell phone model, the audio streaming function may not be supported.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If a phone call is made or received when music is playing in Bluetooth Wireless Technology Audio mode, the call may mix with the music.
When returning to Bluetooth Wireless Technology Audio mode after ending a call, play might not resume automatically for some cell phone models.
Bluetooth Wireless Technology Handsfree is a feature that enables drivers to practice safe driving. Connecting the car audio system with a Bluetooth
Wireless Technology phone allows the user to conveniently make calls, receive calls, and manage the phone book. Before using the Bluetooth Wireless Technology, carefully read the contents of this users manual.
Excessive use or operations while driving may lead to negli- gent driving practices and be the cause of accidents.
Do not operate the device exces- sively while driving.
Viewing the screen for pro- longed periods of time is dan- gerous and may lead to acci- dents.
When driving, view the screen only for short periods of time.
NOTICEi
4-28
Multimedia System
Bluetooth Wireless Technology (BT) Audio
(1) Repeat
Enable/disable repeat.
(2) Shuffle
Enable/disable shuffle play.
(3) Menu
Navigate to the menu screen.
(4) Play/Pause
Pause or play music.
Information Some cell phone models may not
support particular functions.
Bluetooth Wireless Technology audio volume is synced with cell phone media volume.
Playback
Press the [MEDIA] button, and select [BT Audio].
Changing songs
Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to play the previous or next song.
Information Some cell phones may not support this function.
Repeat play
Select [Repeat] to enable or disable Repeat all, Repeat current song or Repeat category. Repeat all: All songs in the
playlist are repeated. Repeat current song: The cur-
rently playing song is repeated. Repeat category: Repeat all
songs in the current category.
Information The repeat play function is engaged, depending on the operation of the con- nected Bluetooth Wireless Technology device.
Shuffle play
Select [Shuffle] to enable/disable Shuffle, Shuffle category play. Shuffle: Songs are played in
random order. Shuffle category: Songs within
the current category are played in random order.
i
i
i
4-29
M ultim
edia System
4
Information The shuffle function is engaged, depend- ing on the operation of the connected Bluetooth Wireless Technology device.
Menu
Select [Menu], and select the desired function. Connections:The currently connected
Bluetooth Wireless Technology device can be changed.
Information: Detailed information on the currently playing song is displayed.
Sound Settings: Audio sound set- tings can be changed.
AUX
Running AUX
Press the [MEDIA] button, and select [AUX].
Connect the external device con- nection jack to the AUX terminal to run AUX.
(1) Sound Settings: Audio sound set- tings can be changed.
My Music
(1) Repeat
Enable/disable repeat.
(2) Shuffle
Enable/disable shuffle play.
(3) List
View a list of all songs.
(4) Menu
Navigate to the menu screen.
(5) Album Image
View song info.
i
4-30
Multimedia System
(6) Pause
Pause or play music.
(7) Playback progress
Press to skip to the desired location.
Playback
Press the [MEDIA] button, and select [My Music]. My Music cannot be selected if it
does not contain music. Check the content of your USB
drive before saving music to My Music.
Changing songs
Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to play the previous or next song. Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK]
button to rewind or fast forward the currently playing song.
Search songs by turning the TUNE knob and press the knob to play.
Selecting songs from a list
Select [List] to see a list of songs available for play. Select and play the desired song.
Repeat play
Select [Repeat] to enable or disable Repeat all, Repeat current song or Repeat category. Repeat all: All songs in the
playlist are repeated. Repeat current song: The cur-
rently playing song is repeated. Repeat category: Repeat all
songs in the current category.
Shuffle play
Select [Shuffle] to enable/disable Shuffle, Shuffle category play. Shuffle: Songs are played in
random order. Shuffle category: Songs within
the current category are played in random order.
Menu
Select [Menu], and select the desired function.
Delete Files: You can delete files from My Music.
(1) File: Select saved file.
(2) Mark All: Select all files. (3) Unmark All: Deselect all files.
4-31
M ultim
edia System
4
(4) Delete: Delete the selected file(s). - Select the file to delete, then
select [Delete] to delete it. - If Siri is activated, phone calls
are received or made during delete, delete will be canceled.
Add to Playlist: Frequently played songs can be paired in a [Playlist]. - Songs can be played from the
[Playlist]. Information: Detailed info on the
currently playing song is displayed. Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed.
Delete from Playlist
When a song in the playlist is play- ing, select [Menu] and select [Delete from Playlist]. Select the song to delete, then select [Delete].
Pandora
(1) Thumbs Down
If you dont like the song that is cur- rently playing, press this button to skip to the next song and to minimize the number of songs from similar genres.
Information Pandora limits the number of times that you can skip to the next song.
(2) Thumbs Up
If you like the song that is currently playing, press this button. Pandora
will play more songs from the same genre.
Information The settings of this function cannot be reset.
(3) Skip
Skip to the next song.
Information Pandora limits the number of times that you can skip to the next song.
(4) Stations
Display the station list.
(5) Menu
Navigate to the menu screen.
(6) Album Image
View song info.
i
i
i
4-32
Multimedia System
(7) Pause
Pause or play music.
(8) Shared Station
Indicate that the station is already shared.
Information Thumbs Up/Down is not available for shared stations.
Playback
Press the [MEDIA] button, and select [Pandora].
Information Pandora: Connect a smartphone to
listen to Pandora Radio
Apple devices must be connected via USB cable and Android devices must be connected via Bluetooth Wireless Technology in order to run Pandora.
Menu
Select [Menu] and select the desired function. Bookmark: Add the song that is
currently playing to your book- marks list.
Information You can view your bookmarked
songs on your online Pandora pro- file. Go to pandora.com, then go to [Your profile] above the player. That will bring up a page with your sta- tions and bookmarked songs.
The settings of this function cannot be reset.
Quit: Exit Pandora mode and return to previous audio mode.
Information: Detailed info on the currently playing song is displayed.
Sound Settings: Audio sound set- tings can be changed.
Phone
Information - Using the Bluetooth
Wireless Technology Cellular Phone
Bluetooth Wireless Technology is a near-field wireless networking tech- nology that uses the 2.4 GHz fre- quency to connect various devices within a certain distance wirelessly.
The technology is used in PCs, peripherals, Bluetooth Wireless Technology phones, tablet PCs, household appliances and automo- biles. Devices supporting Bluetooth Wireless Technology can exchange data at high speeds without physical cable connections.
Bluetooth Wireless Technology Handsfree devices enable convenient access to phone functions through cell phones equipped with Bluetooth Wireless Technology.
Some Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices may not be supported by the Bluetooth Wireless Technology Handsfree function.
(Continued)
i
i
i
i
4-33
M ultim
edia System
4
(Continued)
When Bluetooth Wireless Technology is connected and calls are attempted through a connected cell phone from outside the vehicle, the call is connected through the Bluetooth Wireless Technology Handsfree function of the vehicle.
Please be sure to disconnect the Bluetooth Wireless Technology Handsfree function through your Bluetooth Wireless Technology device or the audio screen.
See https://www.hyundaiusa.com/ BlueTooth/ for a list of supported Bluetooth devices.
Safety precautions
The Bluetooth Wireless Technology Handsfree function helps drivers to drive safely. By connecting a Bluetooth Wireless Technology- enabled phone to the vehicles audio system, phone calls can be made and received through the audio system and contacts can be managed. Consult the user manual before use.
Excessive manipulation of controls while driving, making it difficult to pay attention to the road ahead, can lead to accidents. Do not oper- ate the device excessively while driving.
Looking at the screen for a pro- longed time increases the risk of accidents. Keep time spent looking at the screen to a minimum.
Precautions when connecting Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices
The vehicle supports the following Bluetooth Wireless Technology functions. Some Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices may not sup- port some functions. 1) Bluetooth Wireless Technology
Handsfree phone calls 2) Operations during a call (Private,
Switch, Mic Vol. controls) 3) Download call history saved to the
Bluetooth Wireless Technology device
4) Download contacts saved to the Bluetooth Wireless Technology device
5) Automatic contacts/call history download when Bluetooth
Wireless Technology is connected 6) Automatic Bluetooth Wireless
Technology device connection when the vehicle is started
7) Bluetooth Wireless Technology audio streaming playback
Before connecting the audio system to your device, make sure your device supports Bluetooth Wireless Technology.
4-34
Multimedia System
Even if your device supports Bluetooth Wireless Technology, a Bluetooth Wireless Technology con- nection cannot be established if the devices Bluetooth Wireless Technology function is switched off. Search and connect with the Bluetooth Wireless Technology function enabled.
Pair or connect Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices to the audio system with the vehicle at a stand- still.
If a Bluetooth Wireless Technology connection is lost due to abnormal conditions while a Bluetooth
Wireless Technology device is con- nected (communication range exceeded, device power OFF, communication errors, etc.), the disconnected Bluetooth Wireless Technology device is searched for and automatically reconnected.
If you want to disable the Bluetooth
Wireless Technology device auto-con- nect function, turn the Bluetooth
Wireless Technology function OFF on your device. Consult the user manu- als for individual devices to see whether Bluetooth Wireless Technology is supported.
Handsfree call quality and volume may vary depending on the type of Bluetooth Wireless Technology device.
Some Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices are subject to intermittent Bluetooth Wireless Technology connection failures. In this case, use the following method. 1) Turn the Bluetooth Wireless
Technology function off on your Bluetooth Wireless Technology device Turn it on and try again.
2) Delete the paired device from both the audio system and Bluetooth Wireless Technology device, then pair again.
3) Power down your Bluetooth
Wireless Technology device Turn it on and try again.
4) Completely remove the battery from your Bluetooth Wireless Technology device; reinsert it, reboot, and attempt connection.
5) Restart the vehicle and reat- tempt connection.
Pairing a Bluetooth Wireless Technology device Information on pairing Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices
Pairing refers to the process of pair- ing Bluetooth Wireless Technology cell phones or devices with the sys- tem prior to connection.This is a nec- essary procedure for Bluetooth
Wireless Technology connection and usage.
Up to five devices can be paired. Pairing Bluetooth device is not
allowed while vehicle is moving.
Pairing the first Bluetooth Wireless Technology device
Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system or the [CALL] button on the steering wheel remote control Search for the vehicle from the Bluetooth Wireless Technology device, and pair Enter the passkey on the Bluetooth Wireless Technology device or approve passkey Bluetooth Wireless Technology pair- ing completed.
4-35
M ultim
edia System
4
1. When the [PHONE] button on the audio or the [CALL] button on the steering wheel remote control is pressed, the following screen is dis- played. Devices can now be paired.
(1) Vehicle Name: Searched name in Bluetooth Wireless Technology device.
Information The vehicle name in the image above is an example. Refer to your device for the actual name of your device.
2. Search for available Bluetooth
Wireless Technology devices in the Bluetooth Wireless Technology menu of your Bluetooth Wireless Technology device (cell phone, etc.).
3. Confirm that the vehicle name in your Bluetooth Wireless Technology device matches the vehicle name shown on the audio screen, then select it.
4-1. For devices that require passkey entry, a passkey entry screen is shown on your Bluetooth
Wireless Technology device. - Enter the passkey 0000, in your
Bluetooth Wireless Technology device.
4-2. For devices that require passkey confirmation, the following screen is shown on the audio system. A 6-digit passkey input screen is shown in the Bluetooth
Wireless Technology device. - After confirming that the 6-digit
passkey on the audio screen and the Bluetooth Wireless Technology device are identical, select [OK] in your Bluetooth
Wireless Technology device.
Information The 6-digit passkey in the image above is an example. Refer to your vehicle for the actual passkey.
i
i
4-36
Multimedia System
Pairing a second Bluetooth Wireless Technology device
Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system Select [Bluetooth] Select [Connections] Select [Add New].
- The pairing procedure from this point is identical to [Pairing the first Bluetooth device].
Information Bluetooth Wireless Technology
standby mode lasts for three min- utes. If a device is not paired within three minutes, pairing is canceled. Start over from the beginning.
For most Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices, a connection is established automatically after pair- ing. Some devices, however, require separate confirmation when con- necting after pairing. Be sure to check your Bluetooth Wireless Technology device after pairing to confirm that it has connected.
Connecting Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices If there are no connected devices
Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system or the [CALL] button in the steering wheel remote control List of paired Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices Select the desired Bluetooth Wireless Technology device from the list Connect Bluetooth
Wireless Technology.
i
4-37
M ultim
edia System
4
If there are connected devices
Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system Select [Settings] Select [Connections] Select Bluetooth
Wireless Technology device to connect Select [Connect] Connect Bluetooth
Wireless Technology.
Information Only one Bluetooth Wireless
Technology device can be connected at a time.
When a Bluetooth Wireless Technology device is connected, other devices cannot be paired.
Accepting/rejecting phone calls Receiving phone calls with Bluetooth
Wireless Technology connected.
(1) Caller name: If the caller number is in your contacts, the correspon- ding name is displayed.
(2) Incoming phone number: Incoming phone number is displayed.
(3) Accept: Accept call. (4) Reject: Reject call.
Information When the incoming call screen is
displayed, audio mode and the set- tings screen cannot be shown. Only call volume control is supported.
Some Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices may not support the call reject function.
Some Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices may not support the phone number display function.
i
i
4-38
Multimedia System
Operation during calls Incoming call with Bluetooth Wireless Technology connected Select [Accept].
(1) Call duration: Call duration display. (2) Caller name: If the caller number is
in your contacts, the corresponding name is displayed.
(3) Incoming phone number: Incoming phone number is displayed.
(4) Keypad: Number keypad for Automatic Response Service input is displayed.
(5) Private: Call is transferred to a cell phone.
(6) Outgoing Volume:Adjust outgoing voice volume.
(7) End: End call.
Information Some Bluetooth Wireless Technology
devices may not support the Private function.
The outgoing voice volume may vary depending on the type of Bluetooth
device. If the outgoing voice volume is too high or low, adjust the Outgoing Volume.
Favorites Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system Select [Favorites] Favorites list displayed.
(1) Favorites list: A list of paired favorites is displayed. Connect a call when selected.
(2) Add to Favorites: Add a down- loaded phone number to favorites.
(3) Delete: Delete a saved favorite.
Information Up to 20 favorites can be paired for
each paired Bluetooth Wireless Technology device.
Favorites can be accessed when the Bluetooth Wireless Technology device they were paired from is con- nected.
The audio system does not down- load favorites from Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices. Favorites must be newly saved before use.
To add to favorites, contacts must be downloaded first.
Saved favorites are not updated even if the contacts of the connected Bluetooth Wireless Technology device are changed. In this case, favorites need to be deleted and added again.
i
i
4-39
M ultim
edia System
4
Call history Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system Select [Call history] Call history is displayed.
(1) Call history: Display the down- loaded call history list. Connect a call when selected.
(2) Sort by:Sort by all calls, dialed calls, received calls or missed calls.
(3) Download: Download call history from connected Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices.
Information Up to 50 dialed, received and missed
calls are saved.
When the latest call history is received, the existing call history is deleted.
Contacts Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system Select [Contacts] Select letter (ABC) Contacts dis- played.
(1) Contacts: Display downloaded contacts. Connect a call when selected.
(2) Download: Download contacts from connected Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices.
Information Only supported contacts format can
be downloaded and displayed from the Bluetooth Wireless Technology device, contacts from some applica- tions will not be included.
Up to 2,000 contacts can be saved.
In some cases, additional confirmation from your Bluetooth Wireless Technology device is necessary when downloading contacts. If downloading of contacts unsuccessful, consult your Bluetooth Wireless Technology device's settings or the audio screen to approve the download.
Contacts without phone numbers are not displayed.
i
i
4-40
Multimedia System
Dial Press the [PHONE] button on the audio Select [Dial].
(1) Phone number entry window: The phone number entered using the keypad is displayed.
(2) Clear - Press to delete individual digits. - Press and hold to delete the
entire phone number. (3) Keypad: Enter phone number. (4) Bluetooth Wireless Technology
Phone name - The name of the connected
Bluetooth Wireless Technology device is displayed.
- Contacts matching the keypad number/letter input are displayed.
(5) Call - Enter and select a phone num-
ber to call. - Select without entering a phone
number to see the most recent dialed call.
Connections Press the [PHONE] button on the audio Select [Connections]. - For connections setting, refer to
Setup Select [Bluetooth] Select [Connections] page.
Settings Press the [PHONE] button on the audio Select [Settings]. - For phone Setup, refer to Setup
page Select [Bluetooth].
Siri
Information - Using Siri Android device is not supported to
use Siri.
If you want to use Siri, you have to connect your iOS device to multime- dia system through Bluetooth Wireless Technology. (Please check whether your iOS device supports Siri and turning Siri On)
If the iOS version is changed, the functions and response may be dif- ferent according to the iOS device and the latest version.
Siri automatically stops in the fol- lowing events.
1)Outgoing and incoming phone calls.
2)Media (USB, etc.) is connected. (Siri mode is maintained when iPods are connected)
3)Rear camera is activated (option).
4)Vehicle is started or engine is turned off.
5)Screen transition buttons, such as RADIO or MEDIA, are selected.
(Continued)
i
4-41
M ultim
edia System
4
(Continued)
6)When a pop-up message is dis- played on the screen due to acci- dental execution of Siri.
The microphone is located above the drivers seat. To ensure proper Siri, state your voice while maintaining proper driving posture.
Starting Siri Press the [VOICE] button on the steering wheel remote control to start Siri and see the screen.
(1) Speak: Re-start Siri. (2) Exit: End Siri.
Information Functions and feedbacks from voice
commands via Siri are executed in the iOS device.
The Audio system only supports "Phone" related functions, other functions will be performed in your iOS device.
Setup
Access Display, Sound, Date/Time, Bluetooth, System, Screen Saver and Display Off settings. Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system.
Display Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system Select [Display]. Mode: Audio screen brightness can
be adjusted to the time of day. Illumination: The brightness of the
audio screen can be changed.
i
4-42
Multimedia System
Sound Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system Select [Sound]. Position: Sound balance and pan-
ning can be adjusted. Tone: Sound tone color can be
adjusted. Speed dependent volume:
Automatically adjust volume based on vehicle speed.
Beep: Select whether to play a beep sound when the screen is touched.
Date/Time Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system Select [Date/Time]. Set Time: Set the time displayed on
the audio screen. Time Format: Choose between 12-
hour and 24-hour time formats. Set Date: Set the date displayed on
the audio screen.
Bluetooth Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system Select [Bluetooth]. Connections: Control pairing, dele-
tion, connection and disconnection of Blluetooth Wireless Technology devices.
Auto Connection Priority: Set the connection priority of Bluetooth
Wireless Technology devices when the vehicle is started.
Download Contacts: Contacts can be downloaded from connected Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices.
Bluetooth Voice Prompts*: Play or mute voice prompts for Bluetooth
Wireless Technology device pair- ing, connection and errors. * if equipped
Information When paired devices are deleted,
the call history and contacts of the device saved to the audio system are deleted.
For Bluetooth Wireless Technology connections with low connection priority, some time may be required for the connection to be established.
Contacts can be downloaded only from the currently connected Bluetooth Wireless Technology device.
If no Bluetooth Wireless Technology device is connected, the Download Contacts button is disabled.
i
Date/Time Setting Distraction
Adjusting the date/time setting while driving can result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal- injury, and death.
WARNING
4-43
M ultim
edia System
4
System Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system Select [System]. Memory Information: View My
Music memory usage. Language: Change the user lan-
guage. Default: Reset the audio system. System Information: At the System
Information screen, Software version information, updates are available. - System Update: At the System
Information screen, insert the USB memory with the latest file downloaded, and then select the [Update] to begin updating. The system with then reboot auto- matically.
Information The system resets to the default val-
ues, and all saved data and settings are lost.
This product needs supplemented software updates and additional functions, which collectively may take some time to complete, depend- ing on the amount of data.
If the Power is disconnected or the USB is removed during an update, the data might be damaged. Please wait until the update is complete while engine is on.
Screen Saver Set the information displayed when the audio system is switched off or the screen is turned off. Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system Select [Screen Saver]. Analog: An analog clock is dis-
played. Digital: A digital clock is displayed. None: No information is displayed.
Display Off To prevent glare, the screen can be turned off with the audio system in operation. Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system Select [Display Off].
Information Use 'Screen Saver' to set the informa- tion to be displayed when the screen is turned off.
i
i
FCC
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a resi- dential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or tel- evision reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to cor- rect the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Caution: Any changes or modifications to this device not explicitly approved by manufacturer could void your authority to operate this equipment.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, includ- ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum 20cm between the radiator and your body. This trans- mitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter unless authorized to do so by the FCC.
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
4-44
Multimedia System
Driving your vehicle
5
Before Driving ........................................................5-4 Before Entering the Vehicle ...........................................5-4 Before Starting ..................................................................5-4
Engine Start/Stop Button.....................................5-6 Engine Start/Stop Button Positions .............................5-7 Starting the Vehicle ..........................................................5-9 Turning Off the Vehicle .................................................5-11
Dual Clutch Transmission....................................5-12 Dual Clutch Transmission Operation ..........................5-12 Shift Lever Position........................................................5-16 Paddle Shifter ..................................................................5-19 Parking...............................................................................5-20 Good Driving Practices ..................................................5-20
Coasting Guide (Plug-in hybrid vehicle) ..........5-22 Braking System ....................................................5-23
Power Brakes...................................................................5-23 Disc Brake Wear Indicator ............................................5-24 Parking Brake...................................................................5-24 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ....................................5-26 Electronic Stability Control (ESC)................................5-28 Vehicle Stability Management (VSM).........................5-31 Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) ....................................5-33 Good Braking Practices.................................................5-33
Blind Spot Detection System (BSD) ..................5-34 BSD (Blind Spot Detection) / LCA (Lane Change Assist).............................................5-35 RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) ..................................5-37 Detecting sensor .............................................................5-40 Limitations of the system .............................................5-41
Autonomous (Automatic) Emergency Braking (AEB).......................................................5-43
System Setting and Activation.....................................5-43 AEB Warning Message and System Control ............5-45 AEB Sensor.......................................................................5-47 System Malfunction .......................................................5-49 Limitations of the System.............................................5-51
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).................5-56 LKAS Operation ...............................................................5-57 Warning Light and Message.........................................5-61 Limitations of the System.............................................5-62 LKAS Function Change ..................................................5-63
Cruise Control.......................................................5-64 Cruise Control Operation...............................................5-64
5
Smart Cruise Control System .............................5-69 Smart Cruise Control Speed .........................................5-70 Smart Cruise Control Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance .............................................................................5-75 Sensor to Detect Distance to the Vehicle Ahead ...5-77 To Adjust the Sensitivity of Smart Cruise Control ......................................................5-79 To Convert to Cruise Control Mode............................5-80 Limitations of the System.............................................5-80
Special Driving Conditions ..................................5-86 Hazardous Driving Conditions......................................5-86 Rocking the Vehicle ........................................................5-86 Smooth Cornering ...........................................................5-87 Driving at Night................................................................5-87 Driving in the Rain ..........................................................5-87 Driving in Flooded Areas...............................................5-88 Highway Driving...............................................................5-88
Winter Driving ......................................................5-89 Snow or Icy Conditions..................................................5-89 Winter Precautions.........................................................5-91
Vehicle Load Limit................................................5-93 Tire Loading Information Label ...................................5-94
Trailer Towing.......................................................5-98
5-3
Driving your vehicle
5
Carbon monoxide (CO) gas is toxic. Breathing CO can cause unconsciousness and death. Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide which cannot be seen or smelled.
Do not inhale engine exhaust. If at any time you smell engine exhaust inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately. Exposure to CO can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.
Be sure the exhaust system does not leak. The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the vehicle, have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not run the engine in an enclosed area. Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Run the engine only long enough to start the engine and to move the vehicle out of the garage.
Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the vehicle. If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle, be sure to do so only in an open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan control set to high so fresh air is drawn into the interior.
Keep the air intakes clear. To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, keep the ventilation air intakes located in front of the windshield clear of snow, ice, leaves, or other obstructions.
If you must drive with the liftgate open: Close all windows. Open instrument panel air vents. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face", and the fan control set to high.
WARNING
5-4
Driving your vehicle
Before Entering the Vehicle Be sure all windows, outside mir-
ror(s), and outside lights are clean and unobstructed.
Remove frost, snow, or ice. Visually check the tires for uneven
wear and damage. Check under the vehicle for any
sign of leaks. Be sure there are no obstacles
behind you if you intend to back up.
Before Starting Make sure the hood, the liftgate,
and the doors are securely closed and locked.
Adjust the position of the seat and steering wheel.
Adjust the inside and outside rearview mirrors.
Verify all the lights work. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that all
passengers have fastened their seatbelts.
Check the gauges and indicators in the instrument panel and the mes- sages on the instrument display when the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position.
Check that any items you are car- rying are stored properly or fas- tened down securely.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING
Engine exhaust and a wide vari- ety of automobile components including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit harmful chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and cer- tain products of components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
WARNING
BEFORE DRIVING
5-5
Driving your vehicle
5
NEVER drink or take drugs and drive. Drinking or taking drugs and driv- ing is dangerous and may result in an accident and SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH. Drunk driving is the number one contributor to the highway death toll each year. Even a small amount of alcohol will affect your reflexes, percep- tions and judgment. Just one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions and emergencies and your reac- tion time gets worse with each additional drink. Driving while under the influ- ence of drugs is as dangerous or more dangerous than driving under the influence of alcohol.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued) You are much more likely to have a serious accident if you drink or take drugs and drive. If you are drinking or taking drugs, don't drive. Do not ride with a driver who has been drinking or taking drugs. Choose a designated driv- er or call a taxi.
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH, take the fol- lowing precautions: ALWAYS wear your seat belt.
All passengers must be prop- erly belted whenever the vehi- cle is moving. For more infor- mation, refer to "Seat Belts" in chapter 2.
Always drive defensively. Assume other drivers or pedes- trians may be careless and make mistakes.
Stay focused on the task of driving. Driver distraction can cause accidents.
Leave plenty of space between you and the vehicle in front of you.
WARNING
5-6
Whenever the front door is opened, the Engine Start/Stop button will illu- minate and will go off 30 seconds after the door is closed.
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON
Driving your vehicle
To reduce risk of serious injury or death, NEVER allow children or any person who is unfamiliar with the vehicle to touch the Engine Start/Stop button or related parts. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur.
WARNING
OAE056001
NEVER press the Engine Start/Stop button while the vehicle is in motion except in an emergency. This will result in the engine turning off and loss of power assist for the steering and brake systems.
(Continued)
WARNING
To turn the vehicle off in an emergency: Press and hold the Engine Start/Stop button for more than two seconds OR rapidly press and release the Engine Start/ Stop button three times (within three seconds). If the vehicle is still moving, you can restart the engine without depressing the brake pedal by pressing the Engine Start/Stop button with the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.
WARNING (Continued) This may lead to loss of direc- tional control and braking function, which could cause an accident.
Before leaving the driver's seat, always make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, set the parking brake, press the Engine Start/ Stop button to the OFF posi- tion, and take the Smart Key with you. Unexpected vehicle movement may occur if these precautions are not followed.
NEVER reach through the steering wheel for the Engine Start/Stop button or any other control while the vehicle is in motion. The presence of your hand or arm in this area may cause a loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.
5-7
Driving your vehicle
5
Engine Start/Stop Button Positions
Button Position Action Notice
OFF To turn off the vehicle, press the Engine Start/Stop button with shift lever in P (Park). When you press the Engine Start/Stop but- ton without the shift lever in P (Park), the Engine Start/Stop button does not turn to the OFF position, but turns to the ACC position.
ACC Press the Engine Start/Stop button when the button is in the OFF position without depress- ing the brake pedal. Some electrical accessories are usable.
If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in the ACC position for more than one hour, the bat- tery power will turn off automatically to prevent the battery from discharging.
5-8
Driving your vehicle
Button Position Action Notice
ON Press the Engine Start/Stop button while it is in the ACC position without depressing the brake pedal. The warning lights can be checked before the vehicle is started.
Do not leave the Engine Start/Stop button in the ON position when the vehicle is not in the ready ( ) mode to prevent the battery from discharging.
START To start the vehicle, depress the brake pedal and press the Engine Start/Stop button with the shift lever in the P (Park) position.
If you press the Engine Start/Stop button with- out depressing the brake pedal, the vehicle does not start and the Engine Start/Stop but- ton changes as follows: OFF ACC ON OFF However, the vehicle may start if you depress the brake pedal within 0.5 second after press- ing the Engine Start/Stop button from the OFF position.
5-9
Driving your vehicle
5
Starting the Vehicle Information The vehicle will start by pressing the
Engine Start/Stop button, only when the smart key is in the vehicle.
Even if the smart key is in the vehi- cle, if it is far away from the driver, the vehicle may not start.
When the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ACC or ON position, if any door is open, the system checks for the smart key. If the smart key is not in the vehicle, the " " indicator will blink and the warning "Key not in vehicle" will come on and if all doors are closed, the chime will also sound for about 5 seconds. Keep the smart key in the vehicle when in the ACC position or if the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode.
1. Always carry the smart key with you.
2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in P (Park).
4. Depress the brake pedal. 5. Press the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton. If the vehicle starts, the " " indicator will come on.
Information Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains station- ary. Start driving at moderate engine speeds. (Aggressive accelerat- ing and decelerating should be avoided.)
Always start the vehicle with your foot on the brake pedal. Do not depress the accelerator while start- ing the vehicle. Do not rev the engine while warming it up.
i
i
Always wear appropriate shoes when operating your vehicle. Unsuitable shoes, such as high heels, ski boots, sandals, flip-flops, etc., may interfere with your ability to use the brake and accelerator pedals.
Do not start the vehicle with the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle can move and lead to an accident.
Wait until the engine rpm is normal. The vehicle may sud- denly move if the brake pedal is released when the rpm is high.
WARNING
5-10
Driving your vehicle
To prevent damage to the vehicle: If the " " indicator turns off
while you are in motion, do not attempt to shift to the P (Park) position. If traffic and road conditions permit, you may put the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position while the vehicle is still moving and press the Engine Start/Stop button in an attempt to restart the engine.
Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the vehicle.
To prevent damage to the vehicle: When the stop lamp switch fuse is blown, you can't start the engine normally. Replace the fuse with a new one. If you are not able to replace the fuse, you can start the vehicle by pressing and holding the Engine Start/Stop button for 10 seconds with the Engine Start/ Stop button in the ACC position. Do not press the Engine Start/Stop button for more than 10 seconds except when the stop lamp switch fuse is blown. For your safety always depress the brake pedal before starting the vehicle.
Information If the smart key battery is weak or the smart key does not work correctly, you can start the engine by pressing the Engine Start/Stop button with the smart key in the direction of the pic- ture above.
i
NOTICENOTICE
OAE056002
5-11
Driving your vehicle
5
Turning Off the Vehicle 1. Depress the brake pedal fully. 2. Shift to P (Park). 3. Apply the parking brake. 4. Press the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton to turn the vehicle off. 5. Make sure the " " indicator
light on the instrument cluster is turned off.
If the " " indicator light on the instrument cluster is still on, the vehicle is not turned off and can move when the gear is in any position except P (Park).
CAUTION
5-12
Driving your vehicle
Dual Clutch Transmission Operation The dual clutch transmission has six forward speeds and one reverse speed. The individual speeds are selected automatically when the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position. The dual clutch transmission can
be thought of as an automatically shifting manual transmission. It gives the driving feel of a manual transmission, yet provides the ease of a fully automatic transmis- sion.
When D (Drive) is selected, the transmission will automatically shift through the gears similar to a con- ventional automatic transmission. Unlike a traditional automatic transmission, the gear shifting can sometimes be felt and heard as the actuators engage the clutches and the gears are selected.
The dual clutch transmission incor- porates a dry-type dual clutch mechanism, which allows for better acceleration performance and increased fuel efficiency while driv- ing.
DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION
Move shift lever.
Press the shift button, then move shift lever. Depress the brake pedal, press the shift button, and then move shift lever.
OAE056004N
To move the shift lever from/to P (Parking) or between R (Reverse) and D (Drive), you must depress the brake pedal for the vehicle to stand still.
Manual shift mode
5-13
Driving your vehicle
5
But it differs from a conventional automatic transmission because it does not incorporate a torque con- verter. Instead, the transition from one gear to the next is managed by clutch slip, especially at lower speeds. As a result, shifts are sometimes more noticeable, and a light vibra- tion can be felt as the transmission shaft speed is matched with the engine shaft speed. This is a nor- mal condition of the dual clutch transmission.
The dry-type clutch transfers torque more directly and provides a direct-drive feeling which may feel different from a conventional automatic transmission. This may be more noticeable when launch- ing the vehicle from a stop or when traveling at low, stop-and-go vehi- cle speeds.
When rapidly accelerating from a lower vehicle speed, the engine rpm may increase dramatically as a result of clutch slip as the dual clutch transmission selects the cor- rect gear. This is a normal condi- tion.
When accelerating from a stop on an incline, press the accelerator smoothly and gradually to avoid any shudder feeling or jerkiness.
When traveling at a lower vehicle speed, if you release the accelera- tor pedal quickly, you may feel engine braking before the trans- mission changes gears. This engine braking feeling is similar to operating a manual transmission at low speed.
When driving downhill, you may wish to move the gear shift lever to Manual Shift mode and downshift to a lower gear in order to control your speed without using the brake pedal excessively.
When you turn the vehicle on and off, you may hear clicking sounds as the system goes through a self- test. This is a normal sound for the dual clutch transmission.
During the first 1000 miles (1,500 km), you may feel that the vehicle may not be smooth when acceler- ating at low speed. During this break-in period, the shift quality and performance of your new vehi- cle is continuously optimized.
To reduce the risk of serious injury or death: ALWAYS check the surround-
ing areas near your vehicle for people, especially children, before shifting a vehicle into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
Before leaving the driver's seat, always make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, then set the parking brake, and place the Engine Start/Stop button in the OFF position. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur if these precautions are not followed.
Do not use aggressive engine braking (shifting from a high- er gear to a lower gear) on slippery roads. This could cause the tires to slip and may result in an accident.
WARNING
5-14
Driving your vehicle
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
Do not put the shift lever in N (Neutral) while driving.
To avoid damage to your trans- mission, do not try to accelerate in R (Reverse) or any forward gear position with the brakes applied.
When stopped on a slope, do not hold the vehicle with accel- erator pedal. Use the brake pedal or the parking brake.
DCT Warning Messages Steep Grade
This warning message is displayed when vehicle is driven slowly on a grade and the vehicle detects that the brake pedal is not applied.
Driving up hills or on steep grades: To hold the vehicle on an incline
use the foot brake or the parking brake.
When in stop-and-go traffic on an incline, allow a gap to form ahead of you before moving the vehicle forward. Then hold the vehicle on the incline with the foot brake.
If the vehicle is held or creeping forward on an incline by applying the accelerator pedal, the clutch and transmission may overheat which can result in damage. At this time, a warning message will appear on the LCD display.
If the LCD display warning is active, the foot brake must be applied.
Ignoring the warnings can lead to damage to the transmission.
To hold the vehicle on a hill use the foot brake or the parking brake. If the vehicle is held by applying the accelerator pedal on a hill, the clutch and transmission will be overheated resulting in damage.
NOTICE
NOTICE
OTLE055018
Due to transmission failure, you may not continue to drive and the position indicator (D, P) on the instrument cluster will bilnk. Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked.
WARNING
5-15
Driving your vehicle
5 Transmission High Temperature
Under certain conditions, such as repeated stop-and-go launches on steep grades, sudden take off or acceleration, or other harsh driving conditions, the transmission clutch temperatures will increase exces- sively.
When the clutch temperatures are too high, the "Transmission temp is high! Stop safely" warning mes- sage will appear on the LCD dis- play, a chime will sound, and the transmission shifting may not be smooth.
If this occurs, pull over to a safe location, stop the vehicle with the engine running, apply the brakes and shift the vehicle to P (Park), and allow the transmission to cool.
If you ignore this warning, the driv- ing condition may become worse. You may experience abrupt shifts, frequent shifts, or jerkiness.
When the message "Trans cooled. Resume driving." appears you can continue to drive your vehicle.
When possible, drive the vehicle smoothly.
Transmission Overheated
If the vehicle continues to be driv- en and the clutch temperatures reach the maximum temperature limit, the "Transmission Hot! Park with engine on" warning will be dis- played. When this occurs the clutch is disabled until the clutch cools to normal temperatures.
The warning will display a time to wait for the transmission to cool.
If this occurs, pull over to a safe location, stop the vehicle with the engine running, apply the brakes and shift the vehicle to P (Park), and allow the transmission to cool.
OTLE055023 OAE056196N/OTLE055027
5-16
Driving your vehicle
When the message "Trans cooled. Resume driving." appears you can continue to drive your vehicle.
When possible, drive the vehicle smoothly.
If any of the warning messages in the LCD display continue to blink, for your safety, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the sys- tem checked.
Shift Lever Position P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into P (Park). To shift from P (Park), you must depr ess firmly on the brake pedal and make sure your foot is off the accel- erator pedal. If you have done all of the above and still cannot shift the lever out of P (Park), see "Shift-Lock Release" in this section. The shift lever must be in P (Park) before turning the vehicle off.
Shifting into P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion may cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
After the vehicle has stopped, always make sure the shift lever is in P (Park), apply the parking brake, and turn the vehicle off.
When parking on an incline, place the shift lever in Park and apply the parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling downhill.
Do not use the P (Park) posi- tion in place of the parking brake.
WARNING
5-17
Driving your vehicle
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into or out of R (Reverse); you may damage the transmission if you shift into R (Reverse) while the vehicle is in motion.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transmission are not engaged. Always depress the brake pedal when you are shifting from N (Neutral) to another gear.
D (Drive)
This is the normal driving position. The transmission will automatically shift through a six-gear sequence, providing the best fuel economy and power. For extra power when passing anoth- er vehicle or driving uphill depress the accelerator pedal further until you feel the transmission downshift to a lower gear.
If you drive the vehicle with the shift lever in D (Drive), the vehicle will automatically change to ECO mode. The indicator will illuminate on the instrument cluster. When driving in ECO mode, the vehi- cle improves fuel efficiency for eco- friendly driving.
S (Sport)
If you drive the vehicle with the shift lever in S (Sport), the vehicle will automatically change to SPORT mode. The indicator will illumi- nate on the instrument cluster. When driving in SPORT mode, the vehicle provides sporty but firm rid- ing.
Information In SPORT mode, the fuel efficiency may decrease.
i
NOTICE
5
Do not drive with the shift lever in N (Neutral). The engine brake will not work and lead to an accident.
WARNING
Do not shift into gear unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal. Shifting into gear when the engine is running at high speed can cause the vehicle to move very rapidly. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit people or objects.
WARNING
Depress the brake pedal fully to prevent unintended movement when stopping the vehicle.
CAUTION
5-18
Driving your vehicle
Manual shift mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion, manual shift mode is selected by pushing the shift lever from the D (Drive) position into the manual gate. To return to D (Drive) range operation, push the shift lever back into the main gate. In Manual Shift Mode, moving the shift lever backwards and forwards will allow you to select the desired range of gears for the current driving conditions. + (Up) : Push the lever forward once
to shift up one gear. - (Down) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one gear.
Information Only the six forward gears can be
selected. To reverse or park the vehicle, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) or P (Park) position as required.
Downshifts are made automatically when the vehicle slows down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear is automat- ically selected.
When the engine rpm approaches the red zone the transmission will upshift automatically.
If the driver presses the lever to + (Up) or - (Down) position, the transmission may not make the requested gear change if the next gear is outside of the allowable engine rpm range. The driver must execute upshifts in accordance with road conditions, taking care to keep the engine rpms below the red zone.
Shift-lock system For your safety, the dual clutch trans- mission has a shift-lock system which prevents shifting the transmis- sion from P (Park) into R (Reverse) unless the brake pedal is depressed. To shift the transmission from P (Park) into R (Reverse): 1. Depress and hold the brake pedal. 2. Start the vehicle or place the
Engine Start/Stop button in the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.
i
OAE056012N
+ (UP)
- (DOWN)
5-19
Driving your vehicle
5
Shift-lock release
If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) position into R (Reverse) position with the brake pedal depressed, continue depressing the brake, and then do the following: 1. Place the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton in the OFF position. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Carefully remove the cap (1) cov-
ering the shift-lock release access hole.
4. Insert a tool (e.g. flathead screw- driver) into the access hole and press down on the tool.
5. Move the shift lever. 6. Remove the tool from the shift-
lock override access hole then install the cap.
If you need to use the shift-lock release, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer immediately.
Paddle Shifter (if equipped)
The paddle shifter is functional when the shift lever is in the D (Drive) or S (Sport) position, or the manual shift mode. The paddle shifter will operate when the vehicle speed is more than 3 mph (5 km/h). Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once to shift up or down one gear and the system changes from automatic mode to manual mode.
OAE056011N OPD056015
5-20
Driving your vehicle
The system changes from manual mode to automatic mode when - the vehicle speed is lower than 3
mph (5 km/h), - you depress the accelerator
pedal for more than 5 seconds, - you pull the [+] paddle shifter for
more than 1 second, or - you move the shift lever from D
(Drive) to S (Sport) or manual shift mode (+, -) and then back to D (Drive).
Information If the [+] and [-] paddle shifters are pulled at the same time, gear shift may not occur.
Parking Always come to a complete stop and continue to depress the brake pedal. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position, apply the parking brake, and place the Engine Start/Stop but- ton in the OFF position. Take the key with you when exiting the vehicle.
Good Driving Practices Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other position with the accelerator pedal depressed.
Never move the shift lever into P (Park) when the vehicle is in motion. Be sure the vehicle is completely stopped before you attempt to shift into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
Do not move the shift lever to N (Neutral) when driving. Doing so may result in an accident because of a loss of engine braking and the transmission could be damaged.
Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. Even light, but consistent pedal pressure can result in the brakes overheating, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.
Depressing both accelerator and brake pedals at the same time can trigger logic for engine power reduction to assure vehicle decel- eration. Vehicle acceleration will resume after the brake pedal is released.
i
When you stay in the vehicle with the engine running, be careful not to depress the accel- erator pedal for a long period of time. The engine or exhaust system may overheat and start a fire. The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep away from the exhaust system components. Do not stop or park over flam- mable materials, such as dry grass, paper or leaves. They may ignite and cause a fire.
WARNING
5-21
Driving your vehicle
5
When driving in Manual Shift Mode, slow down before shifting to a lower gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may not be engaged if the engine rpms are outside of the allowable range.
Always apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle. Do not depend on placing the transmis- sion in P (Park) to keep the vehicle from moving.
Exercise extreme caution when driving on a slippery surface. Be especially careful when braking, accelerating or shifting gears. On a slippery surface, an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.
Optimum vehicle performance and economy is obtained by smoothly depressing and releasing the accelerator.
(Continued) In the event your vehicle
leaves the roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes.
HYUNDAI recommends you follow all posted speed limits.
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: ALWAYS wear your seatbelt.
In a collision, an unbelted occupant is significantly more likely to be seriously injured or killed than a properly belt- ed occupant.
Avoid high speeds when cor- nering or turning.
Do not make quick steering wheel movements, such as sharp lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
The risk of rollover is greatly increased if you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds.
Loss of control often occurs if two or more wheels drop off the roadway and the driver over steers to reenter the roadway.
(Continued)
WARNING
5-22
The coasting guide function informs the driver when to take the foot off from the accelerator by anticipating a decelerating event* based on the analysis of driving routes and road conditions of the navigation. It encourages the driver to remove foot from the pedal and allow coasting down the road with EV motor only. This helps prevent unnecessary fuel consumption and increases fuel effi- ciency.
Information Example of a deceleration event is making a right/left turn, driving through a rotary, entering or exiting a highway (freeway), etc.
The driver can activate the coasting guide by placing the ignition switch in the ON position and by selecting: User settings User Settings Driving Assist Coasting Guide For the explanation of the system, press and hold the [OK] button.
Operation conditions To activate the system, take the fol- lowing procedures. Enter your desti- nation information on the navigation and select the driving route. Have the vehicle in ECO mode by driving the vehicle in D (Drive). Then, satisfy the following. - The operational speed is above 25
mph (40 km/h).
Information The operating speed may vary due to difference between instrument cluster and navigation effected by tire infla- tion level.
Information Coasting guide is only a supplemental system to assist with fuel-efficient driving. Thus, the operating condi- tions may be different in accordance with traffic/road conditions (i.e. driv- ing in a traffic jam, driving on a slope, driving on a curve). Thus, take the actual driving conditions into consid- eration, such as distances from the vehicles ahead/ behind, while refer- ring to the coasting guide system as guidance.
i
i
i
COASTING GUIDE (PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE, IF EQUIPPED)
Driving your vehicle
OAEPH047504L/OAE046505N
Type A Type B
5-23
Driving your vehicle
5
Power Brakes Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes that adjust automatically through normal usage. If the vehicle is not in the ready ( ) mode or the vehicle is turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. You can still stop your vehicle by applying greater force to the brake pedal than typical. The stopping distance, however, will be longer than with power brakes. When the vehicle is not in the ready ( ) mode, the reserve brake power is partially depleted each time the brake pedal is applied. Do not pump the brake pedal when the power assist has been interrupted. Pump the brake pedal only when necessary to maintain steering con- trol on slippery surfaces.
BRAKING SYSTEM
Take the following precautions: Do not drive with your foot
resting on the brake pedal. This will create abnormal high brake temperatures, exces- sive brake lining and pad wear, and increased stopping distances.
When descending down a long or steep hill, move the gear shift lever to Manual Shift Mode and manually downshift to a lower gear in order to control your speed without using the brake pedal excessively. Applying the brakes continuously will cause the brakes to overheat and could result in a tempo- rary loss of braking perform- ance.
(Continued)
(Continued) Wet brakes may impair the
vehicle's ability to safely slow down; the vehicle may also pull to one side when the brakes are applied. Applying the brakes lightly will indicate whether they have been affected in this way. Always test your brakes in this fash- ion after driving through deep water. To dry the brakes, light- ly tap the brake pedal to heat up the brakes while maintain- ing a safe forward speed until brake performance returns to normal. Avoid driving at high speeds until the brakes func- tion correctly.
WARNING
5-24
Driving your vehicle
Do not depress the brake pedal continuously without the " " indicator ON. The battery may be discharged. Some noise and vibration may
occur during braking. This is normal.
In below cases, some electric brake pump noise and motor vibration may occur temporarily. This is normal operation. - When the pedal is depressed
very quickly - When the pedal is depressed
multiple times in short inter- vals
- When the ABS function is acti- vated during braking
Disc Brake Wear Indicator When your brake pads are worn and new pads are required, you will hear a high pitched warning sound from your front or rear brakes. You may hear this sound come and go or it may occur whenever you depress the brake pedal. Note that some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when you first apply (or lightly apply) the brakes. This is normal and does not indicate a problem with your brakes.
To avoid costly brake repairs, do not continue to drive with worn brake pads.
Information Always replace brake pads as com- plete front or rear axle sets.
Parking Brake Always set the parking brake before leaving the vehicle. To apply the parking brake:
Firmly depress the brake pedal. Depress the parking brake pedal down as far as possible.
i
NOTICE
NOTICE
OAE056014
5-25
Driving your vehicle
5
To release:
Firmly depress the brake pedal. Depress the parking brake pedal down and it will release automatical- ly. If the parking brake does not release or does not release all the way, have your vehicle checked by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer.
OAE056013
Whenever leaving the vehicle or parking, always come to a complete stop and continue to depress the brake pedal. Move the shift lever into P (Park) position, then apply the park- ing brake, and place the Engine Start/Stop button in the OFF position. Vehicles with the parking brake not fully engaged are at risk for moving inadvertently and causing injury to yourself or others.
NEVER allow anyone who is unfamiliar with the vehicle to touch the parking brake. If the parking brake is released unintentionally, serious injury may occur.
Only release the parking brake when you are seated inside the vehicle with your foot firmly on the brake pedal.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH, do not oper- ate the parking brake while the vehicle is moving except in an emergency situation. It could damage the brake system and lead to an accident.
WARNING
5-26
Driving your vehicle
Do not apply the accelerator pedal while the parking brake is engaged. If you depress the accelerator pedal with the park- ing brake engaged, warning will sound. Damage to the parking brake may occur.
Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the braking sys- tem and cause premature wear or damage to brake parts. Make sure the parking brake is released and the Brake Warning Light is off before driving.
Check the Parking Brake Warning Light by placing the Engine Start/Stop button to the ON position (vehi- cle not in the ready
( ) mode). This light will be illuminated when the parking brake is applied with the Engine Start/Stop button in the START or ON position. Before driving, be sure the parking brake is released and the Brake Warning Light is OFF. If the Parking Brake Warning Light remains on after the parking brake is released while the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode, there may be a malfunction in the brake system. Immediate attention is necessary. If at all possible, cease driving the vehicle immediately. If that is not pos- sible, use extreme caution while operating the vehicle and only con- tinue to drive the vehicle until you can reach a safe location.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)NOTICE
An Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) or an Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system will not prevent accidents due to improper or dangerous driving maneuvers. Even though vehi- cle control is improved during emergency braking, always maintain a safe distance between you and objects ahead of you. Vehicle speeds should always be reduced during extreme road conditions. The braking distance for cars equipped with ABS or ESC may be longer than for those without these systems in the following road conditions.
(Continued)
WARNING
5-27
Driving your vehicle
5
ABS is an electronic braking system that helps prevent a braking skid. ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same time.
Using ABS To obtain the maximum benefit from your ABS in an emergency situation, do not attempt to modulate your brake pressure and do not try to pump your brakes. Depress your brake pedal as hard as possible. When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you may hear sounds from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your ABS is active. ABS does not reduce the time or dis- tance it takes to stop the vehicle. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. ABS will not prevent a skid that results from sudden changes in direction, such as trying to take a corner too fast or making a sudden lane change. Always drive at a safe speed for the road and weather con- ditions.
ABS cannot prevent a loss of stabili- ty. Always steer moderately when braking hard. Severe or sharp steer- ing wheel movement can still cause your vehicle to veer into oncoming traffic or off the road. On loose or uneven road surfaces, operation of the anti-lock brake sys- tem may result in a longer stopping distance than for vehicles equipped with a conventional brake system. The ABS warning light ( ) will stay on for several seconds after the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position. During that time, the ABS will go through self-diagnosis and the light will go off if everything is nor- mal. If the light stays on, you may have a problem with your ABS. Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued) Drive your vehicle at reduced speeds during the following conditions: Rough, gravel or snow-cov-
ered roads. On roads where the road sur-
face is pitted or has different surface height.
Tire chains are installed on your vehicle.
The safety features of an ABS or ESC equipped vehicle should not be tested by high speed driving or cornering. This could endanger the safety of yourself or others.
5-28
Driving your vehicle
Information When you jump start your vehicle because of a drained battery, the ABS warning light ( ) may turn on at the same time. This happens because of the low battery voltage. It does not mean your ABS is malfunctioning. Have the battery recharged before driving the vehicle.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering maneuvers. ESC checks where you are steering and where the vehicle is actually going. ESC applies braking pressure to any one of the vehicle's brakes and intervenes in the engine man- agement system to assist the driver with keeping the vehicle on the intended path. It is not a substitute for safe driving practices. Always adjust your speed and driving to the road conditions.
i
When you drive on a road hav- ing poor traction, such as an icy road, and apply your brakes continuously, the ABS will be active continuously and the ABS warning light ( ) may illuminate. Pull your car over to a safe place and turn the vehicle off. Restart the vehicle. If the ABS warning light is off, then your ABS system is normal. Otherwise, you may have a problem with your ABS system. Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION
If the ABS warning light ( ) is on and stays on, you may have a problem with the ABS. Your power brakes will work normal- ly. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death, contact your HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING
OAEPH057016
5-29
Driving your vehicle
5 ESC operation ESC ON condition
When the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position, the ESC and the ESC OFF indicator lights illumi- nate for approximately three sec- onds. After both lights go off, the ESC is enabled.
When operating
When the ESC is in opera- tion, the ESC indicator light blinks:
When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you may hear sounds from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your ESC is active.
When the ESC activates, the vehi- cle may not respond to the accel- erator as it does under routine con- ditions.
If the Cruise Control was in use when the ESC activates, the Cruise Control automatically disen- gages. The Cruise Control can be reengaged when the road condi- tions allow. See "Cruise Control System" later in this chapter. (if equipped)
When moving out of the mud or driving on a slippery road, the engine RPM (revolutions per minute) may not increase even if you press the accelerator pedal deeply. This is to maintain the sta- bility and traction of the vehicle and does not indicate a problem.
ESC OFF condition
To cancel ESC operation :
State 1 Press the ESC OFF button briefly. The ESC OFF indicator light and message will illuminate. In this state, the traction control function of ESC (engine management) is disabled, but the brake control function of ESC (braking management) still operates.
Never drive too fast for the road conditions or too quickly when cornering. The ESC system will not prevent accidents. Excessive speed in turns, abrupt maneuvers, and hydroplaning on wet surfaces can result in severe accidents.
WARNING Type A Type B
OLF054101N/OAE056018L
5-30
Driving your vehicle
State 2 Press and hold the ESC OFF button continuously for more than 3 sec- onds. The ESC OFF indicator light and message illuminates and a warning chime sounds. In this state, both the traction control function of ESC (engine management) and the brake control function of ESC (brak- ing management) are disabled.
If the Engine Start/Stop button is placed to the OFF position when ESC is off, ESC remains off. Upon restarting the vehicle, the ESC will automatically turn on again.
Indicator lights
When the Engine Start/Stop button is placed to the ON position, the ESC indicator light illuminates, then goes off if the ESC system is operating normally. The ESC indicator light blinks when- ever the ESC is operating. If ESC indicator light stays on, your vehicle may have a malfunction with the ESC system. When this warning light illuminates have your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible. The ESC OFF indicator light comes on when the ESC is turned off.
Driving with wheels and tires with different sizes may cause the ESC system to malfunction. Before replacing tires, make sure all four tires and wheels are the same size. Never drive the vehicle with different sized wheels and tires installed.
NOTICE
ESC indicator light (blinks)
ESC OFF indicator light (comes on)
When the ESC is blinking, this indicates the ESC is active: Drive slowly and NEVER attempt to accelerate. NEVER turn the ESC off while the ESC indicator light is blinking or you may lose control of the vehicle resulting in an accident.
WARNING Type A Type B
OLF054100N/OAE056020L
5-31
Driving your vehicle
5
ESC OFF usage When Driving
The ESC OFF mode should only be used briefly to help free the vehicle if stuck in snow or mud by temporarily stopping operation of the ESC to maintain wheel torque. To turn ESC off while driving, press the ESC OFF button while driving on a flat road surface.
To prevent damage to the trans- mission: Do not allow wheel(s) of one
axle to spin excessively while the ESC, ABS, and parking brake warning lights are displayed. The repairs would not be cov- ered by the vehicle warranty. Reduce engine power and do not spin the wheel(s) excessive- ly while these lights are dis- played.
When operating the vehicle on a dynamometer, make sure the ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light illuminated).
Information Turning the ESC off does not affect ABS or standard brake system opera- tion.
Vehicle Stability Management (VSM) The Vehicle Stability Management (VSM) is a function of the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. It helps ensure the vehicle stays stable when accelerating or braking sud- denly on wet, slippery and rough roads where traction over the four tires can suddenly become uneven.
i
NOTICE
Take the following precautions when using the Vehicle Stability Management (VSM): ALWAYS check the speed and
the distance to the vehicle ahead. The VSM is not a sub- stitute for safe driving prac- tices.
Never drive too fast for the road conditions.The VSM sys- tem will not prevent acci- dents. Excessive speed in bad weather, slippery and uneven roads can result in severe accidents.
WARNING
5-32
Driving your vehicle
VSM operation VSM ON condition
The VSM operates when: The Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is on. Vehicle speed is approximately
above 9 mph (15 km/h) on curve roads.
Vehicle speed is approximately above 12 mph (20 km/h) when the vehicle is braking on rough roads.
When operating
When you apply your brakes under conditions which may activate the ESC, you may hear sounds from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sen- sation in the brake pedal. This is nor- mal and it means your VSM is active.
The VSM does not operate when: Driving on a banked road such
as gradient or incline. Driving rearward. ESC OFF indicator light is on. EPS (Electric Power Steering)
warning light ( ) is on or blinks.
Driving with wheels and tires with dif- ferent sizes may cause the ESC sys- tem to malfunction. Before replacing tires, make sure all four tires and wheels are the same size. Never drive the vehicle with different sized tires and wheels installed.
NOTICE
If ESC indicator light ( ) or EPS warning light ( ) stays on or blinks, your vehicle may have a malfunction with the VSM sys- tem. When the warning light illu- minates, have your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as pos- sible.
WARNING
5-33
Driving your vehicle
5
Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) The Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) helps prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. The system operates the brakes automatically for approximately 2 seconds and releas- es the brake after 2 seconds or when the accelerator pedal is depressed.
The HAC does not operate when the shift lever is in P (Park) or N (Neutral).
The HAC activates even though the ESC (Electronic Stability Control) is off but does not acti- vate when the ESC has malfunc- tioned.
Good Braking Practices
Wet brakes can be dangerous! The brakes may get wet if the vehicle is driven through standing water or if it is washed. Your vehicle will not stop as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet brakes may cause the vehicle to pull to one side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes lightly until the braking action returns to normal, taking care to keep the vehicle under control at all times. If the braking action does not return to normal, stop as soon as it is safe to do so and call an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance. DO NOT drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. Even light, but constant pedal pressure can result in the brakes overheating, brake wear, and possibly even brake failure. If a tire goes flat while you are driv- ing, apply the brakes gently and keep the vehicle pointed straight ahead while you slow down. When you are moving slowly enough for it to be safe to do so, pull off the road and stop in a safe location. Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped to prevent the vehicle from rolling for- ward.
NOTICE
Always be ready to depress the accelerator pedal when starting off on a incline.The HAC activates only for approximately 2 seconds.
WARNING
Whenever leaving the vehicle or parking, always come to a com- plete stop and continue to depress the brake pedal. Move the shift lever into P (Park) posi- tion, then apply the parking brake, and place the Engine Start/Stop button in the OFF position. Vehicles parked with the park- ing brake not applied or not fully engaged may roll inadver- tently and may cause injury to the driver and others. ALWAYS apply the parking brake before exiting the vehicle.
WARNING
5-34
Driving your vehicle
The Blind Spot Detection System (BSD) uses radar sensors in the rear bumper to monitor and warn the driv- er of an approaching vehicle in the driver's blind spot area. The system monitors the rear area of the vehicle and provides information to the driver with an audible alert and an indicator on the outer side view mirrors.
(1) BSD (Blind Spot Detection) The blind spot detection range varies relative to vehicle speed. Note that if your vehicle is travel- ing much faster than the vehicles around you, the warning will not occur.
(2) LCA (Lane Change Assist) The Lane Change Assist feature will help alert you when a vehicle is approaching in an adjacent lane at a high rate of speed. If the driver activates the turn signal when the system detects an oncoming vehicle, the system sounds an audible alert. The time of alert varies according to the speed difference between you and the approaching vehicle.
(3) RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) The Rear Cross Traffic Alert fea- ture monitors approaching cross traffic from the left and right side of the vehicle when your vehicle is in reverse. The feature will operate when the vehicle is mov- ing in reverse below about 6 mph (10 km/h). If oncoming cross traf- fic is detected a warning chime will sound.
The time of alert varies according to the speed difference between you and the approaching vehicle.
BLIND SPOT DETECTION SYSTEM (BSD) (IF EQUIPPED)
OAE056106
Blind spot area
Closing at high speed
Always be aware of road con- ditions while driving and be alert for unexpected situa- tions even though the Blind Spot Detection System is operating.
The Blind Spot Detection System (BSD) is not a substi- tute for proper and safe driv- ing. Always drive safely and use caution when changing lanes or backing up the vehi- cle. The Blind Spot Detection System (BSD) may not detect every object alongside the vehicle.
WARNING
5-35
Driving your vehicle
5
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) / LCA (Lane Change Assist) Operating conditions
To operate: Press the BSD switch with the Engine Start/Stop button in the ON position. The indicator on the BSD switch will illuminate.
To cancel: Press the BSD switch again. The indicator on the switch will go off. When the system is not used, turn the system off by turning off the switch.
Information If the Engine Start/Stop button is
turned OFF and then ON again, the BSD system returns to the previous state.
When the system is turned on, the warning light will illuminate for 3 seconds on the outer side view mir- ror.
The function will activate when: 1. The system is on. 2. The vehicle speed is above
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). 3. An oncoming vehicle is detected
in the blind spot area.
First stage alert
If a vehicle is detected within the boundary of the system, a warning light (yellow) will illuminate on the outer side view mirror. Once the detected vehicle is no longer within the blind spot area, the warning will turn off depending on the driving conditions of the vehicle.
i
OAEPH057033
OAE056035
Left side
Right side
5-36
Driving your vehicle
The second stage alarm may be deactivated. - To deactivate the warning chime: Cluster type A Go to the 'User Settings Driving Assist Rear Collision Warning and deselect Blind Spot Detection Sound' on the LCD display. Cluster type B Go to the 'User Settings Driving Assist and deselect BSD Sound (Blind Spot Detection)' on the LCD display.
OAE056036
Left side
OAE056037
Right side
Second stage alert
A warning chime to alert the driver will activate when: 1. A vehicle has been detected in the blind spot area by the radar system
(the warning light will illuminate on the outer side view mirror) (i.e., in the first stage alert) AND
2. The turn signal is applied (same side as where the vehicle is being detected).
When this alert is activated, the warning light on the side view mirror will also blink. If you turn off the turn signal indicator, the second stage alert (warning chime and blinking warning light on the outer side view mirror) will be deactivated.
5-37
Driving your vehicle
5
- To activate the warning chime: Cluster type A Go to the 'User Settings Driving Assist Rear Collision Warning and select Blind Spot Detection Sound' on the LCD display. Cluster type B Go to the 'User Settings Driving Assist and select BSD Sound (Blind Spot Detection)' on the LCD display.
Information The warning chime function helps alert the driver. Deactivate this func- tion only when it is necessary. For more information, refer to "LCD Display Modes" in chapter 3.
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) (if equipped)
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function monitors approaching cross traffic from the left and right side of the vehicle when your vehicle is in reverse.
Operating conditions To operate: Cluster type A Go to the 'User Settings Driving Assist Rear Collision Warning and select Rear Cross Traffic Alert' on the LCD display. Cluster type B Go to the 'User Settings Driving Assist and select Rear Cross Traffic Alert' on the LCD display. The system will turn on and standby to activate. The system will activate when vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h) and with the shift lever in R (Reverse). If the function is deselected from the instrument cluster, the function will deactivate. For more information, refer to "LCD Display Modes" in chapter 3.
i OAE056106
5-38
Driving your vehicle
Information The last selected setting (ON or
OFF) of the RCTA is remained in the system.
The system will activate when vehi- cle speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h) and with the shift lever in R (Reverse).
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) detecting range is approxi- mately 1 ft ~ 65 ft (0.5 m ~ 20 m) in the direction of both lateral sides of the vehicle.
An approaching vehicle will be detected if their vehicle speed is within 2.5 ~ 22.5 mph (4 km/h ~ 36 km/h).
Note that the detecting range may vary under certain conditions. As always, use caution and pay close attention to your surroundings when backing up your vehicle.
Warning type
If the vehicle detected by the sensors approaches your vehicle, the warn- ing chime will sound, the warning light on the outer side view mirror will blink and a message will appear on the LCD display.
Information The warning chime will turn off
when:
- The detected vehicle moves out of the sensing area or
- when the vehicle is right behind your vehicle or
- when the vehicle is not approach- ing your vehicle or
- when the other vehicle slows down.
The system may not operate proper- ly due to other factors or circum- stances. Always pay attention to your surroundings.
If the sensing area near the rear bumper is blocked by either a wall or barrier or by a parked vehicle, the system sensing area may be reduced.
ii Left
Right Type A Type B
OAE056150L/OAE056046L
OAE056151L/OAE056047L
Type A Type B
5-39
Driving your vehicle
5
The system may not work prop- erly when the bumper has been damaged, or if the rear bumper has been replaced or repaired.
The sensing range differs some- what according to the width of the road. When the road is nar- row, the system may detect other vehicles in the next lane Or when the road is wide, the system may not detect other vehicles in the next lane.
The system may turn off due to strong electromagnetic waves.
NOTICE
With the system activated, the warning light on the outer side view mirror will illumi- nate whenever a vehicle is detected at the rear side by the system. To avoid accidents, do not focus only on the warning light and neglect to see the surrounding of the vehicle.
Drive safely even though the vehicle is equipped with a Blind Spot Detection System (BSD) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA). Do not solely rely on the system but check your surrounding before changing lanes or backing the vehicle up. The system may not alert the driver in some conditions so always check your surround- ings while driving.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued) The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) are not a substitute for proper and safe driving practices. Always drive safely and use caution when changing lanes or back- ing up your vehicle. The Blind Spot Detection System (BSD) may not detect every object alongside the vehicle.
5-40
Driving your vehicle
Detecting sensor
The sensors are located inside the rear bumper. Always keep the rear bumper clean for the proper operation of the sys- tem.
Warning message
Blind Spot Detection disabled. Radar blocked.
This warning message may appear when : - One or both of the sensors on the
rear bumper is blocked by dirt or snow or a foreign object.
- Driving in rural areas where the BSD sensor does not detect anoth- er vehicle for an extended period of time.
- When there is inclement weather such as heavy snow or rain.
If any of these conditions occur, the light on the BSD switch and the sys- tem will turn off automatically. When the BSD canceled warning message is displayed in the cluster, check to make sure that the rear bumper is free from any dirt or snow in the areas where the sensor is located. Remove any dirt, snow, or foreign material that could interfere with the radar sensors. After any dirt or debris is removed, the BSD system should operate nor- mally after about 10 minutes of driv- ing the vehicle. If the system still does not operate normally have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OAE056040LOAE056065
5-41
Driving your vehicle
5 Check BSD system
If there is a problem with the BSD system, a warning message will appear and the light on the switch will turn off. The system will turn off auto- matically. Have your vehicle inspect- ed by an authorized HYUNDAI deal- er.
Limitations of the system The driver must be cautious in the below situations, because the sys- tem may not detect other vehicles or objects in certain circumstances.
When a trailer or carrier is installed.
The vehicle drives in inclement weather such as heavy rain or snow.
The sensor is polluted with rain, snow, mud, etc.
The rear bumper where the sensor is located is covered with a foreign object such as a bumper sticker, a bumper guard, a bike rack, etc.
The rear bumper is damaged, or the sensor is out of the original default position.
The vehicle height gets lower or higher due to heavy loading in the luggage compartment, abnormal tire pressure, etc.
When the temperature near the rear bumper area is high or low.
When the sensors are blocked by other vehicles, walls or parking-lot pillars.
The vehicle drives on a curved road or through a tollgate.
The vehicle is driven near areas containing metal substances such as a construction zone, railroad, etc.
There is a fixed object near the vehicle, such as a guardrail, per- son, animal, etc.
While going down or up a steep road where the height of the lane is different.
When driving through a narrow road with many trees or bushes.
When driving on wet surfaces. When driving through a large area
with few vehicles or structures around, such as a desert, rural area, etc.
A big vehicle is near such as a bus or truck.
When other vehicles are close to your vehicle.
When the other vehicle approach- es very close.
OTLE055040
5-42
When the detected vehicle also moves back, as your vehicle drives back.
While changing lanes. The vehicle is turning left or right at
a crossroad. If the vehicle has started at the
same time as the vehicle next to you and has accelerated.
When the other vehicle passes at a very fast speed.
When the vehicle in the next lane moves two lanes away from you OR when the vehicle two lanes away moves to the next lane to you.
A motorcycle or bicycle is near. A flat trailer is near. If there are small objects in the
detecting area such as a shopping cart or a baby stroller.
If there is a low height vehicle such as a sports car.
Non-operating condition The BSD indicator on the outer side view mirror may not illuminate prop- erly when: The outer side view mirror housing
is damaged. The mirror is covered with dirt,
snow, or debris. The window is covered with dirt,
snow, or debris. The window is tinted.
Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter- ference received, including interfer- ence that may cause undesired operation.
i
Driving your vehicle
5-43
Driving your vehicle
5
The Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB) system is designed to help detect and monitor the vehicle ahead or detect a pedestrian (if equipped) in the roadway through radar signals and camera recogni- tion to warn the driver that a collision is imminent, and if necessary, apply emergency braking.
System Setting and Activation System setting
The driver can activate the AEB by placing the Engine Start/Stop button to the ON position and by selecting: Cluster type A 'User Settings Driving Assist Forward Collision Warning Autonomous Emergency Braking' Cluster type B 'User Settings Driving Assist AEB (Auton. Emergency Braking)'
The AEB deactivates, when the driv- er deselects the system setting.
AUTONOMOUS (AUTOMATIC) EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB) (IF EQUIPPED)
Take the following precautions when using the Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB): This system is only a supple-
mental system and it is not intended to, nor does it replace the need for extreme care and attention of the driv- er. The sensing range and objects detectable by the sen- sors are limited. Pay attention to the road conditions at all times.
NEVER drive too fast in accor- dance with the road condi- tions or while cornering.
Always drive cautiously to prevent unexpected and sud- den situations from occur- ring. AEB does not stop the vehicle completely and is not a collision avoidance system.
WARNING
Type A Type B
OAE056095L/OAE056022L
5-44
Driving your vehicle
The warning light illumi- nates on the LCD display, when you cancel the AEB system. The driver can
monitor the AEB ON/OFF status on the LCD display. Also, the warning light illuminates when the ESC (Electronic Stability Control) is turned off (Traction & Stability control disabled). If the warning light remains ON when the AEB is activated, have the sys- tem checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
The driver can select the initial warn- ing activation time on the LCD display. Go to the 'User Settings Driving Assist FCW (Fwd. Collision Warning) Late/Normal/Early'.
The options for the initial Forward Collision Warning includes the fol- lowing: Early:
When this condition is selected, the initial Forward Collision Warning is activated earlier than normal. This setting maximizes the amount of distance between the vehicle or pedestrian ahead before the initial warning occurs.
Even though, 'Early' is selected if the front vehicle suddenly stops the initial warning activation time may not seem fast.
Normal: When this condition is selected, the initial Forward Collision Warning is activated normally. This setting allows for a nominal amount of dis- tance between the vehicle or pedestrian ahead before the initial warning occurs.
Late: When this condition is selected, the initial Forward Collision Warning is activated later than normal. This setting reduces the amount of dis- tance between the vehicle or pedestrian ahead before the initial warning occurs. Select 'Late' when traffic is light and when driving speed is slow.
Type A Type B
OAE056096L/OAE056023L
5-45
Driving your vehicle
5
Prerequisite for activation The AEB system is on and ready when AEB is selected on the LCD display and when the following pre- requisites are satisfied: - The ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) is on. - Driving speed exceeds approxi-
mately 6 mph (10 km/h). (The AEB is only activated within a certain speed range.)
- The system detects a pedestrian or a vehicle in front, which may col- lide with your vehicle. (The AEB may not be activated or may sound a warning alarm in accordance with the driving situation or vehicle condition.)
AEB Warning Message and System Control The AEB produces warning mes- sages and warning alarms in accor- dance with the collision risk levels, such as abrupt stopping of the vehi- cle in front, insufficient braking dis- tance, or pedestrian detection. Also, it controls the brakes in accordance with the collision risk levels.
Completely stop the vehicle on a safe location before operating the switch on the steering wheel to activate/ deactivate the AEB system.
The AEB automatically acti- vates when the Engine Start/ Stop button is in the ON posi- tion. The driver can deactivate the AEB by canceling the sys- tem setting on the LCD dis- play.
If you cancel the ESC (Electronic Stability Control) when the AEB system is turned on, the AEB automati- cally deactivates and the AEB warning light illuminates. When the ESC is cancelled the AEB cannot be activated on the LCD display. The AEB warning light will illuminate which is normal.
WARNING
5-46
Driving your vehicle
The driver can select the initial warn- ing activation time in the User Settings in the LCD display. The options for the initial Forward Collision Warning include Early, Normal or Late initial warning time.
Forward Warning (1st warning)
This initial warning message appears on the LCD display with a warning chime.
Collision Warning (2nd warning)
This warning message appears on the LCD display with a warning chime. Additionally, some vehicle system intervention occurs by the engine management system to help decelerate the vehicle. - Your vehicle speed may decelerate
moderately. - The AEB system limitedly controls
the brakes to preemptively mitigate impact in a collision.
Emergency braking (3rd warning)
This warning message appears on the LCD display with a warning chime. Additionally, some vehicle system intervention occurs by the engine management system to help decel- erate the vehicle. - The AEB system limitedly controls
the brakes to preemptively mitigate impact in a collision. The brake control is maximized just before a collision.
Type A Type B
OAE056024L/OAE056025L
Type A Type B
OAE056026L/OAE056027L
Type A Type B
OAE056029L/OAE056030L
5-47
Driving your vehicle
5
Brake operation In an urgent situation, the braking
system enters into the ready status for prompt reaction against the dri- ver's depressing the brake pedal.
The AEB provides additional brak- ing power for optimum braking per- formance, when the driver depresses the brake pedal.
The braking control is automatical- ly deactivated, when the driver sharply depresses the accelerator pedal, or when the driver abruptly operates the steering wheel.
The AEB brake control is automat- ically canceled, when risk factors disappear.
AEB Sensor
In order for the AEB system to oper- ate properly, always make sure the radar sensor cover is clean and free of dirt, snow, and debris. Dirt, snow, or foreign substances on the lens may adversely affect the sensing performance of the sensor.
The driver should always use extreme caution while operating the vehicle, whether or not there is a warning message or alarm from the AEB system.
CAUTION
The braking control cannot completely stop the vehicle nor avoid all collisions. The driver should hold the responsibility to safely drive and control the vehicle.
WARNING
Never deliberately drive danger- ously to activate the system.
WARNING
The AEB system logic operates within certain parameters, such as the distance from the vehicle or pedestrian ahead, the speed of the vehicle ahead, and the driver's vehicle speed. Certain conditions such as inclement weather and road conditions may affect the operation of the AEB system.
WARNING
OAE056028N
5-48
Driving your vehicle
Do not apply license plate frame or foreign objects such as a bumper sticker or a bumper guard near the radar sensor. Doing so may adversely affect the sensing performance of the radar.
Always keep the radar sensor and cover clean and free of dirt and debris.
Use only a soft cloth to wash the vehicle. Do not spray pressur- ized water directly on the sensor or sensor cover.
Be careful not to apply unneces- sary force on the radar sensor or sensor cover. If the sensor is forcibly moved out of proper alignment, the AEB system may not operate correctly. In this case, a warning message may not be displayed. Have the vehi- cle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued) If the front bumper becomes
damaged in the area around the radar sensor, the AEB system may not operate properly. Have the vehicle inspected by author- ized HYUNDAI.
Use only genuine parts to repair or replace a damaged sensor or sensor cover. Do not apply paint to the sensor cover.
NEVER install any accessories or stickers on the front wind- shield, nor tint the front wind- shield.
NEVER locate any reflective objects (i.e. white paper, mirror) over the dashboard. Any light reflection may cause a malfunc- tion of the system.
Pay extreme caution to keep the camera out of water.
NEVER disassemble the camera assembly, nor apply any impact on the camera assembly.
Playing the vehicle audio sys- tem at high volume may offset the system warning sounds.
Information Have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer when:
The windshield glass is replaced.
The front bumper is replaced.
The sensor cover or sensor gets damaged or replaced.
i
NOTICENOTICE
5-49
Driving your vehicle
5
Warning message and warning light
Autonomous Emergency Braking disabled. Radar blocked
When the sensor cover is blocked with dirt, snow, or debris, the AEB system operation may stop tem- porarily. If this occurs, a warning message will appear on the LCD dis- play. Remove any dirt, snow, or debris and clean the radar sensor cover before operating the AEB system. The sys- tem will operate normally when such dirt, snow or debris is removed.
The AEB may not properly operate in an area (e.g. open terrain), where any substances are not detected after turning ON the vehicle.
System Malfunction
Check AEB system
When the AEB is not working prop- erly, the AEB warning light ( ) will illuminate and the warning message will appear for a few sec- onds. After the message disap- pears, the master warning light ( ) will illuminate. In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
The AEB warning message may appear along with the illumination of the ESC (Electronic Stability Control) warning light.
OAE056038L
OAE056031N
5-50
Driving your vehicle
(Continued) Even if there is any problem
with the brake control func- tion of the AEB system, the vehicle's basic braking per- formance will operate normal- ly. However, brake control function for avoiding collision will not activate.
If the vehicle in front stops suddenly, you may have less control of the brake system. Therefore, always keep a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
The AEB system may activate during braking and the vehi- cle may stop suddenly shift- ing loose objects toward the passengers. Always keep loose objects secured.
The AEB system may not acti- vate if the driver applies the brake pedal to avoid a colli- sion.
(Continued)
(Continued) The brake control may be
insufficient, possibly causing a collision, if a vehicle in front abruptly stops. Always pay extreme caution.
Occupants may get injured, if the vehicle abruptly stops by the activated AEB system. Pay extreme caution.
The AEB system operates only to help detect vehicles or pedestrians in front of the vehicle.
The AEB system does not operate when the vehicle is in reverse.
The AEB system is not designed to detect other objects on the road such as animals.
The AEB system does not detect vehicles in the oppo- site lane.
(Continued)
WARNING
The AEB is only a supplemen- tal system for the driver's con- venience. The driver should hold the responsibility to con- trol the vehicle operation. Do not solely depend on the AEB system. Rather, maintain a safe braking distance, and, if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce the driving speed.
In certain instances and under certain driving condi- tions, the AEB system may activate unintentionally. This initial warning message appears on the LCD display with a warning chime. Also, in certain instances the front radar sensor or camera recognition system may not detect the vehicle or pedestri- an ahead. The AEB system may not activate and the warning message will not be displayed.
(Continued)
WARNING
5-51
Driving your vehicle
5
Limitations of the System The Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB) system is designed to help monitor the vehicle ahead or a pedes- trian in the roadway through radar sig- nals and camera recognition to warn the driver that a collision is imminent, and if necessary, apply emergency braking. In certain situations, the radar sen- sor or the camera may not be able to detect the vehicle or pedestrian ahead. In these cases, the AEB sys- tem may not operate normally. The driver must pay careful attention in the following situations where the AEB operation may be limited.
Detecting vehicles The sensor may be limited when: The radar sensor or camera is
blocked with a foreign object or debris
Inclement weather such as heavy rain or snow obscures the field of view of the radar sensor or camera
There is interference by electro- magnetic waves
There is severe irregular reflection from the radar sensor
The radar/camera sensor recogni- tion is limited
The vehicle in front is too small to be detected (for example a motor- cycle or a bicycle, etc.)
The vehicle in front is an oversize vehicle or trailer that is too big to be detected by the camera recog- nition system (for example a tractor trailer, etc.)
The driver's field of view is not well illuminated (either too dark or too much reflection or too much back- light that obscures the field of view)
The vehicle in front does not have their rear lights properly turned ON
The outside brightness changes suddenly, for example when enter- ing or exiting a tunnel
Light coming from a street light or an oncoming vehicle is reflected on a wet road surface such as a pud- dle in the road
The field of view in front is obstructed by sun glare
The windshield glass is fogged up; a clear view of the road is obstructed
(Continued) The AEB system does not
detect cross traffic vehicles that are approaching.
The AEB system cannot detect the driver approaching the side view of a parked vehi- cle (for example on a dead end street.)
In these cases, you must main- tain a safe braking distance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce the driv- ing speed in order to maintain a safe distance.
5-52
Driving your vehicle
The vehicle in front is driving errat- ically
The vehicle is on unpaved or uneven rough surfaces, or road with sudden gradient changes.
The vehicle is driven near areas containing metal substances as a construction zone, railroad, etc.
The vehicle drives inside a build- ing, such as a basement parking lot
The adverse road conditions cause excessive vehicle vibrations while driving
The sensor recognition changes suddenly when passing over a speed bump
The vehicle in front is moving verti- cally to the driving direction
The vehicle in front is stopped ver- tically
The vehicle in front is driving towards your vehicle or reversing
- Driving on a curve The performance of the AEB system may be limited when driving on a curved road. On curved roads, the other vehicle on the same lane is not recognized and the AEB system's performance may be degraded. This may result in unnecessary alarm or braking or no alarm or braking when necessary. Also, in certain instances the front radar sensor or camera recognition system may not detect the vehicle traveling on a curved road.
In these cases, the driver must main- tain a safe braking distance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.
OAE056100
5-53
Driving your vehicle
5 The AEB system may recognize a vehicle in the next lane when driving on a curved road. In this case, the system may unnec- essarily alarm the driver and apply the brake. Always pay attention to road and driving conditions, while driving. If necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance. Also, when necessary depress the accelerator pedal to prevent the sys- tem from unnecessarily decelerating your vehicle. Check the surrounding traffic condi- tions before use.
- Driving on a slope The performance of the AEB decreas- es while driving upward or downward on a slope, not recognizing the vehi- cle in front in the same lane. It may unnecessarily produce the warning message and the warning alarm, or it may not produce the warning mes- sage and the warning alarm at all. When the AEB suddenly recognizes the vehicle in front while passing over a slope, you may experience sharp deceleration. Always keep your eyes forward while driving upward or downward on a slope, and, if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain distance.
- Changing lanes When a vehicle changes lanes in front of you, the AEB system may not immediately detect the vehicle, espe- cially if the vehicle changes lanes abruptly. In this case, you must main- tain a safe braking distance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.
OAE056103OAE056101 OAE056102
5-54
Driving your vehicle
When driving in stop-and-go traffic, and a stopped vehicle in front of you merges out of the lane, the AEB sys- tem may not immediately detect the new vehicle that is now in front of you. In this case, you must maintain a safe braking distance, and if nec- essary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.
- Detecting the vehicle in front of you If the vehicle in front of you has cargo that extends rearward from the cab, or when the vehicle in front of you has higher ground clearance, addi- tional special attention is required. The AEB system may not be able to detect the cargo extending from the vehicle. In these instances, you must maintain a safe braking distance from the rearmost object, and if nec- essary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain distance.
Detecting pedestrians (if equipped) The sensor may be limited when: The pedestrian is not fully detected
by the camera recognition system, for example, if the pedestrian is leaning over or is not fully walking upright
The pedestrian is moving very quickly or appears abruptly in the camera detection area
The pedestrian is wearing clothing that easily blends into the back- ground, making it difficult to be detected by the camera recogni- tion system
It is difficult to detect and distin- guish the pedestrian from other objects in the surroundings, for example, when there is a group of pedestrians or a large crowd
There is an item similar to a per- sons body structure
The pedestrian is small The pedestrian has impaired
mobility The sensor recognition is limited
OAE056109 OAE056105
5-55
Driving your vehicle
5
The radar sensor or camera is blocked with a foreign object or debris
Inclement weather such as heavy rain or snow obscures the field of view of the radar sensor or camera
The outside lighting is too bright (e.g. when driving in bright sunlight or in sun glare) or too dark (e.g. when driving on a dark rural road at night)
When light coming from a street light or an oncoming vehicle is reflected on a wet road surface such as a puddle in the road
The field of view in front is obstructed by sun glare
The windshield glass is fogged up; a clear view of the road is obstruct- ed
The adverse road conditions cause excessive vehicle vibrations while driving
Information In some instances, the AEB system may be canceled when subjected to electromagnetic interference.
Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter- ference received, including interfer- ence that may cause undesired operation.
i
i
(Continued) Never try to test the operation
of the AEB system. Doing so may cause severe injury or death.
Do not use the Autonomous Emergency Braking system when towing a vehicle. Application of the AEB sys- tem while towing may adversely affect the safety of your vehicle or the towing vehicle.
Use extreme caution when the vehicle in front of you has cargo that extends rearward from the cab, or when the vehicle in front of you has higher ground clearance.
The AEB system is designed to help detect and monitor the vehicle ahead or help detect a pedestrian in the roadway through radar signals and camera recognition. It is not designed to detect bicycles, motorcycles, or smaller wheeled objects such as lug- gage bags, shopping carts, or strollers.
(Continued)
WARNING
5-56
Driving your vehicle
The Lane Keeping Assist System helps detect lane markers on the road with a camera at the front wind- shield, and assists the driver's steer- ing to help keep the vehicle between lanes. When the system detects the vehicle straying from its lane, it alerts the driver with a visual and audible warn- ing, while applying a slight counter- steering torque, to try to prevent the vehicle from moving out of its lane.
LANE KEEPING ASSIST SYSTEM (LKAS) (IF EQUIPPED)
OAE056048N
The lane keeping assist system is not a substitute for safe driv- ing practices, but a conven- ience function only. It is the responsibility of the driver to always be aware of the sur- rounding and steer the vehicle.
WARNING
Take the following precautions when using the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS): Do not steer the steering
wheel suddenly when the steering wheel is being assist- ed by the system.
LKAS helps to prevent the driv- er from moving out of the lane unintentionally by assisting the driver's steering. However, the driver should not solely rely on the system but always pay attention on the steering wheel to stay in the lane.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued) The operation of the LKAS
can be canceled or not work properly according to road condition and surroundings. Always be cautious when driving.
Do not disassemble the LKAS camera temporarily to tint the window or attach any types of coatings and accessories. If you disassemble the camera and assemble it again, take your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked for calibra- tion.
When you replace the wind- shield glass, LKAS camera or related parts of the steering wheel, take your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked for calibration.
(Continued)
5-57
Driving your vehicle
5
LKAS Operation
To activate/deactivate the LKAS: With the Engine Start/Stop button in the ON position, press the LKAS but- ton located on the instrument panel on the left hand side of the steering wheel. The indicator in the cluster display will initially illuminate white. This indicates the LKAS is in the READY but NOT ENABLED state.
(Continued) Always have your hands on
the steering wheel while the LKAS system is activated. If you continue to drive with your hands off the steering wheel after the "Keep hands on steering wheel" warning message appears, the system will turn off automatically. After then, if you drive with your hands on the steering wheel, the control will be acti- vated again.
The steering wheel is not con- tinuously controlled so if the vehicle speed is at a higher speed when leaving a lane the vehicle may not be able to be controlled by the system. The driver must always follow the speed limit when using the system.
If you attach objects to the steering wheel, the system may not assist steering or the hands off alarm may not work properly.
OAE056050L
(Continued) The system detects lane
markers and controls the steering wheel by a camera, therefore, if the lane markers are hard to detect, the system may not work properly. Please refer to "Limitations of the system".
Do not remove or damage the related parts of LKAS.
You may not hear a warning sound of LKAS because of excessive audio sound.
Do not place objects on the dashboard that reflects light such as mirrors, white paper, etc. The system may malfunc- tion if the sunlight is reflected.
(Continued)
5-58
Driving your vehicle
Information If the indicator (white) is activated from the previous ignition cycle, the system will turn ON without any addi- tional control. If you press the LKAS button again, the indicator on the cluster goes off.
The color of indicator will change depending on the condition of LKAS.
- White : Sensor does not detect lane markers or vehicle speed is under 40 mph (60 km/h).
- Green : Sensor detects lane mark- ers and the system is able to control vehicle steering.
LKAS activation
To see the LKAS screen on the LCD display in the cluster, select SCC/LKAS mode ( ) for cluster type A or ASSIST mode ( ) for cluster type B. For more informa- tion, refer to "LCD Display Modes" in chapter 3.
When both lane markers are detected and all the conditions to activate the LKAS are satisfied, a green steering wheel indicator will illuminate and the LKAS indicator light will change from white to green.This indicates that the LKAS system is in the ENABLED state and the steering wheel will be able to be controlled.
i
OAEE057122N
The Lane Keeping Assist System is a system to prevent the driver from leaving the lane. However, the driver should not solely rely on the system but always check the road condi- tions when driving.
WARNING
5-59
Driving your vehicle
5 If vehicle speed is over 40 mph (64
km/h) and the system detects lane markers, the color changes from gray to white.
If the system detects the left lane marker, the left lane marker color will change from gray to white.
If the system detects the right marker line, the right lane marker color will change from gray to white.
Both lane markers must be detect- ed for the system to fully activate.
If your vehicle speed exceeds 40 mph (60 km/h) and the LKAS but- ton is ON, the system is enabled. If your vehicle departs from the pro- jected lane in front of you, the LKAS operates as follows:
A visual warning appears on the cluster LCD display. Either the left lane marker or the right lane marker in the cluster LCD display will blink depending on which direction the vehicle is veering. If the steering wheel appears, the system will control the vehicle's steering to prevent the vehicle from crossing the lane marker.
Keep hands on steering wheel
If the driver takes their hands off the steering wheel for several seconds while the LKAS is activated, the sys- tem will warn the driver.
Information If the steering wheel is held very light- ly the message may still appear because the LKAS system may not recognize that the driver has their hands on the wheel.
i
Lane marker undetected
Lane marker detected
OAEE057123N/OAEE057124N
Left lane marker Right lane marker
OAEE057127N/OAEE057128N
OAEE056129L
5-60
Driver's grasp not detected. LKAS will be disabled momentarily
If the driver still does not have their hands on the steering wheel after the message "Keep hands on steering wheel", the system will not control the steering wheel and warn the driv- er only when the driver crosses the lane markers. However, if the driver has their hands on the steering wheel again, the sys- tem will start controlling the steering wheel.
Information Even though the steering is assisted
by the system, the driver can still steer to control the steering wheel.
The steering wheel may feel heavier when the steering wheel is assisted by the system than when it is not.
i
Driving your vehicle
OAEE056130L
The driver is responsible for accurate steering.
Turn off the system in below situations. - In bad weather - In bad road condition - When the steering wheel
needs to be controlled by the driver frequently.
WARNING
The warning message may appear late according to road conditions. Therefore, always have your hands on the steering wheel while driving.
WARNING
5-61
Driving your vehicle
Warning Light and Message
Check LKAS
If there is a problem with the system a message will appear for a few sec- onds. If the problem continues the LKAS failure indicator will illuminate.
LKAS failure indicator The LKAS failure indica- tor (yellow) will illuminate if the LKAS is not working properly. Have your vehi- cle checked by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer.
When there is a problem with the system do one of the following:
Turn the system on after turning the engine off and on again.
Check if the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Check if the system is affected by the weather. (ex: fog, heavy rain, etc.)
Check if there is foreign matter on the camera lens.
If the problem is not solved, have your vehicle checked by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer.
The LKAS system will not be in the ENABLED state and the steering wheel will not be assisted when:
The turn signal is turned on before changing a lane. If you change lanes without the turn signal on, the steering wheel might be con- trolled.
The vehicle is not driven in the mid- dle of the lane when the system is turned on or right after changing a lane.
The vehicle drives too close to the lane marker continuously before steering is assisted.
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) or VSM (Vehicle Stability Control) is activated.
The vehicle is driven on a sharp curve.
Vehicle speed is below 40 mph (60 km/h) and over 110 mph (180 km/h).
The vehicle makes sharp lane changes.
The vehicle brakes suddenly. Only one lane marker is detected. The lane is very wide or narrow.
5 OAEE056131L
5-62
There are more than two lane markers on the road. (e.g. con- struction area)
The vehicle is driven on a steep incline.
The steering wheel is turned sud- denly.
Limitations of the System The LKAS may operate prematurely even if the vehicle does not depart from the intended lane, OR, the LKAS may not assist your steering or warn you if the vehicle leaves the intended lane under the following cir- cumstances:
When the lane and road condi- tions are poor It is difficult to distinguish the lane
marking from the road surface or the lane marking is faded or not clearly marked.
It is difficult to distinguish the color of the lane marker from the road.
There are markings on the road surface that look like a lane marker that is inadvertently being detected by the camera.
The lane marker is merged or divided. (e.g. tollgate)
The lane number increases or decreases or the lane marker are crossing complicatedly.
There are more than two lane markers on the road in front of you.
The lane marker is very thick or thin.
The lanes ahead are not visible due to rain, snow, water on the road, damaged or stained road surface, or other factors.
The shadow is on the lane marker by a median strip, trees, etc.
The lanes are incomplete or the area is in a construction zone.
There are crosswalk signs or other symbols on the road.
The lane marker in a tunnel is stained with oil, etc.
The lane suddenly disappears such as at the intersection.
When external condition is inter- vened The brightness outside changes
suddenly such as when entering or exiting a tunnel or passing under a bridge.
The brightness outside is too low such as when the headlamps are not on at night or the vehicle is going through a tunnel or passing under a bridge..
There is a boundary structure in the roadway such as a concrete barrier, guardrail and reflector post that is inadvertently being detected by the camera.
When light coming from a street light or an oncoming vehicle is reflected on a wet road surface such as a puddle in the road.
The field of view in front is obstructed by sun glare.
There is not enough distance between you and the vehicle in front to be able to detect the lane marker or the vehicle ahead is driv- ing on the lane marker.
Driving your vehicle
5-63
Driving your vehicle
Driving on a steep grade, over a hill, or when driving on a curved road.
The adverse road conditions cause excessive vehicle vibrations while driving.
The surrounding of the inside rear view mirror temperature is high due to direct sunlight, etc.
When front visibility is poor The windshield or the LKAS cam-
era lens is blocked with dirt or debris.
The windshield glass is fogged up; a clear view of the road is obstruct- ed.
Placing objects on the dashboard, etc.
The sensor cannot detect the lane because of fog, heavy rain or snow.
LKAS Function Change The driver can change LKAS to Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) or change the LKAS mode between Standard LKA and Active LKA from the LCD display. Go to the 'User Settings Driving Assist Lane Keep Assist System Lane Departure Warning/Standard LKA/ Active LKA'. The system is automatically set to Standard LKA if a function is not selected.
Lane Departure Warning LDWS alerts the driver with a visual warning and a warning alarm when the system detects the vehicle departing the lane. The steering wheel will not be controlled.
Standard LKA The Standard LKA mode guides the driver to help keep the vehicle within the lanes. It rarely controls the steer- ing wheel, when the vehicle drives well inside the lanes. However, it starts to control the steering wheel, when the vehicle is about to deviate out of the lanes.
Active LKA The Active LKA mode provides more frequent steering wheel control in comparison with the Standard LKA mode. Active LKA can reduce the dri- vers fatigue to assist the steering for maintaining the vehicle in the middle of the lane.
Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter- ference received, including interfer- ence that may cause undesired operation.
i
5
5-64
Driving your vehicle
Cruise Control Operation
1. Cruise indicator 2. SET indicator
The Cruise Control system allows you to drive at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h) without depressing the accelerator pedal.
CRUISE CONTROL (Continued)
- When driving in heavy traffic or when traffic conditions make it difficult to drive at a constant speed
- When driving on rainy, icy, or snow-covered roads
- When driving on hilly or windy roads
- When driving in windy areas - When driving with limited
view (possibly due to bad weather such as fog, snow, rain and sandstorm)
OAE056067N
Take the following precautions: Always set the vehicle speed
under the speed limit. If the Cruise Control is left on,
(cruise ( ) indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated) the Cruise Control can be activated unin- tentionally. Keep the Cruise Control system off (cruise ( ) indicator light OFF) when the Cruise Control is not in use, to avoid inadver- tently setting a speed.
Use the Cruise Control sys- tem only when traveling on open highways in good weather.
Do not use the Cruise Control when it may be unsafe to keep the vehicle at a constant speed:
(Continued)
WARNING
5-65
Driving your vehicle
5
Information During normal cruise control opera-
tion, when the SET switch is activat- ed or reactivated after applying the brakes, the cruise control will ener- gize after approximately 3 seconds. This delay is normal.
Before activating the cruise control function, the system will check to verify that the brake switch is oper- ating normally. Depress the brake pedal at least once after turning ON the ignition or starting the engine.
To set Cruise Control speed
1. Press the CRUISE button on the steering wheel to turn the system on. The cruise ( ) indi- cator will illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which must be more than 20 mph (30 km/h).
3. Push the toggle switch down (SET-), and release it. The SET indicator light will illuminate.
4. Release the accelerator pedal.
Information On a steep slope, the vehicle may slightly slow down or speed up, while driving uphill or downhill.
i
i
OAE056068
OAE056069
5-66
Driving your vehicle
To increase Cruise Control speed
Push the toggle switch up (RES+) and release it immediately. The cruising speed will increase 1.0 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the tog- gle switch is operated in this man- ner.
Push the toggle switch up (RES+) and hold it, while monitoring the SET speed on the instrument clus- ter. Release the toggle switch when the desired speed is shown and the vehicle will accelerate to that speed.
Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the toggle switch down (SET-).
To decrease Cruise Control speed
Push the toggle switch down (SET-) and release it immediately. The cruising speed will decrease 1.0 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the toggle switch is operated in this manner.
Push the toggle switch down (SET-) and hold it.Your vehicle will gradual- ly slow down. Release the toggle switch at the speed you want to maintain.
Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the toggle switch down (SET-).
OAE056069OAE056070
5-67
Driving your vehicle
5
To temporarily accelerate with the Cruise Control ON Depress the accelerator pedal. When you take your foot off the accelerator, the vehicle will return to the previ- ously set speed. If you push the toggle switch down (SET-) at the increased speed, the Cruise Control will maintain the increased speed.
Cruise Control will be canceled when:
Depressing the brake pedal. Pressing the CANCEL button
located on the steering wheel. Pressing the CRUISE button. Both
the " " indicator and the "SET" indicator will turn OFF.
Moving the shift lever into N (Neutral).
Decreasing the vehicle speed to less than approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
The ESC (Electronic Stability Control) is operating.
Downshifting to 2nd gear when in Manual Shift mode.
Information Each of the above actions will cancel Cruise Control operation (the "SET" indicator in the instrument cluster will go off), but only pressing the CRUISE button will turn the system off. If you wish to resume Cruise Control opera- tion, push the toggle switch up (RES+) located on your steering wheel. You will return to your previously preset speed, unless the system was turned off using the CRUISE button.
i
OAE056071
5-68
Driving your vehicle
To resume preset Cruising speed
Push the toggle switch up (RES+). If the vehicle speed is over 20 mph (30 km/h), the vehicle will resume the preset speed.
To turn Cruise Control off
Press the CRUISE button (the cruise ( ) indicator light will go off).
Turn the vehicle OFF.
OAE056068
OAE056070
5-69
Driving your vehicle
5 Cruise indicator Set speed Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
To see the SCC screen on the LCD display in the cluster, select SCC/ LKAS mode ( ) for cluster type A or ASSIST mode ( ) for cluster type B. For more information, refer to "LCD Display Modes" in chapter 3.
The Smart Cruise Control System allows you to program the vehicle to maintain constant speed and mini- mum distance between the vehicle ahead. The Smart Cruise Control System will automatically adjust your vehicle speed to maintain your programmed speed and following distance without requiring you to depress the acceler- ator or brake pedals.
SMART CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
For your safety, please read the owner's manual before using the Smart Cruise Control system.
WARNING
The Smart Cruise Control System is not a substitute for safe driving practices, but a convenience function only. It is the responsibility of the driver to always check the speed and distance to the vehicle ahead.
WARNING
Take the following precautions : Always set the vehicle speed
under the speed limit. If the Smart Cruise Control is
left on, (cruise ( ) indicator light in the instru- ment cluster is illuminated) the Smart Cruise Control can be activated unintentionally. Keep the Smart Cruise Control System off (cruise ( ) indicator light OFF) when the Smart Cruise Control is not in use, to avoid inadvertently setting a speed.
Use the Smart Cruise Control System only when traveling on open highways in good weather.
(Continued)
WARNING Type A Type B
OLF054430N/OAE056097N
5-70
Driving your vehicle
Smart Cruise Control Speed To set Smart Cruise Control speed
1. Push the CRUISE button on the steering wheel to turn the system on. The cruise ( ) indi- cator will illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed. The Smart Cruise Control speed can be set as follows: 20 110 mph (30 -180 km/h) :
when there is no vehicle in front 5 110 mph (10 -180 km/h) :
when there is a vehicle in front
3. Push the toggle switch down (SET-). The Set Speed and Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance on the LCD display will illuminate.
4. Release the accelerator pedal. The desired speed will automati- cally be maintained.
If there is a vehicle in front of you, the speed may decrease to maintain the distance to the vehicle ahead. On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow down or speed up slightly while going uphill or downhill.
(Continued) Do not use the Smart Cruise
Control when it may not be safe to keep the vehicle at a constant speed: - When driving in heavy traffic
or when traffic conditions make it difficult to drive at a constant speed
- When driving on rainy, icy, or snow-covered roads
- When driving on a steep downhill or uphill
- When driving in windy areas - When driving in parking lots - When driving near crash
barriers - When driving on a sharp
curve - When driving with limited
view (possibly due to bad weather, such as fog, snow, rain or sandstorm)
- When the vehicle sensing ability decreases due to vehicle modification result- ing level difference of the vehicle's front and rear
OAE056068
OAE056069
5-71
Driving your vehicle
5
Information Vehicle speed may decrease on an upward slope and increase on a down- ward slope.
To increase Smart Cruise Control set speed
Follow either of these procedures: Push the toggle switch up (RES+),
and release it immediately. The cruising speed will increase by 1 mph (1 km/h) each time you move the toggle switch up in this manner.
Push the toggle switch up (RES+), and hold it. Your vehicle set speed will increase by 5 mph (10 km/h). Release the toggle switch at the speed you want.
i
When vehicle speed is under 5 mph (10 km/h), the Smart Cruise Control is canceled. The driver must adjust the vehicle speed by depressing the accelerator or brake pedal according to the road condition ahead and driv- ing condition.
CAUTION
OAE056070
Check the driving condition before using the toggle switch. Driving speed sharply increas- es, when you push up and hold the toggle switch.
CAUTION
5-72
Driving your vehicle
To decrease the Smart Cruise Control set speed
Follow either of these procedures: Push the toggle switch down
(SET-), and release it immediately. The cruising speed will decrease by 1 mph (1 km/h) each time you move the toggle switch down in this manner.
Push the toggle switch down (SET-), and hold it. Your vehicle set speed will decrease by 5 mph (10 km/h). Release the toggle switch at the speed you want.
You can set the speed to 20 mph (30 km/h).
To temporarily accelerate with the Smart Cruise Control on If you want to speed up temporarily when the Smart Cruise Control is on, depress the accelerator pedal. Increased speed will not interfere with Smart Cruise Control operation or change the set speed. To return to the set speed, take your foot off the accelerator pedal. If you push the toggle switch down (SET-) at increased speed, the cruis- ing speed will be set again pedal.
Information Be careful when accelerating tem- porarily, because the speed is not con- trolled automatically at this time even if there is a vehicle in front of you.
Smart Cruise Control set speed will be temporarily canceled when:
Canceled manually Depressing the brake pedal. Pressing the CANCEL button
located on the steering wheel. Depress the brake pedal and press
the CANCEL button at the same time, when the vehicle is at a stand- still.
i OAE056069
OAE056071
5-73
Driving your vehicle
5
The Smart Cruise Control turns off temporarily when the Set Speed and Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance indicator on the LCD display turns off. The cruise ( ) indicator is illuminated continuously.
Canceled automatically The driver's door is opened. The vehicle is shifted to N
(Neutral), R (Reverse) or P (Park). The vehicle speed is over 120 mph
(190 km/h). The ESC (Electronic Stability
Control), TCS (Traction Control System) or ABS is operating.
The ESC is turned off. The sensor or the cover is dirty or
blocked with foreign matter. The accelerator pedal is continu-
ously depressed for more than one minute.
The SCC system has malfunc- tioned.
The engine RPM enters the red zone.
The AEB is activated.
Each of these actions will cancel the Smart Cruise Control opera- tion.The Set Speed and Vehicle-to- Vehicle Distance on the LCD dis- play will go off. In a condition the Smart Cruise Control is canceled automatically, the Smart Cruise Control will not resume even though the RES+ or SET- toggle switch is pushed.
Information If the Smart Cruise Control is canceled by other than the reasons mentioned, have the system checked by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer.
i
5-74
Driving your vehicle
Smart Cruise Control canceled
If the system is canceled, the warn- ing chime will sound and a message will appear for a few seconds. You must adjust the vehicle speed by depressing the accelerator or brake pedal according to the road condition ahead and driving condition. Always check the road conditions. Do not rely on the warning chime.
To resume Smart Cruise Control set speed If any method other than the cruise toggle switch was used to cancel cruising speed and the system is still activated, the cruising speed will automatically resume when you push the toggle switch up (RES+) or down (SET-). If you push the toggle switch up (RES+), the speed will resume to the recently set speed. However, if vehi- cle speed drops below 20 mph (30 km/h), it will resume when there is a vehicle in front of your vehicle.
Information Always check the road conditions when you push the toggle switch up (RES+) to resume speed.
To turn Cruise Control off
Press the CRUISE button (the cruise ( ) indicator light will go off).i
OAEE056165N
OAE056068
5-75
Driving your vehicle
5
Smart Cruise Control Vehicle- to-Vehicle Distance To set Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance
When the Smart Cruise Control System is ON, you can set and main- tain the distance from the vehicle ahead of you without pressing the accelerator or brake pedal. Each time the button is pressed, the vehicle to vehicle distance changes as follows:
For example, if you drive at 56 mph (90 km/h), the distance is maintained as follows:
Distance 4 - approximately 172 feet Distance 3 - approximately 130 feet Distance 2 - approximately 106 feet Distance 1 - approximately 82 feet
Information The distance is set to the last set dis- tance when the system is used for the first time after the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode.
When the lane ahead is clear:
The vehicle speed will maintain the set speed.
i
Type A Type B
OAE056178N/OAE056177N
OAE056076
Distance 4 Distance 3 Distance 2
Distance 1
5-76
Driving your vehicle
Distance 4
Type A
Distance 3 Distance 4 Distance 3
Distance 1Distance 2
OAE056180N/OAE056179N/OAE056182N/OAE056181N OAE056184N/OAE056183N/OAE056186N/OAE056185N
Type B
When there is a vehicle ahead of you in your lane:
Distance 1Distance 2
Your vehicle speed will slow down or speed up to maintain the selected distance.
If the vehicle ahead speeds up, your vehicle will travel at a steady cruis- ing speed after accelerating to the set speed.
When using the Smart Cruise Control System: The warning chime sounds
and the Vehicle-to Vehicle Distance indicator blinks if the vehicle is unable to main- tain the selected distance from the vehicle ahead.
If the warning chime sounds, depress the brake pedal or use the steering wheel toggle switch to actively adjust the vehicle speed, and the dis- tance to the vehicle ahead.
(Continued)
WARNING
OAEE056140R
5-77
Driving your vehicle
5
Sensor to Detect Distance to the Vehicle Ahead
The Smart Cruise Control uses a sensor to detect distance to the vehi- cle ahead.
(Continued) Even if the warning chime is
not activated, always pay attention to the driving condi- tions to prevent dangerous situations from occurring.
Playing the vehicle audio sys- tem at high volume may offset the system warning sounds.
If the vehicle ahead (vehicle speed: less than 20 mph (30 km/h)) disappears to the next lane, the warning chime will sound and a message "Watch for surrounding vehicles" will appear. Adjust your vehicle speed for vehicles or objects that can suddenly appear in front of you by depressing the brake pedal. Always pay attention to the road condition ahead.
CAUTION
OAE056168L
OAE056028N
5-78
Driving your vehicle
Warning message
Smart Cruise Control disabled. Radar blocked
When the sensor lens cover is blocked with dirt, snow, or debris, the Smart Cruise Control System opera- tion may stop temporarily. If this occurs, a warning message will appear on the LCD display. Remove any dirt, snow, or debris and clean the radar sensor lens cover before operating the Smart Cruise Control System. The Smart Cruise Control system may not properly activate, if the radar is totally contaminated, or if any substance is not detected after the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode (e.g. in an open terrain).
OAE056166L
(Continued) If the front bumper becomes
damaged in the area around the radar sensor, the Smart Cruise Control System may not operate properly. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Use only genuine HYUNDAI parts to repair or replace a damaged sensor or sensor cover. Do not apply paint to the sensor cover.
Do not apply license plate frame or foreign objects such as a bumper sticker or a bumper guard near the radar sensor. Doing so may adversely affect the sensing performance of the radar.
Always keep the radar sensor and lens cover clean and free of dirt and debris.
Use only a soft cloth to wash the vehicle. Do not spray pres- surized water directly on the sensor or sensor cover.
Be careful not to apply unnec- essary force on the radar sen- sor or sensor cover. If the sen- sor is forcibly moved out of proper alignment, the Smart Cruise Control System may not operate correctly. In this case, a warning message may not be displayed. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
CAUTION
5-79
Driving your vehicle
5 Check Smart Cruise Control System
The message will appear when the vehicle to vehicle distance control system is not functioning normally. Take your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the sys- tem checked.
To Adjust the Sensitivity of Smart Cruise Control
The sensitivity of vehicle speed when following the front vehicle to maintain the set distance can be adjusted on the LCD display. Cluster type A 'User Settings Driving Assist Smart Cruise Control Response Slow/Normal/Fast' Cluster type B 'User Settings Driving Assist SCC Response (Smart Cruise Control) Slow/Normal/Fast'
You may select one of the three stages you prefer.
Slow: Vehicle speed following the front vehicle to maintain the set distance is slower than normal speed.
Normal: Vehicle speed following the front vehicle to maintain the set distance is normal.
Fast: Vehicle speed following the front vehicle to maintain the set distance is faster than normal speed.
Information The last selected speed sensitivity of the smart cruise control is remained in the system.
i
OAE056167L
Type A Type B
OAE056099L/OAE056077L
5-80
Driving your vehicle
To Convert to Cruise Control Mode The driver may choose to switch to use the conventional Cruise Control mode (speed only control function) by following these steps: 1. Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel to turn the system on. The cruise ( ) indi- cator will illuminate.
2. Push and hold the Vehicle-to- Vehicle Distance button for more than 2 seconds.
3. Choose between "SCC Mode (Smart Cruise Control)" and "CC Mode (Cruise Control)".
When the system is canceled using the CRUISE button or the CRUISE button is used after the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode, the Smart Cruise Control mode will turn on.
Limitations of the System The Smart Cruise Control System may have limits to its ability to detect distance to the vehicle ahead due to road and traffic conditions.
On curves
The Smart Cruise Control System may not detect a moving vehicle in your lane, and then your vehicle could accelerate to the set speed. Also, the vehicle speed will decrease when the vehicle ahead is recognized suddenly.
Select the appropriate set speed on curves and apply the brakes or accelerator pedal if necessary.
OAE056100
When using the conventional Cruise Control mode, you must manually adjust the distance to other vehicles by depressing the accelerator or brake pedal. The system does not automati- cally adjust the distance to vehi- cles in front of you.
WARNING
5-81
Driving your vehicle
5 Your vehicle speed can be reduced due to a vehicle in the adjacent lane. Apply the accelerator pedal and select the appropriate set speed. Check to be sure that the road con- ditions permit safe operation of the Smart Cruise Control.
On inclines
During uphill or downhill driving, the Smart Cruise Control System may not detect a moving vehicle in your lane, and cause your vehicle to accelerate to the set speed. Also, the vehicle speed will rapidly decrease when the vehicle ahead is recognized suddenly.
Select the appropriate set speed on inclines and apply the brake or accelerator pedal if necessary.
Lane changing
A vehicle which moves into your lane from an adjacent lane cannot be recognized by the sensor until it is in the sensor's detection range.
The radar may not detect immedi- ately when a vehicle cuts in sud- denly. Always pay attention to the traffic, road and driving conditions.
If a slower vehicle moves into your lane, your speed may decrease to maintain the distance to the vehicle ahead.
If a faster vehicle which moves into your lane, your vehicle will acceler- ate to the set speed.
OAE056103OAE056102
OAE056101
5-82
Driving your vehicle
Detecting vehicles
Some vehicles in your lane cannot be recognized by the sensor: - Narrow vehicles such as motorcy-
cles or bicycles - Vehicles offset to one side - Slow-moving vehicles or sudden-
decelerating vehicles - Stopped vehicles - Vehicles with small rear profile such
as trailers with no loads
A vehicle ahead cannot be recog- nized correctly by the sensor if any of following occurs: - When the vehicle is pointing
upwards due to overloading in the luggage compartment
- While the steering wheel is operat- ing
- When driving to one side of the lane - When driving on narrow lanes or on
curves Apply the brake or accelerator pedal if necessary.
Your vehicle may accelerate when a vehicle ahead of you disappears.
When you are warned that the vehicle ahead of you is not detect- ed, drive with caution.
OAE056108
OAE056104
5-83
Driving your vehicle
5 When driving in stop-and-go traffic,
and a stopped vehicle in front of you merges out of the lane, the system may not immediately detect the new vehicle that is now in front of you. In this case, you must maintain a safe braking dis- tance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.
Always look out for pedestrians when your vehicle is maintaining a distance with the vehicle ahead.
Always be cautious for vehicles with higher height or vehicles car- rying loads that sticks out from the back of the vehicle.
OAE056105OAE056110OAE056109
5-84
Driving your vehicle
The Smart Cruise Control System may not operate temporarily due to: Electrical interference Modifying the suspension Differences of tire abrasion or
tire pressure Installing different type of tires
NOTICE
(Continued) The Smart Cruise Control
System cannot recognize a stopped vehicle, pedestrians or an oncoming vehicle. Always look ahead cautiously to prevent unexpected and sudden situations from occur- ring.
Vehicles moving in front of you with a frequent lane change may cause a delay in the sys- tem's reaction or may cause the system to react to a vehicle actually in an adjacent lane. Always drive cautiously to pre- vent unexpected and sudden situations from occurring.
Always be aware of the select- ed speed and vehicle to vehi- cle distance. The driver should not solely rely on the system but always pay atten- tion to driving conditions and control your vehicle speed.
(Continued)
(Continued) The Smart Cruise Control
System may not recognize complex driving situations so always pay attention to driv- ing conditions and control your vehicle speed.
When using the Smart Cruise Control take the following pre- cautions: If an emergency stop is nec-
essary, you must apply the brakes. The vehicle cannot be stopped at every emergency situation by using the Smart Cruise Control System.
Keep a safe distance accord- ing to road conditions and vehicle speed. If the vehicle to vehicle distance is too close during a high-speed driving, a serious collision may result.
Always maintain sufficient braking distance and deceler- ate your vehicle by applying the brakes if necessary.
(Continued)
WARNING
5-85
Driving your vehicle
5
Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interfer- ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
3. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.
Information Radio frequency radiation exposure information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 8 in. (20 cm) between the radiator (antenna) and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-locat- ed or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
ii
5-86
Driving your vehicle
Hazardous Driving Conditions When hazardous driving elements are encountered such as water, snow, ice, mud and sand, take the below suggestions: Drive cautiously and keep a longer
braking distance. Avoid abrupt braking or steering. When your vehicle is stuck in snow,
mud, or sand, use second gear. Accelerate slowly to avoid unnec- essary wheel spin.
Put sand, rock salt, tire chains or other non-slip materials under the wheels to provide additional trac- tion while the vehicle becomes stuck in ice, snow, or mud.
Rocking the Vehicle If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around your front wheels. Then, shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a for- ward gear. Try to avoid spinning the wheels, and do not race the engine. To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelera- tor pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal while the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in forward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that may free the vehicle.
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
Downshifting with an dual clutch transmission while driv- ing on slippery surfaces can cause an accident. The sudden change in tire speed could cause the tires to skid. Be care- ful when downshifting on slip- pery surfaces.
WARNING
If the vehicle is stuck and excessive wheel spin occurs, the temperature in the tires can increase very quickly. If the tires become damaged, a tire blow out or tire explosion can occur. This condition is dangerous - you and others may be injured. Do not attempt this procedure if people or objects are anywhere near the vehicle. If you attempt to free the vehicle, the vehicle can overheat quickly, possibly causing an engine compartment fire or other dam- age. Try to avoid spinning the wheels as much as possible to prevent overheating of either the tires or the engine. DO NOT allow the vehicle to spin the wheels above 35 mph (56 km/h).
WARNING
5-87
Driving your vehicle
5
Information The ESC system must be turned OFF before rocking the vehicle.
If you are still stuck after rocking the vehicle a few times, have the vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle to avoid engine overheating, pos- sible damage to the transmission, and tire damage. See "Towing" in chapter 6.
Smooth Cornering Avoid braking or gear changing in corners, especially when roads are wet. Ideally, corners should always be taken under gentle acceleration.
Driving at Night Night driving presents more hazards than driving in the daylight. Here are some important tips to remember: Slow down and keep more dis-
tance between you and other vehi- cles, as it may be more difficult to see at night, especially in areas where there may not be any street lights.
Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare from other driver's head- lamps.
Keep your headlamps clean and properly aimed. Dirty or improperly aimed headlamps will make it much more difficult to see at night.
Avoid staring directly at the head- lamps of oncoming vehicles. You could be temporarily blinded, and it will take several seconds for your eyes to readjust to the darkness.
Driving in the Rain Rain and wet roads can make driving dangerous. Here are a few things to consider when driving in the rain or on slick pavement: Slow down and allow extra follow-
ing distance. A heavy rainfall makes it harder to see and increas- es the distance needed to stop your vehicle.
Turn OFF your Cruise Control. (if equipped)
Replace your windshield wiper blades when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield.
Tires should be properly main- tained with at least 2/32nds of an inch of tread depth. If your tires do not have enough tread, making a quick stop on wet pavement can cause a skid and possibly lead to an accident. See "Tire Tread" in chapter 7.
Turn on your headlamps to make it easier for others to see you.
NOTICE
i
5-88
Driving your vehicle
Driving too fast through large pud- dles can affect your brakes. If you must go through puddles, try to drive through them slowly.
If you believe your brakes may be wet, apply them lightly while driv- ing until normal braking operation returns.
Hydroplaning If the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough, your vehicle may have little or no contact with the road surface and actually ride on the water. The best advice is SLOW DOWN when the road is wet.
The risk of hydroplaning increas- es as the depth of tire tread decreases, refer to "Tire Tread" in chapter 7.
Driving in Flooded Areas Avoid driving through flooded areas unless you are sure the water is no higher than the bottom of the wheel hub. Drive through any water slowly. Allow adequate stopping distance because brake performance may be reduced. After driving through water, dry the brakes by gently applying them sev- eral times while the vehicle is moving slowly.
Highway Driving Tires Adjust the tire inflation, as specified. Under-inflation may overheat or damage the tires. Do not install worn-out or damaged tires, which may reduce traction or adversely affect vehicle handling. This could lead to sudden tire failure that may cause loss of vehicle con- trol resulting in an accident.
Information Never over-inflate your tires above the maximum inflation pressure, as speci- fied on your tires.
Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil Driving at higher speeds on the high- way consumes more fuel and is less efficient than driving at a slower, more moderate speed. Maintain a moderate speed in order to conserve fuel when driving on the highway. Be sure to check both the engine coolant level and the engine oil before driving.
Drive belt A loose or damaged drive belt may overheat the engine.
i
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wear- ing a seat belt. Make sure all passengers are wearing their seat belts.
WARNING
5-89
Driving your vehicle
5
WINTER DRIVING The severe weather conditions of winter quickly wear out tires and cause other problems. To minimize winter driving problems, you should take the following suggestions:
Snow or Icy Conditions You need to keep sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Apply the brakes gently. Speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden brake applications, and sharp turns are potentially very hazardous practices. During deceleration, use engine braking to the fullest extent. Sudden brake applications on snowy or icy roads may cause the vehicle to skid. To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may be necessary to use snow tires or to install tire chains on your tires. Always carry emergency equipment. Some of the items you may want to carry include tire chains, tow straps or chains, a flashlight, emergency flares, sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper, gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehi- cle, make sure to use radial tires of the same size and load range as the original tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels to balance your vehicles handling in all weather conditions. The traction provided by snow tires on dry roads may not be as high as your vehicle's original equipment tires. Check with the tire dealer for maximum speed recommendations.
Information Do not install studded tires without first checking local, state and munici- pal regulations for possible restric- tions against their use.
Tire chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are thinner than other types of tires, they may be damaged by mounting some types of tire chains on them. Therefore, the use of snow tires is recommended instead of tire chains. If tire chains must be used, use gen- uine HYUNDAI parts and install the tire chain after reviewing the instruc- tions provided with the tire chains. Damage to your vehicle caused by improper tire chain use is not cov- ered by your vehicle manufacturers warranty.
i
Snow tires should be equivalent in size and type to the vehicle's standard tires. Otherwise, the safety and handling of your vehicle may be adversely affect- ed.
WARNING
OAE056091
5-90
Driving your vehicle
Information Install tire chains on both left and
right front tires. It should be noted that installing tire chains on the tires will provide a greater driving force, but will not prevent side skids.
Do not install studded tires without first checking local, state and municipal regulations for possible restrictions against their use.
Chain installation
When installing tire chains, follow the manufacturer's instructions and mount them as tightly possible. Drive slowly (less than 20 mph (30 km/h)) with chains installed. If you hear the chains contacting the body or chas- sis, stop and tighten them. If they still make contact, slow down until the noise stops. Remove the tire chains as soon as you begin driving on cleared roads. When mounting snow chains, park the vehicle on level ground away from traffic. Turn on the vehicle Hazard Warning Flasher and place a triangular emergency warning device behind the vehicle (if available). Always place the vehicle in P (Park), apply the parking brake and turn off the engine before installing snow chains.
i
The use of tire chains may adversely affect vehicle han- dling: Drive less than 20 mph
(30 km/h) or the chain manu- facturer's recommended speed limit, whichever is lower.
Drive carefully and avoid bumps, holes, sharp turns, and other road hazards, which may cause the vehicle to bounce.
Avoid sharp turns or locked wheel braking.
WARNING
5-91
Driving your vehicle
5
- When using tire chains: Wrong size chains or improperly
installed chains can damage your vehicle's brake lines, sus- pension, body and wheels.
Use SAE "S" class or wire chains.
If you hear noise caused by chains contacting the body, retighten the chain to prevent contact with the vehicle body.
To prevent body damage, retighten the chains after driving 0.3~0.6 miles (0.5~1.0 km).
Do not use tire chains on vehi- cles equipped with aluminum wheels. If unavoidable, use a wire type chain.
Use wire chains less than 0.47 inch (12 mm) wide to prevent damage to the chain's connec- tion.
Winter Precautions Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant Your vehicle is delivered with high quality ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling system. It is the only type of coolant that should be used because it helps prevent corrosion in the cool- ing system, lubricates the water pump and prevents freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish your coolant in accordance with the maintenance schedule in chapter 7. Before winter, have your coolant tested to assure that its freezing point is sufficient for the temperatures anticipated during the winter.
Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary In some climates it is recommended that a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be used during cold weather. See chapter 8 for recommendations. If you aren't sure what weight oil you should use, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Check battery and cables Winter puts additional burdens on the battery system. Visually inspect the battery and cables as described in chapter 7. The level of charge in your battery can be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a service station.
NOTICE
5-92
Driving your vehicle
Check spark plugs and ignition system Inspect your spark plugs as described in chapter 7 and replace them if necessary. Also check all ignition wiring and components to be sure they are not cracked, worn or damaged in any way.
Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system To keep the water in the window washer system from freezing, add an approved window washer anti-freeze solution in accordance with instruc- tions on the container. Window wash- er anti-freeze is available from an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and most auto parts outlets. Do not use engine coolant or other types of anti- freeze as these may damage the paint finish.
Do not let your parking brake freeze Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged position.This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk the parking brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put the gear selector lever in P and block the rear wheels so the car cannot roll. Then release the parking brake.
Do not let ice and snow accu- mulate underneath Under some conditions, snow and ice can build up under the fenders and interfere with the steering. When driving in severe winter conditions where this may happen, you should periodically check underneath the car to be sure the movement of the front wheels and the steering com- ponents is not obstructed.
Don't place foreign objects or materials in the engine com- partment Placement of foreign object or mate- rials which prevent cooling of the engine, in the engine compartment, may cause a failure or combustion. The manufacturer is not responsible for the damage caused by such placement.
To keep locks from freezing To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into the key opening. If a lock is covered with ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is frozen internally, you may be able to thaw it out by using a heated key. Handle the heat- ed key with care to avoid injury.
5-93
Driving your vehicle
5
Two labels on your driver's door sill show how much weight your vehicle was designed to carry: the Tire and Loading Information Label and the Certification Label. Before loading your vehicle, familiar- ize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle's weight ratings, from the vehicle's specifica- tions and the Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight This is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or option- al equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight This is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your deal- er plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo Weight This figure includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight, including cargo and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) This is the total weight placed on each axle (front and rear) - including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) This is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the Certification Label. The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) This is the Base Curb Weight plus actual Cargo Weight plus passen- gers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) This is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment, passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the Certification Label located on the drivers door sill.
VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT
5-94
Driving your vehicle
Tire Loading Information Label Vehicle capacity weight
849 lbs. (385 kg) Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi- mum combined weight of occupants and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer, the combined weight includes the tongue load.
Seating capacity Total : 5 persons
(Front seat : 2 persons, Rear seat : 3 persons)
Seating capacity is the maximum number of occupants including a driver, your vehicle may carry. However, the seating capacity may be reduced based upon the weight of all of the occupants, and the weight of the cargo being carried or towed. Do not overload the vehicle as there is a limit to the total weight, or load limit including occupants and cargo, the vehicle can carry.
The label located on the driver's door sill gives the original tire size, cold tire pressures recommended for your vehicle, the number of people that can be in your vehicle and vehi- cle capacity weight.
OAE067034N
OAE066035N
OAEPH067035
- Type B
15 inch tire - Type A
16 inch tire
17 inch tire - Type A
- Type B
OAE066036N
OAE067032N
5-95
Driving your vehicle
5
Towing capacity We do not recommend using this vehicle for trailer towing.
Cargo capacity The cargo capacity of your vehicle will increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants and the tongue load, if your vehicle is equipped with a trailer.
Steps for determining correct load limit 1. Locate the statement "The com-
bined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and lug- gage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and lug- gage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail- er, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehi- cle.
Do not overload the vehicle as there is a limit to the total weight, or load limit, including occupants and cargo, the vehi- cle can carry. Overloading can shorten the life of the vehicle. If the GVWR or the GAWR is exceeded, parts on the vehicle can break, and it can change the handling of your vehicle. These could cause you to lose control and result in an accident.
WARNING
5-96
Driving your vehicle
Example 1
Maximum Load (1400 lbs.) (635 kg)
Passenger Weight (150 lbs. 2 = 300 lbs.)
(68 kg 2 = 136 kg)
Cargo Weight (1100 lbs.) (499 kg)
Example 2
Maximum Load (1400 lbs.) (635 kg)
Passenger Weight (150 lbs. 5 = 750 lbs.)
(68 kg 5 = 340 kg)
Cargo Weight (650 lbs.) (295 kg)
Example 3
Maximum Load (1400 lbs.) (635 kg)
Passenger Weight (172 lbs. 5 = 860 lbs.)
(78 kg 5 = 390 kg)
Cargo Weight (540 lbs.) (245 kg)
+
+
+
5-97
Driving your vehicle
5
Certification label
The certification label is located on the driver's door sill at the center pil- lar and shows the maximum allow- able weight of the fully loaded vehi- cle. This is called the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. This label also tells you the maxi- mum weight that can be supported by the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
The total weight of the vehicle, including all occupants, accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline.
OBH059070
Overloading
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, the GAWR for either the front or rear axle and vehicle capacity weight. Exceeding these ratings can affect your vehicle's handling and braking ability, and cause an accident.
Do not overload your vehicle. Overloading your vehicle can cause heat buildup in your vehicle's tires and possible tire failure, increased stop- ping distances and poor vehi- cle handling-all of which may result in a crash.
WARNING
Overloading your vehicle may cause damage. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
We do not recommend using this vehicle for trailer towing.
NOTICE
TRAILER TOWING
If you carry items inside your vehicle (e.g., suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else), they are moving as fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, the items will keep going and can cause an injury if they strike the driver or a passenger. Put items in the cargo area of
your vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
Do not stack items, like suit- cases, inside the vehicle above the tops of the seats.
Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle.
When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it.
WARNING
Driving your vehicle
5-98
What to do in an emergency
6
Hazard Warning Flasher .......................................6-2 In Case of an Emergency While Driving.............6-2
If the Engine Stalls While Driving .................................6-2 If the Vehicle Stalls at a Crossroad or Crossing .......6-2 If You Have a Flat Tire While Driving ..........................6-3
If the Vehicle will not Start ..................................6-3 If the 12 Volt Battery is Discharged (Hybrid Vehicle) .....................................................6-5
Before Jump Starting .......................................................6-5 Jump Starting......................................................................6-6
If the 12 Volt Battery is Discharged (Plug-In Hybrid Vehicle) .......................................6-9
Jump Starting......................................................................6-9 If the Engine Overheats......................................6-12 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).......6-14
Check Tire Pressure .......................................................6-14 Tire Pressure Monitoring System...............................6-15 Low Tire Pressure Telltale ............................................6-16 Low Tire Pressure LCD Display with Position Indicator ............................................................6-16 TPMS Malfunction Indicator ........................................6-17 Changing a Tire with TPMS..........................................6-18
If You Have a Flat Tire........................................6-20 With Spare Tire................................................................6-20 With Tire Mobility Kit (TMK) - Type A......................6-25 With Tire Mobility Kit (TMK) - Type B......................6-33
Towing ...................................................................6-40 Towing Service.................................................................6-40 Removable Towing Hook ...............................................6-41 Emergency Towing..........................................................6-42
If an Accident Occurs..........................................6-44
6-2
The hazard warning flasher serves as a warning to other drivers to exer- cise extreme caution when approach- ing, overtaking, or passing your vehi- cle. It should be used whenever emer- gency repairs are being made or when the vehicle is stopped near the edge of a roadway.
To turn the hazard warning flasher on or off, press the hazard warning flasher button both the left and right. The button is located in the center fascia panel. All turn signal lights will flash simultaneously. The hazard warning flasher oper-
ates whether your vehicle is run- ning or not.
The turn signals do not work when the hazard flasher is on.
If the Engine Stalls While Driving Reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cau- tiously off the road to a safe place.
Turn on your hazard warning flash- er.
Try to start the hybrid system again. If your vehicle will not start, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or seek other qualified assistance.
If the Vehicle Stalls at a Crossroad or Crossing If the vehicle stalls at a crossroad or crossing, if safe to do so, move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position and then push the vehicle to a safe location.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
What to do in an emergency
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING
OAE066001
6-3
W hat to do in an em
ergency
If You Have a Flat Tire While Driving If a tire goes flat while you are driving: Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal and let the vehicle slow down while driving straight ahead. Do not apply the brakes immedi- ately or attempt to pull off the road as this may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident. When the vehicle has slowed to such a speed that it is safe to do so, brake carefully and pull off the road. Drive off the road as far as possible and park on firm, level ground. If you are on a divided highway, do not park in the median area between the two traffic lanes.
When the vehicle is stopped, press the hazard warning flasher button, move the shift lever into P (Park), and apply the parking brake, and place the Engine Start/Stop button in the OFF position.
Have all passengers get out of the vehicle. Be sure they all get out on the side of the vehicle that is away from traffic.
When changing a flat tire, follow the instructions provided later in this chapter.
Hybrid vehicle Be sure the shift lever is in P
(Park). The vehicle starts only when the shift lever is in P (Park).
This vehicle does not have a regu- lar 12V battery that needs periodic replacement. It is lithium ion poly- mer type integrated into the HEV high voltage battery. The vehicle has a 12V battery protection sys- tem that cuts 12V battery from vehicle draw to prevent full dis- charge. If vehicle will not start, first try pressing the 12V Battery Reset switch (left side of the steering wheel near the fuel door open switch) to reconnect the 12V bat- tery, but you must start vehicle within 15 seconds of pressing the 12V Battery Reset switch. After starting vehicle, operate the vehi- cle safely outdoors in ready mode stopped and/or drive it for 30 min- utes total to charge the 12V battery fully.
Check the fuel level and add fuel if necessary.
If the vehicle still does not start, have your vehicle checked by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer.
6
IF THE VEHICLE WILL NOT START
Push or pull starting the vehicle may cause the catalytic con- verter to overload which can lead to damage to the emission control system.
CAUTION
6-4
Plug-in hybrid vehicle Be sure the shift lever is in P
(Park). The engine starts only when the shift lever is in P (Park).
Check the battery connections to be sure they are clean and tight.
Turn on the interior light. If the light dims or goes out when you operate the starter, the battery is drained.
Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. This could cause damage to your vehicle. See instructions for "Jump Starting" provided in this chapter.
Check the fuel level and add fuel if necessary.
If the engine still does not start, have your vehicle checked by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer.
What to do in an emergency
Push or pull starting the vehicle may cause the catalytic con- verter to overload which can lead to damage to the emission control system.
CAUTION
6-5
W hat to do in an em
ergency
6
Before Jump Starting This vehicle does not have a regular 12V battery that needs periodic replacement. It is lithium ion polymer type integrated into the HEV high voltage battery. The vehicle has a 12V battery protection system that cuts 12V battery from vehicle draw to prevent full discharge.
Using the 12V Battery Reset Switch
1. Press the 12V Battery Reset switch to reconnect the 12V bat- tery.
2. Start the vehicle within 15 sec- onds of pressing the 12V Battery Reset switch.
3. After starting vehicle ( indica- tor on), operate the vehicle safely outdoors in ready mode stopped and/or drive it for 30 minutes total to charge the 12V battery fully.
If you do not start the vehicle imme- diately after pressing the 12V Battery Reset switch, the power of 12V bat- tery is automatically disconnected after few seconds to save the 12V battery from additional discharge. If the 12V battery is disconnected prior to starting the vehicle, press the 12V Battery Reset switch again and then immediately start the vehicle as explained. Repeated use of the 12V Battery Reset switch without a sufficient engine ON cycle (30 Min+) may cause over discharge of the 12V bat- tery, which will prevent the vehicle from starting. If the 12V battery is over discharged to a point that the reset does not work, try to jump-start the vehicle.
Information After starting the vehicle ( indica- tor on), the 12V battery is being charged whether the engine is running or not. Although there is no engine- sound, it is unnecessary to depress the accelerator pedal.
i
IF THE 12 VOLT BATTERY IS DISCHARGED (HYBRID VEHICLE)
OAE046037N
6-6
What to do in an emergency
The following items may need to be reset after the battery has been dis- charged or the battery has been dis- connected. See chapter 3 or 4 for: Power Windows Trip Computer Climate Control System Clock Audio System Sunroof Driver Position Memory System
External power source using 12V battery The use of external power acces- sories may reduce performance and function of the vehicle. Especially, the use of dash cam- eras may shut off the power of the vehicle prior to the dash camera's automatic shut-down. If the power of the vehicle is shut off, start the vehicle as explained. (refer to "Using the 12V Battery Switch")
Jump Starting In the event vehicle still does not have a functional 12V battery (check if interior lights will not turn on) then you can try a jump start to the engine compartment jumper terminals using a 12V booster pack or jumper cables from another vehicle's 12V battery according to the following instruc- tions.
1. Position the vehicles close enough that the jumper cables will reach, but do not allow the vehicles to touch.
2. Avoid fans or any moving parts in the engine compartment at all times, even when the vehicles are turned off.
3. Turn off all electrical devices such as radios, lights, air conditioning, etc. Put the vehicles in P (Park) and set the parking brake. Turn both vehicles OFF.
NOTICE Jump starting can be danger- ous if done incorrectly. Follow the jump starting procedure in this section to avoid serious injury or damage to your vehi- cle. If in doubt about how to properly jump start your vehi- cle, we strongly recommend that you have a service techni- cian or towing service do it for you.
CAUTION
6-7
W hat to do in an em
ergency
6
4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact sequence shown in the illus- tration. First connect one jumper cable to the red, positive (+) jumper terminal of your vehicle (1).
5. Connect the other end of the jumper cable to the red, positive (+) battery/jumper terminal of the assisting vehicle (2).
6. Connect the second jumper cable to the black, negative (-) battery/ chassis ground of the assisting vehicle (3).
7. Connect the other end of the sec- ond jumper cable to the black, negative (-) chassis ground of your vehicle (4). Do not allow the jumper cables to contact anything except the cor- rect battery or jumper terminals or the correct ground. Do not lean over the battery when making connections.
8. Press the 12V Battery Reset switch.
9. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for a few min- utes.
10. Start your vehicle as soon as possible. After starting vehicle ( indicator on), operate the vehicle safely outdoors in ready mode stopped and/or drive it for 30 minutes total to charge the 12V battery fully.
OAE066004N OAE046037N
6-8
What to do in an emergency
If your vehicle will not start after a few attempts, it probably requires servicing. In this event please seek qualified assistance. If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent, have your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Disconnect the jumper cables in the exact reverse order you connected them: 1. Disconnect the jumper cable from
the black, negative (-) chassis ground of your vehicle (4).
2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the black, neg- ative (-) battery/chassis ground of the assisting vehicle (3).
3. Disconnect the second jumper cable from the red, positive (+) battery/jumper terminal of the assisting vehicle (2).
4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the red, positive (+) jumper terminal of your vehicle (1).
Information The voltage range of the charger should be 13.3~14V and its current range should be less than 60A. (13.8V is recommended).
Information An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health. Dispose of the battery according to your local law(s) or regulations.
To prevent damage to your vehi- cle: Only use a 12-volt power supply
(battery or jumper system) to jump start your vehicle.
Do not attempt to jump start your vehicle by push-starting.
NOTICE
ii
Pb
The use of an improper charg- er with a voltage and current range higher than specified may cause overheating and damage to the 12V battery.
The use of an incorrect charg- er will lead to a power shut-off to save the 12V battery. Stop using the incorrect charger once the power of the vehicle is shut off.
CAUTION
6-9
W hat to do in an em
ergency
Jump Starting Jump starting can be dangerous if done incorrectly. Follow the jump starting procedure in this section to avoid serious injury or damage to your vehicle. If in doubt about how to properly jump start your vehicle, we strongly recommend that you have a service technician or towing service do it for you.
IF THE 12 VOLT BATTERY IS DISCHARGED (PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE)
6
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH to you or bystanders, always follow these precautions when working near or handling the battery:
Always read and follow instructions carefully when handling a battery. Wear eye protection designed to protect the eyes from acid splashes. Keep all flames, sparks, or smoking materials away from the battery. Hydrogen is always present in battery cells, is highly combustible, and may explode if ignit- ed. Keep batteries out of reach of children.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued) Batteries contain sulfu- ric acid which is highly corrosive. Do not allow acid to contact your eyes, skin or clothing.
If acid gets into your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get imme- diate medical attention. If acid gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the area. If you feel pain or a burning sensation, get med- ical attention immediately. When lifting a plastic-cased
battery, excessive pressure on the case may cause battery acid to leak. Lift with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners.
Do not attempt to jump start your vehicle if your battery is frozen.
(Continued)
6-10
Information An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health. Dispose of the battery according to your local law(s) or regulations.
To prevent damage to your vehicle: Only use a 12-volt power supply
(battery or jumper system) to jump start your vehicle.
Do not attempt to jump start your vehicle by push-starting.
Jump starting procedure 1. Position the vehicles close enough
that the jumper cables will reach, but do not allow the vehicles to touch.
2. Avoid fans or any moving parts in the engine compartment at all times, even when the vehicles are turned off.
3. Turn off all electrical devices such as radios, lights, air conditioning, etc. Put the vehicles in P (Park) and set the parking brake. Turn both vehicles OFF.
Information Your vehicle has a battery in the lug- gage compartment, but when you jump start your vehicle, use the jumper terminal in the engine com- partment.
i
NOTICE
i
What to do in an emergency
(Continued) NEVER attempt to recharge
the battery when the vehicle's battery cables are connected to the battery.
The electrical ignition system works with high voltage. NEVER touch these compo- nents with the engine running or when the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position.
6-11
W hat to do in an em
ergency
4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact sequence shown in the illus- tration. First connect one jumper cable to the red, positive (+) jumper terminal of your vehicle (1).
5. Connect the other end of the jumper cable to the red, positive (+) battery/jumper terminal of the assisting vehicle (2).
6. Connect the second jumper cable to the black, negative (-) battery/ chassis ground of the assisting vehicle (3).
7. Connect the other end of the sec- ond jumper cable to the black, negative (-) chassis ground of your vehicle (4). Do not allow the jumper cables to contact anything except the cor- rect battery or jumper terminals or the correct ground. Do not lean over the battery when making connections.
8. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run at approxi- mately 2,000 rpm for a few min- utes. Then start your vehicle.
If your vehicle will not start after a few attempts, it probably requires servicing. In this event please seek qualified assistance. If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent, have your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Disconnect the jumper cables in the exact reverse order you connected them: 1. Disconnect the jumper cable from
the black, negative (-) chassis ground of your vehicle (4).
2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the black, neg- ative (-) battery/chassis ground of the assisting vehicle (3).
3. Disconnect the second jumper cable from the red, positive (+) battery/jumper terminal of the assisting vehicle (2).
4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the red, positive (+) jumper terminal of your vehicle (1).
6
OAE066004N
6-12
What to do in an emergency
If your engine coolant temperature gauge indicates overheating, you experience a loss of power, or hear loud pinging or knocking, the engine may be overheating. If this happens, you should: 1. Turn ON the hazard warning flash-
er, pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
2. Place the shift lever in P (Park) and set the parking brake.
3. Make sure that there is no hot steam gushing out of the engine compartment. When it is safe to do so, open the engine compart- ment, and check the water-pump connector. When the water-pump connector is disconnected, stop the engine, re-connect the water- pump connector, and then re-start the engine.
4. Set the temperature and the air flow to the maximum, and turn ON the air conditioner.
5. When the Service warning light ( ) illuminates on the instru- ment cluster, immediately stop the engine, and contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. When the engine warning light ( ) illumi- nates, or when the coolant or hot steams gush out of the engine compartment, leave the engine compartment opened, while run- ning the engine. This is to ventilate the engine compartment and to cool down the engine.
6. Check the coolant temperature gauge on the instrument cluster to make sure the coolant temperature is sufficiently cooled down. Check the coolant level. When it is insuffi- cient, check its connection with the radiator, the heater hose, and the water pump for any leakage. When there is no leakage, add the coolant. However, if the problems persists, such as the illumination of the warning lights, leakages, or the cooling-fan malfunction, which may overheat the engine, immediately stop the engine, and have your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
The electric motor for the cooling fan may continue to operate or start up when the engine is not running
and can cause serious injury. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the rotating fan blades of the cooling fan.
WARNING
6-13
W hat to do in an em
ergency
6
7. If you cannot find the cause of the overheating, wait until the engine temperature has returned to nor- mal. Then, if coolant has been lost, carefully add coolant to the reservoir to bring the fluid level in the reservoir up to the halfway mark.
8. Proceed with caution, keeping alert for further signs of overheat- ing. If overheating happens again, call an authorized HYUNDAI deal- er for assistance.
Serious loss of coolant indi- cates a leak in the cooling sys- tem and should be checked as soon as possible by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
Your vehicle is equipped with a pres- surized coolant reserve tank. NEVER remove the coolant
reserve tank cap or the radiator drain plug while the engine and radiator are HOT. Hot coolant and steam may blow out under pressure, causing serious injury. Turn the engine off and wait until the engine cools down. Use extreme care when remov- ing the coolant reserve tank cap. Wrap a towel or thick rag around it, and turn it counter- clockwise slowly to release some of the pressure from the system. Step back while the pressure is released. When you are sure all the pres- sure has been released, contin- ue turning the cap counter- clockwise to remove it.
WARNING
6-14
What to do in an emergency
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
(1) Low Tire Pressure / TPMS Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(2) Low Tire Pressure / Tire Pressure Monitor / TPMS Malfunction Display (shown on the cluster LCD dis- play)
Check Tire Pressure
You can check the tire pressure in the Information Mode (for cluster type A) or Assist Mode (for cluster type B) on the cluster. Refer to the "LCD Display Modes" in chapter 3.
Tire pressure is displayed after a few minutes of driving after initial engine start up.
If tire pressure is not displayed when the vehicle is stopped, "Drive to display" message will appear. After driving, check the tire pres- sure.
The displayed tire pressure values may differ from those measured with a tire pressure gauge.
You can change the tire pressure unit in the User Settings mode on the cluster. - psi, kpa, bar (Refer to the "User
Settings Mode" section in chapter 3).
OAE066006N Type A
Type A Type B
Type B
OAE046460L/OAE066030L
OAE046114L/OAE046115L
6-15
W hat to do in an em
ergency
6
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Each tire, including the spare (if pro- vided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehi- cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac- ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres- sure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pres- sure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi- cantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi- ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte- nance, and it is the driver's responsi- bility to maintain correct tire pres- sure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumina- tion of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse- quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pres- sure as intended. TPMS malfunc- tions may occur for a variety of rea- sons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alter- nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function proper- ly.
Over-inflation or under-inflation can reduce tire life, adversely affect vehicle handling, and lead to sudden tire failure that may cause loss of vehicle con- trol resulting in an accident.
WARNING
6-16
What to do in an emergency
Always check the TPMS malfunction LCD display after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function proper- ly.
If any of the below happens, have the system checked by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer. 1. The Low Tire Pressure TPMS
Malfunction Indicator does not illuminate for 3 seconds when the Engine Start/Stop button is placed to the ON position or engine is running.
2. The TPMS Malfunction Indicator remains illuminated after blink- ing for approximately 1 minute.
3. The Low Tire Pressure LCD dis- play remains illuminated
Low Tire Pressure Telltale
Low Tire Pressure LCD Display with Position Indicator
When the tire pressure monitoring system warning indicators are illumi- nated and the warning message is displayed on the cluster LCD display, one or more of your tires is signifi- cantly under-inflated. The LCD posi- tion indicator will indicate which tire is significantly under-inflated by illu- minating the corresponding position light.
If any of your tire pressures are indi- cated as being low, immediately reduce your speed, avoid hard cor- nering, and anticipate increased stopping distances. You should stop and check your tires as soon as pos- sible. Inflate the tires to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehi- cle's placard or tire inflation pressure label located on the driver's side cen- ter pillar outer panel. If you cannot reach a service station or if the tire cannot hold the newly added air, replace the low pressure tire with the spare tire. The Low Tire Pressure LCD position indicator will remain on and the TPMS Malfunction Indicator may blink for one minute and then remain illuminated until you have the low pressure tire repaired and replaced on the vehicle.
The spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure sensor.
NOTICE
NOTICE
OAE046114L OAE046115L
Type A Type B
6-17
W hat to do in an em
ergency
6
TPMS Malfunction Indicator The TPMS Malfunction
Indicator will illuminate after it blinks for approximately one minute when there is a problem with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System. Have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
If there is a malfunction with the TPMS, the individual tire pres- sures in the cluster LCD display will not be available. Have the sys- tem checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi- ble.
NOTICE
During winter or cold weather, the TPMS indicator may illumi- nate if the tire pressures were set when the outside tempera- ture was warm. As the outside air becomes colder, the pres- sure in the tires will decrease. Similarly, if the outside air becomes warmer, the pressure in the tires will increase. As you drive your vehicle, the tempera- ture of the tires will heat up, therefore the tire pressures will increase. Check and adjust your tire pressures regularly before driving to make sure your vehi- cle is operating at the correct pressures as designed.
CAUTION
Low pressure damage
Significantly low tire pressure makes the vehicle unstable and can contribute to loss of vehicle control and increased braking distances. Continued driving on low pres- sure tires can cause the tires to overheat and fail.
WARNING
6-18
What to do in an emergency
The TPMS Malfunction Indicator may illuminate after blinking for one minute if the vehicle is near electric power supply cables or radio transmitters such as police stations, government and public offices, broadcasting stations, military installations, airports, transmitting towers, etc. Additionally, the TPMS Malfunction Indicator may illuminate if snow chains are used or electronic devices such as computers, charg- ers, remote starters, navigation, etc. This may interfere with normal operation of the TPMS.
Changing a Tire with TPMS If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire Pressure and LCD position indicator will come on. Have the flat tire repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible or replace the flat tire with the spare tire.
The spare tire does not come with a tire pressure monitoring sensor. When the low pressure tire or the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire, the Low Tire Pressure LCD position indicator will remain on. Also, the TPMS Malfunction Indicator will illu- minate after blinking for one minute if the vehicle is driven at speed above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) for approximate- ly 20 minutes.
Once the original tire equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sensor is reinflated to the recommended pres- sure and reinstalled on the vehicle, the Low Tire Pressure LCD position indicator and TPMS Malfunction Indicator will go off within a few min- utes of driving. If the indicators do not disappear after a few minutes, please visit an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. Each wheel is equipped with a tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind the valve stem (except for the spare tire). You must use TPMS specific wheels. It is recommended that you always have your tires serv- iced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
NOTICE
Never use a puncture-repairing agent not approved by HYUNDAI dealer to repair and/or inflate a low pressure tire. Tire sealant not approved by HYUNDAI deal- er may damage the tire pressure sensor.
CAUTION
6-19
W hat to do in an em
ergency
6
You may not be able identify a tire with low pressure by simply looking at it. Always use a good quality tire pressure guage to measure the tire's inflation pressure. Please note that a tire that is hot (from being driven) will have a higher pressure measure- ment than a tire that is cold. A cold tire means the vehicle has been sitting for 3 hours and driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3 hour period. Allow the tire to cool before measur- ing the inflation pressure. Always be sure the tire is cold before inflating to the recommended pressure.
Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter- ference received, including interfer- ence that may cause undesired operation.
3. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.
i
The TPMS cannot alert you to severe and sudden tire dam- age caused by external fac- tors such as nails or road debris.
If you feel any vehicle instabil- ity, immediately take your foot off the accelerator, apply the brakes gradually with light force, and slowly move to a safe position off the road.
WARNING
Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) components may interfere with the system's ability to warn the driver of low tire pressure con- ditions and/or TPMS malfunc- tions. Tampering with, modify- ing, or disabling the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) components may void the warranty for that portion of the vehicle.
WARNING
6-20
What to do in an emergency
With Spare Tire (if equipped) Jack and tools
Jack handle Jack Wheel lug nut wrench
The jack, jack handle, and wheel lug nut wrench are stored in the luggage compartment under the luggage box cover. The jack is provided for emergency tire changing only.
Turn the winged hold down bolt counterclockwise to remove the spare tire. Store the spare tire in the same com- partment by turning the winged hold down bolt clockwise. To prevent the spare tire and tools from "rattling", store them in their proper location.
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
Changing a tire can be danger- ous. Follow the instructions in this section when changing a tire to reduce the risk of serious injury or death.
WARNING
OAD065027
OAD065026
Be careful as you use the jack handle to stay clear of the flat end. The flat end has sharp edges that could cause cuts.
CAUTION
6-21
W hat to do in an em
ergency
6
If it is hard to loosen the tire hold- down wing bolt by hand, you can loosen it easily using the jack handle. 1. Put the jack handle (1) inside of
the tire hold-down wing bolt. 2. Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise with the jack handle.
Changing tires
Follow these steps to change your vehicle's tire: 1. Park on a level, firm surface. 2. Move the shift lever into P (Park),
apply the parking brake, and place the Engine Start/Stop button in the OFF position.
3. Press the hazard warning flasher button.
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench, jack, jack handle, and spare tire from the vehicle.
5. Block both the front and rear of the tire diagonally opposite of the tire you are changing.
A vehicle can slip or roll off of a jack causing serious injury or death to you or those nearby. Take the following safety pre- cautions: Never place any portion of
your body under a vehicle that is supported by a jack.
NEVER attempt to change a tire in the lane of traffic. ALWAYS move the vehicle completely off the road on level, firm ground away from traffic before trying to change a tire. If you cannot find a level, firm place off the road, call a towing service for assistance.
Be sure to use the jack pro- vided with the vehicle.
ALWAYS place the jack on the designated jacking positions on the vehicle and NEVER on the bumpers or any other part of the vehicle for jacking sup- port.
(Continued)
(Continued) Do not start or run the engine
while the vehicle is on the jack.
Do not allow anyone to remain in the vehicle while it is on the jack.
Keep children away from the road and the vehicle.
WARNING
OLF064005
6-22
What to do in an emergency
6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun- terclockwise one turn each in the order shown above, but do not remove any lug nuts until the tire has been raised off of the ground.
7. Place the jack at the designated jacking position under the frame closest to the tire you are chang- ing. The jacking positions are plates welded to the frame with two notches. Never jack at any other position or part of the vehi- cle. Doing so may damage the side seal molding or other parts of the vehicle.
8. Insert the jack handle into the jack and turn it clockwise, raising the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Make sure the vehicle is stable on the jack.
OAE066010
Block
OAE066011 OAE066012
Front Rear
6-23
W hat to do in an em
ergency
6
9. Loosen the lug nuts with the wheel lug nut wrench and remove them with your fingers. Remove the wheel from the studs and lay it flat on the ground out of the way. Remove any dirt or debris from the studs, mounting surfaces, and wheel.
10. Install the spare tire onto the studs of the hub.
11. Tighten the lug nuts with your fin- gers onto the studs with the smaller end of the lug nuts clos- est to the wheel.
12. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle coun- terclockwise.
13. Use the wheel lug nut wrench to tighten the lug nuts in the order shown. Double-check each lug nut until they are tight. After changing tires, have an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer tighten the lug nuts to their proper torque as soon as possible. The wheel lug nut should be tightened to 79~94 lbfft (11~13 kgfm).
If you have a tire gauge, check the tire pressure (see "Tires and Wheels" in chapter 8 for tire pressure instructions.). If the pressure is lower or higher than recommended, drive slowly to the nearest service station and adjust it to the recommended pressure. Always reinstall the valve cap after checking or adjusting tire pressure. If the cap is not replaced, air may leak from the tire. If you lose a valve cap, buy another and install it as soon as possible. After changing tires, secure the flat tire and return the jack and tools to their proper stor- age locations.
OAE066013 OLF064013
Rear
6-24
What to do in an emergency
Check the tire pressure as soon as possible after installing a spare tire. Adjust it to the recommended pressure.
If any of the equipment such as the jack, lug nuts, studs, or other equip- ment is damaged or in poor condi- tion, do not attempt to change the tire and call for assistance.
Use of compact spare tires (if equipped)
Compact spare tires are designed for emergency use only. Drive carefully on the compact spare tire and always follow the safety precautions.
When driving with the compact spare tire mounted to your vehicle: Check the tire pressure after
installing the compact spare tire. The compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
Do not take this vehicle through an automatic car wash while the com- pact spare tire is installed.
Do not use the compact spare tire on any other vehicle because this tire has been designed especially for your vehicle.
The compact spare tires tread life is shorter than a regular tire. Inspect your compact spare tire regularly and replace worn com- pact spare tires with the same size and design, mounted on the same wheel.
Do not use more than one compact spare tire at a time.
NOTICE
Your vehicle has metric threads on the studs and lug nuts. Make certain during tire changing that the same nuts that were removed are reinstalled. If you have to replace your lug nuts make sure they have metric threads to avoid damaging the studs and ensure the wheel is properly secured to the hub. Consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.
CAUTION
To prevent compact spare tire failure and loss of control pos- sibly resulting in an accident: Use the compact spare tire
only in an emergency. NEVER operate your vehicle
over 50 mph (80 km/h). Do not exceed the vehicle's
maximum load rating or the load carrying capacity shown on the sidewall of the com- pact spare tire.
Do not use the compact spare tire continuously. Repair or replace the original tire as soon as possible to avoid fail- ure of the compact spare tire.
WARNING
6-25
W hat to do in an em
ergency
6
When the original tire and wheel are repaired and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nut torque must be set correctly. The correct lug nut tightening torque is 79~94 lbfft (11~13 kgfm).
With Tire Mobility Kit (TMK) - Type A
For safe operation, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual before use. (1) Compressor (2) Sealant bottle
NOTICE
To prevent damaging the com- pact spare tire and your vehicle: Drive slowly enough for the
road conditions to avoid all hazards, such as a potholes or debris.
Avoid driving over obstacles. The compact spare tire diame- ter is smaller than the diame- ter of a conventional tire and reduces the ground clearance approximately 1 inch (25 mm).
Do not use tire chains on the compact spare tire. Because of the smaller size, a tire chain will not fit properly.
Do not use the compact spare tire on any other wheels, nor should standard tires, snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings be used with the com- pact spare wheel.
CAUTION
OAE066037N
6-26
What to do in an emergency
The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary fix to the tire and the tire should be inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
Introduction With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay mobile even after experiencing a tire puncture. The compressor and sealing com- pound system effectively and com- fortably seals most punctures in a passenger car tire caused by nails or similar objects and reinflates the tire. After you ensure that the tire is prop- erly sealed you can drive cautiously on the tire (distance up to 120 miles (200 km)) at a max. speed of (50 mph (80 km/h)) in order to reach a service station or tire dealer for the tire replacement. It is possible that some tires, espe- cially with larger punctures or dam- age to the sidewall, cannot be sealed completely. Air pressure loss in the tire may adversely affect tire performance. For this reason, you should avoid abrupt steering or other driving maneuvers, especially if the vehicle is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in use.
One sealant bottle for one tire
When two or more tires are flat, do not use the tire mobility kit because the supported one sealant of Tire Mobility Kit is only used for one flat tire.
CAUTION
Tire wall
Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit to repair punctures in the tire walls. This can result in an acci- dent due to tire failure.
WARNING
Temporary fix
Have your tire repaired as soon as possible. The tire may lose air pressure at any time after inflating with the Tire Mobility Kit.
WARNING
6-27
W hat to do in an em
ergency
6
The Tire Mobility Kit is not designed or intended as a permanent tire repair method and is to be used for one tire only. This instruction shows you step by step how to temporarily seal the puncture simply and reliably. Read the section "Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit".
Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit Park your car at the side of the
road so that you can work with the Tire Mobility Kit away from moving traffic.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even when you're on fairly level ground, always set your park- ing brake.
Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for sealing/inflation passenger car tires. Only punctured areas located within the tread region of the tire can be sealed using the tire mobil- ity kit.
Do not use on motorcycles, bicy- cles or any other type of tires.
When the tire and wheel are dam- aged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit for your safety.
Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may not be effective for tire damage larger than approximately 0.24 inch (6 mm). Please contact the nearest HYUNDAI dealership if the tire cannot be made roadworthy with the Tire Mobility Kit.
Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if a tire is severely damaged by driving run flat or with insufficient air pres- sure.
Do not remove any foreign objects such as nails or screws that have penetrated the tire.
Provided the car is outdoors, leave the engine running. Otherwise operating the compressor may eventually drain the car battery.
Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit unattended while it is being used.
Do not leave the compressor run- ning for more than 10 minutes at a time or it may overheat.
Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if the ambient temperature is below -22F (-30C).
In case of skin contact with the- sealant, wash the area thoroughly- with plenty of water.If the irritation- persists, seek medical attention.
In case of eye contact with the sealant,flush your eyes for at least 15 min-utes.If the irritation persists, seekmedical attention.
In case of swallowing the sealant,rinse the mouth and drink plenty ofwater.However, never give anythingto an unconscious person and seekmedical attention immedi- ately.
Long time exposure to the sealant- may cause damage to bodily tis- suesuch as kidney, etc.
6-28
What to do in an emergency
1. Speed restriction label 2. Sealant bottle and label with
speed restriction 3. Filling hose from sealant bottle to
wheel 4. Connectors and cable for power
outlet direct connection 5. Holder for the sealant bottle 6. Compressor 7. ON/OFF switch 8. Pressure gauge for displaying the
tire inflation pressure 9. Button for reducing tire inflation
pressure
Components of the Tire Mobility Kit
OAE067039
6-29
W hat to do in an em
ergency
6
Connectors, cable and connection hose are stored in the compressor housing.
Strictly follow the specified sequence, otherwise the sealant may escape under high pressure.
Using the Tire Mobility Kit
1. Shake the sealant bottle (2).
2. Screw the filling hose (3) onto the connector of the sealant bottle (2).
3. Insert the sealant bottle into the housing of the compressor (5) so that the bottle is upright.
4. Ensure that the button (9) on the compressor is not pressed.
Do not use the tire sealant after the sealant has expired (i.e. pasted the expiration date on the sealant container). This can increase the risk of tire failure.
WARNING
Keep out of reach of children. Avoid contact with eyes. Do not swallow.
WARNING
Detach the speed restriction label (1) from the sealant bottle (2), and place it in a highly visi- ble place inside the vehicle such as on the steering wheel to remind the driver not to drive too fast.
CAUTION
OAE066014
OAEPH067041L
6-30
What to do in an emergency
5. Unscrew the valve cap from the valve of the defective wheel and screw the filling hose (3) of the sealant bottle onto the valve.
6. Ensure that the compressor is switched OFF.
7. Plug the compressor power cord (4) into the vehicle power outlet.
8. With the vehicle ON ( indica- tor ON), switch on the compressor and let it run for approximately 5~7 minutes to fill the sealant up to proper pressure. (refer to the Tire and Wheels, chapter 8). The inflation pressure of the tire after filling is unimportant and will be checked/corrected later. Be careful not to overinflate the tire and stay away from the tire when filling it.
OAEPH067016
Securely install the sealant fill- ing hose to the valve. If not, sealant may flow backward, possibly clogging the filling hose.
CAUTION
OAE066027
OAE067040
6-31
W hat to do in an em
ergency
6
9. Switch off the compressor. 10. Detach the hoses from the
sealant bottle connector and from the tire valve.
Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its stor- age location in the vehicle.
Distributing the sealant
11. Immediately drive approximately 4~6 miles (7~10 km or about 10 minutes) to evenly distribute the sealant in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). If possible, do not fall below a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). While driving, if you experience any unusual vibration, ride disturbance or noise, reduce your speed and drive with caution until you can safely pull off of the side of the road.
Checking the tire inflation pres- sure 1. After driving approximately 4~6
miles (7~10 km or about 10 minutes), stop at a safe loca- tion.
2. Connect the filling hose (3) direct- ly into the compressor.
OLMF064106
OAEPH067041
Do not attempt to drive your vehicle if the tire pressure is below 29 psi (200 kpa). This could result in an accident due to sudden tire failure.
CAUTION
Do not the filling leave your vehicle running in a poorly ven- tilated area for extended peri- ods of time. Carbon monoxide poisoning and suffocation can occur.
WARNING
6-32
What to do in an emergency
3. Connect the other end of the filling hose (3) directly into the tire valve.
4. Plug the compressor power cord (4) into the vehicle power outlet.
5. Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the recommended tire inflation. With the ignition switched on, pro- ceed as follows. - To increase the inflation pres-
sure:
Switch on the compressor. To check the current inflation pres- sure setting, briefly switch off the compressor.
- To reduce the inflation pres- sure:
Press the button (9) on the com- pressor.
Information The pressure gauge may show higher than actual reading when the com- pressor is running. To get an accurate tire pressure, the compressor needs to be turned off.
Information When reinstalling the repaired or replaced tire and wheel on the vehicle, tighten the wheel lug nut to 79~94 lbfft (11~13 kgfm).
i
i
When you use the Tire Mobility Kit including sealant not approved by HYUNDAI, the tire pressure sen- sors may be damaged by sealant. The sealant on the tire pressure sensor and wheel should be removed when you replace the tire with a new one and inspect the tire pressure sensors at an authorized dealer.
CAUTION
The tire inflation pressure must be at least 32 psi (220 kPa). If it is not, do not continue driving. Call for road side service or towing.
WARNING
OAE067040
6-33
W hat to do in an em
ergency
With Tire Mobility Kit (TMK) - Type B
For safe operation, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual before use. (1) Compressor (2) Sealant bottle
The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary fix to the tire and the tire should be inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
6
OAEPH067008
One sealant bottle for one tire
When two or more tires are flat, do not use the tire mobility kit because the supported one sealant of Tire Mobility Kit is only used for one flat tire.
CAUTION
Tire wall
Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit to repair punctures in the tire walls. This can result in an acci- dent due to tire failure.
WARNING
Temporary fix
Have your tire repaired as soon as possible. The tire may lose air pressure at any time after inflating with the Tire Mobility Kit.
WARNING
6-34
Introduction With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay mobile even after experiencing a tire puncture. The compressor and sealing com- pound system effectively and com- fortably seals most punctures in a passenger car tire caused by nails or similar objects and reinflates the tire. After you ensure that the tire is prop- erly sealed you can drive cautiously on the tire (distance up to 120 miles (200 km)) at a max. speed of (50 mph (80 km/h)) in order to reach a service station or tire dealer for the tire replacement. It is possible that some tires, espe- cially with larger punctures or dam- age to the sidewall, cannot be sealed completely. Air pressure loss in the tire may adversely affect tire performance. For this reason, you should avoid abrupt steering or other driving maneuvers, especially if the vehicle is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in use.
The Tire Mobility Kit is not designed or intended as a permanent tire repair method and is to be used for one tire only. This instruction shows you step by step how to temporarily seal the puncture simply and reliably. Read the section "Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit".
Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit Park your car at the side of the
road so that you can work with the Tire Mobility Kit away from moving traffic.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even when you're on fairly level ground, always set your park- ing brake.
Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for sealing/inflation passenger car tires. Only punctured areas located within the tread region of the tire can be sealed using the tire mobil- ity kit.
Do not use on motorcycles, bicy- cles or any other type of tires.
When the tire and wheel are dam- aged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit for your safety.
Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may not be effective for tire damage larger than approximately 0.24 inch (6 mm). Please contact the nearest HYUNDAI dealership if the tire cannot be made roadworthy with the Tire Mobility Kit.
Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if a tire is severely damaged by driving run flat or with insufficient air pres- sure.
Do not remove any foreign objects such as nails or screws that have penetrated the tire.
Provided the car is outdoors, leave the engine running. Otherwise operating the compressor may eventually drain the car battery.
Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit unattended while it is being used.
Do not leave the compressor run- ning for more than 10 minutes at a time or it may overheat.
What to do in an emergency
6-35
W hat to do in an em
ergency
Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if the ambient temperature is below -22F (-30C).
In case of skin contact with the- sealant, wash the area thoroughly- with plenty of water.If the irritation- persists, seek medical attention.
In case of eye contact with the sealant,flush your eyes for at least 15 min-utes.If the irritation persists, seekmedical attention.
In case of swallowing the sealant,rinse the mouth and drink plenty ofwater.However, never give anythingto an unconscious person and seekmedical attention immedi- ately.
Long time exposure to the sealant- may cause damage to bodily tis- suesuch as kidney, etc.
6
Components of the Tire Mobility Kit
ODE067044
1. Speed restriction label 2. Sealant bottle and label with
speed restriction 3. Filling hose from sealant bottle to
wheel 4. Connectors and cable for power
outlet direct connection
5. Holder for the sealant bottle 6. Compressor 7. ON/OFF switch 8. Pressure gauge for displaying the
tire inflation pressure 9. Button for reducing tire inflation
pressure
6-36
Connectors, cable and connection hose are stored in the compressor housing.
Strictly follow the specified sequence, otherwise the sealant may escape under high pressure.
Using the Tire Mobility Kit
1. Shake the sealant bottle (2).
2. Connect the filling hose (3) to the sealant bottle (2) in the direction of (A) and connect the sealant bottle to the compressor (5) in the direc- tion of (B).
3. Ensure that the compressor is switched OFF.
What to do in an emergency
Do not use the tire sealant after the sealant has expired (i.e. pasted the expiration date on the sealant container). This can increase the risk of tire failure.
WARNING
Keep out of reach of children. Avoid contact with eyes. Do not swallow.
WARNING
Detach the speed restriction label (1) from the sealant bottle (2), and place it in a highly visi- ble place inside the vehicle such as on the steering wheel to remind the driver not to drive too fast.
CAUTION
OAE066014
OIGH067042
6-37
W hat to do in an em
ergency
6
4. Unscrew the valve cap from the valve of the defective wheel and screw the filling hose (3) of the sealant bottle onto the valve.
5. Plug the compressor power cord (4) into the vehicle power outlet.
6. With the vehicle ON ( indica- tor ON), switch on the compressor and let it run for approximately 5~7 minutes to fill the sealant up to proper pressure. (refer to the Tire and Wheels, chapter 8). The inflation pressure of the tire after filling is unimportant and will be checked/corrected later. Be careful not to overinflate the tire and stay away from the tire when filling it.
OAE067040 OAEPH067016
Securely install the sealant fill- ing hose to the valve. If not, sealant may flow backward, possibly clogging the filling hose.
CAUTION
OAE066027
6-38
What to do in an emergency
7. Switch off the compressor. 8. Detach the hoses from the sealant
bottle connector and from the tire valve.
Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its stor- age location in the vehicle.
Distributing the sealant
9. Immediately drive approximately 4~6 miles (7~10 km or about 10 minutes) to evenly distribute the sealant in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). If possible, do not fall below a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). While driving, if you experience any unusual vibration, ride disturbance or noise, reduce your speed and drive with caution until you can safely pull off of the side of the road.
Checking the tire inflation pres- sure 1. After driving approximately 4~6
miles (7~10 km or about 10 minutes), stop at a safe loca- tion.
2. Connect the filling hose (3) direct- ly into the compressor.
Do not attempt to drive your vehicle if the tire pressure is below 29 psi (200 kpa). This could result in an accident due to sudden tire failure.
CAUTION
Do not the filling leave your vehicle running in a poorly ven- tilated area for extended peri- ods of time. Carbon monoxide poisoning and suffocation can occur.
WARNING
OLMF064106
OAEPH067042
6-39
W hat to do in an em
ergency
6
3. Connect the other end of the filling hose (3) directly into the tire valve.
4. Plug the compressor power cord (4) into the vehicle power outlet.
5. Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the recommended tire inflation. With the ignition switched on, pro- ceed as follows. - To increase the inflation pres-
sure:
Switch on the compressor. To check the current inflation pres- sure setting, briefly switch off the compressor.
- To reduce the inflation pres- sure:
Press the button (9) on the com- pressor.
Information The pressure gauge may show higher than actual reading when the com- pressor is running. To get an accurate tire pressure, the compressor needs to be turned off.
Information When reinstalling the repaired or replaced tire and wheel on the vehicle, tighten the wheel lug nut to 79~94 lbfft (11~13 kgfm).
i
i
OAE067040
When you use the Tire Mobility Kit including sealant not approved by HYUNDAI, the tire pressure sen- sors may be damaged by sealant. The sealant on the tire pressure sensor and wheel should be removed when you replace the tire with a new one and inspect the tire pressure sensors at an authorized dealer.
CAUTION
The tire inflation pressure must be at least 32 psi (220 kPa). If it is not, do not continue driving. Call for road side service or towing.
WARNING
6-40
What to do in an emergency
Towing Service
If emergency towing is necessary, we recommend having it done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial tow-truck service. Proper lifting and towing procedures are necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies or flatbed is recommended.
It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground (without dollies) and the front wheels off the ground. If any of the loaded wheels or sus- pension components are damaged or the vehicle is being towed with the front wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly under the front wheels. When being towed by a commercial tow truck and wheel dollies are not used, the front of the vehicle should always be lifted, not the rear.
TOWING
OAE066018
A
B
C
Dolly
Dolly
Do not tow the vehicle with the front wheels on the ground as this may cause damage to the vehicle.
Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Use wheel lift or flatbed equipment.
CAUTION
OAEE066016
OAE066019
6-41
W hat to do in an em
ergency
6
When towing your vehicle in an emergency without wheel dollies : 1. Place the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton in the ACC position. 2. Place the shift lever in N (Neutral). 3. Release the parking brake.
Removable Towing Hook
1. Open the liftgate, and take the towing hooks out from the tool case.
2. Remove the hole cover pressing the lower part of the cover on the front or rear bumper.
3. Install the towing hook by turning it clockwise into the hole until it is fully secured.
4. Remove the towing hook and install the cover after use.
Failure to place the transmis- sion shift lever in N (Neutral) may cause internal damage to the transmission.
CAUTION
OAE066021N
OAE066022N
OAE066028N
Front
Rear
6-42
What to do in an emergency
Emergency Towing (if equipped)
If towing is necessary, we recom- mend you to have it done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial tow truck service.
If a towing service is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency tow- ing hook at the rear of the vehicle. Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle with a cable or chain. A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the brakes. Towing should be done only on a solid ground for a short distance and at a low speed. Also, the wheels, axles, power train, steering and brakes must all be in good condition.
Always follow these emergency tow- ing precautions: Place the Engine Start/Stop button
in the ACC position so the steering wheel is not locked.
Place the shift lever in N (Neutral). Release the parking brake. Depress the brake pedal with more
force than normal since you will have reduced braking perform- ance.
More steering effort will be required because the power steering system will be disabled.
Use a vehicle heavier than your own to tow your vehicle.
The drivers of both vehicles should communicate with each other fre- quently.
Before emergency towing, check that the hook is not broken or dam- aged.
Fasten the towing cable or chain securely to the hook.
Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and even force.
OAE066024N
OAE066023N
Front
Rear
6-43
W hat to do in an em
ergency
6
Use a towing cable or chain less than 16 feet (5 m) long. Attach a white or red cloth (about 12 inches (30 cm) wide) in the middle of the cable or chain for easy visibility.
Drive carefully so the towing cable or chain remains tight during tow- ing.
Before towing, check the dual clutch transmission for fluid leaks under your vehicle. If the dual clutch transmission fluid is leaking, flatbed equipment or a towing dolly must be used.
OAE066025
To avoid damage to your vehicle and vehicle components when towing: Always pull straight ahead
when using the towing hooks. Do not pull from the side or at a vertical angle.
Do not use the towing hooks to pull a vehicle out of mud, sand or other conditions from which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its own power.
Limit the vehicle speed to 10 mph (15 km/h) and drive less than 1 mile (1.5 km) when tow- ing to avoid serious damage to the dual clutch transmis- sion.
CAUTION
6-44
What to do in an emergency
IF AN ACCIDENT OCCURS
For your safety, do not touch high voltage cables, connec- tors and package modules. High voltage components are orange in color.
Exposed cables or wires may be visible inside or outside of the vehicle. Never touch the wires or cables, because an electrical shock, an injury, or a death may occur.
Any gas or electrolyte leakage from your vehicle is not only poisonous but also flammable. Upon witnessing one of those, open the windows, and remain a safe distance from the vehi- cle out of the road. Immediately contact an authorized Hyundai dealer and advise them that a hybrid vehicle is involved.
If you need towing, refer to "Towing" in the previous pages.
(Continued)
(Continued) When the vehicle is severely
damaged, remain a safe dis- tance of 50 feet (15 meter) or more between your vehicle and other vehicles/flamma- bles.
WARNING
If a fire occurs :
Upon witnessing any sparks, gases, flames, or fuel leakage of your vehicle, immediately call 911 or contact an authorized HYNDAI dealer. Also, advise them that a hybrid vehicle is involved.
WARNING
When a submersion in water occurs:
When your vehicle is flooded in water, a high-voltage battery may cause shock or may catch on fire. Thus, turn the hybrid system OFF, take the key in your possession and move to a safe place. Never attempt phys- ical contact with your flooded vehicle. Immediately contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and advise them that a hybrid vehi- cle is involved.
WARNING
7
M aintenance
Maintenance
Engine Compartment .............................................7-3 Maintenance Services ...........................................7-5
Owner's Responsibility.....................................................7-5 Owner Maintenance Precautions..................................7-5
Owner Maintenance ..............................................7-6 How to Disconnect the (-) Cable for Regular Maintenance (Hybrid vehicle) ........................7-7 Owner Maintenance Schedule .......................................7-7
Scheduled Maintenance Services........................7-8 Normal Maintenance Schedule ......................................7-9 Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions ........7-12 Severe driving conditions..............................................7-13
Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Items ......................................................................7-14 Engine Oil ..............................................................7-16
Checking the Engine Oil Level .....................................7-16 Checking the Engine Oil and Filter.............................7-17
Engine Coolant/Inverter Coolant.......................7-18 Checking the Coolant Level ..........................................7-18 Changing Coolant ............................................................7-21
Hybrid Starter & Generator (HSG) Belt ...........7-22 Checking the Hybrid Starter & Generator (HSG) Belt .....................................................7-22
Brake Fluid............................................................7-22 Checking the Brake Fluid Level...................................7-22
Washer Fluid.........................................................7-23 Checking the Washer Fluid Level................................7-23
Parking Brake.......................................................7-24 Checking the Parking Brake.........................................7-24
Air Cleaner ............................................................7-24 Filter Replacement..........................................................7-24
Climate Control Air Filter ....................................7-26 Filter Inspection...............................................................7-26
Wiper Blades.........................................................7-28 Blade Inspection ..............................................................7-28 Blade Replacement .........................................................7-28
Battery (12 Volt, Plug-In Hybrid Vehicle)........7-31 For Best Battery Service ..............................................7-32 Battery Recharging ........................................................7-32 Reset Features.................................................................7-33
Tires and wheels ..................................................7-34 Tire Care............................................................................7-34 Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressures...........7-35 Check Tire Inflation Pressure ......................................7-36 Tire Rotation.....................................................................7-37 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............................7-38 Tire Replacement ............................................................7-38
7
Wheel Replacement ........................................................7-39 Tire Traction .....................................................................7-39 Tire Maintenance ............................................................7-40 Tire Sidewall Labeling ....................................................7-40 Tire Terminology and Definitions................................7-44 All Season Tires...............................................................7-47 Summer Tires ...................................................................7-47 Snow Tires ........................................................................7-47 Radial-Ply Tires ...............................................................7-47 Low Aspect Ratio Tires..................................................7-48
Fuses......................................................................7-49 Instrument Panel Fuse Replacement..........................7-50 Engine Compartment Panel Fuse Replacement.......7-51 Fuse/Relay Panel Description......................................7-53
Light Bulbs ............................................................7-55 Headlamp, Parking Lamp, Turn Signal Lamp and Side Marker..............................................................7-55 Daytime Running Light (DRL).......................................7-60 Side Repeater Lamp Replacement ..............................7-61 Rear Combination Light Bulb Replacement ..............7-61 High Mounted Stop Lamp Replacement....................7-64 License Plate Light Bulb Replacement ......................7-65 Interior Light Bulb Replacement .................................7-65
Appearance Care..................................................7-67 Exterior Care ....................................................................7-67 Interior Care .....................................................................7-71
Emission Control System ....................................7-74 Crankcase Emission Control System ..........................7-74 Evaporative Emission Control System Including Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR)............7-74 Exhaust Emission Control System ..............................7-75
California Perchlorate Notice.............................7-78
7-3
7
M aintenance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
OAE076001
1. Engine oil filler cap
2. Engine oil dipstick
3. Engine coolant cap
4. Engine coolant reservoir
5. Inverter coolant reservoir
6. Brake fluid reservoir
7. Air cleaner
8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
9. Fuse box
The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
Hybrid vehicle
7-4
Maintenance
OAEPH076001
1. Engine oil filler cap
2. Engine oil dipstick
3. Engine coolant cap
4. Engine coolant reservoir
5. Inverter coolant reservoir
6. Brake fluid reservoir
7. Air cleaner
8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
9. Fuse box
The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
Plug-in hybrid vehicle
7-5
7
M aintenance
MAINTENANCE SERVICES You should exercise the utmost care to prevent damage to your vehicle and injury to yourself whenever per- forming any maintenance or inspec- tion procedures. We recommend you have your vehi- cle maintained and repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. An authorized HYUNDAI dealer meets HYUNDAI's high service quality standards and receives technical support from HYUNDAI in order to provide you with a high level of serv- ice satisfaction.
Owner's Responsibility Maintenance service and record retention are the owner's responsibil- ity. You should retain documents that show proper maintenance has been performed on your vehicle in accor- dance with the scheduled mainte- nance service charts shown on the following pages. You need this infor- mation to establish your compliance with the servicing and maintenance requirements of your vehicle war- ranties.
Detailed warranty information is pro- vided in your Owner's Handbook & Warranty Information booklet. Repairs and adjustments required as a result of improper maintenance or a lack of required maintenance are not covered.
Owner Maintenance Precautions Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi- cient servicing may result in opera- tional problems with your vehicle that could lead to vehicle damage, an accident, or personal injury. This chapter provides instructions only for the maintenance items that are easy to perform. Several procedures can be done only by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer with special tools. Your vehicle should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the performance, safety or durability of your vehicle and may, in addition, violate condi- tions of the limited warranties cover- ing the vehicle.
Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations established by the U.S. Department of Transportation and other federal or state agencies.
Improper owner maintenance dur- ing the warranty period may affect warranty coverage. For details, read the separate Owner's Handbook & Warranty Information booklet pro- vided with the vehicle. If you're unsure about any service or main- tenance procedure, have it done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
NOTICE
7-6
Maintenance
OWNER MAINTENANCE The following lists are vehicle checks and inspections that should be per- formed by the owner or an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer at the frequen- cies indicated to help ensure safe, dependable operation of your vehi- cle. Any adverse conditions should be brought to the attention of your deal- er as soon as possible. These Owner Maintenance vehicle checks are generally not covered by warranties and you may be charged for labor, parts and lubricants used.
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous. If you lack sufficient knowledge and experience or the proper tools and equipment to do the work, have it done by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer. ALWAYS follow these precau- tions for performing mainte- nance work: Park your vehicle on level
ground, move the shift lever into the P (Park), apply the parking brake, and place the Engine Start/Stop button in the OFF position.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued) Block the tires (front and
back) to prevent the vehicle from moving. Remove loose clothing or jew- elry that can become entan- gled in moving parts.
If you must run the engine during maintenance, do so out doors or in an area with plenty of ventilation.
Keep flames, sparks, or smok- ing materials away from the battery and fuel-related parts.
7-7
7
M aintenance
How to Disconnect the (-) Cable for Regular Maintenance (Hybrid vehicle)
When the vehicle is under regular maintenance, make sure to separate the (-) cable before maintenance. Separate the (-) cable following the below instructions. 1. Fold the rear left side seat. 2. Remove the service cover (A) on
the luggage trim. 3. Separate the (-) cable (B). Reassemble in the reverse order.
Owner Maintenance Schedule When you stop for fuel: Check the engine oil level. Check the coolant level in the
engine coolant reservoir. Check the windshield washer fluid
level. Check for low or under-inflated
tires.
While operating your vehicle: Note any changes in the sound of
the exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
Check for vibrations in the steering wheel. Notice if there is any increased steering effort or loose- ness in the steering wheel, or change in its straight-ahead posi- tion.
Notice if your vehicle constantly turns slightly or "pulls" to one side when traveling on smooth, level road.
When stopping, listen and check for unusual sounds, pulling to one side, increased brake pedal travel or "hard-to-push" brake pedal.
If any slipping or changes in the operation of your transmission occurs, check the transmission fluid level.
Check the dual clutch transmission P (Park) function.
Check the parking brake. Check for fluid leaks under your
vehicle (water dripping from the air conditioning system during or after use is normal).
Be careful when checking your engine coolant/inverter coolant level when the engine is hot. This may result in coolant being blown out of the opening and cause serious burns and other injuries.
WARNING
OAE076073N
A B
7-8
Maintenance
At least monthly: Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir. Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the brake lights, turn signals and hazard warning flashers.
Check the inflation pressures of all tires including the spare for tires that are worn, show uneven wear, or are damaged.
Check for loose wheel lug nuts.
At least twice a year: (i.e., every Spring and Fall) Check radiator, heater and air con-
ditioning hoses for leaks or dam- age.
Check windshield washer spray and wiper operation. Clean wiper blades with a clean cloth damp- ened with washer fluid.
Check headlamp alignment. Check muffler, exhaust pipes,
shields and clamps. Check the seat belts for wear and
function.
At least once a year: Clean body and door drain holes. Lubricate door hinges and hood
hinges. Lubricate door and hood locks and
latches. Lubricate door rubber weather
strips. Lubricate door checker. Check the air conditioning system. Inspect and lubricate transmission
linkage and controls. Clean the battery and terminals. Check the brake fluid level.
Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule if the vehicle is usually operated where none of the following conditions apply. If any of the following conditions apply, you must follow the Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions. Repeated short distance driving. Driving in dusty conditions or
sandy areas. Extensive use of brakes. Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are used. Driving on rough or muddy roads. Driving in mountainous areas. Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation. Driving for a prolonged period in
cold temperatures and/or extreme- ly humid climates.
More than 50% driving in heavy city traffic during hot weather above 90F (32C).
For additional information or assis- tance see your authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICES
7-9
7
M aintenance
Normal Maintenance Schedule The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180 Miles 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 83 90 98 105 113 Km 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180
HSG belts *1 Inspect every 7,500 miles or 12 months, and replace every 67,500 miles or 48 months
Engine oil and engine oil filter R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
Fuel additives *2 Add fuel additives every 7,500 miles or 12months
Air cleaner filter I I R I I R I I R I I R I I R
Spark plugs Replace every 97,500 miles
Rotate tires Rotate tires every 7,500 miles
Climate control air filter R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
Vacuum hose I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Engine coolant / Inverter coolant At first, replace at 120,000 miles or 10 years :
after that, replace every 30,000 miles or 24 months
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE ITEM
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace. R : Replace or change. *1 : Inspect HSG belt for evidence of cuts, crocks, excessive wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. If drive belt noise
occurred, readjust drive belt tension before replace. *2 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
7-10
Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Schedule (CONT.)
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180 Miles 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 83 90 98 105 113 Km 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180
Battery condition I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Engine clutch actuator hoses and lines I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Disc brakes and pads I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Driveshaft and boots I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Suspension mounting bolts I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Air conditioner refrigerant I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Air conditioner compressor I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Exhaust pipe and muffler I I I I I I I
Dual clutch transmission fluid I I I
Vapor hose, fuel filler cap and fuel tank I I I
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE ITEM
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace. R : Replace or change.
7-11
7
M aintenance
Normal Maintenance Schedule (CONT.)
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180 Miles 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 83 90 98 105 113 Km 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180
Fuel tank air filter *3 I I I I I I I
Fuel filter *3 I I I I I I I
Fuel lines, hoses and connections I I I
Parking brake I I I I I I I
Brake fluid I I I I I I I
Engine clutch actuator fluid Inspect every 7,500 miles, and replace every 22,500 miles
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE ITEM
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace. R : Replace or change. *3 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this mainte-
nance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem, etc. replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
7-12
Maintenance
Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals. R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
Maintenance item Maintenance
operation Maintenance intervals Driving condition
HSG (Hybrid Starter&Generator) belt R
Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months
C, D, E, L I Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months
Engine oil and filter R Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K
Air cleaner filter R More frequently C, E
Spark plugs R More frequently B, H
Climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
R More frequently C, E
Front brake disc/pads, calipers I More frequently C, D, G, H
7-13
7
M aintenance
Severe driving conditions A-Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5 miles (8 km)
in normal temperature or less than 10 miles (16 km) in freez- ing temperature
B-Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long dis- tances
C-Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt- spread roads
D-Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather
E-Driving in sandy areas
F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90F (32C) G- Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road H- Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack I -Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle
towing J - Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h) K- Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
Maintenance item Maintenance
operation Maintenance intervals Driving condition
Rear brake disc/pads I More frequently C, D, G, F
Steering gear box, linkage & boots/ lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint
I More frequently C, D, E, F, G, H, I
Drive shafts and boots I Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
or 6 months C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
Dual clutch transmission fluid R Every 75,000 miles (120,000 km) C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
Parking brake I More frequently C, D, G, H
7-14
Maintenance
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS Engine Oil and Filter The engine oil and filter should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. If the vehicle is being driven in severe con- ditions, more frequent oil and filter changes are required.
Fuel Filter A clogged-up fuel filter may limit the vehicle driving speed, damage the emission system, and cause the hard starting. When a considerable amount of foreign substances are accumulated in the fuel tank, the fuel filter should be replaced. Upon installing a new fuel filter, oper- ate the engine for several minutes, and check the connections for any leakages. Fuel filters should be installed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses and Connections Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections for leakage and dam- age. Have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer replace any damaged or leak- ing parts immediately.
Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler Cap The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should be inspected at those inter- vals specified in the maintenance schedule. Make sure a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctly replaced.
HSG (Hybrid Starter & Generator) Belt The HSG belt should be changed at the intervals specified in the mainte- nance schedule.
Air Cleaner Filter A genuine HYUNDAI air cleaner filter is recommended when the filter is replaced.
Spark Plugs Make sure to install new spark plugs of the correct heat range.
Cooling System Check cooling system components, such as radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Replace any damaged parts.
Engine Coolant / Inverter Coolant The coolant should be changed at the intervals specified in the mainte- nance schedule.
7-15
7
M aintenance
Dual Clutch Transmission Fluid The dual clutch transmission fluid should be inspected according to the intervals specified in the mainte- nance schedule.
Engine Clutch Actuator Fluid The engine clutch actuator fluid level should be inspected or replaced to the intervals specified in the mainte- nance schedule.
Brake Hoses and Lines Visually check for proper installation, chafing, cracks, deterioration and any leakage. Replace any deteriorat- ed or damaged parts immediately.
Brake Fluid Check the brake fluid level in the brake the fluid reservoir. The level should be between the MIN and the MAX marks on the side of the reser- voir. Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 spec- ification.
Parking Brake Inspect the parking brake system including the parking brake pedal and cables.
Brake Discs, Pads, Calipers and Rotors Check the pads for excessive wear, discs for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage.
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and hangers for cracks, dete- rioration, or damage. Start the engine and listen carefully for any exhaust gas leakage. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.
Suspension Mounting Bolts Check the suspension connections for looseness or damage. Retighten to the specified torque.
Steering Gear Box, Linkage & Boots / Lower Arm Ball Joint With the vehicle stopped and the engine off, check for excessive free- play in the steering wheel. Check the linkage for bends or damage. Check the dust boots and ball joints for deterioration, cracks, or damage. Replace any damaged parts.
Drive Shafts and Boots Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Replace any damaged parts and, if necessary, repack the grease.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant Check the air conditioning lines and connections for leakage and dam- age.
7-16
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL Checking the Engine Oil Level 1. Follow all of the oil manufacturers
precautions. 2. Be sure the vehicle is on the level
ground in P (Park) with the park- ing brake set. If possible, block the wheels.
3. Turn the engine on and allow the engine to reach normal operating temperature.
4. Turn the engine off and wait about five minutes for the oil to return to the oil pan.
5. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and re-insert it fully.
6. Pull the dipstick out again and check the level. The level should be between F (Full) and L (Low).
7. If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring the level to F.
To prevent damage to your engine: Do not overfill with engine oil.
Add oil in small quantities and recheck level to ensure engine is not overfilled.
Do not spill engine oil when adding or changing engine oil. Use a funnel to help prevent oil from being spilled on engine components. Wipe off spilled oil immediately.
NOTICE
OAE076002 OAEPH076003
7-17
7
M aintenance
Information Use only the specified engine oil (refer to "Recommended Lubricants and Capacities" in chapter 8).
Checking the Engine Oil and Filter
Have engine oil and filter changed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer according to the Maintenance Schedule at the beginning of this chapter.
i
The electric motor for the cooling fan may continue to operate or start up when the engine is not running
and can cause serious injury. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the rotating fan blades of the cooling fan.
WARNING
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING
Engine oil contains chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects and reproductive harm. Used engine oil may cause irritation or cancer of the skin if left in contact with the skin for pro- longed periods of time. Always protect your skin by washing your hands thoroughly with soap and warm water as soon as possible after handling used oil.
WARNING
7-18
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT/INVERTER COOLANT The high-pressure cooling system has a reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is filled at the factory. Check the antifreeze protection and coolant level at least once a year, at the beginning of the winter season and before traveling to a colder cli- mate.
Checking the Coolant Level
Check the condition and connections of all cooling system hoses and heater hoses. Replace any swollen or deteriorated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled between the MAX and the MIN marks on the side of the coolant reservoir when the engine is cool. If the coolant level is low, add enough distilled (deionized) water to bring the level to the MAX mark, but do not overfill. If frequent additions are required, see an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for a cooling system inspection.
OAE076005
OAE076004
Engine coolant
Inverter coolant
7-19
7
M aintenance
Information The engine coolant and/or inverter coolant level is influenced by the hybrid system temperature. Before checking or refilling the engine coolant and/or inverter coolant, turn the hybrid vehicle off.
i
OAE076006
OAE076007
Engine coolant cap
Inverter coolant cap
Never remove the engine coolant cap and/or inverter coolant cap or the drain plug while the engine and
radiator are hot. Hot coolant and steam may blow out under pres- sure, causing serious injury. Turn the hybrid system off and wait until the engine cools down. Use extreme care when removing the engine coolant cap and/or inverter coolant cap. Wrap a thick towel around it, and turn it counterclockwise slowly to the first stop. Step back while the pressure is released from the cooling sys- tem. When you are sure all the pressure has been released, press down on the cap, using a thick towel, and continue turn- ing counterclockwise to remove it.
WARNING
The electric motor for the cooling fan may continue to operate or start up when the engine is not running
and can cause serious injury. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the rotating fan blades of the cooling fan.
WARNING
7-20
Maintenance
The electric motor for the cooling fan is controlled by engine coolant tem- perature, refrigerant pressure and vehicle speed. As the engine coolant temperature decreases, the electric motor will automatically shut off. This is a normal condition. If your vehicle is equipped with GDI, the electric motor for the cooling fan may begin to operate at any time and continue to operate until you disconnect the negative battery cable.
Make sure the coolant cap is properly closed after refilling coolant. Otherwise the engine could be overheated while driv- ing.
1. Check if the coolant cap label is straight In front.
(Continued)
WARNING
OTL075062
Engine room front view
(Continued)
2. Make sure that the tiny pro- trusions inside the coolant cap is securely interlocked.
OAE076050
Engine compartment rear view
7-21
7
M aintenance
Recommended coolant When adding coolant, use only
distilled (deionized) water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory.
An improper coolant mixture can result in severe malfunction or engine/ hybrid system damage.
The engine in your vehicle has alu- minum engine parts and must be protected by an phosphate-based ethylene glycol coolant to prevent corrosion and freezing.
Do not use alcohol or methanol coolant or mix them with the spec- ified coolant.
Do not use a solution that contains more than 60% antifreeze or less than 35% antifreeze, which would reduce the effectiveness of the solution.
For mixing percentage, refer to the following table:
Information If in doubt about the mix ratio, a 50% water and 50% antifreeze mix is the easiest to mix together as it will be the same quantity of each. It is suitable to use for most temperature ranges of -31F (-35 C) and higher.
Changing Coolant Have coolant changed by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer according to the Maintenance Schedule at the beginning of this chapter.
To prevent damage to engine parts, put a thick towel around the radiator cap before refilling the coolant to prevent the coolant from overflowing into engine parts, such as the alternator.
NOTICE
i
Ambient Temperature
Mixture Percentage (volume)
Antifreeze Water 5F (-15C) 35 65
-13F (-25C) 40 60
-31F (-35C) 50 50
-49F (-45C) 60 40 Do not use engine coolant or antifreeze in the washer fluid reservoir. Engine coolant can severely obscure visibility when sprayed on the windshield and may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident. Engine coolant may also cause damage to paint and body trim.
WARNING
7-22
Maintenance
Checking the Hybrid Starter & Generator (HSG) Belt Have the hybrid starter & generator (HSG) belt inspected or replaced according to the Maintenance Schedule in this chapter by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Checking the Brake Fluid Level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir periodically. The fluid level should be between MAX and MIN marks on the side of the reservoir. Before removing the reservoir cap and adding brake fluid, clean the area around the reservoir cap thor- oughly to prevent brake fluid contam- ination.
If the level is low, add the specified brake fluid to the MAX level.The level will fall with accumulated mileage. This is a normal condition associated with the wear of the brake linings. If the fluid level is excessively low, have the brake system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Turn the vehicle off while you inspect the engine or hybrid starter & generator(HSG) belt. Otherwise it may result in serious injury.
Keep hands, clothing etc. away from the hybrid starter & generator (HSG) belt.
WARNING
When the HSG belt is worn out or damaged, replace the belt. Otherwise, it may cause engine overheating or battery dis- charge.
CAUTION
HYBRID STARTER & GENERATOR (HSG) BELT
BRAKE FLUID
OAE076008
If the brake system requires fre- quent additions of fluid this could indicate a leak in the brake system. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
Do not allow brake fluid to come in contact with your eyes. If brake fluid comes in contact with your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention.
WARNING
7-23
7
M aintenance
Do not allow brake fluid to con- tact the vehicles body paint, as paint damage will result.
Brake fluid, which has been exposed to open air for an extended time should NEVER be used as its quality cannot be guaranteed. It should be dis- posed of properly.
Do not use the wrong kind of brake fluid. A few drops of miner- al based oil, such as engine oil, in your brake system can damage brake system parts.
Information Use only the specified brake fluid (refer to "Recommended Lubricants and Capacities" in chapter 8).
Checking the Washer Fluid Level
Check the fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir and add fluid if neces- sary. Plain water may be used if washer fluid is not available. However, use washer solvent with antifreeze characteristics in cold cli- mates to prevent freezing.
i
NOTICE
WASHER FLUID
OAE076009
To prevent serious injury or death, take the following safety precautions when using washer fluid: Do not use engine coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid reservoir. Engine coolant can severely obscure visibility when sprayed on the windshield and may cause loss of vehicle con- trol resulting in an accident or damage to paint and body trim.
Do not allow sparks or flames to contact the washer fluid or the washer fluid reservoir. Washer fluid may contain alco- hol and can be flammable.
Do not drink washer fluid and avoid contact with skin. Washer fluid is harmful to humans and animals.
Keep washer fluid away from children and animals.
WARNING
7-24
Maintenance
PARKING BRAKE Checking the Parking Brake
Check whether the stroke is within specification when the parking brake pedal is depressed with 44 lb (20 kg, 196 N) of force. Also, the parking brake alone should securely hold the vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the stroke is more or less than specified, have the parking brake adjusted by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. Stroke : 4~5 notch
Filter Replacement
The air cleaner filter can be cleaned for inspection using compressed air. Do not attempt to wash or to rinse it, as water will damage the filter. If soiled, the air cleaner filter must be replaced.
1. Loosen the air cleaner cover attaching clips and open the cover.
OAE056014
AIR CLEANER
OAEPH076010
OAEPH076011
7-25
7
M aintenance
2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner. 3. Replace the air cleaner filter. 4. Lock the cover with the cover
attaching clips. 5. Check that the cover is firmly
installed.
Information If the vehicle is operated in extremely dusty or sandy areas, replace the ele- ment more often than the usual rec- ommended intervals (refer to "Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions" in this chapter).
Do not drive with the air cleaner filter removed. This will result in excessive engine wear.
When removing the air cleaner filter, be careful that dust or dirt does not enter the air intake, or damage may result.
Use HYUNDAI genuine parts. Use of non-genuine parts could damage the air flow sensor.
NOTICE
i
OAE076012
7-26
Maintenance
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER Filter Inspection The climate control air filter should be replaced according to the Maintenance Schedule. If the vehicle is operated in severely air-polluted cities or on dusty rough roads for a long period, it should be inspected more frequently and replaced earlier. When you replace the climate control air filter, replace it performing the fol- lowing procedure, and be careful to avoid damaging other components.
1. With the glove box open, remove the stoppers on both sides.
2. Remove the support rod (1). OAE076013OAE076014
7-27
7
M aintenance
3. Press and hold the lock (1) on both sides of the cover.
4. Pull out (2) the cover.
5. Replace the climate control air fil- ter.
6. Reassemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
Install a new climate control air fil- ter in the correct direction with the arrow symbol () facing down- wards, otherwise, it may be noisy and the effectiveness of the filter may be reduced.
NOTICE
OHG075041OAE076015
7-28
Maintenance
WIPER BLADES Blade Inspection Contamination of either the wind- shield or the wiper blades with for- eign matter can reduce the effective- ness of the windshield wiper func- tionality. Common sources of con- tamination are insects, tree sap, and hot wax treatments used by some commercial car washes. If the blades are not wiping properly, clean both the window and the blades with a clean cloth dampened with washer fluid.
To prevent damage to the wiper blades, arms or other compo- nents, do not: Use gasoline, kerosene, paint
thinner, or other solvents on or near them.
Attempt to move the wipers manually.
Use non-specified wiper blades.
Information Commercial hot waxes applied by automatic car washes have been known to make the windshield diffi- cult to clean.
Blade Replacement When the wipers no longer clean adequately, the blades may be worn or cracked, and require replacement.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manu- ally.
The use of a non-specified wiper blade could result in wiper mal- function and failure.
NOTICE
NOTICE
i
NOTICE
7-29
7
M aintenance
Type A
1. Raise the wiper arm and slightly rotate the wiper blade assembly to expose the plastic locking clip.
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against the windshield, since it may chip or crack the windshield. 2. Press the clip (1) and slide the
blade assembly downward (2). 3. Lift it off the arm. 4. Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal. 5. Return the wiper arm on the wind-
shield.
Type B
1. Raise the wiper arm.
NOTICE
OLMB073020
OLMB073021
OLMB073022
OLF074017
7-30
Maintenance
2. Lift up the wiper blade clip (1). Then lift up the wiper blade (2).
3. While pushing the lock (3), pull down the wiper blade (4).
4. Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm (5).
5. Install a new wiper blade assem- bly in the reverse order of removal.
6. Return the wiper arm on the wind- shield.
OAD075074L OAD075075L OAD075076L
BATTERY (12 VOLT, PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE)
7-31
7
M aintenance
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH to you or bystanders, always follow these precautions when working near or handling the battery:
Always read and follow instructions carefully when handling a battery. Wear eye protection designed to protect the eyes from acid splashes. Keep all flames, sparks, or smoking materials away from the battery. Hydrogen is always pres- ent in battery cells, is highly combustible, and may explode if ignited. Keep batteries out of reach of children.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued) Batteries contain sulfu- ric acid which is highly corrosive. Do not allow acid to contact your eyes, skin or clothing.
If acid gets into your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get imme- diate medical attention. If acid gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the area. If you feel pain or a burning sensation, get med- ical attention immediately. When lifting a plastic-cased
battery, excessive pressure on the case may cause battery acid to leak. Lift with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners.
Do not attempt to jump start your vehicle if your battery is frozen.
(Continued)
(Continued) NEVER attempt to recharge
the battery when the vehicles battery cables are connected to the battery.
The electrical ignition system works with high voltage. NEVER touch these compo- nents with the engine running or when the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position.
When you do not use the vehicle for a long time in a low tempera- ture area, disconnect the battery and keep it indoors.
Always charge the battery fully to prevent battery case damage in low temperature areas.
For Best Battery Service
Keep the battery securely mount- ed.
Keep the battery top clean and dry. Keep the terminals and connec-
tions clean, tight, and coated with petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
Rinse any spilled acid from the bat- tery immediately with a solution of water and baking soda.
Battery Recharging
NOTICE
7-32
Maintenance
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects and reproductive harm. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. Wash hands after handling.
WARNING
Always follow these instruc- tions when recharging your vehicle's battery to avoid the risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH from explosions or acid burns: Before performing mainte-
nance or recharging the bat- tery, turn off all accessories and place the Engine Start/ Stop button in the OFF posi- tion.
Keep all flames, sparks, or smoking materials away from the battery.
Always work outdoors or in an area with plenty of ventilation.
Wear eye protection when checking the battery during charging.
The battery must be removed from the vehicle and placed in a well ventilated area.
(Continued)
WARNING
OAE076016
By jump starting After a jump start from a good bat- tery, drive the vehicle for 20-30 min- utes before it is shutoff. The vehicle may not restart if you shut it off before the battery had a chance to adequately recharge. See "Jump Starting" in chapter 6 for more infor- mation on jump starting procedures.
Information An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health. Dispose of the bat- tery according to your local law(s) or regulations.
Reset Features The following items may need to be reset after the battery has been dis- charged or the battery has been dis- connected. See chapter 3 or 4 for: Power Windows Trip Computer Climate Control System Clock Audio System Sunroof Driver Position Memory System
i
7-33
7
M aintenance
(Continued) Watch the battery during
charging, and stop or reduce the charging rate if the battery cells begin boiling violently.
The negative battery cable must be removed first and installed last when the battery is disconnected. Disconnect the battery charger in the fol- lowing order: (1) Turn off the battery charg-
er main switch. (2) Unhook the negative
clamp from the negative battery terminal.
(3) Unhook the positive clamp from the positive battery terminal.
Always use a genuine HYUNDAI approved battery when you replace the battery.
7-34
Maintenance
TIRES AND WHEELS Tire Care For proper maintenance, safety, and maximum fuel economy, you must always maintain recommended tire inflation pressures and stay within the load limits and weight distribution recommended for your vehicle.
(Continued) Replace tires that are worn,
show uneven wear, or are dam- aged. Worn tires can cause loss of braking effectiveness, steering control, or traction.
ALWAYS replace tires with the same size as each tire that was originally supplied with this vehicle. Using tires and wheels other than the recom- mended sizes could cause unusual handling characteris- tics, poor vehicle control, or negatively affect your vehi- cle's Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) resulting in a serious accident.
Tire failure may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident. To reduce risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH, take the following precautions: Inspect your tires monthly for
proper inflation as well as wear and damage.
The recommended cold tire pressure for your vehicle can be found in this manual and on the tire label located on the dri- vers side center pillar. Always use a tire pressure gauge to measure tire pressure. Tires with too much or too little pressure wear unevenly caus- ing poor handling.
Check the pressure of the spare every time you check the pressure of the other tires on your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING
7-35
7
M aintenance
All specifications (sizes and pres- sures) can be found on a label attached to the driver's side center pillar.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressures All tire pressures (including the spare) should be checked when the tires are cold. "Cold tires" means the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or has been driven less than one mile (1.6 km). Warm tires normally exceed recom- mended cold tire pressures by 4 to 6 psi (28 to 41 kPa). Do not release air from warm tires to adjust the pres- sure or the tires will be under-inflat- ed. For recommended inflation pres- sure, refer to "Tire and Wheels" in chapter 8.
Recommended pressures must be maintained for the best ride, vehicle handling, and minimum tire wear. Over-inflation or under-inflation can reduce tire life, adversely affect vehicle handling, and lead to sudden tire failure that could result in loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident. Severe under-inflation can lead to severe heat build-up, causing blowouts, tread separation and other tire failures that can result in the loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident. This risk is much higher on hot days and when driving for long peri- ods at high speeds.
WARNING
OAE086002L
7-36
Maintenance
Check Tire Inflation Pressure Check your tires, including the spare tire, once a month or more.
How to check Use a good quality tire pressure gauge to check tire pressure. You can not tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflat- ed when they are under-inflated. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press the tire gauge firm- ly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the tire label located on the driver's side center pillar or in this manual. No further adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is low, add air until you reach the recommended pressure. Make sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. Without the valve cap, dirt or mois- ture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If a valve cap is missing, install a new one as soon as possible.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If a valve cap is missing, install a new one as soon as possible. A cold tire means the vehicle has been sitting for 3 hours and driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3 hour period. Allow the tire to cool before measur- ing the inflation pressure. Always be sure the tire is cold before inflating to the recommended pressure.
Under-inflation results in excessive wear, poor handling and reduced fuel economy. Wheel deformation is also possible. Keep your tire pres- sures at the proper levels. If a tire frequently needs refilling, have it checked by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer.
Over-inflation produces a harsh ride, excessive wear at the center of the tire tread, and a greater possibility of damage from road hazards.
CAUTION
7-37
7
M aintenance
Tire Rotation To equalize tread wear, HYUNDAI recommends that the tires be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or sooner if irregular wear develops. During rotation, check the tires for correct balance. When rotating tires, check for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tire pres- sure, improper wheel alignment, out- of-balance wheels, severe braking or severe cornering. Look for bumps or bulges in the tread or side of the tire. Replace the tire if you find any of these conditions. Replace the tire if fabric or cord is visible. After rotation, be sure to bring the front and rear tire pressures to specification and check lug nut tightness (proper torque is 79~94 lbfft [11~13 kgfm]).
Disc brake pads should be inspected for wear whenever tires are rotated.
Information Tires that are asymmetrical or direc- tional can only be installed on the wheel in one direction. The outside and inside of an asymmetrical tire is not easily distinguishable. Pay careful attention to the markings on the side- walls of the tires, noting the "outside" marking and also the rotating direc- tion before installing them on the vehicle.
i
Do not use the compact spare tire for tire rotation.
Do not mix bias ply and radial ply tires under any circum- stances. This may cause unusual handling characteris- tics that may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.
WARNING
ODH073802
Without a spare tire
7-38
Maintenance
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance. In most cases, you will not need to have your wheels aligned again. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced.
Improper wheel weights can dam- age your vehicle's aluminum wheels. Use only approved wheel weights.
Tire Replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear indicator will appear as a solid band across the tread. This shows there is less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. Replace the tire when this happens. Do not wait for the tread surface to become level with the tread wear indicators before replacing the tire.
NOTICE
OLMB073027
Tread wear indicator To reduce the risk of DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY: Replace tires that are worn,
show uneven wear, or are damaged. Worn tires can cause loss of braking effec- tiveness, steering control, and traction.
Always replace tires with the same size as each tire that was originally supplied with this vehicle. Using tires and wheels other than the recom- mended sizes could cause unusual handling characteris- tics, poor vehicle control, or negatively affect your vehi- cles Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) resulting in a serious accident.
(Continued)
WARNING
7-39
7
M aintenance
Compact spare tire replacement (if equipped) A compact spare tire has a shorter tread life than a regular size tire. Replace it when you can see the tread wear indicator bars on the tire. The replacement compact spare tire should be the same size and design tire as the one provided with your new vehicle and should be mounted on the same compact spare tire wheel. The compact spare tire is not designed to be mounted on a regular size wheel, and the compact spare tire wheel is not designed for mount- ing a regular size tire.
Wheel Replacement When replacing the metal wheels for any reason, make sure the new wheels are equivalent to the original factory units in diameter, rim width and offset.
Tire Traction Tire traction can be reduced if you drive on worn tires, tires that are improperly inflated or on slippery road surfaces. Tires should be replaced when the tread depth is at least 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). To reduce the possibility of losing control, slow down whenever there is rain, snow or ice on the road.
(Continued) Tires degrade over time, even
when they are not being used. Regardless of the remaining tread, HYUNDAI recommends that tires be replaced after six (6) years of normal service.
When replacing tires (or wheels), it is recommended to replace the two front or two rear tires (or wheels) as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle's handling. If only replacing one pair of tires, it is recommend- ed to install the pair of new tires on the rear axle.
Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading con- ditions can accelerate the aging process. Failure to fol- low this warning may cause sudden tire failure, which could lead to a loss of vehicle control resulting in an acci- dent.
The original tire should be repaired or replaced as soon as possible to avoid failure of the spare and loss of vehicle con- trol resulting in an accident.The compact spare tire is for emer- gency use only. Do not operate your vehicle over 50 mph (80 km/h) when using the compact spare tire.
WARNING
7-40
Maintenance
Tire Maintenance In addition to proper inflation, correct wheel alignment helps to decrease tire wear. If you find a tire is worn unevenly, have your dealer check the wheel alignment. When you have new tires installed, make sure they are balanced. This will increase vehicle ride comfort and tire life. Additionally, a tire should always be rebalanced if it is removed from the wheel.
Tire Sidewall Labeling This information identifies and describes the fundamental charac- teristics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name Manufacturer or brand name is shown.
2. Tire size designation A tire's sidewall is marked with a tire size designation. You will need this information when selecting replace- ment tires for your car. The following explains what the letters and num- bers in the tire size designation mean.
Example tire size designation: (These numbers are provided as an example only; your tire size designa- tor could vary depending on your vehicle.) 195/65R15 91H
195 - Tire width in millimeters. 65 - Aspect ratio. The tires section
height as a percentage of its width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial). 15 - Rim diameter in inches. 91 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum load the tire can carry.
H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the speed rating chart in this section for additional information.
OLMB073028
1
1
2 3
4
5,6
7
7-41
7
M aintenance
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with impor- tant information that you need if you ever have to replace one. The follow- ing explains what the letters and numbers in the wheel size designa- tion mean. Example wheel size designation: 6.5J X 15
6.5 - Rim width in inches. J - Rim contour designation. 15 - Rim diameter in inches.
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the dif- ferent speed ratings currently being used for passenger vehicle tires. The speed rating is part of the tire size designation on the sidewall of the tire. This symbol corresponds to that tire's designed maximum safe oper- ating speed.
3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire Identification Number)
Any tires that are over six years old, based on the manufacturing date, (including the spare tire) should be replaced by new ones. You can find the manufacturing date on the tire sidewall (possibly on the inside of the wheel), displaying the DOT Code. The DOT Code is a series of num- bers on a tire consisting of numbers and English letters. The manufactur- ing date is designated by the last four digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT shows a plant code number, tire size and tread pattern and the last four num- bers indicate week and year manu- factured. For example: DOT XXXX XXXX 1417 represents that the tire was produced in the 14th week of 2017.
Speed Rating Symbol
Maximum Speed
S 112 mph (180 km/h) T 118 mph (190 km/h) H 130 mph (210 km/h) V 149 mph (240 km/h) W 168 mph (270 km/h) Y 186 mph (300 km/h)
7-42
Maintenance
4. Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rub- ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. The letter "R" means radial ply con- struction; the letter "D" means diago- nal or bias ply construction; and the letter "B" means belted-bias ply con- struction.
5. Maximum permissible infla- tion pressure
This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information label for recommended inflation pressure.
6. Maximum load rating This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maxi- mum section width. For example: TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA TEMPERATURE A
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a compara- tive rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified govern- ment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one-and-a- half times (1) as well on the gov- ernment course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. These grades are molded on the sidewalls of passenger vehicle tires. The tires available as standard or optional equipment on your vehicle may vary with respect to grade.
7-43
7
M aintenance
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on spec- ified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perform- ance.
Temperature - A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C representing the tires resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled condi- tions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C responds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the labora- tory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight- ahead braking traction tests, and does not include accelera- tion, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, over-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and possible sudden tire failure. This may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.
WARNING
7-44
Maintenance
Tire Terminology and Definitions Air Pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight This means the combined weight of optional accessories. Some exam- ples of optional accessories are automatic transmission, power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio The relationship of a tire's height to its width.
Belt A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure The amount of air pressure in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat from driving.
Curb Weight This means the weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in com- pliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufactur- er, production plant, brand and date of production.
GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
GAWR FRT Gross Axle Weight Rating for the Front Axle.
GAWR RR Gross Axle Weight Rating for the Rear axle.
Intended Outboard Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.
7-45
7
M aintenance
Kilopascal (kPa) The metric unit for air pressure.
Light truck(LT) tire A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on light- weight trucks or multipurpose pas- senger vehicles.
Load ratings The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure.
Load Index An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The max- imum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating The load rating for a tire at the maxi- mum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight The sum of curb weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight; and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 pounds (68 kg).
Occupant Distribution Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall An asymmetrical tire has a particular side that faces outward when mount- ed on a vehicle. The outward facing sidewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the inner facing sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) tire A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipur- pose vehicles.
Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords.
Pneumatic tire A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel provides the trac- tion and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load.
Pneumatic options weight The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, includ- ing heavy duty breaks, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.
7-46
Maintenance
Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer's recommend- ed tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Radial Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate.
Traction The friction between the tire and the road surface. The amount of grip pro- vided.
Tread The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators Narrow bands, sometimes called "wear bars", that show across the tread of a tire when only 1/16 inch of tread remains.
UTQGS Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards is a tire information sys- tem that provides consumers with ratings for a tire's traction, tempera- ture and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing proce- dures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire.
Vehicle Capacity Weight The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the rated cargo and luggage load.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire Load on an individual tire due to curb and accessory weight plus maximum occupant and cargo weight.
Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occu- pant weight and dividing by 2.
Vehicle Placard A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the original equip- ment tire size and recommended inflation pressure.
7-47
7
M aintenance
All Season Tires HYUNDAI specifies all season tires on some models to provide good performance for use all year round, including snowy and icy road condi- tions. All season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than all season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.
Summer Tires HYUNDAI specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rat- ing M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall. If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, HYUNDAI recommends the use of snow tires or all season tires on all four wheels.
Snow Tires If you equip your car with snow tires, they should be the same size and have the same load capacity as the original tires. Snow tires should be installed on all four wheels; other- wise, poor handling may result. Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa) more air pressure than the pressure recommended for the standard tires on the tire label on the drivers side of the center pillar, or up to the maxi- mum pressure shown on the tire sidewall, whichever is less. Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h) when your vehicle is equipped with snow tires.
Radial-Ply Tires Radial-ply tires provide improved tread life, road hazard resistance and smoother high speed ride. The radi- al-ply tires used on this vehicle are of belted construction, and are selected to complement the ride and handling characteristics of your vehicle.
Radial-ply tires have the same load carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias belted tires of the same size, and use the same recommended inflation pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires with bias-ply or bias belted tires is not recommended. Any combina- tions of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias belted tires when used on the same vehicle will seriously deteriorate vehicle handling. The best rule to fol- low is: Identical pairs of radial-ply tires should always be used as a set for the front tires and a set for the rear tires. Longer wearing tires can be more susceptible to irregular tread wear. It is very important to follow the tire rotation interval in this chapter to achieve the tread life potential of these tires. Cuts and punctures in radial-ply tires are repairable only in the tread area, because of sidewall flexing. Consult your tire dealer for radial-ply tire repairs.
7-48
Maintenance
Low Aspect Ratio Tires The aspect ratio is lower than 50 on low aspect ratio tires. Because low aspect ratio tires are optimized for handling and braking, their sidewall is a little stiffer than a standard tire. Also low aspect ratio tires tend to be wider and conse- quently have a greater contact patch with the road surface. In some instances they may generate more road noise compared with standard tires.
Do not mix bias ply and radial ply tires under any circum- stances.This may cause unusu- al handling characteristics that may cause loss of vehicle con- trol resulting in an accident.
WARNING
Because the sidewall of a low aspect ratio tire is shorter than a standard tire, the rim of the wheel and the tire itself is more easily susceptible to damage. Use caution when driving and follow the guidelines below to help minimize damage to the wheel and tire: - When driving on a rough road
or off road, drive cautiously because tires and wheels may be damaged. And after driving, inspect tires and wheels.
- When passing over a pothole, speed bump, manhole, or curb stone, drive slowly so that the tires and wheels are not dam- aged.
- If the tire is subjected to a severe impact, have the tire and wheel inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
- Inspect the tire condition and pressure every 1,800 miles (3,000km).
CAUTION
It is not easy to recognize tire damage with your own eyes. But if there is the slightest hint of tire damage, have the tire checked or replaced because the tire damage may cause air leakage from the tire.
If the tire is damaged by driv- ing on a rough road, off road, pothole, manhole, or curb stone, it will not be covered by the warranty.
CAUTION
7-49
7
M aintenance
FUSES A vehicles electrical system is pro- tected from electrical overload dam- age by fuses. This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels, one located in the driver's side panel bolster, the other in the engine com- partment near the battery. If any of your vehicles lights, acces- sories, or controls do not work, check the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has blown, the element inside the fuse will be melted or broken. If the electrical system does not work, first check the driver's side fuse panel. Before replacing a blown fuse, turn the engine and all switches off, and then disconnect the negative battery cable. Always replace a blown fuse with one of the same rat- ing. If the replacement fuse blows, this indicates an electrical problem. Avoid using the system involved and imme- diately consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not use a screwdriver or any other metal object to remove fuses because it may cause a short circuit and damage the sys- tem.
NOTICE
NEVER replace a fuse with any- thing but another fuse of the same rating. A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly cause a fire.
Do not install a wire or alu- minum foil instead of the proper fuse - even as a tem- porary repair. It may cause extensive wiring damage and possibly a fire.
WARNING Blade type
Normal
Cartridge type Blown
Normal Blown Multi fuse
Normal Blown
Battery fuse terminal
Normal Blown
OLF074075
7-50
Maintenance
Instrument Panel Fuse Replacement
1. Turn the vehicle off. 2. Turn all other switches OFF. 3. Open the fuse panel cover. 4. Refer to the label on the inside of
the fuse panel cover to locate the suspected fuse location.
5. Pull the suspected fuse straight out. Use the removal tool provided in the engine compartment fuse panel.
6. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown. Spare fuses are provided in the instrument panel fuse panels (or in the engine com- partment fuse panel).
7. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
In an emergency, if you do not have a spare fuse, use a fuse of the same rating from a circuit you may not need for operating the vehicle. If the headlamps or other electrical components do not work and the fuses are undamaged, check the fuse panel in the engine compart- ment. If a fuse is blown, it must be replaced with the same rating.
OAE076018
OAE076017
7-51
7
M aintenance
Fuse switch
Always, place the fuse switch to the ON position. If you move the switch to the OFF position, some items such as the audio system and digital clock must be reset and the smart key may not work properly.
Information
If the fuse switch is OFF, "Turn on FUSE SWITCH" or "Turn FUSE SWTICH On" message will appear.
Always place the fuse switch in the ON position while driving the vehicle.
Do not move the fuse switch repeatedly. The fuse switch may be damaged.
Engine Compartment Panel Fuse Replacement
1. Turn the vehicle off. 2. Turn all other switches OFF. 3. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tap and pulling up.
NOTICE
i
OAE076019 OAE076023
OAE076024
Blade type fuse
Cartridge type fuseOLFH044149L/OAEPH047564N
7-52
Maintenance
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown. To remove or insert the fuse, use the fuse puller in the engine compartment fuse panel.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Multi fuse
If the multi fuse is blown, it must be removed as follows: 1. Turn the vehicle off. 2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable. 3. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling it up. 4. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-
ture above. 5. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating. 6. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
Information If the multi fuse is blown, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
i OAE076022
After checking the fuse box in the engine compartment securely close the fuse box cover inside the engine com- partment, until it clicks. If the fuse box is not closed properly, water may leak in side, possibly causing a malfunction with the electrical system.
CAUTION
7-53
7
M aintenance
Fuse/Relay Panel Description Instrument panel fuse panel
Inside the fuse/relay box cover, you can find the fuse/relay label describ- ing fuse/relay names and ratings.
Information Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle; the information is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.
i
OAE076025
OAE076053N
7-54
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
Inside the fuse/relay box cover, you can find the fuse/relay label describ- ing fuse/relay names and ratings.
Information Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle; the information is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.
i
OAE076026
OAE076069N
7-55
7
M aintenance
LIGHT BULBS Consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer to replace most vehicle light bulbs. It is difficult to replace vehicle light bulbs because other parts of the vehicle must be removed before you can get to the bulb. This is especially true for removing the headlamp assembly to get to the bulb(s). Removing/installing the headlamp assembly can result in damage to the vehicle.
Information After heavy driving rain or washing, lamps could appear frosty. This condi- tion is caused by the temperature dif- ference between the lamp inside and the outside temperature. This is simi- lar to the condensation on your win- dows inside your vehicle when raining and doesn't indicate a problem with your vehicle. If the water leaks into the lamp bulb circuitry, have your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Headlamp, Parking Lamp, Turn Signal Lamp and Side Marker Type A Standard type
(1) Headlamp (Low) (2) Headlamp (High) (3) Turn signal lamp (4) Parking lamp (5) Side marker
i
Prior to replacing a lamp, depress the foot brake, move the shift lever into P (Park) apply the parking brake, place the Engine Start/Stop button to the OFF position, and take the key with you when leaving the vehicle to avoid sudden movement of the vehicle and to prevent possible electric shock.
Be aware the bulbs may be hot and may burn your fin- gers.
WARNING
OAE076028
7-56
Maintenance
Always handle them carefully, and avoid scratches and abrasions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with liquids.
Never touch the glass with bare hands. Residual oil may cause the bulb to overheat and burst when lit.
A bulb should be operated only when installed in a headlamp.
If a bulb becomes damaged or cracked, replace it immediately and carefully dispose of it.
Headlamp and parking lamp
1. Open the hood. 2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable. 3. Remove the headlamp bulb cover
(1) by turning it counterclockwise. 4. Disconnect the headlamp bulb
socket-connector. (for low beam and high beam)
5. Remove the bulb from the head- lamp assembly.
6. Install a new bulb.
Halogen bulb
Handle halogen bulbs with care. Halogen bulbs contain pressurized gas that will pro- duce flying pieces of glass that could cause injuries if broken.
Wear eye protection when changing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool down before han- dling it.
WARNING
OAE076052
OAE076030
Parking lamp Low beam
High beam
7-57
7
M aintenance
7. Connect the headlamp bulb sock- et-connector. (for low beam and high beam)
8. Install the hbulb cover (1) by turn- ing it clockwise.
Information The headlamp aiming should be adjusted after an accident or after the headlamp assembly is reinstalled at an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Turn signal
1. Open the hood. 2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable. 3. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
5. Install a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.
6. Install the socket into the assem- bly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assem- bly.
7. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.
i
OAE076031
7-58
Maintenance
Side marker
1. Open the hood. 2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable. 3. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pulling out the bulb.
5. Insert a new bulb.
Type B HID headlamp type
(1) Headlamp (Low/High) (2) Turn signal lamp (3) Parking lamp (4) Side marker
Headlamp
If the light bulb does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Information If your vehicle is equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps, these headlamps contain mercury. So if you need to have your vehicle dis- posed, you should remove the HID Headlamps before disposal. The removed HID headlamps should be recycled, re-used or disposed as haz- ardous waste.
iOAE076029
HID headlamp
Do not attempt to replace or inspect the headlamp (XENON bulb) due to electric shock dan- ger. If the headlamp (XENON bulb) is not working, have your vehicle checked by an author- ized HYUNDAI Dealer.
WARNING
OAEPH077075N
7-59
7
M aintenance
Information HID lamps have superior perform- ance vs. halogen bulbs.
HID lamps are estimated by the man- ufacturer to last twice as long or longer than halogen bulbs depending on their frequency of use. They will probably require replacement at some point in the life of the vehicle. Cycling the headlamps on and off more than typical use will shorten HID lamps life. HID lamps do not fail in the same manner as halogen incandescent lamps. If a headlamp goes out after a period of operation but will immedi- ately relight when the headlamp switch is cycled it is likely the HID lamp needs to be replaced. HID light- ing components are more complex than conventional halogen bulbs thus have higher replacement cost.
Information The headlamp aiming should be adjusted after an accident or after the headlamp assembly is reinstalled at an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Turn signal lamp
1. Open the hood. 2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable. 3. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
ii
OAE076032
7-60
Maintenance
5. Install a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.
6. Install the socket into the assem- bly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assem- bly.
7. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.
Side marker
1. Open the hood. 2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable. 3. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pulling out the bulb.
5. Insert a new bulb.
Daytime Running Light (DRL)
Your vehicle is equipped with LED lamps. LED lamps do not have replaceable bulbs. If the LED lamp does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OAEE076030N
OAEPH077074N
7-61
7
M aintenance
Side Repeater Lamp Replacement
Your vehicle is equipped with LED lamps. LED lamps do not have replaceable bulbs. If the LED lamp does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Rear Combination Light Bulb Replacement Type A
(1) Tail/Stop lamp (2) Turn signal lamp (3) Tail lamp (4) Back-up lamp (5) Side marker
Tail/Stop lamp, turn signal lamp and side marker lamp
1. Open the liftgate. 2. Open the lamp assembly retaining
screw covers. 3. Loosen the lamp assembly retain-
ing screws with a cross-tip screw- driver.
OAE077035N
OAE076037
OAE076034
7-62
Maintenance
4. Remove the rear combination lamp assembly from the body of the vehicle.
5. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.
6. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
7. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.
8. Install the socket into the assem- bly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assem- bly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.
9. Reinstall the lamp assembly to the body of the vehicle.
OAE076039
OTLA075071
Turn signal lamp
Tail/Stop lamp
Side marker
OAE076038
7-63
7
M aintenance
Tail lamp and back-up lamp
1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the service cover using a
flat-blade screwdriver.
3. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket. 5. Insert a new bulb into the socket. 6. Install the socket into the assem-
bly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots on the assembly and turning the socket clockwise.
7. Reinstall the service cover.
Type B
(1) Tail lamp (2) Stop lamp, tail lamp and turn sig-
nal lamp (3) Tail lamp (4) Back-up lamp (5) Side marker
Stop lamp, tail lamp, turn signal lamp and side marker
Your vehicle is equipped with LED lamps. LED lamps do not have replaceable bulbs. If the LED lamp does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OAE076042
Backup lamp
OAE076036
OAEE076025
7-64
Maintenance
Backup lamp
1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the service cover using a
flat-blade screwdriver.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
4. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.
5. Install the socket into the assem- bly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assem- bly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.
6. Reinstall the service cover.
High Mounted Stop Lamp Replacement
1. Open the liftgate. 2. Gently remove the cover of the lift-
gate trim. 3. Remove the spoiler plug hole. 4. Disconnect the electrical connec-
tor. 5. Loosen the mounting bolts and
remove the spoiler. 6. Remove the high mounted stop
light assembly after disconnecting the connector.
7. Reinstall a new light assembly in the reverse order of removal.
OAEE076025 OAEE076038
Backup lamp
OAE076043
7-65
7
M aintenance
License Plate Light Bulb Replacement
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently pry the lens cover from the lamp housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
3. Install a new bulb. 4. Reinstall in the reverse order.
Map lamp and room lamp
OAE076044
Interior Light Bulb Replacement
OAEE076026
Map lamp (LED type)
OAEE076027
Room lamp (LED type)
Your vehicle is equipped with LED lamps. LED lamps do not have replace- able bulbs. If the LED lamp does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
7-66
Maintenance
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently pry the lens from the interi- or lamp housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
3. Install a new bulb into the socket. 4. Align the lens tabs with the interi-
or lamp housing notches and snap the lens into place.
Use care not to dirty or damage lens, lens tab, and plastic hous- ings.
NOTICE
Prior to working on the Interior Lights, ensure that the lamp is off to avoid burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock.
WARNING
Map lamp (Bulb type)
OAE076045
OAE076046
Vanity mirror lamp
Luggage compartment lamp
OAE076048
OAE076047
Room lamp (Bulb type)
Map lamp, room lamp, vanity mirror lamp and luggage compartment lamp
7-67
7
M aintenance
APPEARANCE CARE Exterior Care Exterior general caution It is very important to follow the label directions when using any chemical cleaner or polish. Read all warning and caution statements that appear on the label.
High-pressure washing When using high-pressure wash-
ers, make sure to maintain suffi- cient distance from the vehicle. Insufficient clearance or excessive pressure can lead to component damage or water penetration.
Do not spray the camera, sensors or its surrounding area directly with a high pressure washer. Shock applied from high pressure water may cause the device to not oper- ate normally.
Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or plastic covers)or connectors as they may be dam- aged if they come into contact with high pressure water.
Do not use any high-pressure noz- zles, which induce either one-direct water stream or water swirling.
Protecting your vehicle's finish Washing
To help protect your vehicles finish from rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly and frequently at least once a month with lukewarm or cold water. If you use your vehicle for off-road driving, you should wash it after each off-road trip. Pay special attention to the removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign materials. Make sure the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors and rocker panels are kept clear and clean. Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings, industrial pollution and similar deposits can damage your vehicles finish if not removed immediately. Even prompt washing with plain water may not completely remove all these deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on painted surfaces, should be used. After washing, rinse the vehicle thor- oughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do not allow soap to dry on the fin- ish.
Do not use strong soap, chemi- cal detergents or hot water, and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or when the body of the vehicle is warm.
Be careful when washing the side windows of your vehicle. Especially, with high-pressure water, water may leak through the windows and wet the interi- or.
To prevent damage to the plastic parts, do not clean with chemi- cal solvents or strong deter- gents.
NOTICE
After washing the vehicle, test the brakes while driving slowly to see if they have been affected by water before getting on the road. If braking performance is impaired, dry the brakes by applying them lightly while maintaining a slow forward speed.
WARNING
7-68
Maintenance
Water washing in the engine compartment including high pressure water washing may cause the failure of electrical cir- cuits located in the engine com- partment.
Never allow water or other liq- uids to come in contact with electrical/electronic compo- nents inside the vehicle as this may damage them.
Waxing
A good coat of wax provides a barri- er between your paint and environ- mental contamination. Keeping a good coat of wax on your vehicle will help protect it. Wax the vehicle when water will no longer bead on the paint. Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing. Use a good quality liquid or paste wax, and follow the manufacturer's instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect it and to main- tain its luster. Removing oil, tar, and similar materi- als with a spot remover will usually strip the wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax these areas even if the rest of the vehicle does not yet need wax- ing.
Wiping dust or dirt off the body with a dry cloth will scratch the finish.
Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, or strong detergents containing highly alkaline or caustic agents on chrome-plat- ed or anodized aluminum parts. This may result in damage to the protective coating and cause discoloration or paint deteriora- tion.
Repairing your vehicles finish Deep scratches or stone chips in the painted surface must be repaired promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust and may develop into a major repair expense.
If your vehicle is damaged and requires any metal repair or replacement, be sure the body shop applies anti-corrosion mate- rials to the parts repaired or replaced.
NOTICE
NOTICE
NOTICE
OAE076051
7-69
7
M aintenance
Bright-metal maintenance To remove road tar and insects,
use a tar remover, not a scraper or other sharp object.
To protect the surfaces of bright- metal parts from corrosion, apply a coating of wax or chrome preser- vative and rub to a high luster.
During winter weather or in coastal areas, cover the bright metal parts with a heavier coating of wax or preservative. If necessary, coat the parts with non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other protective compound.
Underbody maintenance Corrosive materials used for ice and snow removal and dust control may collect on the underbody. If these materials are not removed, acceler- ated rusting can occur on underbody parts such as the fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust system, even though they have been treated with rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle under- body and wheel openings with luke- warm or cold water once a month, after off-road driving and at the end of each winter. Pay special attention to these areas because it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It will do more harm than good to wet down the road grime without removing it. The lower edges of doors, rocker panels, and frame members have drain holes that should not be allowed to clog with dirt; trapped water in these areas can cause rust- ing.
Aluminum wheel maintenance The aluminum wheels are coated with a clear protective finish.
Do not use abrasive cleaner, pol- ishing compound, solvent, or wire brushes on aluminum wheels.
Clean the wheel when it has cooled.
Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent, and rinse thoroughly with water. Also, clean the wheels after driving on salted roads.
Do not wash the wheels with high-speed car wash brushes.
Do not use any cleaners con- taining acid or alkaline deter- gents.
NOTICE
After washing the vehicle, test the brakes while driving slowly to see if they have been affected by water. If braking performance is impaired, dry the brakes by applying them lightly while maintaining a slow forward speed.
WARNING
7-70
Maintenance
Corrosion protection Protecting your vehicle from corro- sion
By using the most advanced design and construction practices to combat corrosion, HYUNDAI produces vehi- cles of the highest quality. However, this is only part of the job. To achieve the long-term corrosion resistance your vehicle can deliver, the owner's cooperation and assistance is also required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corro- sion on your vehicle are: Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath the vehicle.
Removal of paint or protective coatings by stones, gravel, abra- sion or minor scrapes and dents which leave unprotected metal exposed to corrosion.
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your vehi- cle is regularly exposed to corrosive materials, corrosion protection is particularly important. Some of the common causes of accelerated cor- rosion are road salts, dust control chemicals, ocean air and industrial pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in which corrosion is most likely to occur. For example, corrosion is accelerated by high humidity, partic- ularly when temperatures are just above freezing. In such conditions, the corrosive material is kept in con- tact with the vehicle surfaces by moisture that is slow to evaporate. Mud is particularly corrosive because it is slow to dry and holds moisture in contact with the vehicle. Although the mud appears to be dry, it can still retain moisture and pro- mote corrosion.
High temperatures can also acceler- ate corrosion of parts that are not properly ventilated so the moisture can be dispersed. For all these rea- sons, it is particularly important to keep your vehicle clean and free of mud or accumulations of other mate- rials. This applies not only to the vis- ible surfaces but particularly to the underside of the vehicle.
To help prevent corrosion
Keep your vehicle clean The best way to prevent corrosion is to keep your vehicle clean and free of corrosive materials. Attention to the underside of the vehicle is partic- ularly important.
If you live in a high-corrosion area where road salts are used, near the ocean, areas with industrial pollution, acid rain, etc., you should take extra care to prevent corrosion. In winter, hose off the underside of your vehicle at least once a month and be sure to clean the underside thoroughly when winter is over.
7-71
7
M aintenance
When cleaning underneath the vehicle, pay particular attention to the components under the fenders and other areas that are hidden from view. Do a thorough job; just dampening the accumulated mud rather than washing it away will accelerate corrosion rather than prevent it. Water under high pres- sure and steam are particularly effective in removing accumulated mud and corrosive materials.
When cleaning lower door panels, rocker panels and frame members, be sure that drain holes are kept open so that moisture can escape and not be trapped inside to accel- erate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry Don't park your vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. This cre- ates a favorable environment for cor- rosion. This is particularly true if you wash your vehicle in the garage or drive it into the garage when it is still wet or covered with snow, ice or mud. Even a heated garage can con- tribute to corrosion unless it is well ventilated so moisture is dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good condition Scratches or chips in the finish should be covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as possible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. If bare metal is showing through, the atten- tion of a qualified body and paint shop is recommended. Bird droppings are highly corrosive and may damage painted surfaces in just a few hours. Always remove bird droppings as soon as possible.
Interior Care Interior general precautions Prevent caustic solutions such as perfume and cosmetic oil, from con- tacting the interior parts because they may cause damage or discol- oration. If they do contact the interior parts, wipe them off immediately. See the instructions for the proper way to clean vinyl.
Never allow water or other liq- uids to come in contact with electrical/electronic compo- nents inside the vehicle as this may damage them.
When cleaning leather products (steering wheel, seats etc.), use neutral detergents or low alco- hol content solutions. If you use high alcohol content solutions or acid/alkaline detergents, the color of the leather may fade or the surface may get stripped off.
NOTICE
7-72
Maintenance
Cleaning the upholstery and interior trim Vinyl (if equipped)
Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.
Fabric (if equipped)
Remove dust and loose dirt from fab- ric with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu- tion recommended for upholstery or carpets. Remove fresh spots imme- diately with a fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not receive immediate attention, the fabric can be stained and its color can be affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties can be reduced if the material is not proper- ly maintained.
Using anything but recommended cleaners and procedures may affect the fabric's appearance and fire-resistant properties.
Leather (if equipped)
Features of seat leather - Leather is made from the outer
skin of an animal, which goes through a special process to be available for use. Since it is a nat- ural product, each part differs in thickness or density. Wrinkles may appear as a natural result of stretching and shrinking depending on the temperature and humidity.
- The seat is made of stretchable fabric to improve comfort.
- The parts contacting the body are curved and the side supporting area is high which provides driv- ing comfort and stability.
- Wrinkles may appear naturally from usage. It is not a fault of the products.
Wrinkles or abrasions which appear naturally from usage are not covered by warranty.
Belts with metallic accessories, zippers or keys inside the back pocket may damage the seat fabric.
Make sure not to wet the seat. It may change the nature of natu- ral leather.
Jeans or clothes which could bleach may contaminate the sur- face of the seat covering fabric.
NOTICE
NOTICE
7-73
7
M aintenance
Caring for the leather seats - Vacuum the seat periodically to
remove dust and sand on the seat. It will prevent abrasion or damage of the leather and maintain its qual- ity.
- Wipe the natural leather seat cover often with dry or soft cloth.
- Use of proper leather protector may prevent abrasion of the cover and helps maintain the color. Be sure to read the instructions and consult a specialist when using leather coating or protective agent.
- Light colored (beige, cream beige) leather is easily contaminated and the stain is noticeable. Clean the seats frequently.
- Avoid wiping with wet cloth. It may cause the surface to crack.
Cleaning the leather seats - Remove all contaminations instant-
ly. Refer to instructions below for removal of each contaminant.
- Cosmetic products (sunscreen, foundation, etc.) Apply cleansing cream on a cloth and wipe the contaminated spot. Wipe off the cream with a wet cloth and remove water with a dry cloth.
- Beverages (coffee, soft drink, etc.) Apply a small amount of neutral detergent and wipe until contami- nations do not smear.
- Oil Remove oil instantly with absorbable cloth and wipe with stain remover used only for natu- ral leather.
- Chewing gum Harden the gum with ice and remove gradually.
Cleaning the seat belt webbing Clean the belt webbing with any mild soap solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow the instructions provided with the soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the webbing because this may weaken the seat belt.
Cleaning the interior window glass If the interior glass surfaces of the vehicle become fogged (that is, cov- ered with an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the directions on the glass cleaner container.
Do not scrape or scratch the inside of the rear window. This may result in damage to the rear window defroster grid.
NOTICE
7-74
Maintenance
The emission control system of your vehicle is covered by a written limited warranty. Please see the warranty information contained in the Owner's Handbook & Warranty Information booklet in your vehicle. Your vehicle is equipped with an emission control system to meet all applicable emission regulations. There are three emission control systems, as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control sys- tem
(2) Evaporative emission control sys- tem
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to ensure the proper func- tion of the emission control systems, it is recommended that you have your vehicle inspected and main- tained by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer in accordance with the main- tenance schedule in this manual.
For the Inspection and Maintenance Test (with Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system) To prevent the vehicle from mis-
firing during dynamometer test- ing, turn the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system off by pressing the ESC switch (ESC OFF light illuminated).
After dynamometer testing is completed, turn the ESC system back on by pressing the ESC switch again.
1. Crankcase Emission Control System
The positive crankcase ventilation system is employed to prevent air pollution caused by blow-by gases being emitted from the crankcase. This system supplies fresh filtered air to the crankcase through the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase, the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases, which then pass through the PCV valve into the induction system.
2. Evaporative Emission Control System Including Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR)
The Evaporative Emission Control System is designed to prevent fuel vapors from escaping into the atmos- phere. The ORVR system is designed to allow the vapors from the fuel tank to be loaded into a can- ister while refueling at the gas sta- tion, preventing the escape of fuel vapors into the atmosphere.
NOTICE
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
7-75
7
M aintenance
Canister Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel tank are absorbed and stored in the onboard canister. When the engine is running, the fuel vapors absorbed in the canister are drawn into the surge tank through the purge control sole- noid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV) The purge control solenoid valve is controlled by the Engine Control Module (ECM); when the engine coolant temperature is low during idling, the PCSV closes so that evap- orated fuel is not taken into the engine. After the engine warms-up during ordinary driving, the PCSV opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the engine.
3. Exhaust Emission Control System
The Exhaust Emission Control System is a highly effective system which controls exhaust emissions while maintaining good vehicle per- formance. When the engine starts or fails to start, excessive attempts to restart the engine may cause damage to the emission system.
Engine exhaust (carbon monox- ide) precautions Carbon monoxide can be present
with other exhaust fumes. If you smell exhaust fumes of any kind in your vehicle, drive with all the win- dows fully open. Have your vehicle checked and repaired immediately.
Engine exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide (CO). Though colorless and odorless, it is dangerous and could be lethal if inhaled. Follow the instructions on this page to avoid CO poi- soning.
WARNING
Do not operate the engine in con- fined or closed areas (such as garages) any more than what is necessary to move the vehicle in or out of the area.
When the vehicle is stopped in an open area for more than a short time with the engine running, adjust the ventilation system (as needed) to draw outside air into the vehicle.
Never sit in a parked or stopped vehicle for any extended time with the engine running.
When the engine stalls or fails to start, excessive attempts to restart the engine may cause damage to the emission control system.
Operating precautions for cat- alytic converters (if equipped)
The exhaust system and cat- alytic converter are very hot during and immediately after the engine has been running.To avoid SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: Do not park, idle, or drive the
vehicle over or near flamma- ble objects, such as grass, vegetation, paper, leaves, etc. A hot exhaust system can ignite flammable items under your vehicle.
Keep away from the exhaust system and catalytic convert- er or you may get burned. Also, Do not remove the heat sink around the exhaust sys- tem, do not seal the bottom of the vehicle, and do not coat the vehicle for corrosion con- trol. It may present a fire risk under certain conditions.
WARNING CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING
Engine exhaust and a wide vari- ety of automobile components and parts, including compo- nents found in the interior fur- nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause can- cer and birth defects and repro- ductive harm. In addition, cer- tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of compo- nent wear contain or emit chem- icals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproduc- tive harm.
WARNING
Maintenance
7-76
Your vehicle is equipped with a cat- alytic converter emission control device. To prevent damage to the catalytic converter and to your vehicle, take the following precautions: Use only UNLEADED FUEL for
gasoline engines. Do not operate the vehicle when
there are signs of engine malfunc- tion, such as misfire or a noticeable loss of performance.
Do not misuse or abuse the engine. Examples of misuse are coasting with the engine off and descending steep grades in gear with the engine off.
Do not operate the engine at high idle speed for extended periods (5 minutes or more).
Do not modify or tamper with any part of the engine or emission con- trol system. All inspections and adjustments must be made by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Avoid driving with extremely low fuel level. If you run out of gasoline, it could cause the engine to misfire and result in excessive loading of the catalytic converter.
M aintenance
7
7-77
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE NOTICE Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply, See: www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers: Perchlorate containing materials, such as air bag inflators, seatbelt pretensioners and keyless remote entry batteries, must be disposed of according to Title 22 California Code of Regulations Section 67384.10 (a).
Maintenance
7-78
8
Specifications & Consum
er inform ation
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Dimensions ..............................................................8-2 Engine......................................................................8-2 Bulb Wattage ..........................................................8-3 Tires and Wheels ...................................................8-5 Volume and Weight................................................8-6 Air Conditioning System........................................8-6 Recommended Lubricants and Capacities..........8-7
Recommended SAE Viscosity Number .........................8-8 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ...................8-9 Vehicle Certification Label....................................8-9 Tire Specification and Pressure Label .............8-10 Engine Number .....................................................8-10 Refrigerant Label.................................................8-10 Consumer Information.........................................8-11 Reporting Safety Defects ...................................8-12
DIMENSIONS
8-2
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
ENGINE
Items in (mm)
Overall length 175.9 (4,470)
Overall width 71.6 (1,820)
Overall height 56.8 (1,445)
Front tread
195/65 R15 *1 61.5 (1,563)
205/55 R16 *2 61.2 (1,555)
225/45 R17 *1 60.0 (1,549)
Rear tread
195/65 R15 *1 62.0 (1,577)
205/55 R16 *2 61.8 (1,569)
225/45 R17 *1 61.5 (1,563)
Wheelbase 106.3 (2,700)
Engine Displacement cu in. (cc) Bore X Stroke in. (mm) Firing Order No. of Cylinders
Kappa 1.6 GDI 96.4 (1,580) 2.8 X 3.8 (72 X 97) 1-3-4-2 In-line 4 cylinder
*1 : Hybrid vehicle *2 : Plug-in hybrid vehicle
BULB WATTAGE
8-3
8
Specifications, Consum er inform
ation and Reporting safety defects
Light Bulb Bulb Type Wattage
Front
Type A
Headlamp Low H7 55 High HB3 60
Parking lamp W5W 5 Turn signal lamp 28/8W 28/8 Side marker W5W 5
Type B
Headlamp Low/High D3S 35 Parking lamp LED LED Turn signal lamp 28/8W 28/8 Side marker W5W 5
Daytime running light (DRL) LED LED
Side repeater lamp Outside mirror LED LED Vehicle side WY5W 5
Rear
Type A
Tail/Stop lamp P21/5W 21/5 Turn signal lamp PY27W 27 Tail lamp W5W 5 Backup lamp W16W 16 Side marker W5W 5
Type B
Tail/Stop lamp LED LED Turn signal lamp LED LED Tail lamp LED LED Backup lamp W16W 16 Side marker LED LED
High mounted stop lamp LED LED License plate lamp W5W 5
8-4
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Light Bulb Bulb Type Wattage
Interior
Map lamp Type A W10W 10
Type B LED LED
Room lamp Type A FESTOON 8
Type B LED LED
Vanity mirror lamp FESTOON 5
Luggage compartment lamp FESTOON 5
TIRES AND WHEELS
8-5
8
Specifications, Consum er inform
ation and Reporting safety defects
If your vehicle is not equipped with a compact spare tire, your vehicle will be equipped with a Tire Mobility Kit.
Items Tire Size Wheel Size
Inflation Pressure kPa (psi)
WheelLug Nut Torque kgfm
(lbfft, Nm) Normal Load Maximum Load
Front Rear Front Rear
Full size tire
195/65 R15 *1 6.0J X 15 250 (36) 250 (36) 250 (36) 250 (36)
11~13 (79~94,
107~127)
205/55 R16 *2 6.5J X 16 250 (36) 250 (36) 250 (36) 250 (36)
225/45 R17 *1 7.0J X 17 250 (36) 250 (36) 250 (36) 250 (36)
Compact spare tire (if equipped)
T125/80 D15 4.0T X 15 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60)
It is permissible to add 3 psi to the standard tire pressure specification if colder temperatures are expect- ed soon. Tires typically loose 1psi (7kPa) for every 12F temperature drop. If extreme temperature variations are expected, recheck your tire pressure as necessary to keep them properly inflated.
An air pressure generally decreases, as you drive up to a high-altitude area above sea level. Thus, if you plan to drive a high-altitude area, check the tire pressures in advance. If necessary, inflate them to a prop- er level. (Air inflation per altitude : +2.4 psi/1 mile)
NOTICE
When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle. Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or not work properly.
NOTICE
*1 : Hybrid vehicle *2 : Plug-in hybrid vehicle
8-6
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
VOLUME AND WEIGHT
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for more details.
Items Weight of Volume Classification
Refrigerant oz. (g)
21.160.88 (60025) R-134a
Compressor lubricant oz. (cc)
4.580.350.88 (13010) POE
Gross Vehicle Weight lbs. (kg) Luggage Volume cu ft (l)
Hybrid vehicle Plug-in hybrid vehicle Hybrid vehicle Plug-in hybrid vehicle
3,935 (1,785)*1 / 4,079 (1,850) 4,343 (1,970) 26.5 (750) 23.0 (650)
*1 : For echo pack vehicles
8-7
8
Specifications, Consum er inform
ation and Reporting safety defects
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil *1 *2 (drain and refill)
Recommends 4.0 US qt. (3.8 l)
0W-20 (SAE Viscosity Number), API SN (or above) or ACEA C2 *3
Dual clutch transmission fluid 1.69 ~ 1.79 US qt. (1.6 ~ 1.7 l)
HK SYN DCTF 70W (SK) SPIRAX S6 GHME 70W DCTF (H.K.SHELL) GS DCTF HD 70W (GS CALTEX) (API GL-4, SAE 70W)
Engine clutch actuator fluid 0.08 ~ 0.13 US qt. (80 ~ 120 cc) FMVSS116 DOT3
Engine coolant 7.07 US qt. (6.7 l) Mixture of antifreeze and water (Phosphate-based Ethylene glycol coolant for aluminum radiator)Inverter coolant 3.38 US qt. (3.2 l)
Brake fluid 0.74~0.85 US qt. (0.7 ~ 0.8 l) FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Fuel Hybrid vehicle 11.9 US gal. (45 l) Refer to "Fuel requirements" in the Foreword
chapter.Plug-in hybrid vehicle 11.4 US gal. (43 l)
*1 : Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page. *2 : Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel econ-
omy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year's time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*3 : If the ACEA C2 engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use ILSAC GF-3 (or above) or ACEA A3 (or above).
8-8
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Recommended SAE Viscosity Number
Always be sure to clean the area around any filler plug, drain plug, or dipstick before check- ing or draining any lubricant. This is especially important in dusty or sandy areas and when the vehicle is used on unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug and dipstick areas will prevent dirt and grit from entering the engine and other mechanisms that could be damaged.
CAUTION
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Engine Oil *1
C (F)
*1 : For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 0W-20 (API SN (or above) or ACEA C2). However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
10W-30
0/5W-20, 0/5W-30
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an effect on fuel economy and cold weather operating (engine start and engine oil flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils can provide better fuel economy and cold weather performance, however, higher viscosity engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using oils of any viscosity other than those recommended could result in engine damage. When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your vehicle will be operated in before the next oil change. Proceed to select the recommended oil viscosity from the chart.
8-9
8
Specifications, Consum er inform
ation and Reporting safety defects
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the number used in register- ing your car and in all legal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc. The number is punched on the floor under the passenger seat. To check the number, open the cover.
The VIN is also on a plate attached to the top of the dashboard. The number on the plate can easily be seen through the windshield from outside.
The vehicle certification label attached on the driver's side center pillar gives the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
OAE086004L
VIN label
OAE086001
Frame number
OAE086002
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
8-10
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
The tires supplied on your new vehi- cle are chosen to provide the best performance for normal driving. The tire label located on the driver's side center pillar gives the tire pres- sures recommended for your car.
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown in the drawing.
The refrigerant label provides infor- mation such as refrigerant type and amount. The label is located on the underside of the hood.
ENGINE NUMBER REFRIGERANT LABEL (IF EQUIPPED)
TIRE SPECIFICATION AND PRESSURE LABEL
OAE086002L OAEE086005N
OAEPH086001
8-11
8
Specifications, Consum er inform
ation and Reporting safety defects
Eastern Region: Connecticut, Delaware, Maine, Massachusetts, New Hampshire, New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, Vermont. Eastern Region 1122 Cranbury South River Road Jamesburg, NJ 08831 (800) 633-5151
Southern Region: Florida, Georgia, Maryland, North Carolina, South Carolina, Virginia, West Virginia. Southern Region 3025 Chastain Meadows Parkway Suite 100 Marietta, GA 30066 (800) 633-5151
South Central Region: Alabama, Arkansas, Louisiana, Mississippi, New Mexico, Oklahoma, Tennessee, Texas. South Central Region 1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400 Coppell, TX 75019 (800) 633-5151
Central Region: Illinois, Indiana, lowa, Kentucky, Michigan, Minnesota, Nebraska, North Dakota, South Dakota, Ohio, Wisconsin, Kansas, Missouri. Central Region 2 Trans Am Plaza Dr #500 Oakbrook Terrace, IL 60181 (800) 633-5151
Western Region: Alaska, Hawaii, Arizona, California, Colorado, Idaho, Montana, Nevada, Oregon, Utah, Washington, Wyoming. Western Region 10550 Talbert Avenue P.O.Box 20850 Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850 (800) 633-5151
CONSUMER INFORMATION This consumer information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation.Your HYUNDAI dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information. HYUNDAI motor vehicles are designed and manufactured to meet or exceed all applicable safety standards. For your safety, however, we strongly urge you to read and follow all directions in this Owners Manual, particularly the information under the headings "NOTICE", "CAUTION" and "WARNING". If, after reading this manual, you have any questions regarding the operation of your vehicle, please contact your nearest HYUNDAI Motor America Regional Office as listed in the following:
8-12
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888- 327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; download the SaferCar mobile application; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Ave, SE, West Building Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual prob- lems between you, your dealer, or HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
I
Index
I-2
Air bag warning labels....................................................2-70
Air bags...........................................................................2-47
Additional safety precautions.....................................2-69
Air bag collision sensors ............................................2-63
Air bag inflation conditions .......................................2-65
Air bag non-inflation conditions ................................2-66
Air bag warning labels ...............................................2-70
Curtain air bags ..........................................................2-51
Do not install a child restraint on the front passenger seat..........................................................2-62
Driver's air bag ...........................................................2-49
Driver's knee airbag....................................................2-49
How does the air bags system operate? .....................2-52
Occupant Classification System (OCS) .....................2-58
Passengers front air bag ............................................2-49
Side air bags ...............................................................2-50
SRS Care ....................................................................2-68
SRS components and functions..................................2-52
SRS warning light ......................................................2-53
What to expect after an air bag inflates .....................2-57
Why didn't my air bag go off in a collision ...............2-63
Air cleaner.......................................................................7-24
Air conditioning refrigerant label .................................3-140
Air conditioning system specification ..............................8-6
Air conditioning system................................................3-129
Alarm system ..................................................................3-13
Antenna .............................................................................4-2
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ......................................5-26
Appearance care..............................................................7-67
Exterior care ...............................................................7-67
Interior care ................................................................7-71
Armrest ...........................................................................2-15
Audio/Video/Navigation system (AVN system)...............4-5
Auto defogging system .................................................3-143
Auto door lock/unlock features
Impact sensing door unlock .......................................3-12
Shift lever auto door lock...........................................3-12
Speed sensing door lock.............................................3-12
Auto light position ........................................................3-115
Automatic climate control system ................................3-129
Air conditioning .......................................................3-137
Air conditioning refrigerant label.............................3-140
Air intake control .....................................................3-135
Automatic heating and air conditioning...................3-130
Driver only ...............................................................3-137
Fan speed control .....................................................3-136
Manual heating and air conditioning .......................3-131
Mode selection .........................................................3-132
OFF mode.................................................................3-137
Sync button...............................................................3-134
System maintenance.................................................3-139
Temperature control .................................................3-134
Index
A
I-3
Automatic ventilation ...................................................3-145
Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB) system...........5-43
AUX, USB and iPod Port...............................................4-2
Batterty (12 volt, Plug-in hybrid vehicle).......................7-31
Battery cooling duct........................................................2-22
Battery saver function ...................................................3-118
Before driving ...................................................................5-4
Blind Spot Detection (BSD) system...............................5-34
Blind spot mirror.............................................................3-34
Blue Link center ...........................................................3-19
Bluetooth Wireless Technology hands-free ....................4-4
Bottle holder .................................................................3-148
Brake fluid ......................................................................7-22
Brake system...................................................................5-23
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)..................................5-26
Disc brakes wear indicator .........................................5-24
Electronic Stability Control (ESC).............................5-28
Good braking practices ..............................................5-33
Hill-start Assist Control (HAC) .................................5-33
Parking brake..............................................................5-24
Power brakes ..............................................................5-23
Vehicle Stability Management (VSM) .......................5-31
Bulb replacement ............................................................7-55
Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) .................................7-60
Front parking lamp.....................................................7-55
Front turn signal lamp ................................................7-55
Headlamp....................................................................7-55
High mounted stop lamp ............................................7-64
Interior light bulb .......................................................7-65
License plate light bulb ..............................................7-65
Rear combination light bulb.......................................7-61
Side marker ................................................................7-55
Side repeater lamp......................................................7-61
Bulb wattage .....................................................................8-3
Button start/stop, see engine start/stop button..................5-6
Camera (Rear view) ......................................................3-125
Capacities (Lubricants) .....................................................8-7
Care
Exterior care ...............................................................7-67
Interior care ................................................................7-71
Tire care......................................................................7-34
Cargo security screen....................................................3-154
Center console storage..................................................3-146
Central door lock switch .................................................3-11
Certification label location ...............................................8-9
Chains
Tire chains ..................................................................5-89
Checking tire inflation pressure......................................7-36
I
Index
B
C
I-4
Child restraint system (CRS)..........................................2-36
Booster seats...............................................................2-39
Forward-facing child restraint system........................2-39
Installing a child restraint system (CRS) ...................2-39
Lower anchors and tether for children (LATCH system) .....................................................2-40
Rearward-facing child restraint system......................2-38
Securing a child restraint system seat with "Tether Anchor" system ..........................................3-43
Securing a child restraint system with a lap/shoulder belt ......................................................3-44
Securing a child restraint system withthe LATCH anchors system ........................................................2-42
Selecting a child restraint system (CRS) ...................2-37
Child-protector rear door lock ........................................3-12
Climate control air filter .................................................7-26
Clock .............................................................................3-152
Clothes hanger ..............................................................3-153
Coasting guide ................................................................5-22
Combined instrument, see instrument cluster ................3-54
Compact spare tire replacement .....................................7-39
Consumer information ....................................................8-11
Convertible locking retractor ..........................................2-27
Coolant ............................................................................7-18
Cooling fluid, see engine coolant/inverter coolant.........7-18
Crankcase emission control system................................7-74
Cruise control system .....................................................5-64
Cup holder.....................................................................3-148
Curtain air bags...............................................................2-51
Dashboard illumination, see instrument panel illumination..................................................................3-56
Dashboard, see instrument cluster ..................................3-54
Day/night rearview mirror ..............................................3-19
Daytime running light (DRL) .......................................3-115
Defogging (Windshield) ...............................................3-141
Defroster
Rear window defroster .............................................3-142
Defrosting (Windshield) ...............................................3-141
Dimensions .......................................................................8-2
Display illumination, see instrument panel illumination..................................................................3-56
Displays, see instrument cluster .....................................3-54
Door locks.........................................................................3-9
Auto door lock/unlock features..................................3-12
Central door lock switch ............................................3-11
Child-protector rear door lock....................................3-12
Drinks holders, see cup holders....................................3-148
Driver position memory system .....................................3-14
Easy access function ..................................................3-15
Recalling positions from memory.............................3-15
Storing positions into memory ...................................3-14
Driver's air bag................................................................2-49
Driver's knee airbag ........................................................2-49
Driving at night...............................................................5-87
Driving in flooded areas .................................................5-88
Driving in the rain...........................................................5-87
Index
D
I-5
Dual clutch transmission.................................................5-12
DCT warning messages..............................................5-14
ECO mode ..................................................................5-17
Good driving practices ...............................................5-20
Manual shift mode......................................................5-18
Paddle shifter..............................................................5-19
Shift lever position .....................................................5-16
Shift lock system ........................................................5-18
SPORT mode..............................................................5-17
Dual clutch transmission shift indicator .........................3-61
Shift indicator pop-up ................................................3-62
Dynamic Bending Light (DBL)....................................3-119
Easy access function .......................................................3-15
ECO mode.......................................................................5-17
Electric Chromic Mirror (ECM) with HomeLink system, compass and Blue Link ................................................3-19
Electric Power Steering (EPS)........................................3-16
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .................................5-28
Emergency locking retractor...........................................2-26
Emergency towing ..........................................................6-42
Emission control system .................................................7-74
Crankcase emission control system ...........................7-74
Evaporative emission control System ........................7-74
Exhaust emission control system ...............................7-75
Engine compartment .........................................................7-3
Engine compartment panel fuse replacement.................7-51
Engine coolant ................................................................7-18
Engine number location..................................................8-10
Engine oil ........................................................................7-16
Engine specification..........................................................8-2
Engine Start/Stop button ...................................................5-6
Evaporative emission control System.............................7-74
Exhaust emission control system....................................7-75
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items.................7-14
Exterior care....................................................................7-67
Flat tire
Spare tire ....................................................................6-20
Tire Mobility Kit (TMK) ..................................6-25, 6-33
Floor mat anchor(s).......................................................3-153
Fluid
Brake fluid..................................................................7-22
Washer fluid ...............................................................7-23
Front seat adjustment ........................................................2-6
Manual adjustment .......................................................2-7
Power adjustment .........................................................2-9
Seatback pocket..........................................................2-12
Front seat head restraints
Adjusting the height up and down .............................2-17
Removal/Reinstallation ..............................................2-18
Fuel filler door
Hybrid vehicle ............................................................3-48
Plug-in hybrid vehicle ................................................3-51
I
Index
E
F
I-6
Fuel gauge.......................................................................3-58
Fuel requirements .............................................................F-7
Detergent fuel additives ...............................................F-8
Gasoline containing alcohol or methanol ....................F-7
Gasoline containing MMT...........................................F-8
Operation in foreign countries .....................................F-9
Using fuel additives .....................................................F-8
Fuse switch .....................................................................7-51
Fuses ...............................................................................7-49
Engine compartment panel fuse replacement ............7-51
Fuse switch.................................................................7-51
Fuse/relay panel description.......................................7-53
Instrument panel fuse replacement.............................7-50
Multi fuse ...................................................................7-52
Gauges and meters ..........................................................3-56
Glove box......................................................................3-146
Gross vehicle weight.........................................................8-6
Hazard warning flasher.....................................................6-2
Hazardous driving conditions .........................................5-86
Head restraints ................................................................2-16
Front seat head restraints............................................2-17
Rear seat head restraints.............................................2-19
Headlamp delay function ..............................................3-118
Headlamp position ........................................................3-116
Headlight bulb replacement ............................................7-55
Heated steering wheel.....................................................3-17
Heater ............................................................................3-129
Height adjustment ...........................................................2-27
High beam operation.....................................................3-117
Highway driving .............................................................5-88
Hill-start Assist Control (HAC)......................................5-33
Hood................................................................................3-45
Horn ................................................................................3-17
How to use this manual ....................................................F-6
Hybrid battery SOC (State of Charge) gauge.................3-59
Hybrid starter&generator (HSG) belt .............................7-22
Hybrid vehicle
Engine compartment ....................................................1-6
Exterior overview.........................................................1-2
Fuel filler door............................................................3-48
If the 12 volt battery is discharged...............................6-4
If the vehicle will not start ...........................................6-3
Instrument panel overview...........................................1-5
Interior overview ..........................................................1-4
Jump starting ................................................................6-6
Trip computer ...........................................................3-104
Index
G
H
I-7
If the 12 volt battery is discharged (Hybrid vehicle) .......6-4
Jump starting ................................................................6-6
Using the 12V battery reset switch ..............................6-5
If the 12 volt battery is discharged (Plug-in hybrid vehicle).................................................6-9
Jump starting ................................................................6-9
If the engine overheats....................................................6-12
If the engine stalls while driving ......................................6-2
If the vehicle stalls at a crossroad or crossing..................6-2
If the vehicle will not start
Hybrid vehicle ..............................................................6-3
Plug-in hybrid vehicle ..................................................6-4
If you have a flat tire ......................................................6-20
If you have a flat tire while driving..................................6-3
Impact sensing door unlock............................................3-12
Improtant safety precautions.............................................2-2
Air bag hazards ............................................................2-2
Always wear your seat belt ..........................................2-2
Control your speed .......................................................2-3
Driver distraction..........................................................2-2
Keep your vehicle in safe condition.............................2-3
Restrain all children .....................................................2-2
In case of emergency while driving..................................6-2
Indicator light..................................................................3-62
Inside rearview mirror ....................................................3-18
Instrument cluster ...........................................................3-54
Gauges and meters .....................................................3-56
Gear shift indicator.....................................................3-61
Icy road warning light ................................................3-75
Instrument panel illumination ....................................3-56
LCD display control ...................................................3-88
LCD display messages ...............................................3-73
LCD modes (for cluster type A).................................3-89
LCD modes (for cluster type B).................................3-97
Shift indicator pop-up ................................................3-62
Warning and indicator lights ......................................3-62
Instrument panel fuse replacement .................................7-50
Interior care.....................................................................7-71
Interior features
Bottle holder .............................................................3-148
Cargo security screen ...............................................3-154
Clock ........................................................................3-152
Clothes hanger..........................................................3-153
Cup holder ................................................................3-148
Floor mat anchor(s) ..................................................3-153
Mobile phone charging system ................................3-151
Power outlet..............................................................3-149
Sunvisor....................................................................3-149
USB charger .............................................................3-150
Wireless cellular phone charging system.................3-151
Interior lamp AUTO cut................................................3-120 I
Index
I
I-8
Interior lights.................................................................3-120
Door lamp.................................................................3-120
Interior lamp AUTO cut ...........................................3-120
Luggage compartment lamp.....................................3-121
Map lamp..................................................................3-120
Rear lamps................................................................3-121
Room lamp ...............................................................3-120
Vanity mirror lamp ...................................................3-121
Inverter coolant ...............................................................7-18
Jump starting
Hybrid vehicle ..............................................................6-6
Plug-in hybrid vehicle ..................................................6-9
Label
Air bag warning labels ...............................................2-70
Regrigerent label location ..........................................8-10
Tire sidewall labeling .................................................7-40
Tire specification and pressure label location............8-10
Vehicle certification label location...............................8-9
Lane change signals ......................................................3-117
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ............................5-56
Lap/shoulder belt ............................................................2-25
LCD display control .......................................................3-88
LCD modes (for cluster type A).................................3-89
LCD modes (for cluster type B).................................3-97
LCD display messages
AC Charger Error!......................................................3-84
Aux. Battery Saver+ was used while parked .............3-84
Check active air flap system ......................................3-78
Check BRAKE SWITCH fuse ...................................3-74
Check brakes ..............................................................3-81
Check fuel door ..........................................................3-83
Check headlight..........................................................3-77
Check hybrid system ..................................................3-78
Check hybrid system. Do not start engine .................3-79
Check hybrid system. Turn engine off .......................3-79
Check regenerative brakes .........................................3-81
Check steering wheel lock system .............................3-73
Check virtual engine sound system............................3-81
Door, hood, liftgate open............................................3-74
Engine has overheated/Engine overheated.................3-76
Exit SPORT mode to switch to EV............................3-87
Fuel door open............................................................3-83
Key not detected.........................................................3-73
Key not in vehicle ......................................................3-73
Lights mode................................................................3-77
Low fuel .....................................................................3-76
Low Key Battery ........................................................3-73
Index
J
L
I-9
Low pressure ..............................................................3-76
Low washer fluid........................................................3-76
Low/High system temp. maintaining hybrid mode....3-85
Low/High system temp. switching to hybrid mode...3-86
Maintaining Hybrid mode to continue heating or air conditioning .......................................................3-85
Maintaining Hybrid mode to protect engine..............3-86
Park with engine on to charge battery........................3-80
Press brake pedal to start vehicle ...............................3-73
Press START button again .........................................3-73
Press START button while turning wheel..................3-73
Press START button with key ....................................3-74
Rear parking assist system malfunction.....................3-78
Refill inverter coolant ................................................3-80
Refuel to prevent hybrid battery damage...................3-80
Remaining time ..........................................................3-82
Shift to P.....................................................................3-73
Shift to P to charge .....................................................3-84
Shift to P to start vehicle ............................................3-74
Stop vehicle and check brakes ...................................3-81
Stop vehicle and check power supply ........................3-79
Stop vehicle and check regen. brakes ........................3-81
Stop vehicle to charge battery ....................................3-80
Sunroof open ..............................................................3-75
Switching to Hybrid mode to allow heating or air conditioning .......................................................3-85
Switching to Hybrid mode to lubricate engine ..........3-86
Turn on FUSE SWITCH/ Turn FUSE SWITCH On........................................3-76
Unplug vehicle to start ...............................................3-82
Wait until fuel door opens ..........................................3-82
Wiper ..........................................................................3-77
Liftgate............................................................................3-46
Light bulbs ......................................................................7-55
Lighting.........................................................................3-115
Auto light position....................................................3-115
Battery saver function ..............................................3-118
Daytime Running Light (DRL) ................................3-115
Dynamic Bending Light (DBL) ...............................3-119
Headlamp delay function..........................................3-118
Headlamp position....................................................3-116
High beam operation ................................................3-117
Lane change signals..................................................3-117
One-touch turn signal function.................................3-118
Parking lamp position...............................................3-116
Turn signals ..............................................................3-117
Lubricants and capacities..................................................8-7
Luggage compartment lamp .........................................3-121
Luggage volume ...............................................................8-6
I
Index
I-10
Maintenance
Disconnecting (-) cable ................................................7-7
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ............7-14
Maintenance services ...................................................7-5
Maintenance under severe usage conditions..............7-12
Normal maintenance service ........................................7-9
Owner maintenance......................................................7-6
Scheduled maintenance services ..................................7-8
Tire maintenance ........................................................7-40
Maintenance services ........................................................7-5
Manual shift mode ..........................................................5-18
Mirrors ............................................................................3-18
Blue Link center.......................................................3-19
Day/night rearview mirror..........................................3-19
Electric Chromic Mirror (ECM) with HomeLink
system, compass and Blue Link ...........................3-19
Folding the side view mirror......................................3-35
Inside rearview mirror................................................3-18
Reverse parking aid function .....................................3-36
Side view mirror control ............................................3-35
Side view mirrors .......................................................3-33
Mobile phone charging system.....................................3-151
Moonroof, see sunroof....................................................3-41
Multi box.......................................................................3-147
Multi fuse........................................................................7-52
Multimedia system............................................................4-2
Antenna ........................................................................4-2
Audio/Video/Navigation system (AVN system) ..........4-5
AUX, USB and iPod Port ..........................................4-2
Bluetooth Wireless Technology hands-free................4-4
Steering wheel audio control........................................4-3
Occupant Classification System (OCS)..........................2-58
Odometer.........................................................................3-60
Oil (Engine) ....................................................................7-16
One-touch turn signal function .....................................3-118
Outside temperature gauge .............................................3-60
Owner maintenance ..........................................................7-6
Index
O
M
I-11
Paddle shifter ..................................................................5-19
Parking brake ..................................................................7-24
Parking lamp position ...................................................3-116
Passenger's front air bag .................................................2-49
Plug-in hybrid mode indicator ........................................3-59
Plug-in hybrid vehicle
Engine compartment...................................................1-11
Exterior overview.........................................................1-7
Fuel filler door............................................................3-51
If the 12 volt battery is discharged...............................6-9
If the vehicle will not start ...........................................6-4
Instrument panel overview.........................................1-10
Interior overview ..........................................................1-9
Jump starting ................................................................6-9
Trip computer ...........................................................3-109
Power brakes...................................................................5-23
Power gauge....................................................................3-57
Power outlet ..................................................................3-149
Power steering.................................................................3-16
Power window lock switch.............................................3-40
Pre-tensioner seat belt.....................................................2-29
Range ..............................................................................3-61
Rear center seatbelt.........................................................2-31
Rear parking assist system............................................3-126
Rear seat adjustment .......................................................2-12
Armrest .......................................................................2-15
Folding the rear seat ...................................................2-12
Rear seat head restraints .................................................2-19
Adjusting the height up and down .............................2-19
Removal/Reinstallation ..............................................2-20
Rear seat warmers...........................................................2-21
Rear view camera .........................................................3-125
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ...................7-35
Recommended lubricants and capacities ..........................8-7
Recommended SAE viscosity number.........................8-8
Regrigerent label location...............................................8-10
Removable towing hook .................................................6-41
Replacement light bulb ...................................................7-55
Reporting safety defects .................................................8-12
Rocking the vehicle ........................................................5-86
Rotation (Tire) ................................................................7-37
I
Index
P R
I-12
Safety messages................................................................F-6
Scheduled maintenance services.......................................7-8
Seat belt warning light
Driver's seat ................................................................2-24
Front passenger's seat .................................................2-25
Seat belts .........................................................................2-23
Additional seat belt safety precautions ......................2-32
Care of seat belts ........................................................2-35
Convertible locking retractor .....................................2-27
Do not lie down..........................................................2-34
Emergency locking retractor ......................................2-26
Height adjustment ......................................................2-27
Keep belts clean and dry ............................................2-35
Lap/shoulder belt........................................................2-25
One person per belt ....................................................2-34
Periodic inspection .....................................................2-35
Pre-tensioner seat belt ................................................2-29
Rear center seatbelt ....................................................2-31
Seat belt restraint system............................................2-25
Seat belt safety precautions........................................2-23
Seat belt use and children...........................................2-33
Seat belt use during pregnancy ..................................2-32
Seat belt warning light ...............................................2-24
Transporting an injured person ..................................2-34
When to replace seat belts..........................................2-35
Seat warmers
Front ...........................................................................2-20
Rear ............................................................................2-21
Seats ..................................................................................2-4
Battery cooling duct ...................................................2-22
Front seat adjustment ...................................................2-6
Front seat warmers .....................................................2-20
Head restraints............................................................2-16
Rear seat adjustment ..................................................2-12
Rear seat warmers ......................................................2-21
Safety precautions ........................................................2-5
Shift lever auto door lock ...............................................3-12
Shift lock system.............................................................5-18
Side air bags....................................................................2-50
Side view mirrors............................................................3-33
Blind spot mirror ........................................................3-34
Smart cruise control system............................................5-69
Smart key ..........................................................................3-3
Battery replacement......................................................3-7
Liftgate unlocking ........................................................3-5
Locking.........................................................................3-3
Mechanical key ............................................................3-6
Panic button..................................................................3-5
Unlocking .....................................................................3-4
Smooth cornering............................................................5-87
Snow tires .......................................................................5-89
Index
S
I-13
Spare tire
Compact spare tire replacement .................................7-39
Special driving conditions
Driving at night ..........................................................5-87
Driving in flooded areas.............................................5-88
Driving in the rain ......................................................5-87
Hazardous driving conditions ....................................5-86
Highway driving.........................................................5-88
Rocking the vehicle....................................................5-86
Smooth cornering .......................................................5-87
Speed sensing door lock .................................................3-12
Speedometer....................................................................3-56
SPORT mode ..................................................................5-17
Steering wheel
Heated steering wheel ................................................3-17
Horn............................................................................3-17
Power steering ............................................................3-16
Tilt steering / Telescope steering................................3-16
Steering wheel audio control ............................................4-3
Storage compartment ....................................................3-146
Center console storage .............................................3-146
Glove box .................................................................3-146
Multi box ..................................................................3-147
Sunglass holder ........................................................3-147
Sunglass holder .............................................................3-147
Sunroof............................................................................3-41
Automatic reverse ......................................................3-42
Resetting the sunroof..................................................3-44
Sliding the sunroof .....................................................3-42
Sunroof opening and closing......................................3-42
Sunshade.....................................................................3-43
Tilting the sunroof ......................................................3-43
Sunvisor ........................................................................3-149
Tachometer......................................................................3-57
Theft-alarm system .........................................................3-13
Tilt steering / Telescope steering ....................................3-16
Tire chains.......................................................................5-89
Tire Mobility Kit (TMK).......................................6-25, 6-33
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .....................6-14
Tire rotation ....................................................................7-37
Tire specification and pressure label location ................8-10
Tires and wheels .............................................................7-34
Checking tire inflation pressure .................................7-36
Compact spare tire replacement .................................7-39
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ...............7-35
Tire care......................................................................7-34
Tire maintenance ........................................................7-40
Tire replacement.........................................................7-38
Tire rotation ................................................................7-37 I
Index
T
I-14
Tire sidewall labeling .................................................7-40
Tire terminology and definitions................................7-44
Tire traction ................................................................7-39
Wheel alignment and tire balance..............................7-38
Wheel replacement .....................................................7-39
Towing ............................................................................6-40
Trip computer
Hybrid vehicle ..........................................................3-104
Plug-in hybrid vehicle ..............................................3-109
Turn signals...................................................................3-117
USB charger..................................................................3-150
Vanity mirror lamp........................................................3-121
Vehicle break-in process...................................................F-9
Vehicle certification label location ...................................8-9
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders ...........F-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN) location ..................8-9
Vehicle load limit ............................................................5-93
Tire loading information label....................................5-94
Vehicle modifications .......................................................F-9
Vehicle Stability Management (VSM)............................5-31
Warning and indicator lights...........................................3-62
Air bag warning light .................................................3-63
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) warning light ...........3-64
Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB) warning light ...........................................................3-72
Charging cable connection indicator..........................3-63
Charging system warning light ..................................3-66
Cruise indicator light..................................................3-71
Cruise SET indicator light..........................................3-71
ECO mode indicator light ..........................................3-72
Electric Power Steering (EPS) warning light.............3-65
Electronic brake force warning light..........................3-65
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) indicator light.....3-69
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF indicator light ..........................................................3-69
Engine coolant temperature warning light .................3-67
Engine oil pressure warning light ..............................3-66
EV mode indicator .....................................................3-62
Exterior light warning light........................................3-71
High beam indicator light ..........................................3-70
Immobilizer indicator light ........................................3-69
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) warning light ...........................................................3-72
LED headlight warning light......................................3-71
Light ON indicator light.............................................3-70
Low fuel level warning light......................................3-67
Index
V
W
U
I-15
Low tire pressure warning light .................................3-68
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ...........................3-66
Master warning light ..................................................3-68
Parking brake & brake fluid warning light ................3-63
Ready indicator ..........................................................3-62
Regenerative brake warning light ..............................3-64
Seat belt warning light ...............................................3-63
Service warning light .................................................3-62
SPORT mode indicator light ......................................3-72
Turn signal indicator light ..........................................3-70
Warning light ..................................................................3-62
Washer fluid ....................................................................7-23
Welcome system ...........................................................3-122
Door handle lamp.....................................................3-122
Headlamp and parking lamp ....................................3-122
Interior lamp.............................................................3-122
Wheel alignment and tire balance ..................................7-38
Wheel replacement .........................................................7-39
Windows .........................................................................3-37
Auto up/down window...............................................3-39
Automatic reverse ......................................................3-39
Power window lock switch ........................................3-40
Resetting the windows ...............................................3-39
Windshield defrosting and defogging...........................3-141
Windshield washers ......................................................3-124
Windshield wipers.........................................................3-123
Winter driving .................................................................5-89
Snow tires ...................................................................5-89
Tire chains ..................................................................5-89
Winter Precautions..........................................................5-91
Wiper blade replacement ................................................7-28
Wipers and washers ......................................................3-123
Windshield washers..................................................3-124
Windshield wipers ....................................................3-123
Wireless cellular phone charging system......................3-151
I
Index
Hybrid System Overview
HEV (Hybrid Electric Vehicle) System..................H2 Hybrid Vehicle......................................................................H2
PHEV (Plug-in Electric Vehicle) System..............H3 Plug-in Hybrid Vehicle.......................................................H3
Charging the Plug-in Hybrid Vehicle....................H4 Charging Information .........................................................H4 Charging Types ....................................................................H4 Charging Time Information...............................................H4 Charging Status ...................................................................H5 Charging Connector AUTO/LOCK Mode .......................H6 Scheduled Charging............................................................H7 Charging Precautions.........................................................H8 Normal Charge .....................................................................H9 Trickle Charge....................................................................H15
Driving the Hybrid/Plug-in Hybrid Vehicle .......H25 Starting the Vehicle..........................................................H25 Special Features................................................................H26 Hybrid System Gauge ......................................................H28 Plug-in Hybrid Mode (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)..........H29 Aux. Battery Saver+ (Plug-in hybrid vehicle) ...........H30 Warning and Indicator Lights ........................................H32 LCD Display Messages.....................................................H33 Energy flow........................................................................H41
Safety Precautions for Hybrid System ..............H45 High Voltage Battery System.........................................H45 Safety Plug.........................................................................H48 High Voltage Battery Cooling Duct ..............................H48 If an Accident Occurs ......................................................H50 When the Hybrid Vehicle Shuts Off ............................H51
H2
Hybrid Vehicle
HEV (HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE) SYSTEM
The HYUNDAI Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV) uses both the gasoline engine and the electric motor for power. The elec- tric motor is run by a high-voltage HEV battery. Depending on the driving conditions, the HEV computer selectively operates between the engine and the electric motor or even both at the same time. Fuel efficiency increases when the engine is off at idle, or when the vehicle is driven by the electric motor with the HEV battery. The HEV battery charge must be maintained, so at times the engine will come on even at idle to act as a generator. Charging also occurs when decelerating or by regenerative braking.
OAE056066
Startup/Low speed cruise
Electric motor
Acceleration
Electric motor + Engine
High speed cruise
Engine
Deceleration
Charging
Stop
Engine OFF
H3
PHEV (PLUG-IN ELECTRIC VEHICLE) SYSTEM
Plug-in Hybrid Vehicle
The HYUNDAI Plug-in Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV) shares the characteristics of both a conventional hybrid elec- tric vehicle and an all-electric vehicle. When used as a conventional hybrid electric vehicle, the HEV computer selectively operates between the engine and the electric motor or even both at the same time. When it is operating in the electric vehicle mode, the vehicle is driven only using the electric motor over a certain dis- tance until the hybrid battery becomes low. The driving distance in EV mode depends on customer driving style and road conditions. Aggressive driving maneuvers may at times temporarily enable the engine to operate for maximum power. The hybrid battery can be fully charged by connecting a plug to an external electric power source.
OAEPH057200L
Electric Vehicle Mode Startup/Low speed Acceleration High speed Deceleration External charging
Electric motor
CD (Charge Depleting) Mode CS (Charge Sustaining) Mode Charging
Motor Engine+Motor Engine+Motor Charging Battery charging
6
H4
Charging Information Normal Charge :
The plug-in hybrid vehicle is charged by plugging into a normal charger installed in your home or a public charging station. (For further details, refer to the 'Normal Charge'.)
Trickle Charge : The plug-in hybrid vehicle can be charged by using household elec- tricity. The electrical outlet in your home must comply with regulations and can safely accommodate the Voltage / Current (Amps) / Power (Watts) ratings specified on the portable charge.
Charging Time Information Normal Charge :
Takes approximately 2 hours 15 minutes at room temperature. (Can be charged to 100%.)
Trickle Charge : For charging at home. Please note that Trickle Charger is slower than the Normal Charger.
CHARGING THE PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE
Charging Types
Category Charging Inlet (Vehicle) Charging Connector Charging Outlet How to Charge Charging Time
Normal Charge
Use normal charger installed in homes or public charging station
Approx. 2 hours 15 minutes (to fully charge, 100%)
Trickle Charge
Use household current
For charging at home. Please note that Trickle Charger is slower than the Normal Charger.
Depending on the condition and durability of the high voltage battery, charger specifications, and ambient temperature, the time required for charging the high voltage battery may vary.
Actual charger image and charging method may vary in accordance with the charger manufacturer.
OLFP0Q5006KOAEEQ016020
OAEEQ016020 OAEEQ016024
OLFP0Q4057N
OLFP0Q5006K
H5
Charging Status
When charging the high voltage bat- tery, the charge level can be checked from outside the vehicle.
OAEEQ016025
Operation of Charging Indicator Lamp Details
(1) (2) (3)
(OFF) (OFF) (OFF) Not Charged
Blink (OFF) (OFF)
Charging
0~33%
(ON) Blink (OFF) 34~66%
(ON) (ON) Blink 67~99%
(ON) (ON) (ON) Fully charged (100%)(turns OFF in 5 seconds)
Blink Blink Blink Error while charging
(OFF) (OFF) Blink Charging the 12 V auxiliary battery
(Aux. Battery Saver+)
(OFF) Blink (OFF) Scheduled charging is operating
(turns OFF after 3 minutes)
H6
CHARGING THE PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE (CONT.)
Charging Connector AUTO / LOCK Mode
You may select when the charging connector can be locked and unlocked in the charging inlet. Press the button to change between AUTO mode and LOCK mode.
When the Charging Connector is Locked
LOCK mode (button indicator off) : The connector locks when the charging connector is plugged into the charging inlet. The connector is locked until all doors are unlocked by the driver. This mode can be used to prevent charging cable theft. - If the charging connector is
unlocked when all doors are unlocked, but the charging cable is not disconnected within 10 sec- onds, the connector will be auto- matically locked again.
- If the charging connector is unlocked when all doors are unlocked, but all doors are locked again, immediately, the connector will be automatically locked again.
AUTO mode (button indicator on) : The connector locks when charg- ing starts. The connector unlocks when charging is complete. This mode can be used when charging in a public charging station.
OAEEQ016059
LOCK AUTO
Before charging O X
While charging O O
Finished charging O X
H7
Scheduled Charging (if equipped) You can set-up a charging sched-
ule for your vehicle using the AVN or BlueLink application. Refer to the Multimedia manual or the BlueLink manual for detailed information about setting sched- uled charging.
Scheduled charging can only be done when using a normal charger or the portable charger (ICCB: In- Cable Control Box). When scheduled charging is set
and the normal charger or the portable charger (ICCB: In-Cable Control Box) is connected for charging, the indicator lamp in the middle blinks (for 3 minutes) to indicate that scheduled charging is set.
When scheduled charging is set, charging is not initiated immediate- ly when the normal charger or portable charger (ICCB: In-Cable Control Box) is connected. When immediate charging is required, use the AVN to deactivate the scheduled charge setting or press scheduled charging deactivation ( ) button.
If you press the scheduled charg- ing deactivation ( ) button to immediately charge the battery, charging must be initiated 3 min- utes after the charging cable has been connected. When you press the scheduled charging deactivation ( ) button for immediate charging, the sched- uled charge setting is not com- pletely deactivated. If you need to completely deactivate the sched- uled charge setting, use the AVN to finalize the deactivation.
Refer to "Normal Charge or Trickle Charge" for details about connecting the normal charger and the portable charger (ICCB: In-Cable Control Box).
OAEEQ016026 OAEEQ016027
H8
CHARGING THE PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE (CONT.)
Charging Precautions
Actual charger image and charg- ing method may vary in accor- dance with the charger manufac- turer.
Electromagnetic waves that are generated from the charg- er can seriously impact med- ical electric devices such as an implantable cardiac pace- maker. When using medical electric devices such as an implantable cardiac pacemaker, make sure to ask the medical team and manufacturer whether charg- ing your electric vehicle will impact the operation of the medical electric devices such as an implantable cardiac pacemaker.
Check to make sure there is no water or dust on the charg- ing cable connector and plug before connecting to the charger and charging inlet. Connecting while there is water or dust on the charging cable connector and plug may cause a fire or electric shock.
WARNING
Be careful not to touch the charging connector, charging plug, and the charging inlet when connecting the cable to the charger and the charging inlet on the vehicle.
Comply with the following in order to prevent electrical shock when charging: - Use a waterproof charger. - Be careful when touching
the charging connector and charging plug with your hands wet, or when standing in water or snow while con- necting the charging cable.
- Be careful when there is lightning.
- Be careful when the charg- ing connector and plug is wet.
WARNING
OLFP0Q4057N
Normal Charger
H9
Normal Charge
Actual charger image and charg- ing method may vary in accor- dance with the charger manufac- turer.
Immediately stop charging when you find abnormal symptoms (odor, smoke).
Replace the charging cable if the cable coating is damaged to prevent electrical shock.
When connecting or removing the charging cable, make sure to hold the charging connec- tor handle and charging plug. If you pull the cable itself (without using the handle), the internal wires may disconnect or get damaged.This may lead to electric shock or fire.
WARNING
Always keep the charging con- nector and charging plug in clean and dry condition. Be sure to keep the charging cable in a condition where there is no water or moisture.
Make sure to use the designat- ed charger for charging the electric vehicle. Using any other charger may cause fail- ure.
Before charging the battery, turn the vehicle OFF.
When the vehicle is switched OFF while charging, the cool- ing fan inside the motor com- partment may automatically operate. Do not touch the cool- ing fan while charging.
Be careful not to drop the charging connector. The charging connector can be damaged.
CAUTION
OLFP0Q4057N
Normal Charger
H10
How to Connect Normal Charger 1. Depress the brake pedal and
apply the parking brake. 2. Turn OFF all switches, shift to P
(Park), and turn OFF the vehicle.
3. Press center edge of the charging door to open the charging door.
Information The charging door opens only when the door is unlocked.
4. Check if there is dust on the charging connector and charging inlet.
5. Hold the charging connector han- dle and connect it to the vehicle normal charging inlet. Push the connector until you hear a "click- ing" sound. If the charging con- nector and charging terminal are not connected properly, this may cause a fire.
i
OAEEQ016030
OAEEQ016031
CHARGING THE PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE (CONT.)
H11
Information Charging connector AUTO/LOCK mode
The charging connector is locked in the inlet at a different period accord- ing to which mode is selected.
LOCK mode : The connector locks when the charging connector is plugged into the charging inlet.
AUTO mode : The connector locks when charging starts.
For more details, refer to "Charging Connector AUTO/LOCK Mode" in this chapter.
6. Connect the charging plug to the electric outlet at a normal charg- ing station to start charging.
7. Check if the charging indicator light of the high voltage battery on the instrument cluster is turned ON. Charging is not done when the charging indicator lamp is OFF. When the charging connector and charging plug are not connected properly, reconnect the charging cable to charge.
i
OLFP0Q4057N
Normal Charger
OAEEQ016032
H12
Information Even though charging is possible
with the Engine Start/Stop button in the ON/START position, for your safety, start charging when the Engine Start/Stop button is in the OFF position and the vehicle shifted to P (Park). After charging has started, you can use electrical com- ponents such as the radio by press- ing the Engine Start/Stop button to the ACC or ON position.
During normal charging, the radio reception may be bad.
Moving the shift lever from P (Park) to R (Reverse)/N (Neutral)/D (Drive) stops the charging process.
To restart the charging process, move the shift lever to P (Park), place the Engine Start/Stop button to the OFF position, and disconnect the charging cable. Then, connect the charging cable.
8. After charging has started, the estimated charging time is dis- played on the instrument cluster for about 1 minute. If you open the driver seat door while charging, the estimated charging time is also displayed on the instrument cluster for about 1 minute. When scheduled charging is set, the estimated charging time is dis- played as "--".
Information Depending on the condition and dura- bility of the high voltage battery, charger specifications, and ambient temperature, the time required for charging the battery may vary.
ii
OAEPH047193N
CHARGING THE PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE (CONT.)
H13
Checking Charging Status
When charging the high voltage bat- tery, the charge level can be checked from outside the vehicle.
OAEEQ016025
Operation of Charging Indicator Lamp Details
(1) (2) (3)
(OFF) (OFF) (OFF) Not Charged
Blink (OFF) (OFF)
Charging
0~33%
(ON) Blink (OFF) 34~66%
(ON) (ON) Blink 67~99%
(ON) (ON) (ON) Fully charged (100%) (turns OFF in 5 seconds)
Blink Blink Blink Error while charging
(OFF) (OFF) Blink Charging the 12 V auxiliary battery
(Aux. Battery Saver+)
(OFF) Blink (OFF) Scheduled charging is operating
(turns OFF after 3 minutes)
H14
CHARGING THE PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE (CONT.)
How to Disconnect Normal Charger
1. When charging is complete, remove the charging plug from the electrical outlet of the normal charging station.
2. Hold the charging connector han- dle and pull it while pressing the release button (1).
Information To prevent charging cable theft, the charging connector cannot be discon- nected from the inlet when the doors are locked. Unlock all doors to discon- nect the charging connector from the inlet.
However, if the vehicle is in the charg- ing connector AUTO mode, the charg- ing connector automatically unlocks from the inlet when charging is com- pleted.
For more details, refer to "Charging Connector AUTO/LOCK Mode" in this chapter.
i
OAEEQ016033
OLFP0Q4057N
Normal Charger
H15
3. Make sure to completely close the charging door.
Unlock Charging Connector in Emergency
If the charging connector does not disconnect due to battery discharge and failure of the electric wires, open the hood and slightly pull the emer- gency cable. The charging connector will then disconnect.
Trickle Charge
(1) Code and Plug (Code set) (2) Control Box (3) Charging Cable and Charging
Connector
Trickle Charge can be used when Normal Charge is not available by using household electricity.
OAEEQ016034
OAEPHQ016060
OAEEQ016042
Portable Charger
H16
CHARGING THE PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE (CONT.)
How to Connect Portable Charger (ICCB: In-Cable Control Box)
1. Connect the plug to a household electric outlet.
2. Check if the power lamp (green) illuminates on the control box.
3. Depress the brake pedal and apply the parking brake.
4. Turn OFF all switches, shift to P (Park), and turn OFF the vehicle.
5. Press center edge of the charging door to open the charging door.
Information The charging door opens only when the door is unlocked.
6. Check if there is dust on the charging connector and charging inlet.
i
OAEE046506N
Plug Electric Outlet OAEEQ016043
OAEEQ016030
H17
7. Hold the charging connector han- dle and connect it to the vehicle normal charging inlet. Push the connector until you hear a "click- ing" sound. If the charging con- nector and charging terminal are not connected properly, this may cause a fire.
Information Charging connector AUTO/LOCK mode
The charging connector is locked in the inlet at a different period accord- ing to which mode is selected.
LOCK mode : The connector locks when the charging connector is plugged into the charging inlet.
AUTO mode : The connector locks when charging starts.
For more details, refer to "Charging Connector AUTO/LOCK Mode" in this chapter.
8. Charging starts automatically (charging lamp blinks).
i
OAEEQ016031 OAEEQ016045
H18
CHARGING THE PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE (CONT.)
9. Check if the charging indicator light of the high voltage battery on the instrument cluster is turned ON. Charging is not done when the charging indicator lamp is OFF. When the charging connector is not connected properly, reconnect the charging cable to charge it again.
Information Even though charging is possible
with the Engine Start/Stop button in the ON/START position, for your safety, start charging when the Engine Start/Stop button is in the OFF position and the vehicle shifted to P (Park).
After charging has started, you can use electrical components such as the radio by pressing the Engine Start/Stop button to ACC or ON position.
Moving the shift lever from P (Park) to R (Reverse)/N (Neutral)/D (Drive) stops the charging process.
To restart the charging process, move the shift lever to P (Park), place the Engine Start/Stop button to the OFF position, and disconnect the charging cable. Then, connect the charging cable.
10. After charging has started, the estimated charging time is dis- played on the instrument cluster for about 1 minute. If you open the driver seat door while charg- ing, the estimated charging time is also displayed on the instru- ment cluster for about 1 minute. When scheduled charging is set, the estimated charging time is displayed as "--".
Information Depending on the condition and dura- bility of the high voltage battery, charger specifications, and ambient temperature, the time required for charging the battery may vary.
i
i
OAEEQ016032 OAEPH047193N
H19
Checking Charging Status
When charging the high voltage bat- tery, the charge level can be checked from outside the vehicle.
OAEEQ016025
Operation of Charging Indicator Lamp Details
(1) (2) (3)
(OFF) (OFF) (OFF) Not Charged
Blink (OFF) (OFF)
Charging
0~33%
(ON) Blink (OFF) 34~66%
(ON) (ON) Blink 67~99%
(ON) (ON) (ON) Fully charged (100%) (turns OFF in 5 seconds)
Blink Blink Blink Error while charging
(OFF) (OFF) Blink Charging the 12 V auxiliary battery
(Aux. Battery Saver+)
(OFF) Blink (OFF) Scheduled charging is operating
(turns OFF after 3 minutes)
H20
CHARGING THE PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE (CONT.)
Charging Status Indicator Lamp for Portable Charger
Control Box Indicator Details
PLUG
On : Power on Blink : Plug temperature sensor failure
On : Plug high temperature protection Blink : Plug high temperature warning
POWER On : Power on
CHARGE Blink : Charging In power saving mode, only the CHARGE indicator is illuminated.
FAULT Blink : Charging interrupted
CHARGE LEVEL
Charging current 12 A The charging current changes (3 level) whenever the button (1) is pressed for 1 sec with the charger plugged into an electri- cal outlet but not the vehicle.
Charging current 10 A
Charging current 8 A
VEHICLE
Charging connector plugged
Charging
Blink : Charging impossible
(Green)
(Green)
(Blue)
(Red)
(Red)
Back of the control box
H21
Charging Status Indicator Lamp for Portable Charger
NO Control Box Status / Diagnosis / Countermeasure NO Control Box Status / Diagnosis / Countermeasure
1
Charging connector plugged into vehicle (Green ON)
Plug temperature sensor failure (Green blink)
Plug high temperature protection (Red blink)
Plug high temperature warning (Red ON)
Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
2 - Charging connector plugged into
vehicle (Green ON)
3
- While charging Charge indicator (Green blink) Vehicle indicator (Blue ON)
4
- Before plugging charging connector into vehicle (Red blink) Abnormal temperature ICCB (In-Cable Control Box) failure
Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
H22
CHARGING THE PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE (CONT.)
NO Control Box Status / Diagnosis / Countermeasure NO Control Box Status / Diagnosis / Countermeasure
5
- Plugged into vehicle (Red blink) Diagnostic device failure Current leakage Abnormal temperature
Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
6
- After plugging charging connector into vehicle (Red blink) Communication failure
Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
7
Plug temperature sensor failure (Green blink)
Plug high temperature protection (Red blink)
Plug high temperature warning (Red ON)
Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
8
- Power saving mode 3 minutes after charging starts
(Green blink)
H23
1. Hold the charging connector han- dle and pull it while pressing the release button (1).
Information To prevent charging cable theft, the charging connector cannot be discon- nected from the inlet when the doors are locked. Unlock all doors to discon- nect the charging connector from the inlet. However, if the vehicle is in the charging connector AUTO mode, the charging connector automatically unlocks from the inlet when charging is completed. For more details, refer to "Charging Connector AUTO/LOCK Mode" in this chapter.
2. Make sure to completely close the charging door.
3. Disconnect the plug from the household electric outlet. Do not pull the cable when disconnecting the plug.
4. Close the protective cover for the charging connector so that foreign material cannot get into the termi- nal.
5. Put the charging cable inside the cable compartment to protect it.
i
OAEEQ016033
OAEEQ016034
OAEE046507N
Plug Electric Outlet
How to Disconnect Portable Charger (ICCB: In-Cable Control Box)
H24
Unlock Charging Connector in Emergency
If the charging connector does not disconnect due to battery discharge and failure of the electric wires, open the hood and slightly pull the emer- gency cable. The charging connector will then disconnect .
Precautions for Portable Charger (ICCB: In-Cable Control Box) Use the portable charger that is
certified by HYUNDAI Motors. Do not try to repair, disassemble,
or adjust the portable charger. Do not use an extension cord or
adapter. Stop using immediately when fail-
ure occurs. Do not touch the plug and charging
connector with wet hands. Do not touch the terminal part of
the normal charging connector and the normal charging inlet on the vehicle.
Do not connect the charging con- nector to voltage that does not comply with regulations.
Do not use the portable charger if it is worn out, exposed, or there exists any type of damage on the portable charger.
If the ICCB case and normal charg- ing connector is damaged, cracked, or the wires are exposed in any way, do not use the portable charger.
Do not let children operate or touch the portable charger.
Keep the control box free of water. Keep the normal charging connec-
tor or plug terminal free of foreign substances.
Do not step on the cable or cord. Do not pull the cable or cord and do not twist or bend it.
Do not charge when there is light- ning.
Do not drop the control box or place a heavy object on the control box.
Do not place an object that can generate high temperatures near the charger when charging.
Charging with the worn out or dam- aged household electric outlet can result in a risk of electric shock. If you are in doubt to the household electric outlet condition, have it checked by a licensed electrician.
Stop using the portable charger immediately if the household elec- tric outlet or any components is overheated or you notice burnt odors.
OAEPHQ016060
CHARGING THE PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE (CONT.)
H25
Starting the Vehicle 1. Carry the smart key or leave it
inside the vehicle. 2. Make sure the parking brake is
firmly applied. 3. Place the shift lever in P (Park).
With the shift lever in N (Neutral), you cannot start the vehicle.
4. Depress the brake pedal. 5. Press the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton. If the hybrid system starts, the " " indicator will come on. Whether the engine is cold or warm, it should be started without depressing the accelerator.
After following the start proce- dures, " " indicator on the instrument cluster will turn on. For more information, please check Chapter 5.
ECONOMICAL and SAFE OPERA- TION of Hybrid system Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a
moderate rate and maintain a steady cruising speed. Do not make "jack-rabbit" starts. Do not race between stoplights. Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos- sible. Always maintain a safe dis- tance from other vehicles so you can avoid unnecessary braking. This also reduces brake wear.
The regenerative brake generates energy when the vehicle deceler- ates.
When the hybrid battery power is low, the hybrid system automatical- ly recharges the hybrid battery.
When the engine is running with the shift lever in N (Neutral), the hybrid system cannot generate electricity. The hybrid battery can- not recharge with the shift lever in N (Neutral).
Information In the hybrid system, the engine auto- matically runs and stops. When the hybrid system operates, the " " indicator is illuminated.
In the following situation, the engine may operate automatically.
- When the engine is ready to run
- When the hybrid battery is being charged
- Depending on the temperature con- dition of the hybrid battery
i
DRIVING THE HYBRID/PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE
H26
DRIVING THE HYBRID/PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE (CONT.)
Special Features Hybrid vehicles sound different than gasoline engine vehicles. When the hybrid system operates, you may hear a sound from the hybrid battery system behind the rear seat. If you apply the accelerator pedal rapidly, you may hear an unconventional sound. When you apply the brake pedal, you may hear a sound from the regenerative brake system. When the hybrid system is turned off or on, you may hear a sound in the engine compartment. If you depress the brake pedal repeatedly when the hybrid system is turned on, you may hear a sound in the engine compart- ment. None of these sounds indicate a problem. These are normal charac- teristics of hybrid vehicles.
If any of following occur, it's a normal condition if you hear a motor sound in the engine compartment: - After turning off the hybrid system,
the brake pedal is released. - When the hybrid system is turned
off, the brake pedal is applied. - When the driver door is opened. When the hybrid system is turned ON, the gasoline engine may acti- vate or may not. In this situation, you may feel a vibration. This does not indicate a malfunction. When the " " indicator illuminates, the hybrid system is ready to begin driv- ing. Even if the engine is off, you can operate the vehicle as long as the " " indicator is illuminated.
The hybrid system contains many electronic components. High volt- age components, such as cables and other parts, may emit electro- magnetic waves. Even when the electromagnetic cover blocks elec- tromagnetic emissions, electro- magnetic waves may have an effect on electronic devices. When your vehicle is not used for a long period of time, the hybrid system will discharge. You need to drive the vehicle several times a month. We recommend driving at least for 1 hour or 10 miles. When the hybrid battery is discharged, or when it is impossible to jump start the vehicle, contact your HYUNDAI dealer.
NOTICE
H27
Virtual Engine Sound System (VESS) The Virtual Engine Sound System generates engine sounds for pedes- trians to hear vehicle sound because there is limited sound while electric power is used.
What Does Regenerative Braking Do? It uses an electric motor when decel- erating and when braking and trans- forms kinetic energy to electrical energy in order to charge the high voltage battery.
Battery Hybrid vehicle
- The vehicle is composed of a high voltage battery that drives the motor and air conditioner, and an integrated 12V lithium ion polymer battery with the HEV battery that drives the lamps, wipers, and audio system.
- The integrated 12V battery is automatically charged when the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode.
Plug-in hybrid vehicle - The vehicle is composed of a
high voltage battery that drives the motor and air-conditioner, and an auxiliary battery (12 V) that drives the lamps, wipers, and audio system.
- The auxiliary battery is automati- cally charged when the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode.
When you start the hybrid system with the shift lever in P (Park), the " " indicator illuminates on the instrument cluster. The driver can drive the vehicle, even when the gasoline engine is off.
When you leave the vehicle, you should turn OFF the vehi- cle and place the shift lever in P (Park). If you depress the accelerator pedal by mistake, or when the shift lever is not in P (Park), the vehicle will abruptly move, possibly result- ing in serious injury or death.
WARNING
H28
DRIVING THE HYBRID/PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE (CONT.)
Hybrid System Gauge
The hybrid system gauge indicates whether the current driving condition is fuel efficient or not. CHARGE :
Shows that the energy made by the vehicle is being converted to electrical energy. (Regenerated energy)
ECO : Shows that the vehicle is being driven in an Eco-friendly manner.
POWER : Shows that the vehicle is exceeding the Eco-friendly range.
According to the hybrid system gauge area, the "EV" indicator comes on or off. - "EV" indicator ON :Vehicle is driven
using the electric motor or the gasoline engine is stopped.
- "EV" indicator OFF : Vehicle is driv- en using the gasoline engine.
Hybrid Battery SOC (State of Charge) Gauge
This gauge indicates the remaining hybrid battery power. If the SOC is near the "L (Low)" level, the vehicle automatically operates the engine to charge the battery. However, if the Service Indicator ( ) and Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ( ) turn on when the SOC (State of charge) gauge is near the "L (Low)" level, have the vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OAEQ046008
OAEQ046009/OAEPH046522
Hybrid vehicle Plug-in hybrid vehicle
H29
Plug-in Hybrid Mode (Plug-in hybrid vehicle) EV/HEV Button
Pressing the [EV/HEV] button changes the plug-in hybrid system modes, between Electric (CD) mode and Hybrid (CS) mode. Each time the mode is changed a corresponding indicator is displayed on the instrument cluster as follows.
Plug-in Hybrid Mode Indicator
CD (Charge Depleting, Electric) mode : The high-voltage (hybrid) battery is used to drive the vehicle.
CS (Charge Sustaining, Hybrid) mode : The high-voltage (hybrid) battery and gasoline engine is used to drive the vehicle.
Information Even when the battery charging rate is high and driving in electric mode is possible, engine may turn on in some areas to protect the system.
AVN Screen (Plug-in hybrid vehicle) (if equipped)
Press [PHEV] on the [Home] screen or the [All menus] screen and the menus related to plug-in hybrid ([ECO Driving], [Energy Information], [EV Range], [Charging Settings], [Charging Stations], [Gas Stations]) are displayed. For more information, please refer to the Multimedia System Manual that was separately supplied with your vehicle.
i OAEPH047518N
OAEPH047519N
OAEPH047520N
OAEPHQ017003L
H30
DRIVING THE HYBRID/PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE (CONT.)
Aux. Battery Saver+ (Plug-in hybrid vehicle) The Aux. Battery Saver+ is a function that monitors the charging status of the 12 V auxiliary battery. If the auxiliary battery level is low, the main high voltage battery charges the auxiliary battery.
Information The Aux. Battery Saver+ function will be ON when the vehicle is delivered. If the function is not needed, you may turn it off in the Users Settings mode on the cluster. For more information, refer to the following page.
Mode Cycle Mode : When the vehicle is OFF with all doors, hood and liftgate closed, the Aux. Battery Saver+ activates according to the auxiliary battery status. Automatic Mode : When the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position with the charg- ing connector plugged in, the func- tion activates according to the auxil- iary battery status to prevent overdischarge of the auxiliary bat- tery.
Information The Aux. Battery Saver+ activates
maximum of 20 minutes. If the Aux. Battery Saver+ function activates more than 10 times consecutively when in the automatic mode, the function will stop activating, judg- ing that there is a problem with the auxiliary battery. In this case, drive the vehicle for some period of time or if the auxiliary battery returns to normal, the function will start acti- vating.
The Aux. Battery Saver+ function cannot prevent battery discharge if the auxiliary battery is damaged, worn out, used as a power supply or unauthorized electronic devises are used.
If the Aux. Battery Saver+ function was activated, a message will be dis- played on the instrument cluster and the high voltage battery level may have decreased.
i
i
H31
System Setting
The driver can activate the Aux. Battery Saver+ function by placing the Engine Start/Stop button to the ON position and by selecting: 'User Settings Other Aux. Battery Saver+'
The Aux. Battery Saver+ function deactivates, when the driver cancels the system setting.
LCD Message
This message is displayed when the Aux. Battery Saver+ function has been completed when the vehicle is turned ON. However, if the LCD message pops up frequently, we recommend that your vehicle's auxiliary battery or electric/electronic components be serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OAEE047143N
When the function is activating, the third Charging Indicator Lamp will blink and high voltage electricity will be flowing in the vehicle. Do not touch the high voltage electric wire (orange), connector, and all electric com- ponents and devices. This may cause electric shock and lead to injuries. Also, do not modify your vehicle in any way. This may affect your vehicle per- formance and lead to an acci- dent.
WARNING
OAEEQ016025OAEE047433N
H32
DRIVING THE HYBRID/PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE (CONT.)
Warning and Indicator Lights
Ready Indicator
This indicator illuminates : When the vehicle is ready to be driven. - ON : Normal driving is possible. - OFF : Normal driving is not possible,
or a problem has occurred. - Blinking : Emergency driving.
When the ready indicator goes OFF or blinks, there is a problem with the system. In this case, have your vehi- cle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Service Warning Light
This warning light illuminates : When the Engine Start/Stop button
is in the ON position. - It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off. When there is a problem with the
hybrid vehicle control system or hardware.
When the warning light illuminates while driving, or does not go OFF after starting the vehicle, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
EV Mode Indicator
This indicator illuminates when the vehicle is driven by the electric motor.
Charging Cable Connection Indicator (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)
This indicator illuminates in red when the charging cable is connected.
Regenerative Brake Warning Light
This warning light illuminates : When the regenerative brake is not operating. This causes the Brake Warning light (red) and Regenerative Brake Warning Light (yellow) to illu- minate simultaneously as soon as possible. In this case, drive safely and have your vehicle inspected by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer. The service brake still function, how- ever, the operation of the brake pedal may be more difficult than normal and the braking distance can increase.
EV
H33
LCD Display Messages Check Hybrid system
This message is displayed when there is a problem with the hybrid control system. Refrain from driving when the warn- ing message is displayed. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Check Hybrid system. Turn engine Off
This message is displayed when there is a problem with the hybrid system. The " " indicator will blink and a warning chime will sound until the problem is solved. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Check Hybrid system. Do not start engine
This message is displayed when the hybrid battery power (SOC) level is low. A warning chime will sound until the problem is solved. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OLFH044248L OLFH044240LOAEPH047560N
H34
DRIVING THE HYBRID/PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE (CONT.)
Stop vehicle and check power supply
This message is displayed when a failure occurs in the power supply system. In this case, park the vehicle in a safe location and tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the vehicle inspect- ed.
Stop vehicle to charge battery/ Park with engine On to charge battery
Either message is displayed when the hybrid battery power (SOC) level is low. In this case, park the vehicle in a safe location and wait until the hybrid battery is charged. You can increase the hybrid battery charging rate by holding the acceler- ator pedal to the floor with transmis- sion in P. The engine will rev high but it will be limited for charging purpose when you hold the pedal to the floor.
Refuel to prevent Hybrid battery damage
This message is displayed when the fuel tank is nearly empty. You should refill the fuel tank to pre- vent hybrid battery damage.
OLFH044230L OLFH044242L
OLFH044232L/OAEPH047561N
H35
Refill inverter coolant
This message is displayed when the inverter coolant is nearly empty. You should refill the inverter coolant.
Stop vehicle and check brakes/ Stop vehicle and check regen. brakes
Either message is displayed when a failure occurs in the brake system. In this case, park the vehicle in a safe location and tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the vehicle inspect- ed.
Check brakes/ Check regenerative brakes
Either message is displayed when the brake performance is low or the regenerative brake does not work properly due to a failure in the brake system. In this case, it may take longer for the brake pedal to operate and the brak- ing distance may become longer.
OLFH044244L
OLFH044234L/OAEPH047562N
OLFH044250L/OAEPH047563N
H36
DRIVING THE HYBRID/PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE (CONT.)
Check Virtual Engine Sound System
This message is displayed when there is a problem with the Virtual Engine Sound System (VESS). In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Unplug vehicle to start (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)
This message is displayed when you start the engine without unplugging the charging cable. Unplug the charging cable, and then start the vehicle.
Remaining time (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)
This message is displayed to notify the remaining time to fully charge the battery.
OLFH044543L OLFP045258N OAEPH047193N
H37
Wait until fuel door opens (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)
This message is displayed when you attempt to open the fuel filler door with the fuel tank pressurized. Wait until the fuel tank is depressurized.
Information It may take up to 20 seconds to open fuel filler door.
Check fuel door (Plug-in hybrid)
This message is displayed when there is a problem with the fuel filler door. Such as, when the fuel filler door does not open after 20 seconds at freezing temperature.
Information When the fuel filler door is frozen and does not open after 20 seconds at freezing temperature, slightly tap the fuel filler door and then attempt to open it. In other cases, have your vehi- cle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Fuel door open (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)
This message is displayed when the fuel filler door opens after the fuel tank is depressurized. If this mes- sage is displayed, you can refuel the fuel tank.
ii
OAEPH047201L
OAEPH047526L
OAEPH047525L
H38
DRIVING THE HYBRID/PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE (CONT.)
Check fuel door (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)
This message is displayed when the vehicle is driven with the fuel filler door opened. Close the fuel filler door and then start driving.
Shift to P to charge (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)
This message is displayed when the charging connector is plugged with the shift lever in R (Reverse), N (Neutral) or D (Drive). Move the shift lever to P (Park) and re-start the charging process.
AC Charger Error! (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)
This message is displayed when there is a problem with the charger.
OAEPH047526L OAEPH047202L OAEE047134N
H39
Switching to Hybrid mode to allow heating or air condition- ing (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)
This message is displayed when the vehicle automatically switches to HEV mode to allow heating or air conditioning. It is when the coolant temperature is low (below 7 F (-14 C)) and the driver turns on the heating or cooling system. If the coolant temperature gets high- er than 7 F (-14 C) or the driver turns off the heating or cooling sys- tem the vehicle returns to its default (EV) mode.
Maintaining Hybrid mode to continue heating or air condi- tioning (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)
This message is displayed when the vehicle maintains the HEV mode to allow heating or air conditioning. The mode does not change when the driver presses the [EV/HEV] button to switch from the HEV mode to EV mode while the heating and cooling system is on and the coolant temper- ature is below 7 F (-14 C).
Low/High System Temp. Maintaining Hybrid mode (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)
This message is displayed when the temperature of the high-voltage (hybrid) battery is too low or too high. This warning message is to protect the battery and the hybrid system.
OAEPH047207L OAEPH047527L OAEPH047203L/OAEPH047204L
H40
DRIVING THE HYBRID/PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE (CONT.)
Low/High System Temp. Switching to Hybrid mode (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)
This message is displayed when the temperature of the high-voltage (hybrid) battery is too low or high. This warning message is to protect the battery and the hybrid system.
Switching to Hybrid mode to lubricate engine (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)
This message is displayed when the vehicle is automatically switched to the HEV mode to lubricate engine while the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position.
Maintaining Hybrid mode to pro- tect engine (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)
This message is displayed when the [EV/HEV] button is pressed but it is impossible to switch from the HEV mode to EV mode due to engine lubrication.
OAEPH047205L/OAEPH047206L OAEPH047530L OAEPH047528L
H41
Exit SPORT mode to switch to EV (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)
This message is displayed when [EV/HEV] button is pressed but it is impossible to switch from the HEV mode to EV mode because the SPORT mode is engaged.
Energy flow The hybrid system informs the driv- ers its energy flow in various operat- ing modes. While driving, the current energy flow is specified in 11 modes.
Vehicle Stop
The vehicle is stopped. (No energy flow)
EV Propulsion
Only the motor power is used to drive the vehicle. (Battery Wheel)
OAE046149L/OAEQ046001L
Type A Type B
OAEPH047531N
OAE046150L/OAEQ046020L
Type A Type B
H42
DRIVING THE HYBRID/PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE (CONT.)
Power Assist
Both the motor and the engine power are used to drive the vehicle. (Battery & Energy Wheel)
Engine Only Propulsion
Only the engine power is used to drive the vehicle. (Engine Wheel)
Engine Generation
When the vehicle is stopped, the high-voltage battery is charged up by the engine. (Engine Battery)
OAE046151L/OAEQ046021L
Type A Type B
OAE046152L/OAEQ046022L
Type A Type B
OAE046153L/OAEQ046005L
Type A Type B
H43
Regeneration
The high-voltage battery is charged up by the regenerative brake system. (Wheel Battery)
Engine Brake
The engine braking is used to decel- erate the vehicle. (Wheel Engine)
Power Reserve
The engine is simultaneously used to drive the vehicle and to charge up the high-voltage battery. (Engine Wheel & Battery)
OAE046150L/OAEQ046002L
Type A Type B
OAE046152L/OAEQ046004L
Type A Type B
OAE046154L/OAEQ046023L
Type A Type B
H44
DRIVING THE HYBRID/PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE (CONT.)
Engine Generation/Motor Drive
The engine charges up the high-volt- age battery. The motor power is used to drive the vehicle. (Engine Battery Wheel)
Engine Generation/Regeneration
The engine and regenerative brake system charges up the high-voltage battery. (Engine & Wheel Battery)
Engine Brake/Regeneration
The engine braking is simultaneously used to decelerate the vehicle and to charge up the high-voltage battery. (Wheel Engine & Battery)
OAE046155L/OAEQ046024L
Type A Type B
OAE046155L/OAEQ046007L
Type A Type B
OAE046151L/OAEQ046003L
Type A Type B
H45
High Voltage Battery System
*1: Located in the engine compartment
*2: Located under the rear seats
OAEPHQ016040L
OAEQ046019
HPCU (Hybrid Power Control Unit)*1
High Voltage Battery System*2
Never touch orange colored or high voltage labeled compo- nents, including wires, cables, and connections.When the insu- lators or covers are damaged or removed, severe injury or death from electrocution may occur.
WARNING
While replacing the fuses in the engine compartment, never touch the HPCU. The HPCU car- ries high voltage. Touching the HPCU may result in electrocu- tion, serious injury, or death.
WARNING
In the hybrid system, the hybrid battery uses high voltage to operate the motor and other components. This high voltage hybrid battery system can be very dangerous. Never touch the hybrid system. When you touch the hybrid battery system, seri- ous injury or death may occur.
WARNING
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR HYBRID SYSTEM
H46
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR HYBRID SYSTEM (CONT.)
*3: Located in the engine compartment
OAEQ046017
Drive Motor *3
Do not disassemble the high voltage motor connector. The high voltage motor connector may contain residual high voltage. Coming in contact with high voltage may result in death or serious injury.
Your vehicle's hybrid system should only be inspected or repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
Do not disassemble or assem- ble the high voltage battery system. Doing so may result in electric shock, causing death or serious injury.
If you disassemble or assem- ble hybrid system compo- nents improperly, it may dam- age the performance and reli- ability of your vehicle.
If electrolyte comes in contact with your body, clothes or eyes, immediately flush with a large quantity of fresh tap water. Have your eyes exam- ined by a doctor as soon as possible.
WARNING
Do not pile up any items in an area behind the high voltage battery. In a crash, the battery may become unstable, or its performance may degrade.
Do not apply strong force nor pile up any items above the luggage compartment. Such an attempt may distort the high voltage battery case, causing a safety problem or degrading the performance.
Be careful when loading flam- mable liquid in luggage com- partment. It could cause oper- ational and safety degrada- tion if the liquid leaks and flows in high voltage battery.
CAUTION
H47
When the vehicle is paint baked, do not bake over 30 minutes in 158F (70C) or 20 minutes in 176F (80C) degree.
Do not wash the engine compart- ment, using water. Water may cause an electric shock and may damage electronic components.
NOTICE
Never use the package mod- ules (high voltage battery, inverter and converter) for any other purpose.
Do not use an unauthorized battery charger to charge the high voltage battery. Doing so may result in death or serious injury.
Never place the high voltage system near or in a fire.
Never drill into or strike the package module. Otherwise, it may be damaged. An electric shock may occur, resulting in serious injury or death.
WARNING
This hybrid vehicle uses the hybrid battery system inverter and converter to generate high voltage. High voltage in the hybrid battery system is very dangerous and may cause severe burns and electric shock. This may result in serious injury or death. For your safety, never touch,
replace, disassemble or remove the hybrid battery system including components, cables and connectors. Severe burns or electric shock may result in serious injury or death when you fail to follow this warning.
When the hybrid battery sys- tem operates, the hybrid bat- tery system can be hot. Always be careful because burns or electric shock may be caused by high voltage.
(Continued)
WARNING
Never assemble or disassemble the high voltage battery system. If you assemble or disassem-
ble the high voltage battery system, the durability and per- formance of the vehicle may be damaged.
When you want to check the high voltage battery system, have the vehicle checked and inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not touch the high voltage battery and high voltage cable connected to motor (orange color). Severe burns and elec- tric shock may occur. For your safety, do not touch the cover of electronic components and electronic cable. Do not remove the cover of electronic compo- nents and electronic cable. In particular, never touch the high voltage battery system when the hybrid system in operation. It may result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
H48
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR HYBRID SYSTEM (CONT.)
Information Gradual capacity reduction of the high voltage battery.
The high voltage Battery capacity gradually reduces with time and use. This is natural characteristic of the high voltage batteries. The extent at which capacity is reduced changes drastically depending on the environ- ment(ambient temperature, etc.) and usage conditions such as how the vehi- cle is driven and how the high voltage battery is charged. Reduction of the high voltage battery capacity is not covered under warranty.
Safety Plug High Voltage Battery Cooling Duct
The high-voltage battery cooling duct is located on the left side of the rear seats.
i
Never touch the safety plug.The safety plug is attached to high voltage hybrid battery system. Touching the safety plug will result in death or serious injury. Service personnel should follow procedures in service manual.
DANGER
OAEQ046018
OAE036024
Hybrid vehicle
OAEPH036024
(Continued) Do not drop water or liquid on
to HPCU, HSG, motor and fuses. The hybrid system com- ponents are covered. If you drop water or liquid on to hybrid system components, it may result in electric shock.
Plug-in hybrid vehicle
H49
The cooling duct cools down the high-voltage battery. When the high- voltage battery cooling duct is blocked, the high-voltage battery may be overheated and the vehicle performance may become limited and set a hybrid warning lamp. Do not obstruct the cooling duct with any other objects.
Information Clean the cooling duct for the hybrid battery with a dry cloth on a regular basis.
i
(Continued) Do not put any objects into
the cooling duct of the hybrid battery. Doing so may cause loss of cooling duct volume to the hybrid battery. When the cooling duct is blocked with any objects, immediately con- tact your HYUNDAI dealer.
Never place a container of liq- uid on or near the cooling duct. If the liquid spills, the hybrid battery located in the luggage compartment may be damaged.
Secure all loads in the luggage compartment to prevent them from being tossed about before driving. If a sharp or heavy load impacts or pierces the interior luggage compart- ment wall, the hybrid battery system may be damaged, dete- riorating its performance.
Never clean the cooling duct of the hybrid battery with a wet cloth. If any water enters in the cooling duct of the hybrid battery, the hybrid bat- tery may cause an electric shock, serious damage, injury or death.
The hybrid battery is com- posed of lithium-ion polymer. If the hybrid battery is improp- erly handled, it is dangerous to the environment. Also it may cause electrical shock and severe burns, resulting in serious injury or death.
Do not spill liquid over the cooling duct of the hybrid bat- tery. Doing so is very danger- ous. It may cause electric shock or serious injury.
Do not cover the cooling duct with objects.
(Continued)
WARNING
H50
If an Accident Occurs
When a submersion in water occurs:
When your vehicle is flooded in water, a high-voltage battery may cause shock or fires. Thus, turn the hybrid system OFF, take the key in your possession and escape to a safe place. Never attempt physical contact with your flooded vehicle. Immediately contact an emer- gency response team and advise them that a hybrid vehi- cle is involved.
WARNING
For your safety, do not touch high voltage cables, connec- tors and package modules. High voltage components are orange in color.
Exposed cables or wires may be visible inside or outside of the vehicle. Never touch the wires or cables, because it can cause an electrical shock, injury or death may occur.
Any gas or electrolyte leakage from your vehicle is not only poisonous but also flamma- ble. Upon witnessing one of those, open the windows, and remain a safe distance from the vehicle out of the road. Immediately contact an emer- gency response team and advise them that a hybrid vehi- cle is involved.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued) When the vehicle is severely
damaged, remain a safe dis- tance of 50 feet (15 meter) or more between your vehicle and other vehicles/flammables.
If a fire occurs :
If a small scale fire occurs, use a fire extinguisher (ABC, BC) that is meant for electrical fires. If it is impossible to extinguish the fire in the early stage, remain a safe distance from the vehicle and immediately call 911. Also, advise them that an electric vehicle is involved. If the fire spreads to the high voltage battery, large amount of water is needed to put out the fire. Using small amount of water or fire extinguishers not meant for electrical fires could cause serious injury or death from electrical shocks.
WARNING
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR HYBRID SYSTEM (CONT.)
H51
When the Hybrid Vehicle Shuts Off When the high voltage battery is dis- charged, when the 12-volt battery is discharged, or when the fuel tank is empty, the hybrid system may not operate while driving. When the Hybrid system does not operate, do the followings: 1. Gradually reduce the vehicle
speed. Pull over your vehicle off the road in a safe area.
2. Locate the shift lever in P (Park). 3. Turn ON the hazard warning flash-
ers. 4. Turn OFF the vehicle, and try to
start the hybrid system again, while depressing the brake pedal and turning on the Engine Start/Stop button.
5. When the hybrid system still does not operate, refer to ''If the 12 Volt Battery Is Discharged'' in chapter 6. Before jump-starting the vehicle, check the fuel level and the exact procedure to jump start. For fur- ther details, refer to ''If the 12 Volt Battery Is Discharged'' in
Related manuals for Hyundai Ioniq Hybrid Blue Link 2018 Hatchback Owner's Manual
en
en
en
en
en
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the Blue Link Hyundai works, you can view and download the Hyundai Ioniq Hybrid Blue Link 2018 Hatchback Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Hyundai Blue Link as well as other Hyundai manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Hyundai Blue Link. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Hyundai Ioniq Hybrid Blue Link 2018 Hatchback Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Hyundai Ioniq Hybrid Blue Link 2018 Hatchback Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Hyundai Ioniq Hybrid Blue Link 2018 Hatchback Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Hyundai Ioniq Hybrid Blue Link 2018 Hatchback Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Hyundai Ioniq Hybrid Blue Link 2018 Hatchback Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.